[Title 47 CFR ]
[Code of Federal Regulations (annual edition) - October 1, 2024 Edition]
[From the U.S. Government Publishing Office]
[[Page i]]
Title 47
Telecommunication
________________________
Parts 70 to 79
Revised as of October 1, 2024
Containing a codification of documents of general
applicability and future effect
As of October 1, 2024
Published by the Office of the Federal Register
National Archives and Records Administration as a
Special Edition of the Federal Register
[[Page ii]]
U.S. GOVERNMENT OFFICIAL EDITION NOTICE
Legal Status and Use of Seals and Logos
The seal of the National Archives and Records Administration
(NARA) authenticates the Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) as
the official codification of Federal regulations established
under the Federal Register Act. Under the provisions of 44
U.S.C. 1507, the contents of the CFR, a special edition of the
Federal Register, shall be judicially noticed. The CFR is
prima facie evidence of the original documents published in
the Federal Register (44 U.S.C. 1510).
It is prohibited to use NARA's official seal and the stylized Code
of Federal Regulations logo on any republication of this
material without the express, written permission of the
Archivist of the United States or the Archivist's designee.
Any person using NARA's official seals and logos in a manner
inconsistent with the provisions of 36 CFR part 1200 is
subject to the penalties specified in 18 U.S.C. 506, 701, and
1017.
Use of ISBN Prefix
This is the Official U.S. Government edition of this publication
and is herein identified to certify its authenticity. Use of
the 0-16 ISBN prefix is for U.S. Government Publishing Office
Official Editions only. The Superintendent of Documents of the
U.S. Government Publishing Office requests that any reprinted
edition clearly be labeled as a copy of the authentic work
with a new ISBN.
U . S . G O V E R N M E N T P U B L I S H I N G O F F I C E
------------------------------------------------------------------
U.S. Superintendent of Documents Washington, DC
20402-0001
http://bookstore.gpo.gov
Phone: toll-free (866) 512-1800; DC area (202) 512-1800
[[Page iii]]
Table of Contents
Page
Explanation................................................. v
Title 47:
Chapter I--Federal Communications Commission
(Continued) 3
Finding Aids:
Table of CFR Titles and Chapters........................ 785
Alphabetical List of Agencies Appearing in the CFR...... 805
Table of OMB Control Numbers............................ 815
List of CFR Sections Affected........................... 817
[[Page iv]]
----------------------------
Cite this Code: CFR
To cite the regulations in
this volume use title,
part and section number.
Thus, 47 CFR 73.1 refers
to title 47, part 73,
section 1.
----------------------------
[[Page v]]
EXPLANATION
The Code of Federal Regulations is a codification of the general and
permanent rules published in the Federal Register by the Executive
departments and agencies of the Federal Government. The Code is divided
into 50 titles which represent broad areas subject to Federal
regulation. Each title is divided into chapters which usually bear the
name of the issuing agency. Each chapter is further subdivided into
parts covering specific regulatory areas.
Each volume of the Code is revised at least once each calendar year
and issued on a quarterly basis approximately as follows:
Title 1 through Title 16.................................as of January 1
Title 17 through Title 27..................................as of April 1
Title 28 through Title 41...................................as of July 1
Title 42 through Title 50................................as of October 1
The appropriate revision date is printed on the cover of each
volume.
LEGAL STATUS
The contents of the Federal Register are required to be judicially
noticed (44 U.S.C. 1507). The Code of Federal Regulations is prima facie
evidence of the text of the original documents (44 U.S.C. 1510).
HOW TO USE THE CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS
The Code of Federal Regulations is kept up to date by the individual
issues of the Federal Register. These two publications must be used
together to determine the latest version of any given rule.
To determine whether a Code volume has been amended since its
revision date (in this case, October 1, 2024), consult the ``List of CFR
Sections Affected (LSA),'' which is issued monthly, and the ``Cumulative
List of Parts Affected,'' which appears in the Reader Aids section of
the daily Federal Register. These two lists will identify the Federal
Register page number of the latest amendment of any given rule.
EFFECTIVE AND EXPIRATION DATES
Each volume of the Code contains amendments published in the Federal
Register since the last revision of that volume of the Code. Source
citations for the regulations are referred to by volume number and page
number of the Federal Register and date of publication. Publication
dates and effective dates are usually not the same and care must be
exercised by the user in determining the actual effective date. In
instances where the effective date is beyond the cut-off date for the
Code a note has been inserted to reflect the future effective date. In
those instances where a regulation published in the Federal Register
states a date certain for expiration, an appropriate note will be
inserted following the text.
OMB CONTROL NUMBERS
The Paperwork Reduction Act of 1980 (Pub. L. 96-511) requires
Federal agencies to display an OMB control number with their information
collection request.
[[Page vi]]
Many agencies have begun publishing numerous OMB control numbers as
amendments to existing regulations in the CFR. These OMB numbers are
placed as close as possible to the applicable recordkeeping or reporting
requirements.
PAST PROVISIONS OF THE CODE
Provisions of the Code that are no longer in force and effect as of
the revision date stated on the cover of each volume are not carried.
Code users may find the text of provisions in effect on any given date
in the past by using the appropriate List of CFR Sections Affected
(LSA). For the convenience of the reader, a ``List of CFR Sections
Affected'' is published at the end of each CFR volume. For changes to
the Code prior to the LSA listings at the end of the volume, consult
previous annual editions of the LSA. For changes to the Code prior to
2001, consult the List of CFR Sections Affected compilations, published
for 1949-1963, 1964-1972, 1973-1985, and 1986-2000.
``[RESERVED]'' TERMINOLOGY
The term ``[Reserved]'' is used as a place holder within the Code of
Federal Regulations. An agency may add regulatory information at a
``[Reserved]'' location at any time. Occasionally ``[Reserved]'' is used
editorially to indicate that a portion of the CFR was left vacant and
not dropped in error.
INCORPORATION BY REFERENCE
What is incorporation by reference? Incorporation by reference was
established by statute and allows Federal agencies to meet the
requirement to publish regulations in the Federal Register by referring
to materials already published elsewhere. For an incorporation to be
valid, the Director of the Federal Register must approve it. The legal
effect of incorporation by reference is that the material is treated as
if it were published in full in the Federal Register (5 U.S.C. 552(a)).
This material, like any other properly issued regulation, has the force
of law.
What is a proper incorporation by reference? The Director of the
Federal Register will approve an incorporation by reference only when
the requirements of 1 CFR part 51 are met. Some of the elements on which
approval is based are:
(a) The incorporation will substantially reduce the volume of
material published in the Federal Register.
(b) The matter incorporated is in fact available to the extent
necessary to afford fairness and uniformity in the administrative
process.
(c) The incorporating document is drafted and submitted for
publication in accordance with 1 CFR part 51.
What if the material incorporated by reference cannot be found? If
you have any problem locating or obtaining a copy of material listed as
an approved incorporation by reference, please contact the agency that
issued the regulation containing that incorporation. If, after
contacting the agency, you find the material is not available, please
notify the Director of the Federal Register, National Archives and
Records Administration, 8601 Adelphi Road, College Park, MD 20740-6001,
or call 202-741-6010.
CFR INDEXES AND TABULAR GUIDES
A subject index to the Code of Federal Regulations is contained in a
separate volume, revised annually as of January 1, entitled CFR Index
and Finding Aids. This volume contains the Parallel Table of Authorities
and Rules. A list of CFR titles, chapters, subchapters, and parts and an
alphabetical list of agencies publishing in the CFR are also included in
this volume.
An index to the text of ``Title 3--The President'' is carried within
that volume.
[[Page vii]]
The Federal Register Index is issued monthly in cumulative form.
This index is based on a consolidation of the ``Contents'' entries in
the daily Federal Register.
A List of CFR Sections Affected (LSA) is published monthly, keyed to
the revision dates of the 50 CFR titles.
REPUBLICATION OF MATERIAL
There are no restrictions on the republication of material appearing
in the Code of Federal Regulations.
INQUIRIES
For a legal interpretation or explanation of any regulation in this
volume, contact the issuing agency. The issuing agency's name appears at
the top of odd-numbered pages.
For inquiries concerning CFR reference assistance, call 202-741-6000
or write to the Director, Office of the Federal Register, National
Archives and Records Administration, 8601 Adelphi Road, College Park, MD
20740-6001 or e-mail [email protected].
SALES
The Government Publishing Office (GPO) processes all sales and
distribution of the CFR. For payment by credit card, call toll-free,
866-512-1800, or DC area, 202-512-1800, M-F 8 a.m. to 4 p.m. e.s.t. or
fax your order to 202-512-2104, 24 hours a day. For payment by check,
write to: US Government Publishing Office - New Orders, P.O. Box 979050,
St. Louis, MO 63197-9000.
ELECTRONIC SERVICES
The full text of the Code of Federal Regulations, the LSA (List of
CFR Sections Affected), The United States Government Manual, the Federal
Register, Public Laws, Public Papers of the Presidents of the United
States, Compilation of Presidential Documents and the Privacy Act
Compilation are available in electronic format via www.govinfo.gov. For
more information, contact the GPO Customer Contact Center, U.S.
Government Publishing Office. Phone 202-512-1800, or 866-512-1800 (toll-
free). E-mail, [email protected].
The Office of the Federal Register also offers a free service on the
National Archives and Records Administration's (NARA) website for public
law numbers, Federal Register finding aids, and related information.
Connect to NARA's website at www.archives.gov/federal-register.
The eCFR is a regularly updated, unofficial editorial compilation of
CFR material and Federal Register amendments, produced by the Office of
the Federal Register and the Government Publishing Office. It is
available at www.ecfr.gov.
Oliver A. Potts,
Director,
Office of the Federal Register
October 1, 2024
[[Page ix]]
THIS TITLE
Title 47--Telecommunication is composed of five volumes. The parts
in these volumes are arranged in the following order: Parts 0-19, parts
20-39, parts 40-69, parts 70-79, and part 80 to end. All five volumes
contain chapter I--Federal Communications Commission. The last volume,
part 80 to end, also includes chapter II--Office of Science and
Technology Policy and National Security Council, chapter III--National
Telecommunications and Information Administration, Department of
Commerce, chapter IV--National Telecommunications and Information
Administration, Department of Commerce, and National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration, Department of Transportation, and chapter V--The
First Responder Network Authority. The contents of these volumes
represent all current regulations codified under this title of the CFR
as of October 1, 2024.
Part 73 contains a numerical designation of FM broadcast channels
and a table of FM allotments designated for use in communities in the
United States, its territories, and possessions. Part 73 also contains a
numerical designation of television channels and a table of allotments
which contain channels designated for the listed communities in the
United States, its territories, and possessions.
The OMB control numbers for the Federal Communications Commission
appear in Sec. 0.408 of chapter I. For the convenience of the user
Sec. 0.408 is reprinted in the Finding Aids section of the second
through fifth volumes.
For this volume, Cheryl E. Sirofchuck was Chief Editor. The Code of
Federal Regulations publication program is under the direction of John
Hyrum Martinez, assisted by Stephen J. Frattini.
[[Page 1]]
TITLE 47--TELECOMMUNICATION
(This book contains parts 70 to 79)
--------------------------------------------------------------------
Part
chapter I--Federal Communications Commission (Continued).... 73
[[Page 3]]
CHAPTER I--FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION (CONTINUED)
--------------------------------------------------------------------
SUBCHAPTER C--BROADCAST RADIO SERVICES
Part Page
70-72
[Reserved]
73 Radio broadcast services.................... 5
74 Experimental radio, auxiliary, special
broadcast and other program
distributional services................. 385
76 Multichannel video and cable television
service................................. 498
78 Cable television relay service.............. 690
79 Accessibility of video programming.......... 723
Supplemental Publications: Annual Reports of the Federal Communications
Commission to Congress.
Federal Communications Commission Reports of Orders and Decision.
Communications Act of 1934 (with amendments and index thereto), Recap.
Version May 1989.
Broadcast Operator Handbook, 1976 edition.
[[Page 5]]
SUBCHAPTER C_BROADCAST RADIO SERVICES
PARTS 70 72 [RESERVED]
PART 73_RADIO BROADCAST SERVICES--Table of Contents
Subpart A_AM Broadcast Stations
Sec.
73.1 Scope.
73.14 AM broadcast definitions.
73.21 Classes of AM broadcast channels and stations.
73.23 AM broadcast station applications affected by international
agreements.
73.24 Broadcast facilities; showing required.
73.25 Clear channels; Class A, Class B and Class D stations.
73.26 Regional channels; Class B and Class D stations.
73.27 Local channels; Class C stations.
73.28 Assignment of stations to channels.
73.29 Class C stations on regional channels.
73.30 Petition for authorization of an allotment in the 1605-1705 kHz
band.
73.31 Rounding of nominal power specified on applications.
73.33 Antenna systems; showing required.
73.35 Calculation of improvement factors.
73.37 Applications for broadcast facilities, showing required.
73.44 AM transmission system emission limitations.
73.45 AM antenna systems.
73.49 AM transmission system fencing requirements.
73.51 Determining operating power.
73.53 Requirements for authorization of antenna monitors.
73.54 Antenna resistance and reactance measurements.
73.57 Remote reading antenna and common point ammeters.
73.58 Indicating instruments.
73.61 AM directional antenna field strength measurements.
73.62 Directional antenna system operation and tolerances.
73.68 Sampling systems for antenna monitors.
73.69 Antenna monitors.
73.72 Operating during the experimental period.
73.88 Blanketing interference.
73.99 Presunrise service authorization (PSRA) and Postsunset service
authorization (PSSA).
73.127 Use of multiplex transmission.
73.128 AM stereophonic broadcasting.
73.132 Territorial exclusivity.
73.150 Directional antenna systems.
73.151 Field strength measurements to establish performance of
directional antennas.
73.152 Modification of directional antenna data.
73.153 Field strength measurements in support of applications or
evidence at hearings.
73.154 AM directional antenna partial proof of performance measurements.
73.155 Directional antenna performance recertification.
73.157 Antenna testing during daytime.
73.158 Directional antenna monitoring points.
73.160 Vertical plane radiation characteristics, f([thetas]).
73.182 Engineering standards of allocation.
73.183 Groundwave signals.
73.184 Groundwave field strength graphs.
73.185 Computation of interfering signal.
73.186 Establishment of effective field at one kilometer.
73.187 Limitation on daytime radiation.
73.189 Minimum antenna heights or field strength requirements.
73.190 Engineering charts and related formulas.
Subpart B_FM Broadcast Stations
73.201 Numerical designation of FM broadcast channels.
73.202 Table of Allotments.
73.203 Availability of channels.
73.204 International agreements and other restrictions on use of
channels.
73.205 Zones.
73.207 Minimum distance separation between stations.
73.208 Reference points and distance computations.
73.209 Protection from interference.
73.210 Station classes.
73.211 Power and antenna height requirements.
73.212 Administrative changes in authorizations.
73.213 Grandfathered short-spaced stations.
73.215 Contour protection for short-spaced assignments.
73.220 Restrictions on use of channels.
73.232 Territorial exclusivity.
73.258 Indicating instruments.
73.267 Determining operating power.
73.277 Permissible transmissions.
73.293 Use of FM multiplex subcarriers.
73.295 FM subsidiary communications services.
73.297 FM stereophonic sound broadcasting.
73.310 FM technical definitions.
73.311 Field strength contours.
73.312 Topographic data.
[[Page 6]]
73.313 Prediction of coverage.
73.314 Field strength measurements.
73.315 FM transmitter location.
73.316 FM antenna systems.
73.317 FM transmission system requirements.
73.318 FM blanketing interference.
73.319 FM multiplex subcarrier technical standards.
73.322 FM stereophonic sound transmission standards.
73.333 Engineering charts.
Subpart C_Digital Audio Broadcasting
73.401 Scope.
73.402 Definitions.
73.403 Digital audio broadcasting service requirements.
73.404 IBOC DAB operation.
73.406 Notification.
Subpart D_Noncommercial Educational FM Broadcast Stations
73.501 Channels available for assignment.
73.502 [Reserved]
73.503 Licensing requirements and service.
73.504 Channel assignments in the Mexican border area.
73.505 Zones.
73.506 Classes of noncommercial educational FM stations and channels.
73.507 Minimum distance separations between stations.
73.508 Standards of good engineering practice.
73.509 Prohibited overlap.
73.510 Antenna systems.
73.511 Power and antenna height requirements.
73.512 Special procedures applicable to Class D noncommercial
educational stations.
73.513 Noncommercial educational FM stations operating on unreserved
channels.
73.514 Protection from interference.
73.515 NCE FM transmitter location.
73.525 TV Channel 6 protection.
73.558 Indicating instruments.
73.561 Operating schedule; time sharing.
73.567 Determining operating power.
73.593 Subsidiary communications services.
73.597 FM stereophonic sound broadcasting.
73.599 NCE-FM engineering charts.
Subpart E_Television Broadcast Stations
73.601 Scope of subpart.
73.602 Cross reference to rules in other parts.
73.603 Numerical designation of television channels.
73.606 Table of allotments.
73.609 Zones.
73.611 Emission levels and mask filter.
73.612 Protection from interference.
73.613 [Reserved]
73.614 Power and antenna height requirements.
73.616 References to TV station interference protection methodology.
73.617 Interference protection of other services.
73.618 Antenna location and principal community coverage.
73.619 Contours and service areas.
73.620 Interference calculation and protection of TV broadcast services.
73.621 Noncommercial educational TV stations.
73.622 Digital television table of allotments.
73.623 DTV applications and changes to DTV allotments.
73.624 Digital television broadcast stations.
73.625 TV antenna system.
73.626 TV distributed transmission systems.
73.658 Affiliation agreements and network program practices; territorial
exclusivity in non-network program arrangements.
73.659-73.663 [Reserved]
73.664 Determining operating power.
73.670 Commercial limits in children's programs.
73.671 Educational and informational programming for children.
73.672 [Reserved]
73.673 Public information initiatives regarding educational and
informational programming for children.
73.681 Definitions.
73.682 TV transmission standards.
73.683 Field strength contours and presumptive determination of field
strength at individual locations.
73.685 Transmitter location and antenna system.
73.686 Field strength measurements.
73.687 Transmission system requirements.
73.688 Indicating instruments.
73.691 Visual modulation monitoring.
73.698 Tables.
73.699 TV engineering charts.
Subpart F_International Broadcast Stations
73.701 Definitions.
73.702 Assignment and use of frequencies.
73.703 Geographical zones and areas of reception.
73.712 Equipment tests.
73.713 Program tests.
73.731 Licensing requirements.
73.732 Authorizations.
73.733 Normal license period.
73.751 Operating power.
73.753 Antenna systems.
73.754 Frequency monitors.
73.755 Modulation monitors.
73.756 System specifications for double-sideband (DBS) modulated
emissions in the HF broadcasting service.
73.757 System specifications for single-sideband (SSB) modulated
emissions in the HF broadcasting service.
[[Page 7]]
73.758 System specifications for digitally modulated emissions in the HF
broadcasting service.
73.759 Auxiliary transmitters.
73.760 Alternate main transmitters.
73.761 Modification of transmission systems.
73.762 Time of operation.
73.765 Determining operating power.
73.766 [Reserved]
73.781 Logs.
73.782 Retention of logs.
73.787 Station identification.
73.788 Service; commercial or sponsored programs.
Subpart G_Low Power FM Broadcast Stations (LPFM)
73.801 Broadcast regulations applicable to LPFM stations.
73.805 Availability of channels.
73.807 Minimum distance separation between stations.
73.808 Distance computations.
73.809 Interference protection to full service FM stations.
73.810 Third adjacent channel interference.
73.811 LPFM power and antenna height requirements.
73.812 Rounding of power and antenna heights.
73.813 Determination of antenna height above average terrain (HAAT).
73.816 Antennas.
73.825 Protection to reception of TV channel 6.
73.827 Interference to the input signals of FM translator or FM booster
stations.
73.840 Operating power and mode tolerances.
73.845 Transmission system operation.
73.850 Operating schedule.
73.853 Licensing requirements and service.
73.854 Unlicensed radio operations.
73.855 Ownership limits.
73.858 Attribution of LPFM station interests.
73.860 Cross-ownership.
73.865 Assignment and transfer of LPFM permits and licenses.
73.870 Processing of LPFM broadcast station applications.
73.871 Amendment of LPFM broadcast station applications.
73.872 Selection procedure for mutually exclusive LPFM applications.
73.873 LPFM license period.
73.875 Modification of transmission systems.
73.877 Station logs for LPFM stations.
73.878 Station inspections by FCC; availability to FCC of station logs
and records.
73.879 Signal retransmission.
73.881 Equal employment opportunities.
Subpart H_Rules Applicable to All Broadcast Stations
73.1001 Scope.
73.1010 Cross reference to rules in other parts.
73.1015 Truthful written statements and responses to Commission
inquiries and correspondence.
73.1020 Station license period.
73.1030 Notifications concerning interference to radio astronomy,
research and receiving installations.
73.1120 Station location.
73.1125 Station telephone number.
73.1150 Transferring a station.
73.1201 Station identification.
73.1202 [Reserved]
73.1206 Broadcast of telephone conversations.
73.1207 Rebroadcasts.
73.1208 Broadcast of taped, filmed, or recorded material.
73.1209 References to time.
73.1210 TV/FM dual-language broadcasting in Puerto Rico.
73.1211 Broadcast of lottery information.
73.1212 Sponsorship identification; list retention; related
requirements.
73.1213 Antenna structure, marking and lighting.
73.1215 Specifications for indicating instruments.
73.1216 Licensee-conducted contests.
73.1217 Broadcast hoaxes.
73.1225 Station inspection by FCC.
73.1226 Availability to FCC of station logs and records.
73.1250 Broadcasting emergency information.
73.1300 Unattended station operation.
73.1350 Transmission system operation.
73.1400 Transmission system monitoring and control.
73.1515 Special field test authorizations.
73.1520 Operation for tests and maintenance.
73.1530 Portable test stations [Definition].
73.1540 Carrier frequency measurements.
73.1545 Carrier frequency departure tolerances.
73.1560 Operating power and mode tolerances.
73.1570 Modulation levels: AM and FM.
73.1580 Transmission system inspections.
73.1590 Equipment performance measurements.
73.1610 Equipment tests.
73.1615 Operation during modification of facilities.
73.1620 Program tests.
73.1635 Special temporary authorizations (STA).
73.1650 International agreements.
73.1660 Acceptability of broadcast transmitters.
73.1665 Main transmitters.
[[Page 8]]
73.1670 Auxiliary transmitters.
73.1675 Auxiliary antennas.
73.1680 Emergency antennas.
73.1690 Modification of transmission systems.
73.1692 [Reserved]
73.1695 Changes in transmission standards.
73.1700 Broadcast day.
73.1705 Time of operation.
73.1710 Unlimited time.
73.1715 Share time.
73.1720 Daytime.
73.1725 Limited time.
73.1730 Specified hours.
73.1735 AM station operation pre-sunrise and post-sunset.
73.1740 Minimum operating schedule.
73.1745 Unauthorized operation.
73.1750 Discontinuance of operation.
73.1800 General requirements related to the station log.
73.1820 Station log.
73.1835 Special technical records.
73.1840 Retention of logs.
73.1870 Chief operators.
73.1940 Legally qualified candidates for public office.
73.1941 Equal opportunities.
73.1942 Candidate rates.
73.1943 Political file.
73.1944 Reasonable access.
73.2080 Equal employment opportunities (EEO).
73.2090 Ban on discrimination in broadcast transactions.
73.3500 Application and report forms.
73.3511 Applications required.
73.3512 Where to file; number of copies.
73.3513 Signing of applications.
73.3514 Content of applications.
73.3516 Specification of facilities.
73.3517 Contingent applications.
73.3518 Inconsistent or conflicting applications.
73.3519 Repetitious applications.
73.3520 Multiple applications.
73.3521 Mutually exclusive applications for low power television,
television translators and television booster stations.
73.3522 Amendment of applications.
73.3525 Agreements for removing application conflicts.
73.3526 Online public inspection file of commercial stations.
73.3527 Online public inspection file of noncommercial educational
stations.
73.3533 Application for construction permit or modification of
construction permit.
73.3534 [Reserved]
73.3536 Application for license to cover construction permit.
73.3537 Application for license to use former main antenna as an
auxiliary.
73.3538 Application to make changes in an existing station.
73.3539 Application for renewal of license.
73.3540 Application for voluntary assignment or transfer of control.
73.3541 Application for involuntary assignment of license or transfer of
control.
73.3542 Application for emergency authorization.
73.3544 Application to obtain a modified station license.
73.3545 Application for permit to deliver programs to foreign stations.
73.3549 Requests for extension of time to operate without required
monitors, indicating instruments, and EAS encoders and
decoders.
73.3550 Requests for new or modified call sign assignments.
73.3555 Multiple ownership.
73.3556 Sponsorship identification; list retention; related
requirements.
73.3561 Staff consideration of applications requiring Commission action.
73.3562 Staff consideration of applications not requiring action by the
Commission.
73.3564 Acceptance of applications.
73.3566 Defective applications.
73.3568 Dismissal of applications.
73.3571 Processing of AM broadcast station applications.
73.3572 Processing of TV broadcast, Class A TV broadcast, low power TV,
and TV translators applications.
73.3573 Processing FM broadcast station applications.
73.3574 Processing of international broadcast station applications.
73.3578 Amendments to applications for renewal, assignment or transfer
of control.
73.3580 Local public notice of filing of broadcast applications.
73.3584 Procedure for filing petitions to deny.
73.3587 Procedure for filing informal objections.
73.3588 Dismissal of petitions to deny or withdrawal of informal
objections.
73.3589 Threats to file petitions to deny or informal objections.
73.3591 Grants without hearing.
73.3592 Conditional grant.
73.3593 Designation for hearing.
73.3594 Local public notice of designation for hearing.
73.3597 Procedures on transfer and assignment applications.
73.3598 Period of construction.
73.3601 Simultaneous modification and renewal of license.
73.3603 Special waiver procedure relative to applications.
73.3605 Retention of applications in hearing status after designation
for hearing.
73.3612 Annual employment report.
73.3613 Availability to FCC of station contracts.
73.3615 Ownership reports.
73.3617 Information available on the internet.
[[Page 9]]
73.3700 Post-incentive auction licensing and operation.
73.3701 Reimbursement under the Reimbursement Expansion Act.
73.3800 Full power television channel sharing outside the incentive
auction.
73.3801 Full power television simulcasting during the ATSC 3.0 (Next Gen
TV) transition.
73.3999 Enforcement of 18 U.S.C. 1464 (restrictions on the transmission
of obscene and indecent material).
73.4000 Listing of FCC policies.
73.4005 Advertising--refusal to sell.
73.4015 Applications for AM and FM construction permits, incomplete or
defective.
73.4017 Application processing: Commercial FM stations.
73.4045 Barter agreements.
73.4050 Children's TV programs.
73.4055 Cigarette advertising.
73.4060 Citizens agreements.
73.4075 Commercials, loud.
73.4082 [Reserved]
73.4091 Direct broadcast satellites.
73.4094 Dolby encoder.
73.4095 Drug lyrics.
73.4097 EBS (now EAS) attention signals on automated programing systems.
73.4099 Financial qualifications, certification of.
73.4100 Financial qualifications; new AM and FM stations.
73.4101 Financial qualifications, TV stations.
73.4102 FAA communications, broadcast of.
73.4104 FM assignment policies and procedures.
73.4107 [Reserved]
73.4108 [Reserved]
73.4110 Format changes of stations.
73.4135 Interference to TV reception by FM stations.
73.4140 Minority ownership; tax certificates and distress sales.
73.4154 Network/AM, FM station affiliation agreements.
73.4157 Network signals which adversely affect affiliate broadcast
service.
73.4163 Noncommercial nature of educational broadcast stations.
73.4165 Obscene language.
73.4170 Obscene broadcasts.
73.4180 Payment disclosure: Payola, plugola, kickbacks.
73.4185 Political broadcasting and telecasting, the law of.
73.4190 Political candidate authorization notice and sponsorship
identification.
73.4195 Political advertising by UHF translators.
73.4210 Procedure Manual: ``The Public and Broadcasting''.
73.4215 Program matter: Supplier identification.
73.4242 Sponsorship identification rules, applicability of.
73.4246 Stereophonic pilot subcarrier use during monophonic programming.
73.4247 [Reserved]
73.4250 Subliminal perception.
73.4255 Tax certificates: Issuance of.
73.4260 Teaser announcements.
73.4265 Telephone conversation broadcasts (network and like sources).
73.4266 Tender offer and proxy statements.
73.4267 Time brokerage.
73.4275 Tone clusters; audio attention-getting devices.
73.4280 Character evaluation of broadcast applicants.
Subpart I_Procedures for Competitive Bidding and for Applications for
Noncommercial Educational Broadcast Stations on Non-Reserved Channels
73.5000 Services subject to competitive bidding.
73.5001 [Reserved]
73.5002 Application and certification procedures; return of mutually
exclusive applications not subject to competitive bidding
procedures; prohibition of collusion.
73.5003 Submission of full payments.
73.5004 [Reserved]
73.5005 Filing of long-form applications.
73.5006 Filing of petitions to deny against long-form applications.
73.5007 Designated entity provisions.
73.5008 Definitions applicable for designated entity provisions.
73.5009 Assignment or transfer of control.
Subpart J_Class A Television Broadcast Stations
73.6000 Definitions.
73.6001 Eligibility and service requirements.
73.6002 Licensing requirements.
73.6003-73.6005 [Reserved]
73.6006 Channel assignments.
73.6007 Power limitations.
73.6008 Distance computations.
73.6010 Class A TV station protected contour.
73.6016 References to TV station interference protection methodology.
73.6017 Class A TV station protection of Class A TV stations.
73.6018 Class A TV station protection of TV stations.
73.6019 Class A TV station protection of low power TV and TV translator
stations.
73.6020 Protection of stations in the land mobile radio service.
73.6022 Negotiated interference and relocation agreements.
73.6023 Distributed transmission systems.
73.6024 Transmission standards and system requirements.
[[Page 10]]
73.6025 Antenna system and station location.
73.6026 Broadcast regulations applicable to Class A television stations.
73.6028 Class A television channel sharing outside the incentive
auction.
73.6029 Class A television simulcasting during the ATSC 3.0 (Next Gen
TV) transition.
73.6030 Low Power Protection Act.
Subpart K_Application and Selection Procedures for Reserved
Noncommercial Educational Channels, and for Certain Applications for
Noncommercial Educational Stations on Non-Reserved Channels
73.7000 Definition of terms (as used in subpart K only).
73.7001 Services subject to evaluation by point system.
73.7002 Fair distribution of service on reserved band FM channels.
73.7003 Point system selection procedures.
73.7004 Petitions to deny tentative selectee(s).
73.7005 Maintenance of comparative qualifications.
Subpart L_Incorporated Standards
73.8000 Incorporation by reference.
Alphabetical Index--Part 73
Authority: 47 U.S.C. 154, 155, 301, 303, 307, 309, 310, 334, 336,
339.
Subpart A_AM Broadcast Stations
Sec. 73.1 Scope.
This subpart contains those rules which apply exclusively to the AM
broadcast service and are in addition to those rules in Subpart H which
are common to all AM, FM and TV broadcast services, commercial and
noncommercial.
[47 FR 8587, Mar. 1, 1982]
Sec. 73.14 AM broadcast definitions.
AM broadcast band. The band of frequencies extending from 535 to
1705 kHz.
AM broadcast channel. The band of frequencies occupied by the
carrier and the upper and lower sidebands of an AM broadcast signal with
the carrier frequency at the center. Channels are designated by their
assigned carrier frequencies. The 117 carrier frequencies assigned to AM
broadcast stations begin at 540 kHz and progress in 10 kHz steps to 1700
kHz. (See Sec. 73.21 for the classification of AM broadcast channels).
AM broadcast station. A broadcast station licensed for the
dissemination of radio communications intended to be received by the
public and operated on a channel in the AM broadcast band.
Amplitude modulated stage. The radio-frequency stage to which the
modulator is coupled and in which the carrier wave is modulated in
accordance with the system of amplitude modulation and the
characteristics of the modulating wave.
Amplitude modulator stage. The last amplifier stage of the
modulating wave amplitude modulates a radio-frequency stage.
Antenna current. The radio-frequency current in the antenna with no
modulation.
Antenna input power. The product of the square of the antenna
current and the antenna resistance at the point where the current is
measured.
Antenna resistance. The total resistance of the transmitting antenna
system at the operating frequency and at the point at which the antenna
current is measured.
Auxiliary facility. An auxiliary facility is an AM antenna tower(s)
separate from the main facility's antenna tower(s), permanently
installed at the same site or at a different location, from which an AM
station may broadcast for short periods without prior Commission
authorization or notice to the Commission while the main facility is not
in operation (e.g., where tower work necessitates turning off the main
antenna or where lightning has caused damage to the main antenna or
transmission system) (See Sec. 73.1675).
Blanketing. The interference which is caused by the presence of an
AM broadcast signal of one volt per meter (V/m) or greater strengths in
the area adjacent to the antenna of the transmitting station. The 1 V/m
contour is referred to as the blanket contour and the area within this
contour is referred to as the blanket area.
Carrier-amplitude regulation (Carrier shift). The change in
amplitude of the carrier wave in an amplitude-modulated transmitter when
modulation is
[[Page 11]]
applied under conditions of symmetrical modulation.
Combined audio harmonics. The arithmetical sum of the amplitudes of
all the separate harmonic components. Root sum square harmonic readings
may be accepted under conditions prescribed by the FCC.
Critical hours. The two hour period immediately following local
sunrise and the two hour period immediately preceding local sunset.
Daytime. The period of time between local sunrise and local sunset.
Effective field; Effective field strength. The root-mean-square
(RMS) value of the inverse distance fields at a distance of 1 kilometer
from the antenna in all directions in the horizontal plane. The term
``field strength'' is synonymous with the term ``field intensity'' as
contained elsewhere in this Part.
Equipment performance measurements. The measurements performed to
determine the overall performance characteristics of a broadcast
transmission system from point of program origination to sampling of
signal as radiated. (See Sec. 73.1590)
Experimental period. the time between 12 midnight local time and
local sunrise, used by AM stations for tests, maintenance and
experimentation.
Frequency departure. The amount of variation of a carrier frequency
or center frequency from its assigned value.
Incidental phase modulation. The peak phase deviation (in radians)
resulting from the process of amplitude modulation.
Input power. Means the product of the direct voltage applied to the
last radio stage and the total direct current flowing to the last radio
stage, measured without modulation.
Intermittent service area. Means the area receiving service from the
groundwave of a broadcast station but beyond the primary service area
and subject to some interference and fading.
Last radio stage. The radio-frequency power amplifier stage which
supplies power to the antenna.
Left (or right) signal. The electrical output of a microphone or
combination of microphones placed so as to convey the intensity, time,
and location of sounds originated predominately to the listener's left
(or right) of the center of the performing area.
Left (or right) stereophonic channel. The left (or right) signal as
electrically reproduced in reception of AM stereophonic broadcasts.
Main channel. The band of audio frequencies from 50 to 10,000 Hz
which amplitude modulates the carrier.
Maximum percentage of modulation. The greatest percentage of
modulation that may be obtained by a transmitter without producing in
its output, harmonics of the modulating frequency in excess of those
permitted by these regulations. (See Sec. 73.1570)
Maximum rated carrier power. The maximum power at which the
transmitter can be operated satisfactorily and is determined by the
design of the transmitter and the type and number of vacuum tubes or
other amplifier devices used in the last radio stage.
Model I facility. A station operating in the 1605-1705 kHz band
featuring fulltime operation with stereo, competitive technical quality,
10 kW daytime power, 1 kW nighttime power, non-directional antenna (or a
simple directional antenna system), and separated by 400-800 km from
other co-channel stations.
Model II facility. A station operating in the 535-1605 kHz band
featuring fulltime operation, competitive technical quality, wide area
daytime coverage with nighttime coverage at least 15% of the daytime
coverage.
Modulation dependent carrier level (MDCL) control technologies.
Transmitter control techniques that vary either the carrier power level
or both the carrier and sideband power levels as a function of the
modulation level.
Nighttime. The period of time between local sunset and local
sunrise.
Nominal power. The antenna input power less any power loss through a
dissipative network and, for directional antennas, without consideration
of adjustments specified in paragraphs (b)(1) and (b)(2) of Sec. 73.51
of the rules. However, for AM broadcast applications granted or filed
before June 3, 1985, nominal power is specified in a system of
classifications which include the following values: 50 kW, 25 kW, 10 kW,
5 kW, 2.5 kW, 1 kW, 0.5 kW, and 0.25 kW. The specified nominal power for
any
[[Page 12]]
station in this group of stations will be retained until action is taken
on or after June 3, 1985, which involves a change in the technical
facilities of the station.
Percentage modulation (amplitude)
In a positive direction:
M = MAX-C x 100
----------------
c
In a negative direction:
M = C-MIN x 100
---------------
c
Where:
M = Modulation level in percent.
MAX = Instantaneous maximum level of the modulated radio frequency
envelope.
MIN = Instantaneous minimum level of the modulated radio frequency
envelope.
C = (Carrier) level of radio frequency envelope without modulation.
Plate modulation. The modulation produced by introduction of the
modulating wave into the plate circuit of any tube in which the carrier
frequency wave is present.
Primary service area. Means the service area of a broadcast station
in which the groundwave is not subject to objectionable interference or
objectionable fading.
Proof of performance measurements or antenna proof of performance
measurements. The measurements of field strengths made to determine the
radiation pattern or characteristics of an AM directional antenna
system.
Secondary service area. Means the service area of a broadcast
station served by the skywave and not subject to objectionable
interference and in which the signal is subject to intermittent
variations in strength.
Stereophonic channel. The band of audio frequencies from 50 to
10,000 Hz containing the stereophonic information which modulates the
radio frequency carrier.
Stereophonic crosstalk. An undesired signal occurring in the main
channel from modulation of the stereophonic channel or that occurring in
the stereophonic channel from modulation of the main channel.
Stereophonic pilot tone. An audio tone of fixed or variable
frequency modulating the carrier during the transmission of stereophonic
programs.
Stereophonic separation. The ratio of the electrical signal caused
in the right (or left) stereophonic channel to the electrical signal
caused in the left (or right) stereophonic channel by the transmission
of only a right (or left) signal.
Sunrise and sunset. For each particular location and during any
particular month, the time of sunrise and sunset as specified in the
instrument of authorization (See Sec. 73.1209).
White area. The area or population which does not receive
interference-free primary service from an authorized AM station or does
not receive a signal strength of at least 1 mV/m from an authorized FM
station.
[47 FR 8587, Mar. 1, 1982, as amended at 47 FR 13164, Mar. 29, 1982; 47
FR 13812, Apr. 1, 1982; 50 FR 18821, May 2, 1985; 50 FR 47054, Nov. 14,
1985; 56 FR 64856, Dec. 12, 1991; 62 FR 51058, Sept. 30, 1997; 66 FR
20755, Apr. 25, 2001; 81 FR 2759, Jan. 19, 2016; 82 FR 57882, Dec. 8,
2017]
Sec. 73.21 Classes of AM broadcast channels and stations.
(a) Clear channel. A clear channel is one on which stations are
assigned to serve wide areas. These stations are protected from
objectionable interference within their primary service areas and,
depending on the class of station, their secondary service areas.
Stations operating on these channels are classified as follows:
(1) Class A station. A Class A station is an unlimited time station
that operates on a clear channel and is designed to render primary and
secondary service over an extended area and at relatively long distances
from its transmitter. Its primary service area is protected from
objectionable interference from other stations on the same and adjacent
channels, and its secondary service area is protected from interference
from other stations on the same channel. (See Sec. 73.182). The
operating power shall not be less than 10 kW nor more than 50 kW. (Also
see Sec. 73.25(a)).
(2) Class B station. Class B stations are authorized to operate with
a minimum power of 0.25 kW (or, if less than 0.25 kW, an equivalent RMS
antenna
[[Page 13]]
field of at least 107.5 mV/m at 1 kilometer) and a maximum power of 50
kW, or 10 kW for stations that are authorized to operate in the 1605-
1705 kHz band.
(3) Class D station. A Class D station operates either daytime,
limited time or unlimited time with nighttime power less than 0.25 kW
and an equivalent RMS antenna field of less than 107.5 mV/m at 1
kilometer. Class D stations shall operate with daytime powers not less
than 0.25 kW nor more than 50 kW. Nighttime operations of Class D
stations are not afforded protection and must protect all Class A and
Class B operations during nighttime hours. New Class D stations that had
not been previously licensed as Class B will not be authorized.
(b) Regional Channel. A regional channel is one on which Class B and
Class D stations may operate and serve primarily a principal center of
population and the rural area contiguous thereto.
Note: Until the North American Regional Broadcasting Agreement
(NARBA) is terminated with respect to the Bahama Islands and the
Dominican Republic, radiation toward those countries from a Class B
station may not exceed the level that would be produced by an
omnidirectional antenna with a transmitted power of 5 kW, or such lower
level as will comply with NARBA requirements for protection of stations
in the Bahama Islands and the Dominican Republic against objectionable
interference.
(c) Local channel. A local channel is one on which stations operate
unlimited time and serve primarily a community and the suburban and
rural areas immediately contiguous thereto.
(1) Class C station. A Class C station is a station operating on a
local channel and is designed to render service only over a primary
service area that may be reduced as a consequence of interference in
accordance with Sec. 73.182. The power shall not be less than 0.25 kW,
nor more than 1 kW. Class C stations that are licensed to operate with
0.1 kW may continue to do so.
[56 FR 64856, Dec. 12, 1991, as amended at 81 FR 2759, Jan. 19, 2016]
Sec. 73.23 AM broadcast station applications affected by international
agreements.
(a) Except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section, no
application for an AM station will be accepted for filing if
authorization of the facilities requested would be inconsistent with
international commitments of the United States under treaties and other
international agreements, arrangements and understandings. (See list of
such international instruments in Sec. 73.1650(b)). Any such
application that is inadvertently accepted for filing will be dismissed.
(b) AM applications that involve conflicts only with the North
American Regional Broadcasting Agreement (NARBA), but that are in
conformity with the remaining treaties and other international
agreements listed in Sec. 73.1650(b) and with the other requirements of
this part 73, will be granted subject to such modifications as the FCC
may subsequently find appropriate, taking international considerations
into account.
(c) In the case of any application designated for hearing on issues
other than those related to consistency with international relationships
and as to which no final decision has been rendered, whenever action
under this section becomes appropriate because of inconsistency with
international relationships, the applicant involved shall,
notwithstanding the provisions Sec. Sec. 73.3522 and 73.3571, be
permitted to amend its application to achieve consistency with such
relationships. In such cases the provisions of Sec. 73.3605(c) will
apply.
(d) In some circumstances, special international considerations may
require that the FCC, in acting on applications, follow procedures
different from those established for general use. In such cases,
affected applicants will be informed of the procedures to be followed.
[56 FR 64856, Dec. 12, 1991]
Sec. 73.24 Broadcast facilities; showing required.
An authorization for a new AM broadcast station or increase in
facilities of an existing station will be
[[Page 14]]
issued only after a satisfactory showing has been made in regard to the
following, among others:
(a) That the proposed assignment will tend to effect a fair,
efficient, and equitable distribution of radio service among the several
states and communities.
(b) That a proposed new station (or a proposed change in the
facilities of an authorized station) complies with the pertinent
requirements of Sec. 73.37 of this chapter.
(c) That the applicant is financially qualified to construct and
operate the proposed station.
(d) That the applicant is legally qualified. That the applicant (or
the person or persons in control of an applicant corporation or other
organization) is of good character and possesses other qualifications
sufficient to provide a satisfactory public service.
(e) That the technical equipment proposed, the location of the
transmitter, and other technical phases of operation comply with the
regulations governing the same, and the requirements of good engineering
practice.
(f) That the facilities sought are subject to assignment as
requested under existing international agreements and the rules and
regulations of the Commission.
(g) That the population within the 1 V/m contour does not exceed 1.0
percent of the population within the 25 mV/m contour: Provided, however,
That where the number of persons within the 1 V/m contour is 300 or less
the provisions of this paragraph are not applicable.
(h) That, in the case of an application for a Class B or Class D
station on a clear channel, the proposed station would radiate, during
two hours following local sunrise and two hours preceding local sunset,
in any direction toward the 0.1 mV/m groundwave contour of a co-channel
United States Class A station, no more than the maximum value permitted
under the provisions of Sec. 73.187.
(i) That, for all proposals for new stations, applications to modify
a construction permit for an unlicensed station, and all applications to
change a station's community of license, the daytime 5 mV/m contour
encompasses the entire principal community to be served. That, for all
other applications for modification of licensed stations, the daytime 5
mV/m contour encompasses either 50 percent of the area, or 50 percent of
the population, of the principal community to be served. That, for all
proposals for new stations in the 535-1605 kHz band, applications to
modify a construction permit for an unlicensed station, or applications
to change a station's community of license, either 50 percent of the
area, or 50 percent of the population of the principal community is
encompassed by the nighttime 5 mV/m contour or the nighttime
interference-free contour, whichever value is higher. That, for stations
in the 1605-1705 kHz band, 50 percent of the principal community is
encompassed by the nighttime 5 mV/m contour or the nighttime
interference-free contour, whichever value is higher. That Class D
stations with nighttime authorizations need not demonstrate such
coverage during nighttime operation.
(j) That the public interest, convenience, and necessity will be
served through the operation under the proposed assignment.
[28 FR 13574, Dec. 14, 1963, as amended at 38 FR 5874, Mar. 5, 1973; 49
FR 43960, Nov. 1, 1984; 50 FR 40014, Oct. 1, 1985; 52 FR 11654, Apr. 10,
1987; 53 FR 1031, Jan. 15, 1988; 56 FR 64857, Dec. 12, 1991; 81 FR 2759,
Jan. 19, 2016]
Sec. 73.25 Clear channels; Class A, Class B and Class D stations.
The frequencies in the following tabulations are designated as clear
channels and assigned for use by the Classes of stations given:
(a) On each of the following channels, one Class A station may be
assigned, operating with power of 50 kW: 640, 650, 660, 670, 700, 720,
750, 760, 770, 780, 820, 830, 840, 870, 880, 890, 1020, 1030, 1040,
1100, 1120, 1160, 1180, 1200, and 1210 kHz. In Alaska, these frequencies
can be used by Class A stations subject to the conditions set forth in
Sec. 73.182(a)(1)(ii). On the channels listed in this paragraph, Class
B and Class D stations may be assigned.
(b) To each of the following channels there may be assigned Class A,
Class B and Class D stations: 680, 710, 810, 850, 940, 1000, 1060, 1070,
1080, 1090, 1110, 1130,
[[Page 15]]
1140, 1170, 1190, 1500, 1510, 1520, 1530, 1540, 1550, and 1560 kHz.
Note: Until superseded by a new agreement, protection of the Bahama
Islands shall be in accordance with NARBA. Accordingly, a Class A, Class
B or Class D station on 1540 kHz shall restrict its signal to a value no
greater than 5 [micro]V/m groundwave or 25 [micro]V/m-10% skywave at any
point of land in the Bahama Islands, and such stations operating
nighttime (i.e., sunset to sunrise at the location of the U.S. station)
shall be located not less than 650 miles from the nearest point of land
in the Bahama Islands.
(c) Class A, Class B and Class D stations may be assigned on 540,
690, 730, 740, 800, 860, 900, 990, 1010, 1050, 1220, 1540, 1570, and
1580 kHz.
[28 FR 13574, Dec. 14, 1963, as amended at 33 FR 4410, Mar. 12, 1968; 35
FR 18052, Nov. 25, 1970; 47 FR 27862, June 28, 1982; 49 FR 43960, Nov.
1, 1984; 50 FR 24520, June 11, 1985; 52 FR 47568, Dec. 15, 1987; 53 FR
1031, Jan. 15, 1988; 54 FR 39736, Sept. 28, 1989; 56 FR 64857, Dec. 12,
1991]
Sec. 73.26 Regional channels; Class B and Class D stations.
(a) The following frequencies are designated as regional channels
and are assigned for use by Class B and Class D stations: 550, 560, 570,
580, 590, 600, 610, 620, 630, 790, 910, 920, 930, 950, 960, 970, 980,
1150, 1250, 1260, 1270, 1280, 1290, 1300, 1310, 1320, 1330, 1350, 1360,
1370, 1380, 1390, 1410, 1420, 1430, 1440, 1460, 1470, 1480, 1590, 1600,
1610, 1620, 1630, 1640, 1650, 1660, 1670, 1680, 1690, and 1700 kHz.
(b) Additionally, in Alaska, Hawaii, Puerto Rico, and the U.S.
Virgin Islands the frequencies 1230, 1240, 1340, 1400, 1450, and 1490
kHz are designated as Regional channels, and are assigned for use by
Class B stations. Stations formerly licensed to these channels in those
locations as Class C stations are redesignated as Class B stations.
[56 FR 64857, Dec. 12, 1991]
Sec. 73.27 Local channels; Class C stations.
Within the conterminous 48 states, the following frequencies are
designated as local channels, and are assigned for use by Class C
stations: 1230, 1240, 1340, 1400, 1450, and 1490 kHz.
[56 FR 64857, Dec. 12, 1991]
Sec. 73.28 Assignment of stations to channels.
(a) The Commission will not make an AM station assignment that does
not conform with international requirements and restrictions on spectrum
use that the United States has accepted as a signatory to treaties,
conventions, and other international agreements. See Sec. 73.1650 for a
list of pertinent treaties, conventions and agreements, and Sec. 73.23
for procedural provisions relating to compliance with them.
(b) Engineering standards now in force domestically differ in some
respects from those specified for international purposes. The
engineering standards specified for international purposes (see Sec.
73.1650, International Agreements) will be used to determine:
(1) The extent to which interference might be caused by a proposed
station in the United States to a station in another country; and
(2) whether the United States should register an objection to any
new or changed assignment notified by another country. The domestic
standards in effect in the United States will be used to determine the
extent to which interference exists or would exist from a foreign
station where the value of such interference enters into a calculation
of:
(i) The service to be rendered by a proposed operation in the United
States; or
(ii) the permissible interfering signal from one station in the
United States to another United States station.
[28 FR 13574, Dec. 14, 1963, as amended at 29 FR 9499, July 11, 1964; 49
FR 32358, Aug. 14, 1984; 50 FR 18821, May 2, 1985; 54 FR 39736, Sept.
28, 1989; 56 FR 64857, Dec. 12, 1991]
Sec. 73.29 Class C stations on regional channels.
No license will be granted for the operation of a Class C station on
a regional channel.
[ 56 FR 64857, Dec. 12, 1991]
Sec. 73.30 Petition for authorization of an allotment in the
1605-1705 kHz band.
(a) Any party interested in operating an AM broadcast station on one
of the ten channels in the 1605-1705 kHz band
[[Page 16]]
must file a petition for the establishment of an allotment to its
community of license. Each petition must include the following
information:
(1) Name of community for which allotment is sought;
(2) Frequency and call letters of the petitioner's existing AM
operation; and
(3) Statement as to whether or not AM stereo operation is proposed
for the operation in the 1605-1705 kHz band.
(b) Petitions are to be filed during a filing period to be
determined by the Commission. For each filing period, eligible stations
will be allotted channels based on the following steps:
(1) Stations are ranked in descending order according to the
calculated improvement factor.
(2) The station with the highest improvement factor is initially
allotted the lowest available channel.
(3) Successively, each station with the next lowest improvement
factor, is allotted an available channel taking into account the
possible frequency and location combinations and relationship to
previously selected allotments. If a channel is not available for the
subject station, previous allotments are examined with respect to an
alternate channel, the use of which would make a channel available for
the subject station.
(4) When it has been determined that, in accordance with the above
steps, no channel is available for the subject station, that station is
no longer considered and the process continues to the station with the
next lowest improvement factor.
(c) If awarded an allotment, a petitioner will have sixty (60) days
from the date of public notice of selection to file an application for
construction permit on FCC Form 301. (See Sec. Sec. 73.24 and 73.37(e)
for filing requirements). Unless instructed by the Commission to do
otherwise, the application shall specify Model I facilities. (See Sec.
73.14). Upon grant of the application and subsequent construction of the
authorized facility, the applicant must file a license application on
FCC Form 302.
Note 1: Until further notice by the Commission, the filing of these
petitions is limited to licensees of existing AM stations (excluding
Class C stations) operating in the 535-1605 kHz band. First priority
will be assigned to Class D stations located within the primary service
contours of U.S. Class A stations that are licensed to serve communities
of 100,000 or more for which there exists no local fulltime aural
service.
Note 2: Selection among competing petitions will be based on
interference reduction. Notwithstanding the exception contained in Note
5 of this section, within each operational category, the station
demonstrating the highest value of improvement factor will be afforded
the highest priority for an allotment, with the next priority assigned
to the station with next lowest value, and so on, until available
allotments are filled.
Note 3: The Commission will periodically evaluate the progress of
the movement of stations from the 535-1605 kHz band to the 1605-1705 kHz
band to determine whether the 1605-1705 kHz band should continue to be
administered on an allotment basis or modified to an assignment method.
If appropriate, the Commission will later develop further procedures for
use of the 1605-1705 kHz band by existing station licensees and others.
Note 4: Other than the exception specified in note 1 of this
section, existing fulltime stations are considered first for selection
as described in note 2 of this section. In the event that an allotment
availability exists for which no fulltime station has filed a relevant
petition, such allotment may be awarded to a licensed Class D station.
If more than one Class D station applies for this migration opportunity,
the following priorities will be used in the selection process: First
priority--a Class D station located within the 0.5 mV/m-50% contour of a
U.S. Class A station and licensed to serve a community of 100,000 or
more, for which there exists no local fulltime aural service; Second
priority--Class D stations ranked in order of improvement factor, from
highest to lowest, considering only those stations with improvement
factors greater than zero.
Note 5: The preference for AM stereo in the expanded band will be
administered as follows: when an allotment under consideration
(candidate allotment) conflicts with one or more previously selected
allotments (established allotments) and cannot be accommodated in the
expanded band, the candidate allotment will be substituted for the
previously established allotment provided that: the petitioner for the
candidate allotment has made a written commitment to the use of AM
stereo and the petitioner for the established allotment has not; the
difference between the ranking factors associated with the candidate and
established allotments does not exceed 10% of the ranking factor of the
candidate allotment; the substitution will not require the displacement
of more than one established allotment; and both the
[[Page 17]]
candidate allotment and the established allotment are within the same
priority group.
[58 FR 27949, May 12, 1993]
Sec. 73.31 Rounding of nominal power specified on applications.
(a) An application filed with the FCC for a new station or for an
increase in power of an existing station shall specify nominal power
rounded to two significant figures as follows:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rounded
down to
Nominal power (kW) nearest
figure
(kW)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Below 0.25................................................... 0.001
0.25 to 0.99................................................. 0.01
1 to 9.9..................................................... 0.1
10 to 50..................................................... 1
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(b) In rounding the nominal power in accordance with paragraph (a)
of this section the RMS shall be adjusted accordingly. If rounding
upward to the nearest figure would result in objectionable interference,
the nominal power specified on the application is to be rounded downward
to the next nearest figure and the RMS adjusted accordingly.
[50 FR 18821, May 2, 1985, as amended at 53 FR 1031, Jan. 15, 1988]
Sec. 73.33 Antenna systems; showing required.
(a) An application for authority to install a broadcast antenna
shall specify a definite site and include full details of the antenna
design and expected performance.
(b) All data necessary to show compliance with the terms and
conditions of the construction permit must be filed with the license
application. If the station is using a directional antenna, a proof of
performance must also be filed.
[28 FR 13574, Dec. 14, 1963, as amended at 37 FR 25840, Dec. 5, 1972]
Sec. 73.35 Calculation of improvement factors.
A petition for an allotment (See Sec. 73.30) in the 1605-1705 kHz
band filed by an existing fulltime AM station licensed in the 535-1605
kHz band will be ranked according to the station's calculated
improvement factor. (See Sec. 73.30). Improvement factors relate to
both nighttime and daytime interference conditions and are based on two
distinct considerations: (a) Service area lost by other stations due to
interference caused by the subject station, and (b) service area of the
subject station. These considerations are represented by a ratio. The
ratio consists, where applicable, of two separate additive components,
one for nighttime and one for daytime. For the nighttime component, to
determine the numerator of the ratio (first consideration), calculate
the RSS and associated service area of the stations (co- and adjacent
channel) to which the subject station causes nighttime interference.
Next, repeat the RSS and service area calculations excluding the subject
station. The cumulative gain in the above service area is the numerator
of the ratio. The denominator (second consideration) is the subject
station's interference-free service area. For the daytime component, the
composite amount of service lost by co-channel and adjacent channel
stations, each taken individually, that are affected by the subject
station, excluding the effects of other assignments during each study,
will be used as the numerator of the daytime improvement factor. The
denominator will consist of the actual daytime service area (0.5 mV/m
contour) less any area lost to interference from other assignments. The
value of this combined ratio will constitute the petitioner's
improvement factor. Notwithstanding the requirements of Sec. 73.153,
for uniform comparisons and simplicity, measurement data will not be
used for determining improvement factors and FCC figure M-3 ground
conductivity values are to be used exclusively in accordance with the
pertinent provisions of Sec. 73.183(c)(1).
[56 FR 64858, Dec. 12, 1991]
Sec. 73.37 Applications for broadcast facilities, showing required.
(a) No application will be accepted for a new station if the
proposed operation would involve overlap of signal strength contours
with any other station as set forth below in this paragraph; and no
application will be accepted for a change of the facilities of an
existing station if the proposed
[[Page 18]]
change would involve such overlap where there is not already such
overlap between the stations involved:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Contour of
proposed
station Contour of any other
Frequency separation (kHz) (classes station (mV/m)
B, C and
D) (mV/m)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.............................. 0.005 0.100 (Class A).
0.025 0.500(Other classes).
0.500 0.025 (All classes).
10............................. 0.250 0.500(All classes).
0.500 0.250 (All classes).
20............................. 5 5 (All classes).
5 5 (All classes).
30............................. 25 25 (All classes).
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(b) In determining overlap received, an application for a new Class
C station with daytime power of 250 watts, or greater, shall be
considered on the assumption that both the proposed operation and all
existing Class C stations operate with 250 watts and utilize non-
directional antennas.
(c) If otherwise consistent with the public interest, an application
requesting an increase in the daytime power of an existing Class C
station on a local channel from 250 watts to a maximum of 1kW, or from
100 watts to a maximum of 500 watts, may be granted notwithstanding
overlap prohibited by paragraph (a) of this section. In the case of a
100 watt Class C station increasing daytime power, the provisions of
this paragraph shall not be construed to permit an increase in power to
more than 500 watts, if prohibited overlap would be involved, even if
successive applications should be tendered.
(d) In addition to demonstrating compliance with paragraphs (a),
and, as appropriate, (b), and (c) of this section, an application for a
new AM broadcast station, or for a major change (see Sec.
73.3571(a)(1)) in an authorized AM broadcast station, as a condition for
its acceptance, shall make a satisfactory showing, if new or modified
nighttime operation by a Class B station is proposed, that objectionable
interference will not result to an authorized station, as determined
pursuant to Sec. 73.182(1).
(e) An application for an authorization in the 1605-1705 kHz band
which has been selected through the petition process (See Sec. 73.30)
is not required to demonstrate compliance with paragraph (a), (b), (c),
or (d) of this section. Instead, the applicant need only comply with the
terms of the allotment authorization issued by the Commission in
response to the earlier petition for establishment of a station in the
1605-1705 kHz band. Within the allotment authorization, the Commission
will specify the assigned frequency and the applicable technical
requirements.
(f) Stations on 1580, 1590 and 1600 kHz. In addition to the rules
governing the authorization of facilities in the 535-1605 kHz band,
stations on these frequencies seeking facilities modifications must
protect assignments in the 1610-1700 kHz band. Such protection shall be
afforded in a manner which considers the spacings that occur or exist
between the subject station and a station within the range 1605-1700
kHz. The spacings are the same as those specified for stations in the
frequency band 1610-1700 kHz or the current separation distance,
whichever is greater. Modifications that would result in a spacing or
spacings that fails to meet any of the separations must include a
showing that appropriate adjustment has been made to the radiated signal
which effectively results in a site-to-site radiation that is equivalent
to the radiation of a station with standard Model I facilities (10 kW-D,
1 kW-N, non-DA, 90 degree antenna ht. & ground system) operating in
compliance with all of the above separation distances. In those cases
where that radiation equivalence value is already exceeded, a station
may continue to maintain, but not increase beyond that level.
Note 1: In the case of applications for changes in the facilities of
AM broadcast stations covered by this section, an application will be
accepted even though overlap of field strength contours as mentioned in
this section would occur with another station in an area where such
overlap does not already exist, if:
(1) The total area of overlap with that station would not be
increased;
(2) There would be no net increase in the area of overlap with any
other station; and
(3) There would be created no area of overlap with any station with
which overlap does not now exist.
Note 2: The provisions of this section concerning prohibited overlap
of field strength contours will not apply where:
[[Page 19]]
(1) The area of overlap lies entirely over sea water: or
(2) The only overlap involved would be that caused to a foreign
station, in which case the provisions of the applicable international
agreement, as identified in Sec. 73.1650, will apply. When overlap
would be received from a foreign station, the provisions of this section
will apply, except where there would be overlap with a foreign station
with a frequency separation of 20 kHz, in which case the provisions of
the international agreement will apply in lieu of this section.
Note 3: In determining the number of ``authorized'' aural
transmission facilities in a given community, applications for that
community in hearing or otherwise having protected status under
specified ``cut-off'' procedures shall be considered as existing
stations. In the event that there are two or more mutually exclusive
protected applications seeking authorization for the proposed community
it will be assumed that only one is ``authorized.''
Note 4: A ``transmission facility'' for a community is a station
licensed to the community. Such a station provides a ``transmission
service'' for that community.
[56 FR 64858, Dec. 12, 1991; 57 FR 43290, Sept. 18, 1992]
Sec. 73.44 AM transmission system emission limitations.
(a) The emissions of stations in the AM service shall be attenuated
in accordance with the requirements specified in paragraph (b) of this
section. Emissions shall be measured using a properly operated and
suitable swept-frequency RF spectrum analyzer using a peak hold duration
of 10 minutes, no video filtering, and a 300 Hz resolution bandwidth,
except that a wider resolution bandwidth may be employed above 11.5 kHz
to detect transient emissions. Alternatively, other specialized
receivers or monitors with appropriate characteristics may be used to
determine compliance with the provisions of this section, provided that
any disputes over measurement accuracy are resolved in favor of
measurements obtained by using a calibrated spectrum analyzer adjusted
as set forth above.
(b) Emissions 10.2 kHz to 20 kHz removed from the carrier must be
attenuated at least 25 dB below the unmodulated carrier level, emissions
20 kHz to 30 kHz removed from the carrier must be attenuated at least 35
dB below the unmodulated carrier level, emissions 30 kHz to 60 kHz
removed from the carrier must be attenuated at least [5 + 1 dB/kHz]
below the unmodulated carrier level, and emissions between 60 kHz and 75
kHz of the carrier frequency must be attenuated at least 65 dB below the
unmodulated carrier level. Emissions removed by more than 75 kHz must be
attenuated at least 43 + 10 Log (Power in watts) or 80 dB below the
unmodulated carrier level, whichever is the lesser attenuation, except
for transmitters having power less than 158 watts, where the attenuation
must be at least 65 dB below carrier level.
(c) Should harmful interference be caused to the reception of other
broadcast or non-broadcast stations by out of band emissions, the
licensee may be directed to achieve a greater degree of attentuation
than specified in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section.
(d) Measurements to determine compliance with this section for
transmitter type acceptance are to be made using signals sampled at the
output terminals of the transmitter when operating into an artificial
antenna of substantially zero reactance. Measurements made of the
emissions of an operating station are to be made at ground level
approximately 1 kilometer from the center of the antenna system. When a
directional antenna is used, the carrier frequency reference field
strength to be used in order of preference shall be:
(1) The measure non-directional field strength.
(2) The RMS field strength determined from the measured directional
radiation pattern.
(3) The calculated expected field strength that would be radiated by
a non-directional antenna at the station authorized power.
(e) Licensees of stations complying with the ANSI/EIA-549-1988,
NRSC-1 AM Preemphasis/Deemphasis and Broadcast Transmission Bandwidth
Specifications (NRSC-1), prior to June 30, 1990 or from the original
commencement of operation will, until June 30, 1994, be considered to
comply with paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section, absent any reason
for the Commission to believe otherwise. Such stations are waived from
having to make the periodic measurements required in
[[Page 20]]
Sec. 73.1590(a)(6) until June 30, 1994. However, licensees must make
measurements to determine compliance with paragraphs (a) and (b) of this
section upon receipt of an Official Notice of Violation or a Notice of
Apparent Liability alleging noncompliance with those provisions, or upon
specific request by the Commission.
[47 FR 8588, Mar. 1, 1982, as amended at 49 FR 3999, Feb. 1, 1984]
Sec. 73.45 AM antenna systems.
(a) All applicants for new, additional, or different AM station
facilities and all licensees requesting authority to change the
transmitting system site of an existing station must specify an antenna
system, the efficiency of which complies with the requirements for the
class and power of station. (See Sec. Sec. 73.186 and 73.189.)
(1) An application for authority to install an AM broadcast antenna
must specify a definite site and include full details of the antenna
system design and expected performance.
(2) All data necessary to show compliance with the terms and
conditions of the construction permit must be filed with the application
for the station license to cover the construction. If the station has
constructed a directional antenna, a directional proof of performance
must be filed. See Sec. Sec. 73.150 through 73.157.
(b) The simultaneous use of a common antenna or antenna structure by
more than one AM station or by a station of any other type or service
may be authorized provided:
(1) Engineering data are submitted showing that satisfactory
operation of each station will be obtained without adversely affecting
the operation of the other station(s).
(2) The minimum field strength for each AM station complies with
Sec. 73.189(b).
(c) Should any changes be made or otherwise occur which would
possibly alter the resistance of the antenna system, the licensee must
commence the determination of the operating power by a method described
in Sec. 73.51(a)(1) or (d). (If the changes are due to the addition of
antennas to the AM tower, see Sec. 1.30003.) Upon completion of any
necessary repairs or adjustments, or upon completion of authorized
construction or modifications, the licensee must make a new
determination of the antenna resistance using the procedures described
in Sec. 73.54. Operating power should then be determined by a direct
method as described in Sec. 73.51. Notification of the value of
resistance of the antenna system must be filed with the FCC in
Washington, DC as follows:
(1) Whenever the measurements show that the antenna or common point
resistance differs from that shown on the station authorization by more
than 2%, FCC Form 302 must be filed with the information and measurement
data specified in Sec. 73.54(d).
(2) Whenever AM stations use direct reading power meters pursuant to
Sec. 73.51, a letter notification to the FCC in Washington, DC,
Attention: Audio Division, Media Bureau, must be filed in accordance
with Sec. 73.54(e).
[43 FR 53735, Nov. 17, 1978, as amended at 45 FR 28141, Apr. 28, 1980;
47 FR 8589, Mar. 1, 1982; 50 FR 32416, Aug. 12, 1985; 51 FR 2707; Jan.
21, 1986; 51 FR 26250, July 22, 1986; 63 FR 33875, June 22, 1998; 67 FR
13231, Mar. 21, 2002; 78 FR 66298, Nov. 5, 2013]
Sec. 73.49 AM transmission system fencing requirements.
Antenna towers having radio frequency potential at the base (series
fed, folded unipole, and insulated base antennas) must be enclosed
within effective locked fences or other enclosures. Ready access must be
provided to each antenna tower base for meter reading and maintenance
purposes at all times. However, individual tower fences need not be
installed if the towers are contained within a protective property
fence.
[51 FR 2707, Jan. 21, 1986]
Sec. 73.51 Determining operating power.
(a) Except in those circumstances described in paragraph (d) of this
section, the operating power shall be determined by the direct method.
The direct method consists of either:
(1) using a suitable instrument for determining the antenna's input
power directly from the RF voltage, RF current, and phase angle; or
(2) calculating the product of the licensed antenna or common point
resistance at the operating frequency
[[Page 21]]
(see Sec. 73.54), and the square of the indicated unmodulated antenna
current at that frequency, measured at the point where the resistance
has been determined.
(b) The authorized antenna input power for each station shall be
equal to the nominal power for such station, with the following
exceptions:
(1) For stations with nominal powers of 5 kW, or less, the
authorized antenna input power to directional antennas shall exceed the
nominal power by 8 percent.
(2) For stations with nominal powers in excess of 5 kW, the
authorized antenna input power to directional antennas shall exceed the
nominal power by 5.3 percent.
(3) In specific cases, it may be necessary to limit the radiated
field to a level below that which would result if normal power were
delivered to the antenna. In such cases, excess power may be dissipated
in the antenna feed circuit, the transmitter may be operated with power
output at a level which is less than the rated carrier power, or a
combination of the two methods may be used, subject to the conditions
given in paragraph (c) of this section.
(i) Where a dissipative network is employed, the authorized antenna
current and resistance, and the authorized antenna input power shall be
determined at the input terminals of the dissipative network.
(ii) Where the authorized antenna input power is less than the
nominal power, subject to the conditions set forth in paragraph (c) of
this section, the transmitter may be operated at the reduced power level
necessary to supply the authorized antenna input power.
(c) Applications for authority to operate with antenna input power
which is less than nominal power and/or to employ a dissipative network
in the antenna system shall be made on FCC Form 302. The technical
information supplied on section II-A of this form shall be that applying
to the proposed conditions of operation. In addition, the following
information shall be furnished, as pertinent:
(1) Full details of any network employed for the purpose of
dissipating radio frequency energy otherwise delivered to the antenna
(see Sec. 73.54).
(2) A showing that the transmitter has been type accepted or
notified for operation at the proposed power output level, or, in lieu
thereof:
(i) A full description of the means by which transmitter output
power will be reduced.
(ii) Where the proposed transmitter power output level(s) is less
than 90% of the rated power of the transmitter, equipment performance
measurements must be made to confirm that the station transmissions
conform to the emission limitation specified in Sec. 73.44, under all
conditions of program operation.
(iii) A showing that, at the proposed power output level, means are
provided for varying the transmitter output within a tolerance of 10 percent, to compensate for variations in line voltage
or other factors which may affect the power output level.
(d) When it is not possible or appropriate to use the direct method
of power determination due to technical reasons, the indirect method of
determining operating power (see paragraphs (e) and (f) of this section)
may be used on a temporary basis. A notation must be made in the station
log indicating the dates of commencement and termination of measurement
using the indirect method of power determination.
(e) The antenna input power is determined indirectly by applying an
appropriate factor to the input power to the last radio-frequency power
amplifier stage of the transmitter, using the following formula:
Where:
Antenna input power = Ep x Ip x F
Ep = DC input voltage of final radio stage.
Ip = Total DC input current of final radio stage.
F= Efficiency factor.
(1) If the above formula is not appropriate for the design of the
transmitter final amplifier, use a formula specified by the transmitter
manufacturer with other appropriate operating parameters.
(2) The value of F applicable to each mode of operation must be
determined
[[Page 22]]
and a record kept thereof with a notation as to its derivation. This
factor is to be established by one of the methods described in paragraph
(f) of this section and retained in the station records.
(f) The value of F is to be determined by one of the following
procedures listed in order of preference:
(1) If the station had previously been authorized and operating by
determining the antenna input power by the direct method, the factor F
is the ratio of the antenna input power (determined by the direct
method) to the corresponding final radio frequency power amplifier input
power.
(2) If a station has not been previously in regular operation with
the power authorized for the period of indirect power determination, if
a new transmitter has been installed, or if, for any other reason, the
determination of the factor F by the method described in paragraph
(f)(1) of this section is impracticable:
(i) The factor F as shown in the transmitter manufacturer's test
report, if such a test report specifies a unique value of F for the
power level and frequently used; or
(ii) The value determined by reference to the following table:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Method of Maximum rated carrier Class of
Factor(F) modulation power amplifier
------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.70 Plate.............. 1 kW or less.......... ................
.80 Plate.............. 2.5 kW and over....... ................
.35 Low level.......... 0.25 kW and over...... B
.65 Low level.......... 0.25 kW and over...... BC\1\
.35 Grid............... 0.25 kW and over...... ................
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ All linear amplifier operation where efficiency approaches that of
class C operation.
[37 FR 7516, Apr. 15, 1972, as amended at 42 FR 36827, July 18, 1977; 42
FR 61863, Dec. 7, 1977; 44 FR 36036, June 20, 1979; 47 FR 28387, June
30, 1982; 48 FR 38477, Aug. 24, 1983; 48 FR 44805, Sept. 30, 1983; 49 FR
3999, Feb. 1, 1984; 49 FR 4210, Feb. 3, 1984; 49 FR 49850, Dec. 24,
1984; 50 FR 24521, June 11, 1985; 52 FR 10570, Apr. 2, 1987; 83 FR
48963, Sept. 28, 2018]
Sec. 73.53 Requirements for authorization of antenna monitors.
(a) Antenna monitors shall be approved with Supplier's Declaration
of Conformity that demonstrates compliance with the technical
requirements in this section. The procedure for Supplier's Declaration
of Conformity is specified in subpart J of part 2 of this chapter.
Note 1 to paragraph (a): The verification procedure has been
replaced by Supplier's Declaration of Conformity. Antenna monitors
previously authorized under subpart J of part 2 of this chapter may
remain in use. See Sec. 2.950 of this chapter.
(b) An antenna monitor shall meet the following specifications:
(1) The monitor shall be designed to operate in the 535-1705 kHz
band.
(2) The monitor shall be capable of indicating any phase difference
between two RF voltages of the same frequency over a range of from 0 to
360[deg].
(3) The monitor shall be capable of indicating the relative
amplitude of two RF voltages.
(4) The device used to indicate phase differences shall indicate in
degrees, and shall be graduated in increments of 2[deg], or less. If a
digital indicator is provided, the smallest increment shall be 0.5[deg],
or less.
(5) The device used to indicate relative amplitudes shall be
graduated in increments which are 1 percent, or less, of the full scale
value. If a digital indicator is provided, the smallest increment shall
be 0.1 percent, or less, of the full scale value.
(6) The monitor shall be equipped with means, if necessary, to
resolve ambiguities in indication.
(7) If the monitor is provided with more than one RF input terminal
in addition to a reference input terminal, appropriate switching shall
be provided in the monitor so that the signal at each of these RF inputs
may be selected separately for comparison with the reference input
signal.
(8) Each RF input of the monitor shall provide a termination of such
characteristics that, when connected to a sampling line of an impedance
specified by the manufacturer the voltage reflection coefficient shall
be 3 percent or less.
(9) The monitor, if intended for use by stations operating
directional antenna systems by remote control, shall be designed so that
the switching functions required by paragraph (b)(7) of this section may
be performed from a point external to the monitor, and phase and
amplitude indications be provided by external meters. The indications of
external meters furnished by
[[Page 23]]
the manufacturer shall meet the specifications for accuracy and
repeatability of the monitor itself, and the connection of these meters
to the monitor, or of other indicating instruments with electrical
characteristics meeting the specifications of the monitor manufacturer
shall not affect adversely the performance of the monitor in any
respect.
(10) Complete and correct schematic diagrams and operating
instructions shall be retained by the party responsible for Supplier's
Declaration of Conformity of the equipment and submitted to the FCC upon
request. For the purpose of equipment authorization, these diagrams and
instructions shall be considered as part of the monitor.
(11) When an RF signal of an amplitude within a range specified by
the manufacturer is applied to the reference RF input terminal of the
monitor, and another RF signal of the same frequency and of equal or
lower amplitude is applied to any other selected RF input terminal,
indications shall be provided meeting the following specifications.
(i) The accuracy with which any difference in the phases of the
applied signals is indicated shall be 1[deg], or
better, for signal amplitude ratios of from 2:1 to 1:1, and 2[deg], or better, for signal amplitude ratios in excess
of 2:1 and up to 5:1.
(ii) The repeatability of indication of any difference in the phases
of the applied signals shall be 1[deg], or better.
(iii) The accuracy with which the relative amplitudes of the applied
signals is indicated, over a range in which the ratio of these
amplitudes is between 2:1 and 1:1, shall be 2
percent of the amplitude ratio, or better, and for amplitude ratios in
excess of 2:1 and up to 5:1, 5 percent of the
ratio, or better.
(iv) The repeatability of indication of the relative amplitudes of
the applied signals, over a range where the ratio of these amplitudes is
between 5:1 and 1:1, shall be 2 percent of the
amplitude ratio, or better.
(v) The modulation of the RF signals by a sinusoidal wave of any
frequency between 100 and 10,000 Hz, at any amplitude up to 90 percent
shall cause no deviation in an indicated phase difference from its
value, as determined without modulation, greater than 0.5[deg].
(12) The performance specifications set forth in paragraph (b)(11)
of this section, shall be met when the monitor is operated and tested
under the following conditions.
(i) After continuous operation for 1 hour, the monitor shall be
calibrated and adjusted in accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
(ii) The monitor shall be subjected to variations in ambient
temperature between the limits of 10 and 40 [deg]C; external meters
furnished by the manufacturer will be subjected to variations between 15
and 30 [deg]C.
(iii) Powerline supply voltage shall be varied over a range of from
10 percent below to 10 percent above the rated supply voltage.
(iv) The amplitude of the reference signal shall be varied over the
operating range specified by the manufacturer, and in any case over a
range of maximum to minimum values of 3 to 1.
(v) The amplitude of the comparison signal shall be varied from a
value which is 0.2 of the amplitude of the reference signal to a value
which is equal in amplitude to the reference signal.
(vi) Accuracy shall be determined for the most adverse combination
of conditions set forth above.
(vii) Repeatability shall be determined as that which may be
achieved under the specified test conditions over a period of 7 days,
during which no calibration or adjustment of the instrument, subsequent
to the initial calibration, shall be made.
(viii) The effects of modulation of the RF signal shall be
separately determined, and shall not be included in establishing values
for accuracy and repeatability.
Note 1 to paragraph (b): In paragraph (b)(1) of this section, the
requirement that monitors be capable of operation in the 535-1705 kHz
band shall apply only to equipment manufactured after July 1, 1992. Use
of a monitor in the 1605-1705 kHz band which is not approved for such
operation will be permitted pending the general availability of 535-1705
kHz band monitors if a manufacturer can demonstrate, in the interim,
that its monitor performs in accordance with the
[[Page 24]]
standards in this section on these 10 channels.
(Secs. 4, 5, 303, 48 Stat., as amended, 1066, 1068, 1082 (47 U.S.C. 154,
155, 303))
[38 FR 1917, Jan. 19, 1973, as amended at 49 FR 3999, Feb. 1, 1984; 49
FR 29069, July 18, 1984; 50 FR 32416, Aug. 12, 1985; 50 FR 47054, Nov.
14, 1985; 51 FR 2707, Jan. 21, 1986; 56 FR 64859, Dec. 12, 1991; 57 FR
43290, Sept. 18, 1992; 60 FR 55480, Nov. 1, 1995; 63 FR 36604, July 7,
1998; 66 FR 20755, Apr. 25, 2001; 82 FR 50835, Nov. 2, 2017]
Sec. 73.54 Antenna resistance and reactance measurements.
(a) The resistance of an omnidirectional series fed antenna is
measured at either the base of the antenna without intervening coupling
or tuning networks, or at the point the transmission line connects to
the output terminals of the transmitter. The resistance of a shunt
excited antenna may be measured at the point the radio frequency energy
is transferred to the feed wire circuit or at the output terminals of
the transmitter.
(b) The resistance and reactance of a directional antenna shall be
measured at the point of common radiofrequency input to the directional
antenna system after the antenna has been finally adjusted for the
required radiation pattern.
(c) A letter of notification must be filed with the FCC in
Washington, DC, Attention: Audio Division, Media Bureau, when
determining power by the direct method pursuant to Sec. 73.51. The
letter must specify the antenna or common point resistance at the
operating frequency. The following information must also be kept on file
at the station:
(1) A full description of the method used to make measurements.
(2) A schematic diagram showing clearly all components of coupling
circuits, the point of resistance measurement, the location of the
antenna ammeter, connections to and characteristics of all tower
lighting isolation circuits, static drains, and any other fixtures
connected to and supported by the antenna, including other antennas and
associated networks. Any network or circuit component used to dissipate
radio frequency power shall be specifically identified, and the
impedances of all components which control the level of power
dissipation, and the effective input resistance of the network must be
indicated.
(d) AM stations using direct reading power meters in accordance with
Sec. 73.51, can either submit the information required by paragraph (c)
of this section or submit a statement indicating that such a meter is
being used. Subsequent station licenses will indicate the use of a
direct reading power meter in lieu of the antenna resistance value in
such a situation.
[66 FR 20755, Apr. 25, 2001,as amended at 67 FR 13231, Mar. 21, 2002]
Sec. 73.57 Remote reading antenna and common point ammeters.
Remote reading antenna and common point ammeters may be used without
further authority according to the following conditions:
(a) Remote reading antenna or common point ammeters may be provided
by:
(1) Inserting second radio frequency current sensing device directly
in the antenna circuit with remote leads to the indicating instruments.
(2) Inductive coupling to radio frequency current sensing device for
providing direct current to indicating instrument.
(3) Capacity coupling to radio frequency current sensing device for
providing direct current to indicating instrument.
(4) Current transformer connected to radio frequency current sensing
device for providing direct current to indicating instrument.
(5) Using transmission line current meter at transmitter as remote
reading ammeter. See paragraph (c) of this section.
(6) Using the indications of the antenna (phase) monitor, provided
that when the monitor is used to obtain remote reading indication of
non-directional antenna base current, the monitor calibration can be
independently made and maintained for each mode of operation.
(b) Devices used for obtaining remote reading antenna or common
point current indications, except antenna monitor coupling elements,
shall be located
[[Page 25]]
at the same point as, but below (transmitter side) the associated main
ammeter.
(c) In the case of shunt-excited antennas, the transmission line
current meter at the transmitter may be considered as the remote antenna
ammeter provided the transmission line is terminated directly into the
excitation circuit feed line, which shall employ series tuning only (no
shunt circuits of any type shall be employed) and insofar as
practicable, the type and scale of the transmission line meter should be
the same as those of the excitation circuit feed line meter (meter in
slant wire feed line or equivalent).
(d) Each remote reading ammeter shall be accurate to within 2
percent of the value read on its corresponding regular ammeter.
(e) All remote reading ammeters shall conform with the
specifications for regular antenna ammeters.
(f) Meters with arbitrary scale divisions may be used provided that
calibration charts or curves are provided at the transmitter control
point showing the relationship between the arbitrary scales and the
reading of the main meters.
(g) If a malfunction affects the remote reading indicators of the
antenna or common point ammeter, the operating power may be determined
by a method using alternative procedures as described in Sec. 73.51.
[41 FR 36817, Sept. 1, 1976, as amended at 48 FR 38477, Aug. 24, 1983;
49 FR 49850, Dec. 24, 1984; 50 FR 32416, Aug. 12, 1985; 60 FR 55480,
Nov. 1, 1995]
Sec. 73.58 Indicating instruments.
(a) Each AM broadcast station must be equipped with indicating
instruments which conform with the specifications described in Sec.
73.1215 for determining power by the direct and indirect methods, and
with such other instruments as are necessary for the proper adjustment,
operation, and maintenance of the transmitting system. However,
auxiliary transmitters with a nominal power rating of 100 watts or less
are not required to be equipped with instruments to determine power by
the indirect method provided that the licensee can determine the antenna
input power at all times.
(b) Since it is usually impractical to measure the actual antenna
current of a shunt excited antenna system, the current measured at the
input of the excitation circuit feed line is accepted as the antenna
current.
(c) The function of each instrument shall be clearly and permanently
shown on the instrument itself or on the panel immediately adjacent
thereto.
(d) In the event that any one of these indicating instruments
becomes defective when no substitute which conforms with the required
specifications is available, the station may be operated without the
defective instrument pending its repair or replacement for a period not
in excess of 60 days without further authority of the Commission. If the
defective instrument is the antenna current meter of a nondirectional
station which does not employ a remote antenna ammeter, or if the
defective instrument is the common point meter of a station which
employs a directional antenna and does not employ a remote common point
meter, the operating power shall be determined by a method described in
Sec. 73.51(a)(1) or Sec. 73.51(d) during the entire time the station
is operated without the antenna current meter or common point meter.
However, if a remote meter is employed and the antenna current ammeter
or common point meter becomes defective, the remote meter can be used to
determine operating power pending the return to service of the regular
meter.
(e) If conditions beyond the control of the licensee prevent the
restoration of the meter to service within the above allowed period,
information requested in accordance with Sec. 73.3549 may be filed by
letter with the FCC in Washington, DC, Attention: Audio Division, Media
Bureau, to request additional time as may be required to complete
repairs of the defective instrument.
[41 FR 36817, Sept. 1, 1976, as amended at 48 FR 38477, Aug. 24, 1983;
49 FR 49850, Dec. 24, 1984; 50 FR 32416, Aug. 12, 1985; 51 FR 2707, Jan.
21, 1986; 53 FR 2498, Jan. 28, 1988; 63 FR 33876, June 22, 1998; 66 FR
20755, Apr. 25, 2001; 67 FR 13231, Mar. 21, 2002]
[[Page 26]]
Sec. 73.61 AM directional antenna field strength measurements.
(a) Each AM station using a directional antenna with monitoring
point locations specified in the instrument of authorization must make
field strength measurements as often as necessary to ensure that the
field at each of those points does not exceed the value specified in the
station authorization. Additionally, stations not having an approved
sampling system must make the measurements once each calendar quarter at
intervals not exceeding 120 days. The provision of this paragraph
supersedes any schedule specified on a station license issued prior to
January 1, 1986. The results of the measurements are to be entered into
the station log pursuant to the provisions of Sec. 73.1820.
(b) If the AM license was granted on the basis of field strength
measurements performed pursuant to Sec. 73.151(a), partial proof of
performance measurements using the procedures described in Sec. 73.154
must be made whenever the licensee has reason to believe that the
radiated field may be exceeding the limits for which the station was
most recently authorized to operate.
(c) A station may be directed to make a partial proof of performance
by the FCC whenever there is an indication that the antenna is not
operating as authorized.
[50 FR 47054, Nov. 14, 1985, as amended at 73 FR 64560, Oct. 30, 2008]
Sec. 73.62 Directional antenna system operation and tolerances.
(a) Each AM station operating a directional antenna must maintain
the relative amplitudes of the antenna currents, as indicated by the
antenna monitor, within 5% of the values specified on the instrument of
authorization. Directional antenna relative phases must be maintained
within 3 degrees of the values specified on the instrument of
authorization.
(b) In the event of a failure of system components, improper pattern
switching or any other event that results in operation substantially at
variance from the radiation pattern specified in the instrument of
authorization for the pertinent time of day, operation must be
terminated within three minutes unless power can be reduced sufficiently
to eliminate any excessive radiation. See Sec. 73.1350(e).
(1) Any variation of operating parameters by more than 15 percent sample current ratio or 10 degrees in phase, any monitor point that exceeds 125
percent of the licensed limit, or any operation at variance that results
in complaints of interference shall be considered operation
substantially at variance from the license and will require immediate
corrective action.
(2) [Reserved]
(c) In the event of minor variations of directional antenna
operating parameters from the tolerances specified in paragraph (a) of
this section, the following procedures will apply:
(1) The licensee shall measure and log every monitoring point at
least once for each mode of directional operation. Subsequent variations
in operating parameters will require the remeasuring and logging of
every monitoring point to assure that the authorized monitoring point
limits are not being exceeded. The licensee will be permitted 24 hours
to accomplish these actions; provided that, the date and time of the
failure to maintain proper operating parameters have been recorded in
the station log.
(2) Provided each monitoring point is within its specified limit,
operation may continue for a period up to 30 days before a request for
Special Temporary Authority (STA) must be filed, pursuant to paragraph
(c)(4) of this section, to operate with parameters at variance from the
provisions of paragraph (a) of this section.
(3) If any monitoring point exceeds its specified limit, the
licensee must either terminate operation within three hours or reduce
power in accordance with the applicable provisions of Sec. 73.1350(d),
in order to eliminate any possibility of interference or excessive
radiation in any direction.
(4) If operation pursuant to paragraph (c)(3) of this section is
necessary, or before the 30-day period specified in paragraph (c)(2) of
this Sec. expires, the licensee must request a Special Temporary
Authority (STA) in accordance with section 73.1635 to continue operation
with parameters at variance and/or with reduced power along with a
[[Page 27]]
statement certifying that all monitoring points will be continuously
maintained within their specified limits.
(d) In any other situation in which it might reasonably be
anticipated that the operating parameters might vary out of tolerance
(such as planned array repairs or adjustment and proofing procedures),
the licensee shall, before such activity is undertaken, obtain a Special
Temporary Authority (STA) in accordance with Sec. 73.1635 in order to
operate with parameters at variance and/or with reduced power as
required to maintain all monitoring points within their specified
limits.
[72 FR 44422, Aug. 8, 2007]
Sec. 73.68 Sampling systems for antenna monitors.
(a) Each AM station permittee authorized to construct a new
directional antenna system which will be subject to a proof of
performance based on field strength measurements, as described in Sec.
73.151(a) or (b), must install the sampling system in accordance with
the following specifications:
(1) Devices used to extract or sample the current and the
transmission line connecting the sampling elements to the antenna
monitor must provide accurate and stable signals to the monitor (e.g.,
rigidly mounted and non-rotatable loops and all system components
protected from physical and environmental disturbances).
(2) Sampling lines for directional antennas may be of different
lengths provided the phase difference of signals at the monitor are less
than 0.5 degrees between the shortest and longest cable lengths due to
temperature variations to which the system is exposed.
(3) Other configurations of sampling systems may be used upon
demonstration of stable operation to the FCC.
(b) An AM station permittee authorized to construct a directional
antenna system which will be subject to a proof of performance based on
moment method modeling, as described in Sec. 73.151(c), shall install a
sampling system conforming to the requirements set forth in that
section.
(c) A station having an antenna sampling system constructed
according to the specifications given in paragraph (a) of this section
may obtain approval of that system by submitting an informal letter
request to the FCC in Washington, DC, Attention: Audio Division, Media
Bureau. The request for approval, signed by the licensee or authorized
representative, must contain sufficient information to show that the
sampling system is in compliance with all requirements of paragraph (a)
of this section.
Note to paragraph (c): A public notice dated December 9, 1985 giving
additional information on approval of antenna sampling systems is
available through the Internet at http://www.fcc.gov/mb/audio/decdoc/
letter/1985-12-09-sample.html.
(d) In the event that the antenna monitor sampling system is
temporarily out of service for repair or replacement, the station may be
operated, pending completion of repairs or replacement, for a period not
exceeding 120 days without further authority from the FCC if all other
operating parameters and the field monitoring point values are within
the limits specified on the station authorization.
(e) If the antenna sampling system is modified or components of the
sampling system are replaced, the following procedure shall be followed:
(1) Special Temporary Authority (see Sec. 73.1635) shall be
requested and obtained from the Commission's Audio Division, Media
Bureau in Washington to operate with parameters at variance with
licensed values pending issuance of a modified license specifying
parameters subsequent to modification or replacement of components.
(2) Immediately prior to modification or replacement of components
of the sampling system, and after a verification that all monitoring
point values and operating parameters are within the limits or
tolerances specified in the rules, the following indications must be
recorded for each radiation pattern: Final plate current and plate
voltage, common point current, antenna monitor phase and current
indications, and the field strength at each monitoring point. Subsequent
to these modifications or changes the procedure must be repeated.
(3) If monitoring point field strengths or antenna monitor
parameters exceed
[[Page 28]]
allowable limits following the replacement or modification of that
portion of the sampling system above the base of the towers, a partial
proof of performance shall be executed in accordance with Sec. 73.154 .
The partial proof of performance shall be accompanied by common point
impedance measurements made in accordance with Sec. 73.54.
(4) Request for modification of license shall be submitted to the
FCC in Washington, DC, within 30 days of the date of sampling system
modification or replacement. Such request shall specify the transmitter
plate voltage and plate current, common point current, base currents and
their ratios, antenna monitor phase and current indications, and all
other data obtained pursuant to this paragraph.
(f) If an existing sampling system is found to be patently of
marginal construction, or where the performance of a directional antenna
is found to be unsatisfactory, and this deficiency reasonably may be
attributed, in whole or in part, to inadequacies in the antenna
monitoring system, the FCC may require the reconstruction of the
sampling system in accordance with requirements specified above.
[41 FR 7405, Feb. 18, 1976]
Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting Sec.
73.68, see the List of CFR Sections Affected, which appears in the
Finding Aids section of the printed volume and at www.govinfo.gov.
Sec. 73.69 Antenna monitors.
(a) Each station using a directional antenna must have in operation
at the transmitter site an FCC authorized antenna monitor.
(b) In the event that the antenna monitor sampling system is
temporarily out of service for repair or replacement, the station may be
operated, pending completion of repairs or replacement, for a period not
exceeding 120 days without further authority from the FCC if all other
operating parameters, and the field monitoring point values are within
the limits specified on the station authorization.
(c) If conditions beyond the control of the licensee prevent the
restoration of the monitor to service within the allowed period, an
informal letter request in accordance with Sec. 73.3549 of the
Commission's rules must be filed with the FCC, Attention: Audio
Division, Media Bureau in Washington, DC for such additional time as may
be required to complete repairs of the defective instrument.
(d) If an authorized antenna monitor is replaced by another antenna
monitor, the following procedure shall be followed:
(1) Temporary authority shall be requested and obtained from the
Commission in Washington to operate with parameters at variance with
licensed values, pending issuance of a modified license specifying new
parameters.
(2) Immediately before the replacement of the antenna monitor, after
a verification that all monitoring point values and the common point
current reading are within the limits or tolerances specified in the
rules, the following indications must be recorded for each radiation
pattern: Final plate current and plate voltage, common point current,
antenna monitor phase and current indications, and the field strength at
each monitoring point.
(3) With the new monitor substituted for the old, all indications
specified in paragraph (d)(2) of this section, again must be read. If no
change has occurred in the indication for any parameter other than the
indications of the antenna monitor, the new antenna monitor indications
must be deemed to be those reflecting correct array adjustments.
(4) If it cannot be established by the observations required in
paragraph (d)(2) of this section that the common point current reading
and the monitoring point values are within the tolerances or limits
prescribed by the rules and the instrument of authorization, or if the
substitution of the new antenna monitor for the old results in changes
in these parameters, a partial proof of performance shall be executed
and analyzed in accordance with Sec. 73.154.
(5) An informal letter request for modification of license shall be
submitted to the FCC, Attention: Audio Division, Media Bureau in
Washington, DC within 30 days of the date of monitor replacement. Such
request shall specify the make, type, and serial number of the
replacement monitor, phase
[[Page 29]]
and sample current indications, and other data obtained pursuant to this
paragraph (d).
(e) The antenna monitor must be calibrated according to the
manufacturer's instructions as often as necessary to ensure its proper
operation.
[38 FR 1918, Jan. 19, 1973]
Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting Sec.
73.69, see the List of CFR Sections Affected, which appears in the
Finding Aids section of the printed volume and at www.govinfo.gov.
Sec. 73.72 Operating during the experimental period.
(a) An AM station may operate during the experimental period (the
time between midnight and sunrise, local time) on its assigned frequency
and with its authorized power for the routine testing and maintenance of
its transmitting system, and for conducting experimentation under an
experimental authorization, provided no interference is caused to other
stations maintaining a regular operating schedule within such period.
(b) No station licensed for ``daytime'' or ``specified hours'' of
operation may broadcast any regular or scheduled program during this
period.
(c) The licensee of an AM station shall operate or refrain from
operating its station during the experimental period as directed by the
FCC to facilitate frequency measurements or for the determination of
interference.
[43 FR 32780, July 28, 1978, as amended at 56 FR 64859, Dec. 12, 1991]
Sec. 73.88 Blanketing interference.
The licensee of each broadcast station is required to satisfy all
reasonable complaints of blanketing interference within the 1 V/m
contour.
Note: For more detailed instructions concerning operational
responsibilities of licensees and permittees under this section, see
Sec. 73.318 (b), (c) and (d).
[28 FR 13574, Dec. 14, 1963, as amended at 56 FR 64859, Dec. 12, 1991]
Sec. 73.99 Presunrise service authorization (PSRA) and postsunset
service authorization (PSSA).
(a) To provide maximum uniformity in early morning operation
compatible with interference considerations, and to provide for
additional service during early evening hours for Class D stations,
provisions are made for presunrise service and postsunset service. The
permissible power for presunrise or postsunset service authorizations
shall not exceed 500 watts, or the authorized daytime or critical hours
power (whichever is less). Calculation of the permissible power shall
consider only co-channel stations for interference protection purposes.
(b) Presunrise service authorizations (PSRA) permit:
(1) Class D stations operating on Mexican, Bahamian, and Canadian
priority Class A clear channels to commence PSRA operation at 6 a.m.
local time and to continue such operation until the sunrise times
specified in their basic instruments of authorization.
(2) Class D stations situated outside 0.5 mV/m-50% skywave contours
of co-channel U.S. Class A stations to commence PSRA operation at 6 a.m.
local time and to continue such operation until sunrise times specified
in their basic instruments of authorization.
(3) Class D stations located within co-channel 0.5 mV/m-50% skywave
contours of U.S. Class A stations, to commence PSRA operation either at
6 a.m. local time, or at sunrise at the nearest Class A station located
east of the Class D station (whichever is later), and to continue such
operation until the sunrise times specified in their basic instruments
of authorization.
(4) Class B and Class D stations on regional channels to commence
PSRA operation at 6 a.m. local time and to continue such operation until
local sunrise times specified in their basic instruments of
authorization.
(c) Extended Daylight Saving Time Pre-Sunrise Authorizations:
(1) Between the first Sunday in April and the end of the month of
April, Class D stations will be permitted to conduct pre-sunrise
operation beginning at 6 a.m. local time with a maximum power of 500
watts (not to exceed the station's regular daytime or critical hours
power), reduced as necessary to comply with the following requirements:
[[Page 30]]
(i) Full protection is to be provided as specified in applicable
international agreements.
(ii) Protection is to be provided to the 0.5 mV/m groundwave signals
of co-channel U.S. Class A stations; protection to the 0.5 mV/m-50%
skywave contours of these stations is not required.
(iii) In determining the protection to be provided, the effect of
each interfering signal will be evaluated separately. The presence of
interference from other stations will not reduce or eliminate the
required protection.
(iv) Notwithstanding the requirements of paragraph (c)(1) (ii) and
(iii) of this section, the stations will be permitted to operate with a
minimum power of 10 watts unless a lower power is required by
international agreement.
(2) The Commission will issue appropriate authorizations to Class D
stations not previously eligible to operate during this period. Class D
stations authorized to operate during this presunrise period may
continue to operate under their current authorization.
(d) Postsunset service authorizations (PSSA) permit:
(1) Class D stations located on Mexican, Bahamian, and Canadian
priority Class A clear channels to commence PSSA operation at sunset
times specified in their basic instruments of authorization and to
continue for two hours after such specified times.
(2) Class D stations situated outside 0.5 mV/m-50% skywave contours
of co-channel U.S. Class A stations to commence PSSA operations at
sunset times specified in their basic instruments of authorization and
to continue for two hours after such specified times.
(3) Class D stations located within co-channel 0.5 mV/m-50% skywave
contours of U.S. Class A stations to commence PSSA operation at sunset
times specified in their basic instruments of authorization and to
continue such operation until two hours past such specified times, or
until sunset at the nearest Class A station located west of the Class D
station, whichever is earlier. Class D stations located west of the
Class A station do not qualify for PSSA operation.
(4) Class D stations on regional channels to commence PSSA operation
at sunset times specified on their basic instruments of authorization
and to continue such operation until two hours past such specified
times.
(e) Procedural Matters. (1) Applications for PSRA and PSSA operation
are not required. Instead, the FCC will calculate the periods of such
operation and the power to be used pursuant to the provisions of this
section and the protection requirements contained in applicable
international agreements. Licensees will be notified of permissible
power and times of operation. Presunrise and Postsunset service
authority permits operation on a secondary basis and does not confer
license rights. No request for such authority need be filed. However,
stations intending to operate PSRA or PSSA shall submit by letter,
signed as specified in Sec. 73.3513, the following information:
(i) Licensee name, station call letters and station location,
(ii) Indication as to whether PSRA operation, PSSA operation, or
both, is intended by the station,
(iii) A description of the method whereby any necessary power
reduction will be achieved.
(2) Upon submission of the required information, such operation may
begin without further authority.
(f) Technical criteria. Calculations to determine whether there is
objectionable interference will be determined in accordance with the AM
Broadcast Technical Standards, Sec. Sec. 73.182 through 73.190, and
applicable international agreements. Calculations will be performed
using daytime antenna systems, or critical hours antenna systems when
specified on the license. In performing calculations to determine
assigned power and times for commencement of PSRA and PSSA operation,
the following standards and criteria will be used:
(1) Class D stations operating in accordance with paragraphs (b)(1),
(b)(2), (d)(1), and (d)(2) of this section are required to protect the
nighttime 0.5 mV/m-50% skywave contours of co-channel Class A stations.
Where a 0.5 mV/m-50%
[[Page 31]]
skywave signal from the Class A station is not produced, the 0.5 mV/m
groundwave contour shall be protected.
(2) Class D stations are required to fully protect foreign Class B
and Class C stations when operating PSRA and PSSA; Class D stations
operating PSSA are required to fully protect U.S. Class B stations. For
purposes of determining protection, the nighttime RSS limit will be used
in the determination of maximum permissible power.
(3) Class D stations operating in accordance with paragraphs (d)(2)
and (d)(3) of this section are required to restrict maximum 10% skywave
radiation at any point on the daytime 0.1 mV/m groundwave contour of a
co-channel Class A station to 25 [micro]V/m. The location of the 0.1 mV/
m contour of the Class A station will be determined by use of Figure M3,
Estimated Ground Conductivity in the United States. When the 0.1 mV/m
contour extends beyond the national boundary, the international boundary
shall be considered the 0.1 mV/m contour.
(4) Class B and Class D stations on regional channels operating PSRA
and PSSA (Class D only) are required to provide full protection to co-
channel foreign Class B and Class C stations.
(5) Class D stations on regional channels operating PSSA beyond 6
p.m. local time are required to fully protect U.S. Class B stations.
(6) The protection that Class D stations on regional channels are
required to provide when operating PSSA until 6 p.m. local time is as
follows.
(i) For the first half-hour of PSSA operation, protection will be
calculated at sunset plus 30 minutes at the site of the Class D station;
(ii) For the second half-hour of PSSA operation, protection will be
calculated at sunset plus one hour at the site of the Class D station;
(iii) For the second hour of PSSA operation, protection will be
calculated at sunset plus two hours at the site of the Class D station;
(iv) Minimum powers during the period until 6 p.m. local time shall
be permitted as follows:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Calculated power Adjusted minimum power
------------------------------------------------------------------------
From 1 to 45 watts.................... 50 watts.
Above 45 to 70 watts.................. 75 watts.
Above 70 to 100 watts................. 100 watts.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(7) For protection purposes, the nighttime 25% RSS limit will be
used in the determination of maximum permissible power.
(g) Calculations made under paragraph (d) of this section may not
take outstanding PSRA or PSSA operations into account, nor will the
grant of a PSRA or PSSA confer any degree of interference protection on
the holder thereof.
(h) Operation under a PSRA or PSSA is not mandatory, and will not be
included in determining compliance with the requirements of Sec.
73.1740. To the extent actually undertaken, however, presunrise
operation will be considered by the FCC in determining overall
compliance with past programming representations and station policy
concerning commercial matter.
(i) The PSRA or PSSA is secondary to the basic instrument of
authorization with which it is to be associated. The PSRA or PSSA may be
suspended, modified, or withdrawn by the FCC without prior notice or
right to hearing, if necessary to resolve interference conflicts, to
implement agreements with foreign governments, or in other circumstances
warranting such action. Moreover, the PSRA or PSSA does not extend
beyond the term of the basic authorization.
(j) The Commission will periodically recalculate maximum permissible
power and times for commencing PSRA and PSSA for each Class D station
operating in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section. The
Commission will calculate the maximum power at which each individual
station may conduct presunrise operations during extended daylight
saving time and shall issue conforming authorizations. These original
notifications and subsequent notifications should be associated with the
station's authorization. Upon notification of new power and time of
commencing operation, affected stations shall make necessary adjustments
within 30 days.
(k) A PSRA and PSSA does not require compliance with Sec. Sec.
73.45, 73.182 and 73.1560 where the operation might otherwise be
considered as technically
[[Page 32]]
substandard. Further, the requirements of paragraphs (a)(5), (b)(2),
(c)(2), and (d)(2) of Sec. 73.1215 concerning the scale ranges of
transmission system indicating instruments are waived for PSRA and PSSA
operation except for the radio frequency ammeters used in determining
antenna input power.
(1) A station having an antenna monitor incapable of functioning at
the authorized PSRA and PSSA power when using a directional antenna
shall take the monitor reading using an unmodulated carrier at the
authorized daytime power immediately prior to commencing PSRA or PSSA
operations. Special conditions as the FCC may deem appropriate may be
included for PSRA or PSSA to insure operation of the transmitter and
associated equipment in accordance with all phases of good engineering
practice.
[56 FR 64860, Dec. 12, 1991; 57 FR 43290, Sept. 18, 1992, as amended at
58 FR 27950, May 12, 1993]
Sec. 73.127 Use of multiplex transmission.
The licensee of an AM broadcast station may use its AM carrier to
transmit signals not audible on ordinary consumer receivers, for both
broadcast and non-broadcast purposes subject to the following
requirements:
(a) Such use does not disrupt or degrade the station's own programs
or the programs of other broadcast stations.
(b) AM carrier services that are common carrier in nature are
subject to common carrier regulation. Licensees operating such services
are required to apply to the FCC for the appropriate authorization and
to comply with all policies and rules applicable to the service.
Responsibility for making the initial determinations of whether a
particular activity is common carriage rests with the AM station
licensee. Initial determinations by licensees are subject to FCC
examination and may be reviewed at the FCC's discretion. AM carrier
services that are private carrier in nature must notify the Licensing
Division of the Private Radio Bureau at Gettysburg, Pennsylvania 17325,
by letter, prior to initiating service certifying compliance with 47 CFR
parts 90 and 94.
(c) AM carrier services are of a secondary nature under the
authority of the AM station authorization, and the authority to provide
such communications services may not be retained or transferred in any
manner separate from the station's authorization. The grant or renewal
of an AM station permit or license is not furthered or promoted by
proposed or past service. The permittee or licensee must establish that
the broadcast operation is in the public interest wholly apart from the
subsidiary communications services provided.
(d) The station identification, delayed recording, and sponsor
identification announcements required by Sec. Sec. 73.1201, 73.1208,
and 73.1212 are not applicable to leased communications services
transmitted via services that are not of a general broadcast program
nature.
(e) The licensee or permittee must retain control over all material
transmitted in a broadcast mode via the station's facilities, with the
right to reject any material that it deems inappropriate or undesirable.
(f) Installation of the multiplex transmitting equipment must
conform with the requirements of Sec. 73.1690(e).
[47 FR 25345, June 11, 1982, as amended at 49 FR 34015, Aug. 28, 1984;
51 FR 41629, Nov. 18, 1986; 51 FR 44478, Dec. 10, 1986]
Sec. 73.128 AM stereophonic broadcasting.
(a) An Am broadcast station may, without specific authority from the
FCC, transmit stereophonic programs upon installation of type accepted
stereophonic transmitting equipment and the necessary measuring
equipment to determine that the stereophonic transmissions conform to
the modulation characteristics specified in paragraphs (b) and (c) of
this section. Stations transmitting stereophonic programs prior to March
21, 1994 may continue to do so until March 21, 1995 as long as they
continue to comply with the rules in effect prior to March 21, 1994.
(b) The following limitations on the transmitted wave must be met to
insure compliance with the occupied bandwidth limitations, compatibility
[[Page 33]]
with AM receivers using envelope detectors, and any applicable
international agreements to which the FCC is a party:
(1) The transmitted wave must meet the occupied bandwidth
specifications of Sec. 73.44 under all possible conditions of program
modulation. Compliance with requirement shall be demonstrated either by
the following specific modulation tests or other documented test
procedures that are to be fully described in the application for type
acceptance and the transmitting equipment instruction manual. (See Sec.
2.983(d)(8) and (j)).
(i) Main channel (L + R) under all conditions of amplitude
modulations for the stereophonic system but not exceeding amplitude
modulation on negative peaks of 100%.
(ii) Stereophonic (L-R) modulated with audio tones of the same
amplitude at the transmitter input terminals as in paragraph (b)(i) of
this section but with the phase of either the L or R channel reversed.
(iii) Left and Right Channel only, under all conditions of
modulation for the stereophonic system in use but not exceeding
amplitude modulation on negative peaks of 100%.
(c) Effective on December 20, 1994, stereophonic transmissions shall
conform to the following additional modulation characteristics:
(1) The audio response of the main (L + R) channel shall conform to
the requirements of the ANSI/EIA-549-1988, NRSC-1 AM Preemphasis/
Deemphasis and Broadcast Transmission Bandwidth Specifications (NRSC-1).
(2) The left and right channel audio signals shall conform to
frequency response limitations dictated by ANSI/EIA-549-1988.
(3) The stereophonic difference (L-R) information shall be
transmitted by varying the phase of the carrier in accordance with the
following relationship:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR20DE93.000
where:
L(t) = audio signal left channel,
R(t) = audio signal right channel,
m = modulation factor, and
mpeak(L(t) + R(t)) = 1 for 100% amplitude modulation,
mpeak(L(t)-R(t)) = 1 for 100% phase modulation.
(4) The carrier phase shall advance in a positive direction when a
left channel signal causes the transmitter envelope to be modulated in a
positive direction. The carrier phase shall likewise retard (negative
phase change) when a right channel signal causes the transmitter
envelope to be modulated in a positive direction. The phase modulation
shall be symmetrical for the condition of difference (L-R) channel
information sent without the presence of envelope modulation.
(5) Maximum angular modulation, which occurs on negative peaks of
the left or right channel with no signal present on the opposite channel
(L(t)=-0.75, R(t) = 0, or R(t)=-0.75, L(t) = 0) shall not exceed 1.25
radians.
(6) A peak phase modulation of 0.785 radians
under the condition of difference (L-R) channel modulation and the
absence of envelope (L + R) modulation and pilot signal shall represent
100% modulation of the difference channel.
(7) The composite signal shall contain a pilot tone for indication
of the presence of stereophonic information. The pilot tone shall
consist of a 25 Hz tone, with 3% or less total harmonic distortion and a
frequency tolerance of 0.1 H2, which
modulates the carrier phase 0.05 radians peak,
corresponding to 5% L-R modulation when no other modulation is present.
The injection level shall be 5%, with a tolerance of + 1, -1%.
(8) The composite signal shall be described by the following
expression:
[[Page 34]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR20DE93.001
where:
A = the unmodulated carrier voltage
m = the modulation index
Csn = the magnitude of the nth term of the sum signal
Cdn = the magnitude of the nth term of the difference signal
[omega]sn = the nth order angular velocity of the sum signal
[omega]dn = the nth order angular velocity of the difference
signal
[omega]c = the angular velocity of the carrier
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR20DE93.002
Asn and Bsn are the n\th\ sine and cosine
coefficients of Csn
Adn and Bdn are the n\th\ sine and cosine
coefficients of Cdn
[58 FR 66301, Dec. 20, 1993]
Sec. 73.132 Territorial exclusivity.
No licensee of an AM broadcast station shall have any arrangement
with a network organization which prevents or hinders another station
serving substantially the same area from broadcasting the network's
programs not taken by the former station, or which prevents or hinders
another station serving a substantially different area from broadcasting
any program of the network organization: Provided, however, That this
section does not prohibit arrangements under which the station is
granted first call within its primary service area upon the network's
programs. The term ``network organization'' means any organization
originating program material, with or without commercial messages, and
furnishing the same to stations interconnected so as to permit
simultaneous broadcast by all or some of them. However, arrangements
involving only stations under common ownership, or only the rebroadcast
by one station or programming from another with no compensation other
than a lump-sum payment by the station rebroadcasting, are not
considered arrangements with
[[Page 35]]
a network organization. The term ``arrangement'' means any contract,
arrangement or understanding, expressed or implied.
[42 FR 16422, Mar. 28, 1977]
Sec. 73.150 Directional antenna systems.
(a) For each station employing a directional antenna, all
determinations of service provided and interference caused shall be
based on the inverse distance fields of the standard radiation pattern
for that station. (As applied to nighttime operation the term ``standard
radiation pattern'' shall include the radiation pattern in the
horizontal plane, and radiation patterns at angles above this plane.)
(1) Parties submitting directional antenna patterns pursuant to this
section and Sec. 73.152 (Modified standard pattern) must submit
patterns which are tabulated and plotted in units of millivolts per
meter at 1 kilometer.
Note: Applications for new stations and for changes (both minor and
major) in existing stations must use a standard pattern.
(b) The following data shall be submitted with an application for
authority to install a directional antenna:
(1) The standard radiation pattern for the proposed antenna in the
horizontal plane, and where pertinent, tabulated values for the
azimuthal radiation patterns for angles of elevation up to and including
60 degrees, with a separate section for each increment of 5 degrees.
(i) The standard radiation pattern shall be based on the theoretical
radiation pattern. The theoretical radiation pattern shall be calculated
in accordance with the following mathematical expression:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC13NO91.014
where:
E([phis],[thetas])th Represents the theoretical inverse
distance fields at one kilometer for the given azimuth and
elevation.
k Represents the multiplying constant which determines the basic pattern
size. It shall be chosen so that the effective field (RMS) of
the theoretical pattern in the horizontal plane shall be no
greater than the value computed on the assumption that nominal
station power (see Sec. 73.14) is delivered to the
directional array, and that a lumped loss resistance of one
ohm exists at the current loop of each element of the array,
or at the base of each element of electrical height lower than
0.25 wavelength, and no less than the value required by Sec.
73.189(b)(2) of this part for a station of the class and
nominal power for which the pattern is designed.
n Represents the number of elements (towers) in the directional array.
i Represents the i\th\ element in the array.
Fi Represents the field ratio of the i\th\ element in the
array.
[thetas] Represents the vertical elevation angle measured from the
horizontal plane.
fi ([thetas]) represents the vertical plane radiation characteristic of
the ith antenna. This value depends on the tower height, as
well as whether the tower is top-loaded or sectionalized. The
various formulas for computing fi ([thetas]) are given in
Sec. 73.160.
Si Represents the electrical spacing of the i\th\ tower from the
reference point.
[phis]i Represents the orientation (with respect to true
north) of the i\th\ tower.
[phis] Represents the azimuth (with respect to true north).
[psi]i Represents the electrical phase angle of the current in the i\th\
tower.
The standard radiation pattern shall be constructed in accordance
with the following mathematical expression:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MR91.063
where:
E([phis],[thetas])std represents the inverse distance fields
at one kilometer which are produced by the directional antenna
in the horizontal and vertical planes.
E([phis],[thetas])th represents the theoretical
inverse distance fields at one kilometer as computed in
accordance with Eq. 1, above.
Q is the greater of the following two quantities: 0.025g([thetas])
Erss or 10.0g([thetas]) [radic] PkW
where:
[[Page 36]]
g([thetas]) is the vertical plane distribution factor, f([thetas]),
for the shortest element in the array (see Eq. 2, above; also see Sec.
73.190, Figure 5). If the shortest element has an electrical height in
excess of 0.5 wavelength, g([thetas]) shall be computed as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MR91.064
Erss is the root sum square of the amplitudes of the inverse
fields of the elements of the array in the horizontal plane,
as used in the expression for E([phis],[thetas])th
(see Eq. 1, above), and is computed as follows:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MR91.065
PkW is the nominal station power expressed in kilowatts, see
Sec. 73.14. If the nominal power is less than one kilowatt,
PkW = 1.
(ii) Where the orthogonal addition of the factor Q to E([phis],
[thetas])th results in a standard pattern whose minimum
fields are lower than those found necessary or desirable, these fields
may be increased by appropriate adjustment of the parameters of
E([phis], [thetas])th.
(2) All patterns shall be computed for integral multiples of five
degrees, beginning with zero degrees representing true north, and, shall
be plotted to the largest scale possible on unglazed letter-size paper
(main engraving approximately 7[min] x 10[min]) using only scale
divisions and subdivisions of 1,2,2.5, or 5 times 10\nth\. The
horizontal plane pattern shall be plotted on polar coordinate paper,
with the zero degree point corresponding to true north. Patterns for
elevation angles above the horizontal plane may be plotted in polar or
rectangular coordinates, with the pattern for each angle of elevation on
a separate page. Rectangular plots shall begin and end at true north,
with all azimuths labelled in increments of not less than 20 degrees. If
a rectangular plot is used, the ordinate showing the scale for radiation
may be logarithmic. Such patterns for elevation angles above the
horizontal plane need be submitted only upon specific request by
Commission staff. Minor lobe and null detail occurring between
successive patterns for specific angles of elevation need not be
submitted. Values of field strength on any pattern less than ten percent
of the maximum field strength plotted on that pattern shall be shown on
an enlarged scale. Rectangular plots with a logarithmic ordinate need
not utilize an expanded scale unless necessary to show clearly the minor
lobe and null detail.
(3) The effective (RMS) field strength in the horizontal plane of
E([phis],[thetas])std, E([phis],[thetas])th and
the root-sum-square (RSS) value of the inverse distance fields of the
array elements at 1 kilometer, derived from the equation for
E([phis],[thetas])th. These values shall be tabulated on the
page on which the horizontal plane pattern is plotted, which shall be
specifically labelled as the Standard Horizontal Plane Pattern.
(4) Physical description of the array, showing:
(i) Number of elements.
(ii) Type of each element (i.e., guyed or self-supporting, uniform
cross section or tapered (specifying base dimensions), grounded or
insulated, etc.)
(iii) Details of top loading, or sectionalizing, if any.
(iv) Height of radiating portion of each element in feet (height
above base insulator, or base, if grounded).
(v) Overall height of each element above ground.
(vi) Sketch of antenna site, indicating its dimensions, the location
of the antenna elements, thereon, their spacing from each other, and
their orientation with respect to each other and to true north, the
number and length of the radials in the ground system about each
element, the dimensions of ground screens, if any, and bonding between
towers and between radial systems.
(5) Electrical description of the array, showing:
(i) Relative amplitudes of the fields of the array elements.
(ii) Relative time phasing of the fields of the array elements in
degrees leading [ + ] or lagging [-].
(iii) Space phasing between elements in degrees.
(iv) Where waiver of the content of this section is requested or
upon request of the Commission staff, all assumptions made and the basis
therefor, particularly with respect to the electrical height of the
elements, current distribution along elements, efficiency
[[Page 37]]
of each element, and ground conductivity.
(v) Where waiver of the content of this section is requested, or
upon request of the Commission staff, those formulas used for computing
E([phis],[thetas])th and E([phis],[thetas])std.
Complete tabulation of final computed data used in plotting patterns,
including data for the determination of the RMS value of the pattern,
and the RSS field of the array.
(6) The values used in specifying the parameters which describe the
array must be specified to no greater precision than can be achieved
with available monitoring equipment. Use of greater precision raises a
rebuttable presumption of instability of the array. Following are
acceptable values of precision; greater precision may be used only upon
showing that the monitoring equipment to be installed gives accurate
readings with the specified precision.
(i) Field Ratio: 3 significant figures.
(ii) Phasing: to the nearest 0.1 degree.
(iii) Orientation (with respect to a common point in the array, or
with respect to another tower): to the nearest 0.1 degree.
(iv) Spacing (with respect to a common point in the array, or with
respect to another tower): to the nearest 0.1 degree.
(v) Electrical Height (for all parameters listed in Section 73.160):
to the nearest 0.1 degree.
(vi) Theoretical RMS (to determine pattern size): 4 significant
figures.
(vii) Additional requirements relating to modified standard patterns
appear in Sec. 73.152(c)(3) and (c)(4).
(7) Any additional information required by the application form.
(c) Sample calculations for the theoretical and standard radiation
follow. Assume a five kilowatt (nominal power) station with a
theoretical RMS of 685 mV/m at one kilometer. Assume that it is an in-
line array consisting of three towers. Assume the following parameters
for the towers:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Field Relative Relative Relative
Tower ratio phasing spacing orientation
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1............................. 1.0 -128.5 0.0 0.0
2............................. 1.89 0.0 110.0 285.0
3............................. 1.0 128.5 220.0 285.0
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Assume that tower 1 is a typical tower with an electrical height of
120 degrees. Assume that tower 2 is top-loaded in accordance with the
method described in Sec. 73.160(b)(2) where A is 120 electrical degrees
and B is 20 electrical degrees. Assume that tower 3 is sectionalized in
accordance with the method described in Sec. 73.160(b)(3) where A is
120 electrical degrees, B is 20 electrical degrees, C is 220 electrical
degrees, and D is 15 electrical degrees.
The multiplying constant will be 323.6.
Following is a tabulation of part of the theoretical pattern:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Vertical
Azimuth 0 30 60 angle
------------------------------------------------------------------------
0........................... 15.98 62.49 68.20
105......................... 1225.30 819.79 234.54
235......................... 0.43 18.46 34.56
247......................... 82.62 51.52 26.38
------------------------------------------------------------------------
If we further assume that the station has a standard pattern, we
find that Q, for [thetas] = 0, is 22.36.
Following is a tabulation of part of the standard pattern:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Vertical
Azimuth 0 30 60 angle
------------------------------------------------------------------------
0........................... 28.86 68.05 72.06
105......................... 1286.78 860.97 246.41
235......................... 23.48 26.50 37.18
247......................... 89.87 57.03 28.87
------------------------------------------------------------------------
The RMS of the standard pattern in the horizontal plane is 719.63
mV/m at one kilometer.
[36 FR 919, Jan. 20, 1971, as amended at 37 FR 529, Jan. 13, 1972; 41 FR
24134, June 15, 1976; 46 FR 11991, Feb. 12, 1981; 48 FR 24384, June 1,
1983; 51 FR 2707, Jan. 21, 1986; 52 FR 36877, Oct. 1, 1987; 56 FR 64861,
Dec. 12, 1991; 57 FR 43290, Sept. 18, 1992]
Sec. 73.151 Field strength measurements to establish performance of
directional antennas.
The performance of a directional antenna may be verified either by
field strength measurement or by computer modeling and sampling system
verification.
(a) In addition to the information required by the license
application form, the following showing must be submitted to establish,
for each mode of directional operation, that the effective measured
field strength (RMS) at 1
[[Page 38]]
kilometer (km) is not less than 85 percent of the effective measured
field strength (RMS) specified for the standard radiation pattern, or
less than that specified in Sec. 73.189(b) for the class of station
involved, whichever is the higher value, and that the measured field
strength at 1 km in any direction does not exceed the field shown in
that direction on the standard radiation pattern for that mode of
directional operation:
(1) A tabulation of inverse field strengths in the horizontal plane
at 1 km, as determined from field strength measurements taken and
analyzed in accordance with Sec. 73.186, and a statement of the
effective measured field strength (RMS). Measurements shall be made in
the following directions:
(i) Those specified in the instrument of authorization.
(ii) In major lobes. Generally, one radial is sufficient to
establish a major lobe; however, additional radials may be required.
(iii) Along additional radials to establish the shape of the
pattern. In the case of a relatively simple directional antenna pattern,
a total of six radials is sufficient. If two radials would be more than
90[deg] apart, then an additional radial must be specified within that
arc. When more complicated patterns are involved, that is, patterns
having several or sharp lobes or nulls, measurements shall be taken
along as many as 12 radials to definitely establish the pattern(s).
Pattern symmetry may be assumed for complex patterns which might
otherwise require measurements on more than 12 radials.
(2) A tabulation of:
(i) The phase difference of the current in each element with respect
to the reference element, and whether the current leads (+) or lags (-)
the current in the reference element, as indicated by the station's
antenna monitor.
(ii) The ratio of the amplitude of the radio frequency current in
each element to the current in the reference element, as indicated on
the station's antenna monitor.
(3) A monitoring point shall be established on each radial for which
the construction permit specifies a limit. The following information
shall be supplied for each monitoring point:
(i) Measured field strength.
(ii) An accurate and detailed description of each monitoring point.
The description may include, but shall not be limited to, geographic
coordinates determined with a Global Positioning System receiver.
(iii) Clear photographs taken with the field strength meter in its
measuring position and with the camera so located that its field of view
takes in as many pertinent landmarks as possible.
(b) For stations authorized to operate with simple directional
antenna systems (e.g., two towers) in the 1605-1705 kHz band, the
measurements to support pattern RMS compliance referred to in paragraphs
(a)(1)(ii) and (a)(1)(iii) of this section are not required. In such
cases, measured radials are required only in the direction of short-
spaced allotments, or in directions specifically identified by the
Commission.
(c) Computer modeling and sample system verification of modeled
parameters to establish operation of a directional antenna consistent
with the theoretical pattern. Each element of the directional array
shall be modeled by use of a method of moments computer program, using
the physical characteristics of each element to establish a model that
does not violate any of the internal constraints of the computer
program. Only arrays consisting of series-fed elements may have their
performance verified by computer modeling and sample system
verification.
(1) A matrix of impedance measurements at the base and/or feed point
of each element in the array, with all other elements shorted and/or
open circuited at their respective measurement locations, shall be made.
The physical model of the individual antenna elements used in the
computer program may be varied to match the measured impedance matrix,
but the actual spacings and orientations of the array elements must be
used. Towers may be modeled using individual vertical wires to represent
them, or with multiple wires representing their leg and cross-member
sections. The resulting model description (consisting of the length,
radius, and number of
[[Page 39]]
segments of each wire for arrays using vertical wire sections to
represent the towers, or the length, end-point coordinates, and radius
of each wire used to represent leg and cross-member sections for arrays
using detailed tower structure representations) as well as the assumed
input feed and base region stray reactances shall be used to generate
the drive impedances and sample system parameter values for the
operating directional antenna pattern parameters.
(i) For arrays using vertical wires to represent each tower, the
radii of cylinders shall be no less than 80 percent and no more than 150
percent of the radius of a circle with a circumference equal to the sum
of the widths of the tower sides.
(ii) For arrays using multiple wires to represent leg and cross-
member sections, the individual legs of the tower may be modeled at
their actual diameters with appropriate interconnecting segments
representing cross-members at regular intervals.
(iii) No less than one segment for each 10 electrical degrees of the
tower's physical height shall be used for each element in the array.
(iv) Base calculations shall be made for a reference point at ground
level or within one electrical degree elevation of the actual feed
point.
(v) For uniform cross-section towers represented by vertical wires,
each wire used for a given tower shall be between 75 to 125 percent of
the physical length represented.
(vi) For self-supporting towers, stepped-radius wire sections may be
employed to simulate the physical tower's taper, or the tower may be
modeled with individual wire sections representing the legs and cross
members.
(vii) The lumped series inductance of the feed system between the
output port of each antenna tuning unit and the associated tower shall
be no greater than 10 [micro]H unless a measured value from the
measurement point to the tower base with its insulator short circuited
is used.
(viii) The shunt capacitance used to model the base region effects
shall be no greater than 250 pF unless the measured or manufacturer's
stated capacitance for each device other than the base insulator is
used. The total capacitance of such devices shall be limited such that
in no case will their total capacitive reactance be less than five times
the magnitude of the tower base operating impedance without their
effects being considered. This ``five times'' requirement only applies
when the total capacitance used to model base region effects exceeds 250
pF and when base current sampling is used.
(ix) The orientation and distances among the individual antenna
towers in the array shall be confirmed by a post-construction
certification by a land surveyor (or, where permitted by local
regulation, by an engineer) licensed or registered in the state or
territory where the antenna system is located. Stations submitting a
moment method proof for a pattern using towers that are part of an
authorized AM array are exempt from the requirement to submit a
surveyor's certification, provided that the tower geometry of the array
is not being modified and that no new towers are being added to the
array.
(x) An AM station that verified the performance of its directional
antenna system using computer modeling and sampling system verification
under this rule section, that makes modifications to tower or system
components above the base insulator, shall follow the procedures set
forth in section 1.30003(b)(2) of this chapter.
(2)(i) The computer model, once verified by comparison with the
measured base impedance matrix data, shall be used to determine the
appropriate antenna monitor parameters. The moment method modeled
parameters shall be established by using the verified moment method
model to produce tower current distributions that, when numerically
integrated and normalized to the reference tower, are identical to the
specified field parameters of the theoretical directional antenna
pattern. The samples used to drive the antenna monitor may be current
transformers or voltage sampling devices at the outputs of the antenna
matching networks or sampling loops located on the towers. If sample
loops are used, they shall be located at the elevation where the current
in the tower would be at a minimum if the tower were
[[Page 40]]
detuned in the horizontal plane, as determined by the moment method
model parameters used to determine the antenna monitor parameters.
Sample loops may be employed only when the towers are identical in
cross-sectional structure, including both leg and cross member
characteristics; if the towers are of unequal height, the sample loops
shall be mounted identically with respect to tower cross members at the
appropriate elevations above the base insulator. If the tower height
used in the model is other than the physical height of the tower, the
sampling loop shall be located at a height that is the same fraction of
the total tower height as the minimum in tower current with the tower
detuned in the model. Sample lines from the sensing element to the
antenna monitor must be equal in both length (within one electrical
degree) and characteristic impedance (within two ohms), as established
by impedance measurements, including at the open-circuit resonant
frequency closest to carrier frequency to establish length, at
frequencies corresponding to odd multiples of \1/8\ wavelength
immediately above and below the open circuit resonant frequency closest
to carrier frequency, while open circuited, to establish characteristic
impedance, and at carrier frequency or, if necessary, at nearby
frequencies where the magnitude of the measured impedance is no greater
than 200 ohms with the sampling devices connected. Samples may be
obtained from current transformers at the output of the antenna coupling
and matching equipment for base-fed towers whose actual electrical
height is 120 degrees or less, or greater than 190 electrical degrees.
Samples may be obtained from base voltage sampling devices at the output
of the antenna coupling and matching equipment for base-fed towers whose
actual electrical height is greater than 105 degrees. Samples obtained
from sample loops located as described above can be used for any height
of tower. For towers using base current or base voltage sampling derived
at the output of the antenna coupling and matching equipment, the
sampling devices shall be disconnected and calibrated by measuring their
outputs with a common reference signal (a current through them or a
voltage across them, as appropriate) and the calibration must agree
within the manufacturer's specifications. A complete description of the
sampling system, including the results of the measurements described in
this paragraph, shall be submitted with the application for license.
(ii) Proper adjustment of an antenna pattern shall be determined by
correlation between the measured antenna monitor sample indications and
the parameters calculated by the method of moments program, and by
correlation between the measured matrix impedances for each tower and
those calculated by the method of moments program. The antenna monitor
sample indications must be initially adjusted to agree with the moment
method model within 5 percent for the field ratio
and 3 degrees in phase. The measured matrix
impedances must agree with the moment method model within 2 ohms and 4 percent for
resistance and reactance.
(3) When the application for an initial license for a directional
antenna system is submitted that is based on computer modeling and
sample system verification, reference field strength measurement
locations shall be established in the directions of pattern minima and
maxima. On each radial corresponding to a pattern minimum or maximum,
there shall be at least three measurement locations. The field strength
shall be measured at each reference location at the time of the proof of
performance. The license application shall include the measured field
strength values at each reference point, along with a description of
each measurement location, including GPS coordinates and datum
reference. New reference field strength measurements are not required
for subsequent license applications for the same directional antenna
pattern and physical facilities.
[36 FR 919, Jan. 20, 1971, as amended at 42 FR 36828, July 18, 1977; 49
FR 23348, June 6, 1984; 50 FR 32416, Aug. 12, 1985; 56 FR 64862, Dec.
12, 1991; 63 FR 33876, June 22, 1998; 66 FR 20756, Apr. 25, 2001; 73 FR
64561, Oct. 30, 2008; 82 FR 51165, Nov. 3, 2017]
[[Page 41]]
Sec. 73.152 Modification of directional antenna data.
(a) If, after construction and final adjustment of a directional
antenna, a measured inverse distance field in any direction exceeds the
field shown on the standard radiation pattern for the pertinent mode of
directional operation, an application shall be filed, specifying a
modified standard radiation pattern and/or such changes as may be
required in operating parameters so that all measured effective fields
will be contained within the modified standard radiation pattern.
Permittees may also file an application specifying a modified standard
radiation pattern, even when measured radiation has not exceeded the
standard pattern, in order to allow additional tolerance for monitoring
point limits.
(b) If, following a partial proof of performance, a licensee
discovers that radiation exceeds the standard pattern on one or more
radials because of circumstances beyond the licensee's control, a
modified standard pattern may be requested. The licensee shall submit,
concurrently, Forms 301-AM and 302-AM. Form 301-AM shall include an
exhibit demonstrating that no interference would result from the
augmentation. Form 302-AM shall include the results of the partial
proof, along with full directional and nondirectional measurements on
the radial(s) to be augmented, including close-in points and a
determination of the inverse distance field in accordance with Sec.
73.186.
(c) Normally, a modified standard pattern is not acceptable at the
initial construction permit stage, before a proof-of-performance has
been completed. However, in certain cases, where it can be shown that
modification is necessary, a modified standard pattern will be
acceptable at the initial construction permit stage. Following is a non-
inclusive list of items to be considered in determining whether a
modification is acceptable at the initial construction permit stage:
(1) When the proposed pattern is essentially the same as an existing
pattern at the same antenna site. (e.g., A DA-D station proposing to
become a DA-1 station.)
(2) Excessive reradiating structures, which should be shown on a
plat of the antenna site and surrounding area.
(3) Other environmental factors; they should be fully described.
(4) Judgment and experience of the engineer preparing the
engineering portion of the application. This must be supported with a
full discussion of the pertinent factors.
(d) The following general principles shall govern the situations in
paragraphs (a), (b), and (c) in this section:
(1) Where a measured field in any direction will exceed the
authorized standard pattern, the license application may specify the
level at which the input power to the antenna shall be limited to
maintain the measured field at a value not in excess of that shown on
the standard pattern, and shall specify the common point current
corresponding to this power level. This value of common point current
will be specified on the license for that station.
(2) Where any excessive field does not result in objectionable
interference to another station, a modification of construction permit
application may be submitted with a modified standard pattern
encompassing all augmented fields. The modified standard pattern shall
supersede the previously submitted standard radiation pattern for that
station in the pertinent mode of directional operation. Following are
the possible methods of creating a modified standard pattern:
(i) The modified pattern may be computed by making the entire
pattern larger than the original pattern (i.e., have a higher RMS value)
if the measured fields systematically exceed the confines of the
original pattern. The larger pattern shall be computed by using a larger
multiplying constant, k, in the theoretical pattern equation (Eq. 1) in
Sec. 73.150(b)(1).
(ii) Where the measured field exceeds the pattern in discrete
directions, but objectionable interference does not result, the pattern
may be expanded over sectors including these directions. When this
``augmentation'' is desired, it shall be achieved by application of the
following equation:
E([phis],[thetas])aug = [radic] { E([phis],[thetas])std {time} \2\ +
A{g([thetas]) cos (180 DA/S {time} \2\
[[Page 42]]
where:
E([phis],[thetas])std is the standard pattern field at some particular
azimuth and elevation angle, before augmentation, computed
pursuant to Eq. 2, Sec. 73.150(b)(1)(i).
E([phis],[thetas])aug. is the field in the direction specified above,
after augmentation.
A = E([phis], O)\2\aug-E([phis], O)\2\std in which [phis] is the central
azimuth of augmentation. E([phis], O)aug and E([phis], O)std
are the fields in the horizontal plane at the central azimuth
of augmentation.
Note: ``A'' must be positive, except during the process of
converting non-standard patterns to standard patterns pursuant to the
Report and Order in Docket No. 21473, and in making minor changes to
stations with patterns developed during the conversion. However, even
when ``A'' is negative, ``A'' cannot be so negative that
E([phis],[alpha])aug is less than E([phis],[thetas])th at any azimuth or
vertical elevation angle.
g([thetas]) is defined in Sec. 73.150(b)(1)(i).
S is the angular range, or ``span'', over which augmentation is applied.
The span is centered on the central azimuth of augmentation.
At the limits of the span, the augmented pattern merges into
the unaugmented pattern. Spans may overlap.
DA is the absolute horizontal angle between the azimuth at
which the augmented pattern value is being computed and the
central azimuth of augmentation. (DA cannot exceed
1/2 S.)
In the case where there are spans which overlap, the above formula shall
be applied repeatedly, once for each augmentation, in ascending order of
central azimuth of augmentation, beginning with zero degrees
representing true North. Note that, when spans overlap, there will be,
in effect, an augmentation of an augmentation. And, if the span of an
earlier augmentation overlaps the central azimuth of a later
augmentation, the value of ``A'' for the later augmentation will be
different than the value of ``A'' without the overlap of the earlier
span.
(iii) A combination of paragraphs (d)(2)(i) and (d)(2)(ii), of this
section, with (d)(2)(i) being applied before (d)(2)(ii) is applied.
(iv) Where augmentation is allowable under the terms of this
section, the requested amount of augmentation shall be centered upon the
measured radial and shall not exceed the following:
(A) The actual measured inverse distance field value, where the
radial does not involve a required monitoring point.
(B) 120% of the actual measured inverse field value, where the
radial has a monitoring point required by the instrument of
authorization.
Whereas some pattern smoothing can be accommodated, the extent of the
requested span(s) shall be minimized and in no case shall a requested
augmentation span extend to a radial azimuth for which the analyzed
measurement data does not show a need for augmentation.
(3) A Modified Standard Pattern shall be specifically labeled as
such, and shall be plotted in accordance with the requirements of
paragraph (b)(2) of Sec. 73.150. The effective (RMS) field strength in
the horizontal plane of E([phis],[alpha])std, E([phis],[alpha])th, and
the root sum square (RSS) value of the inverse fields of the array
elements (derived from the equation for E([phis],[alpha])th), shall be
tabulated on the page on which the horizontal plane pattern is plotted.
Where sector augmentation has been employed in designing the modified
pattern, the direction of maximum augmentation (i.e., the central
azimuth of augmentation) shall be indicated on the horizontal plane
pattern for each augmented sector, and the limits of each sector shall
also be shown. Field values within an augmented sector, computed prior
to augmentation, shall be depicted by a broken line.
(4) There shall be submitted, for each modified standard pattern,
complete tabulations of final computed data used in plotting the
pattern. In addition, for each augmented sector, the central azimuth of
augmentation, span, and radiation at the central azimuth of augmentation
(E([phis],[alpha])aug) shall be tabulated.
(5) The parameters used in computing the modified standard pattern
shall be specified with realistic precision. Following is a list of the
maximum acceptable precision:
(i) Central Azimuth of Augmentation: to the nearest 0.1 degree.
(ii) Span: to the nearest 0.1 degree.
(iii) Radiation at Central Azimuth of Augmentation: 4 significant
figures.
(e) Sample calculations for a modified standard pattern follow.
First, assume the existing standard pattern in
[[Page 43]]
Sec. 73.150(c). Then, assume the following augmentation parameters:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Radiation
Central at
Augmentation number azimuth Span central
azimuth
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.......................................... 110 40 1,300
2.......................................... 240 50 52
3.......................................... 250 10 130
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Following is a tabulation of part of the modified standard pattern:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Vertical
Azimuth 0 30 60 angle
------------------------------------------------------------------------
0........................... 28.86 68.05 72.06 .........
105......................... 1,299.42 872.14 254.21 .........
235......................... 39.00 35.74 38.71 .........
247......................... 100.47 66.69 32.78 .........
------------------------------------------------------------------------
[46 FR 11992, Feb. 12, 1981, as amended at 56 FR 64862, Dec. 12, 1991;
66 FR 20756, Apr. 25, 2001]
Sec. 73.153 Field strength measurements in support of applications
or evidence at hearings.
In the determination of interference, groundwave field strength
measurements will take precedence over theoretical values, provided such
measurements are properly taken and presented. When measurements of
groundwave signal strength are presented, they shall be sufficiently
complete in accordance with Sec. 73.186 to determine the field strength
at 1 mile in the pertinent directions for that station. The antenna
resistance measurements required by Sec. 73.186 need not be taken or
submitted.
[44 FR 36037, June 20, 1979, as amended at 56 FR 64862, Dec. 12, 1991]
Sec. 73.154 AM directional antenna partial proof of performance
measurements.
(a) A partial proof of performance consists of at least 8 field
strength measurements made on each of the radials that includes a
monitoring point.
(b) The measurements are to be made within 3 to 15 kilometers from
the center of the antenna array. When a monitoring point as designated
on the station authorization lies on a particular radial, one of the
measurements must be made at that point. One of the following methods
shall be used for the partial proof:
(1) Measurement points shall be selected from the points measured in
latest full proof of performance provided that the points can be
identified with reasonable certainty, and that land development or other
factors have not significantly altered propagation characteristics since
the last full proof. At each point, the licensee shall measure
directional field strength for comparison to either the directional or
the nondirectional field strength measured at that point in the last
full proof.
(2) In the event that a meaningful comparison to full proof
measurements cannot be made, the licensee shall measure both directional
and nondirectional field strength at eight points on each radial. The
points need not be limited to those measured in the last full proof of
performance.
(c) The results of the measurements are to be analyzed as follows.
Either the arithmetic average or the logarithmic average of the ratios
of the field strength at each measurement point to the corresponding
field strength in the most recent complete proof of performance shall be
used to establish the inverse distance fields. (The logarithmic average
for each radial is the antilogarithm of the mean of the logarithms of
the ratios of field strength (new to old) for each measurement location
along a given radial). When new nondirectional measurements are used as
the reference, as described in paragraph (b)(2) of this section, either
the arithmetic or logarithmic averages of directional to nondirectional
field strength on each radial shall be used in conjunction with the
measured nondirectional field from the last proof to establish the
inverse distance field.
(d) The result of the most recent partial proof of performance
measurements and analysis is to be retained in the station records
available to the FCC upon request. Maps showing new measurement points,
i.e., points not measured in the last full proof, shall be associated
with the partial proof in the station's records, and shall be provided
to the FCC upon request.
[66 FR 20756, Apr. 25, 2001, as amended at 82 FR 51165, Nov. 3, 2017]
[[Page 44]]
Sec. 73.155 Directional antenna performance recertification.
A station licensed with a directional antenna pattern pursuant to a
proof of performance using moment method modeling and internal array
parameters as described in Sec. 73.151(c) shall recertify the
performance of the antenna monitor sampling system only in the case of
repair to or replacement of affected system components, and then only as
to the repaired or replaced system components. Any recertification of
repaired or replaced system components shall be performed in the same
manner as an original certification of the affected system components
under Sec. 73.151(c)(2)(i) of this part. The results of the
recertification measurements shall be retained in the station's public
inspection file.
[82 FR 51162, Nov. 3, 2017]
Sec. 73.157 Antenna testing during daytime.
(a) The licensee of a station using a directional antenna during
daytime or nighttime hours may, without further authority, operate
during daytime hours with the licensed nighttime directional facilities
or with a nondirectional antenna when conducting monitoring point field
strength measurements or antenna proof of performance measurements.
(b) Operation pursuant to this section is subject to the following
conditions:
(1) No harmful interference will be caused to any other station.
(2) The FCC may notify the licensee to modify or cease such
operation to resolve interference complaints or when such action may
appear to be in the public interest, convenience and necessity.
(3) Such operation shall be undertaken only for the purpose of
taking monitoring point field strength measurements or antenna proof of
performance measurements, and shall be restricted to the minimum time
required to accomplish the measurements.
(4) Operating power in the nondirectional mode shall be adjusted to
the same power as was utilized for the most recent nondirectional proof
of performance covering the licensed facilities.
[50 FR 30947, July 31, 1985]
Sec. 73.158 Directional antenna monitoring points.
(a) When a licensee of a station using a directional antenna system
finds that a field monitoring point, as specified on the station
authorization, is no longer accessible or is unsuitable because of
nearby construction or other disturbances to the measured field, an
application to change the monitoring point location, including FCC Form
302-AM, is to be promptly submitted to the FCC in Washington, DC.
(1) If the monitoring point has become inaccessible or otherwise
unsuitable, but there has been no significant construction or other
change in the vicinity of the monitoring point which may affect field
strength readings, the licensee shall select a new monitoring point from
the points measured in the last full proof of performance. A recent
field strength measurement at the new monitoring point shall also be
provided.
(2) Alternatively, if changes in the electromagnetic environment
have affected field strength readings at the monitoring point, the
licensee shall submit the results of a partial proof of performance,
analyzed in accordance with Sec. 73.154, on the affected radial.
(3) The licensee shall submit an accurate, written description of
the new monitoring point in relation to nearby permanent landmarks.
(4) The licensee shall submit a photograph showing the new
monitoring point in relation to nearby permanent landmarks that can be
used in locating the point accurately at all times throughout the year.
Do not use seasonal or temporary features in either the written
descriptions or photographs as landmarks for locating field points.
(b) When the description of the monitoring point as shown on the
station license is no longer correct due to road or building
construction or other changes, the licensee must prepare and file with
the FCC, in Washington, DC, a request for a corrected station license
showing the new monitoring point description. The request shall include
the
[[Page 45]]
information specified in paragraphs (a)(3) and (4) of this section, and
a copy of the station's current license.
[66 FR 20757, Apr. 25, 2001, as amended at 84 FR 2758, Feb. 8, 2019]
Sec. 73.160 Vertical plane radiation characteristics, f([thetas]).
(a) The vertical plane radiation characteristics show the relative
field being radiated at a given vertical angle, with respect to the
horizontal plane. The vertical angle, represented as [thetas], is 0
degrees in the horizontal plane, and 90 degrees when perpendicular to
the horizontal plane. The vertical plane radiation characteristic is
referred to as f([thetas]). The generic formula for f([thetas]) is:
f([thetas]) = E([thetas])/E(O)
where:
E([thetas]) is the radiation from the tower at angle [thetas].
E(O) is the radiation from the tower in the horizontal plane.
(b) Listed below are formulas for f([thetas]) for several common
towers.
(1) For a typical tower, which is not top-loaded or sectionalized,
the following formula shall be used:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC13NO91.015
where:
G is the electrical height of the tower, not including the base
insulator and pier. (In the case of a folded unipole tower,
the entire radiating structure's electrical height is used.)
(2) For a top-loaded tower, the following formula shall be used:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC13NO91.016
where:
A is the physical height of the tower, in electrical degrees, and
B is the difference, in electrical degrees, between the apparent
electrical height (G, based on current distribution) and the
actual physical height.
G is the apparent electrical height: the sum of A and B; A + B.
See Figure 1 of this section.
[[Page 46]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MR91.066
(3) For a sectionalized tower, the following formula shall be used:
[[Page 47]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC13NO91.017
where:
A is the physical height, in electrical degrees, of the lower section of
the tower.
B is the difference between the apparent electrical height (based on
current distribution) of the lower section of the tower and
the physical height of the lower section of the tower.
C is the physical height of the entire tower, in electrical degrees.
D is the difference between the apparent electrical height of the tower
(based on current distribution of the upper section) and the
physical height of the entire tower. D will be zero if the
sectionalized tower is not top-loaded.
G is the sum of A and B; A + B.
H is the sum of C and D; C + D.
[Delta] is the difference between H and A; H-A.
See Figure 2 of this section.
[[Page 48]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MR91.067
(c) One of the above f([thetas]) formulas must be used in computing
radiation in the vertical plane, unless the applicant submits a special
formula for a particular type of antenna. If a special formula is
submitted, it must be accompanied by a complete derivation and
[[Page 49]]
sample calculations. Submission of values for f([thetas]) only in a
tabular or graphical format (i.e., without a formula) is not acceptable.
(d) Following are sample calculations. (The number of significant
figures shown here should not be interpreted as a limitation on the
number of significant figures used in actual calculations.)
(1) For a typical tower, as described in paragraph (b)(1) of this
section, assume that G = 120 electrical degrees:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
[thetas] f([thetas])
------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.......................................................... 1.0000
30......................................................... 0.7698
60......................................................... 0.3458
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(2) For a top-loaded tower, as described in paragraph (b)(2) of this
section, assume A = 120 electrical degrees, B = 20 electrical degrees,
and G = 140 electrical degrees, (120 + 20):
------------------------------------------------------------------------
[thetas] f([thetas])
------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.......................................................... 1.0000
30......................................................... 0.7364
60......................................................... 0.2960
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(3) For a sectionalized tower, as described in paragraph (b)(3) of
this section, assume A = 120 electrical degrees, B = 20 electrical
degrees, C = 220 electrical degrees, D = 15 electrical degrees, G = 140
electrical degrees (120 + 20), H = 235 electrical degrees (220 + 15),
and [Delta] = 115 electrical degrees (235-120):
------------------------------------------------------------------------
[thetas] f([thetas])
------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.......................................................... 1.0000
30......................................................... 0.5930
60......................................................... 0.1423
------------------------------------------------------------------------
[46 FR 11993, Feb. 12, 1981]
Sec. 73.182 Engineering standards of allocation.
(a) Sections 73.21 to 73.37, inclusive, govern allocation of
facilities in the AM broadcast band 535-1705 kHz. Sec. 73.21
establishes three classes of channels in this band, namely, clear,
regional and local. The classes and power of AM broadcast stations which
will be assigned to the various channels are set forth in Sec. 73.21.
The classifications of the AM broadcast stations are as follows:
(1) Class A stations operate on clear channels with powers no less
than 10kW nor greater than 50 kW. These stations are designed to render
primary and secondary service over an extended area, with their primary
services areas protected from objectionable interference from other
stations on the same and adjacent channels. Their secondary service
areas are protected from objectionable interference from co-channel
stations. For purposes of protection, Class A stations may be divided
into two groups, those located in any of the contiguous 48 States and
those located in Alaska in accordance with Sec. 73.25.
(i) The mainland U.S. Class A stations are those assigned to the
channels allocated by Sec. 73.25. The power of these stations shall be
50 kW. The Class A stations in this group are afforded protection as
follows:
(A) Daytime. To the 0.1 mV/m groundwave contour from stations on the
same channel, and to the 0.5 mV/m groundwave contour from stations on
adjacent channels.
(B) Nighttime. To the 0.5 mV/m-50% skywave contour from stations on
the same channels.
(ii) Class A stations in Alaska operate on the channels allocated by
Sec. 73.25 with a minimum power of 10 kW, a maximum power of 50 kW and
an antenna efficiency of 215 mV/m/kW at 1 kilometer. Stations operating
on these channels in Alaska which have not been designated as Class A
stations in response to licensee request will continue to be considered
as Class B stations. During daytime hours a Class A station in Alaska is
protected to the 100 [micro]V/m groundwave contour from co-channel
stations. During nighttime hours, a Class A station in Alaska is
protected to the 100 [micro]V/m-50 percent skywave contour from co-
channel stations. The 0.5 mV/m groundwave contour is protected both
daytime and nighttime from stations on adjacent channels.
Note: In the Report and Order in MM Docket No. 83-807, the
Commission designated 15 stations operating on U.S. clear channels as
Alaskan Class A stations. Eleven of these stations already have Alaskan
Class A facilities and are to be protected accordingly. Permanent
designation of the other
[[Page 50]]
four stations as Alaskan Class A is conditioned on their constructing
minimum Alaskan Class A facilities no later than December 31, 1989.
Until that date or until such facilities are obtained, these four
stations shall be temporarily designated as Alaskan Class A stations,
and calculations involving these stations should be based on existing
facilities but with an assumed power of 10 kW. Thereafter, these
stations are to be protected based on their actual Alaskan Class A
facilities. If any of these stations does not obtain Alaskan Class A
facilities in the period specified, it is to be protected as a Class B
station based on its actual facilities. These four stations may increase
power to 10 kW without regard to the impact on co-channel Class B
stations. However, power increases by these stations above 10 kW (or by
existing Alaskan Class A stations beyond their current power level) are
subject to applicable protection requirements for co-channel Class B
stations. Other stations not on the original list but which meet
applicable requirements may obtain Alaskan Class A status by seeking
such designation from the Commission. If a power increase or other
change in facilities by a station not on the original list is required
to obtain minimum Alaskan Class A facilities, any such application shall
meet the interference protection requirements applicable to an Alaskan
Class A proposal on the channel.
(2) Class B stations are stations which operate on clear and
regional channels with powers not less than 0.25 kW nor more than 50 kW.
These stations render primary service only, the area of which depends on
their geographical location, power, and frequency. It is recommended
that Class B stations be located so that the interference received from
other stations will not limit the service area to a groundwave contour
value greater than 2.0 mV/m nighttime and to the 0.5 mV/m groundwave
contour daytime, which are the values for the mutual protection between
this class of stations and other stations of the same class.
Note: See Sec. Sec. 73.21(b)(1) and 73.26(b) concerning power
restrictions and classifications relative to Class B, Class C, and Class
D stations in Alaska, Hawaii, Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin Islands.
Stations in the above-named places that are reclassified from Class C to
Class B stations under Sec. 73.26(b) shall not be authorized to
increase power to levels that would increase the nighttime interference-
free limit of co-channel Class C stations in the conterminous United
States.
(3) Class C stations operate on local channels, normally rendering
primary service to a community and the suburban or rural areas
immediately contiguous thereto, with powers not less than 0.25 kW, nor
more than 1 kW, except as provided in Sec. 73.21(c)(1). Such stations
are normally protected to the daytime 0.5 mV/m contour. On local
channels the separation required for the daytime protection shall also
determine the nighttime separation. Where directional antennas are
employed daytime by Class C stations operating with more than 0.25 kW
power, the separations required shall in no case be less than those
necessary to afford protection, assuming nondirectional operation with
0.25 kW. In no case will 0.25 kW or greater nighttime power be
authorized to a station unable to operate nondirectionally with a power
of 0.25 kW during daytime hours. The actual nighttime limitation will be
calculated. For nighttime protection purposes, Class C stations in the
48 contiguous United States may assume that stations in Alaska, Hawaii,
Puerto Rico, and the U.S. Virgin Islands operating on 1230, 1240, 1340,
1400, 1450, and 1490 kHz are Class C stations.
(4) Class D stations operate on clear and regional channels with
daytime powers of not less than 0.25 kW (or equivalent RMS field of
107.5 mV/m at 1 kilometer if less than 0.25 kW) and not more than 50 kW.
Class D stations that have previously received nighttime authority to
operate with powers of less 0.25 kW (or equivalent RMS fields of less
than 107.5 mV/m at 1 kilometer) are not required to provide nighttime
coverage in accordance with Sec. 73.24(i) and are not protected from
interference during nighttime hours. Such nighttime authority is
permitted on the basis of full nighttime protection being afforded to
all Class A and Class B stations.
(b) When a station is already limited by interference from other
stations to a contour value greater than that normally protected for its
class, the individual received limits shall be the established standard
for such station with respect to interference from each other station.
(c) The four classes of AM broadcast stations have in general three
types of
[[Page 51]]
service areas, i.e., primary, secondary and intermittent. (See Sec.
73.14 for the definitions of primary, secondary, and intermittent
service areas.) Class A stations render service to all three areas.
Class B stations render service to a primary area but the secondary and
intermittent service areas may be materially limited or destroyed due to
interference from other stations, depending on the station assignments
involved. Class C and Class D stations usually have only primary service
areas. Interference from other stations may limit intermittent service
areas and generally prevents any secondary service to those stations
which operate at night. Complete intermittent service may still be
obtained in many cases depending on the station assignments involved.
(d) The groundwave signal strength required to render primary
service is 2 mV/m for communities with populations of 2,500 or more and
0.5 mV/m for communities with populations of less than 2,500. See Sec.
73.184 for curves showing distance to various groundwave field strength
contours for different frequencies and ground conductivities, and also
see Sec. 73.183, ``Groundwave signals.''
(e) A Class C station may be authorized to operate with a
directional antenna during daytime hours providing the power is at least
0.25 kW. In computing the degrees of protection which such antenna will
afford, the radiation produced by the directional antenna system will be
assumed to be no less, in any direction, than that which would result
from non-directional operation using a single element of the directional
array, with 0.25 kW.
(f) All classes of broadcast stations have primary service areas
subject to limitation by fading and noise, and interference from other
stations to the contours set out for each class of station.
(g) Secondary service is provided during nighttime hours in areas
where the skywave field strength, 50% or more of the time, is 0.5 mV/m
or greater (0.1 mV/m in Alaska). Satisfactory secondary service to
cities is not considered possible unless the field strength of the
skywave signal approaches or exceeds the value of the groundwave field
strength that is required for primary service. Secondary service is
subject to some interference and extensive fading whereas the primary
service area of a station is subject to no objectionable interference or
fading. Only Class A stations are assigned on the basis of rendering
secondary service.
Note: Standards have not been established for objectionable fading
because of the relationship to receiver characteristics. Selective
fading causes audio distortion and signal strength reduction below the
noise level, objectionable characteristics inherent in many modern
receivers. The AVC circuits in the better designed receivers generally
maintain the audio output at a sufficiently constant level to permit
satisfactory reception during most fading conditions.
(h) Intermittent service is rendered by the groundwave and begins at
the outer boundary of the primary service area and extends to a distance
where the signal strength decreases to a value that is too low to
provide any service. This may be as low as a few [micro]V/m in certain
areas and as high as several millivolts per meter in other areas of high
noise level, interference from other stations, or objectionable fading
at night. The intermittent service area may vary widely from day to
night and generally varies over shorter intervals of time. Only Class A
stations are protected from interference from other stations to the
intermittent service area.
(i) Broadcast stations are licensed to operate unlimited time,
limited time, daytime, share time, and specified hours. (See Sec. Sec.
73.1710, 73.1725, 73.1720, 73.1715, and 73.1730.) Applications for new
stations shall specify unlimited time operation only.
(j) Section 73.24 sets out the general requirements for modifying
the facilities of a licensed station and for establishing a new station.
Sections 73.24(b) and 73.37 include interference related provisions that
be considered in connection with an application to modify the facilities
of an existing station or to establish a new station. Section 73.30
describes the procedural steps required to receive an authorization to
operate in the 1605-1705 kHz band.
(k) Objectionable nighttime interference from a broadcast station
occurs
[[Page 52]]
when, at a specified field strength contour with respect to the desired
station, the field strength of an undesired station (co-channel or first
adjacent channel, after application of proper protection ratio) exceeds
for 10% or more of the time the values set forth in these standards. The
value derived from the root-sum-square of all interference contributions
represents the extent of a station's interference-free coverage.
(1) With respect to the root-sum-square (RSS) values of interfering
field strengths referred to in this section, calculation of nighttime
interference-free service is accomplished by considering the signals on
the three channels of concern (co- and first adjacencies) in order of
decreasing magnitude, adding the squares of the values and extracting
the square root of the sum, excluding those signals which are less than
50% of the RSS values of the higher signals already included.
(2) With respect to the root-sum-square values of interfering field
strengths referred to in this section, calculation of nighttime
interference for non-coverage purposes is accomplished by considering
the signals on the three channels of concern (co- and first adjacencies)
in order of decreasing magnitude, adding the squares of the values and
extracting the square root of the sum, excluding those signals which are
less than 25% of the RSS values of the higher signals already included.
(3) With respect to the root-sum-square values of interfering field
strengths referred to in this section, calculation is accomplished by
considering the signals on the three channels of concern (co- and first
adjacencies) in order of decreasing magnitude, adding the squares of the
values and extracting the square root of the sum. The 0% exclusion
method applies only to the determination of an improvement factor value
for evaluating a station's eligibility for migration to the band 1605-
1705 kHz.
(4) The RSS value will not be considered to be increased when a new
interfering signal is added which is less than the appropriate exclusion
percentage as applied to the RSS value of the interference from existing
stations, and which at the same time is not greater than the smallest
signal included in the RSS value of interference from existing stations.
(5) It is recognized that application of the above ``50% exclusion''
method (or any exclusion method using a per cent value greater than
zero) of calculating the RSS interference may result in some cases in
anomalies wherein the addition of a new interfering signal or the
increase in value of an existing interfering signal will cause the
exclusion of a previously included signal and may cause a decrease in
the calculated RSS value of interference. In order to provide the
Commission with more realistic information regarding gains and losses in
service (as a basis for determination of the relative merits of a
proposed operation) the following alternate method for calculating the
proposed RSS values of interference will be employed wherever
applicable.
(6) In the cases where it is proposed to add a new interfering
signal which is not less than 50% (or 25%, depending on which study is
being performed) of the RSS value of interference from existing stations
or which is greater that the smallest signal already included to obtain
this RSS value, the RSS limitation after addition of the new signal
shall be calculated without excluding any signal previously included.
Similarly, in cases where it is proposed to increase the value of one of
the existing interfering signals which has been included in the RSS
value, the RSS limitation after the increase shall be calculated without
excluding the interference from any source previously included.
(7) If the new or increased signal proposed in such cases is
ultimately authorized, the RSS values of interference to other stations
affected will thereafter be calculated by the ``50% exclusion'' (or 25%
exclusion, depending on which study is being performed) method without
regard to this alternate method of calculation.
(8) Examples of RSS interference calculations:
(i) Existing interferences:
Station No. 1--1.00 mV/m.
Station No. 2--0.60 mV/m.
Station No. 3--0.59 mV/m.
Station No. 4--0.58 mV/m.
[[Page 53]]
The RSS value from Nos. 1, 2 and 3 is 1.31 mV/m; therefore interference
from No. 4 is excluded for it is less than 50% of 1.31 mV/m.
(ii) Station A receives interferences from:
Station No. 1--1.00 mV/m.
Station No. 2--0.60 mV/m.
Station No. 3--0.59 mV/m.
It is proposed to add a new limitation, 0.68 mV/m. This is more than 50%
of 1.31 mV/m, the RSS value from Nos. 1, 2 and 3. The RSS value of
Station No. 1 and of the proposed station would be 1.21 m/Vm which is
more than twice as large as the limitation from Station No. 2 or No. 3.
However, under the above provision the new signal and the three existing
interferences are nevertheless calculated for purposes of comparative
studies, resulting in an RSS value of 1.47 mV/m. However, if the
proposed station is ultimately authorized, only No. 1 and the new signal
are included in all subsequent calculations for the reason that Nos. 2
and 3 are less than 50% of 1.21 mV/m, the RSS value of the new signal
and No. 1.
(iii) Station A receives interferences from:
Station No. 1--1.00 mV/m.
Station No. 2--0.60 mV/m.
Station No. 3--0.59 mV/m.
No. 1 proposes to increase the limitation it imposes on Station A to
1.21 mV/m. Although the limitations from stations Nos. 2 and 3 are less
than 50% of the 1.21 mV/m limitation, under the above provision they are
nevertheless included for comparative studies, and the RSS limitation is
calculated to be 1.47 mV/m. However, if the increase proposed by Station
No. 1 is authorized, the RSS value then calculated is 1.21 mV/m because
Stations Nos. 2 and 3 are excluded in view of the fact that the
limitations they impose are less than 50% of 1.21 mV/m.
Note: The principles demonstrated in the previous examples for the
calculation of the 50% exclusion method also apply to calculations using
the 25% exclusion method after appropriate adjustment.
(l) Objectionable nighttime interference from a station shall be
considered to exist to a station when, at the field strength contour
specified in paragraph (q) of this section with respect to the class to
which the station belongs, the field strength of an interfering station
operating on the same channel or on a first adjacent channel after
signal adjustment using the proper protection ratio, exceeds for 10% or
more of the time the value of the permissible interfering signal set
forth opposite such class in paragraph (q) of this section.
(m) For the purpose of estimating the coverage and the interfering
effects of stations in the absence of field strength measurements, use
shall be made of Figure 8 of Sec. 73.190, which describes the estimated
effective field (for 1 kW power input) of simple vertical
omnidirectional antennas of various heights with ground systems having
at least 120 quarter-wavelength radials. Certain approximations, based
on the curve or other appropriate theory, may be made when other than
such antennas and ground systems are employed, but in any event the
effective field to be employed shall not be less than the following:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Class of station Effective field (at 1 km)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
All Class A (except Alaskan)............... 275 mV/m.
Class A (Alaskan), B and D................. 215 mV/m.
Class C.................................... 180 mV/m.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note (1): When a directional antenna is employed, the radiated signal of
a broadcasting station will vary in strength in different directions,
possibly being greater than the above values in certain directions and
less in other directions depending upon the design and adjustment of
the directional antenna system. To determine the interference in any
direction, the measured or calculated radiated field (unattenuated
field strength at 1 kilometer from the array) must be used in
conjunction with the appropriate propagation curves. (See Sec.
73.185 for further discussion and solution of a typical directional
antenna case.)
Note (2): For Class B stations in Alaska, Hawaii, Puerto Rico, and the
U.S. Virgin Islands, 180 mV/m shall be used.
(n) The existence or absence of objectionable groundwave
interference from stations on the same or adjacent channels shall be
determined by actual measurements made in accordance with the method
described in Sec. 73.186, or in the absence of such measurements, by
reference to the propagation curves of Sec. 73.184. The existence or
absence of objectionable interference due to skywave propagation shall
be determined by reference to Formula 2 in Sec. 73.190.
(o) Computation of skywave field strength values:--(1) Fifty percent
skywave field strength values (clear channel). In computing the fifty
percent skywave field strength values of a Class A clear channel
station, use shall be made of Formula 1 of Sec. 73.190, entitled
``Skywave Field Strength'' for 50 percent of the time.
(2) Ten percent skywave field strength values. In computing the 10%
skywave field strength for stations on a single
[[Page 54]]
signal or an RSS basis, Formula 2 in Sec. 73.190 shall be used.
(3) Determination of angles of departure. In calculating skywave
field strength for stations on all channels, the pertinent vertical
angle shall be determined by use of the formula in Sec. 73.190(d).
(p) The distance to any specified groundwave field strength contour
for any frequency may be determined from the appropriate curves in Sec.
73.184 entitled ``Ground Wave Field Strength vs. Distance.''
(q) Normally protected service contours and permissible interference
signals for broadcast stations are as follows (for Class A stations, see
also paragraph (a) of this section):
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Signal strength contour of area protected Permissible interfering signal ([micro]V/m)
from objectionable interference [remove ---------------------------------------------
Class of station Class of channel used footnote reference] ([micro]V/m)
----------------------------------------------- Day \1\ Night \2\
Day \1\ Night
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A.................................. Clear................. SC 100................ SC 500 50% SW........ SC 5................. SC 25.
AC 500................ AC 500 GW............ AC 250............... AC 250.
A (Alaskan)........................ ......do.............. SC 100................ SC 100 50% SW........ SC 5................. SC 5.
...................... AC 500................ AC 500 GW............ AC 250............... AC 250.
B.................................. Clear................. 500................... 2000 \1\............. 25................... 25.
Regional.............. ...................... ..................... AC 250............... 250.
C.................................. Local................. 500................... No presc.\3\......... SC 25................ Not presc.
D.................................. Clear................. 500................... Not presc............ SC 25................ Not presc.
Regional.............. ...................... ..................... AC 250...............
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ Groundwave.
\2\ Skywave field strength for 10 percent or more of the time.
\3\ During nighttime hours, Class C stations in the contiguous 48 States may treat all Class B stations assigned to 1230, 1240, 1340, 1400, 1450, and
1490 kHz in Alaska, Hawaii, Puerto Rico, and the U.S. Virgin Islands as if they were Class C stations.
Note: SC = Same channel; AC = Adjacent channel; SW = Skywave; GW =
Groundwave
(r) The following table of logarithmic expressions is to be used as
required for determining the minimum permissible ratio of the field
strength of a desired to an undesired signal. This table shall be used
in conjunction with the protected contours specified in paragraph (q) of
this section.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Desired Groundwave to:
Frequency separation of desired to -------------------------------------------------- Desired 50% Skywave to
undesired signals (kHz) Undesired groundwave Undesired 10% Skywave Undesired 10% Skywave
(dB) (dB) (dB)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
0.................................... 26 26 26
10................................... 6 6 not presc.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(s) Two stations, one with a frequency twice of the other, should
not be assigned in the same groundwave service area unless special
precautions are taken to avoid interference from the second harmonic of
the station operating on the lower frequency. Additionally, in selecting
a frequency, consideration should be given to the fact that occasionally
the frequency assignment of two stations in the same area may bear such
a relation to the intermediate frequency of some broadcast receivers as
to cause ``image'' interference, However, since this can usually be
rectified by readjustment of the intermediate frequency of such
receivers, the Commission, in general, will not take this kind of
interference into consideration when authorizing stations.
(t) The groundwave service of two stations operating with
synchronized carriers and broadcasting identical programs will be
subject to some distortion in areas where the signals from the two
stations are of comparable strength. For the purpose of estimating
coverage of such stations, areas in which the signal ratio is between
1:2 and 2:1 will not be considered as receiving satisfactory service.
Note: Two stations are considered to be operated synchronously when
the carriers
[[Page 55]]
are maintained within 0.2 Hz of each other and they transmit identical
program s.
[56 FR 64862, Dec. 12, 1991; 57 FR 43290, Sept. 18, 1992, as amended at
58 FR 27950, May 12, 1993; 81 FR 2759, Jan. 19, 2016]
Sec. 73.183 Groundwave signals.
(a) Interference that may be caused by a proposed assignment or an
existing assignment during daytime hours should be determined, when
possible, by measurements on the frequency involved or on another
frequency over the same terrain and by means for the curves in Sec.
73.184 entitled ``Ground Wave Field Strength versus Distance.''
Note: Groundwave field strength measurements will not be accepted or
considered for the purpose of establishing that interference to a
station in a foreign country other than Canada, or that the field
strength at the border thereof, would be less than indicated by the use
of the ground conductivity maps and engineering standards contained in
this part and applicable international agreements. Satisfactory
groundwave measurements offered for the purpose of demonstrating values
of conductivity other than those shown by Figure M3 in problems
involving protection of Canadian stations will be considered only if,
after review thereof, the appropriate agency of the Canadian government
notifies the Commission that they are acceptable for such purpose.
(b)(1) In all cases where measurements taken in accordance with the
requirements are not available, the groundwave strength must be
determined by means of the pertinent map of ground conductivity and the
groundwave curves of field strength versus distance. The conductivity of
a given terrain may be determined by measurements of any broadcast
signal traversing the terrain involved. Figure M3 (See Note 1) shows the
conductivity throughout the United States by general areas of reasonably
uniform conductivity. When it is clear that only one conductivity value
is involved, Figure R3 of Sec. 73.190, may be used. It is a replica of
Figure M3, and is contained in these standards. In all other situations
Figure M3 must be employed. It is recognized that in areas of limited
size or over a particular path, the conductivity may vary widely from
the values given; therefore, these maps are to be used only when
accurate and acceptable measurements have not been made.
(2) For determinations of interference and service requiring a
knowledge of ground conductivities in other countries, the ground
conductivity maps comprising Appendix 1 to Annex 2 of each of the
following international agreements may be used:
(i) For Canada, the U.S.-Canada AM Agreement, 1984;
(ii) For Mexico, the U.S.-Mexico AM Agreement, 1986; and
(iii) For other Western Hemisphere countries, the Regional Agreement
for the Medium Frequency Broadcasting Service in Region 2.
Where different conductivities appear in the maps of two countries
on opposite sides of the border, such differences are to be considered
as real, even if they are not explained by geophysical cleavages.
(c) Example of determining interference by the graphs in Sec.
73.184:
It is desired to determine whether objectionable interference exists
between a proposed 5 kW Class B station on 990 kHz and an existing 1 kW
Class B station on first adjacent channel, 1000 kHz. The distance
between the two stations is 260 kilometers and both stations operate
nondirectionally with antenna systems that produce a horizontal
effective field of 282 in mV/m at one kilometer. (See Sec. 73.185
regarding use of directional antennas.) The ground conductivity at the
site of each station and along the intervening terrain is 6 mS/m. The
protection to Class B stations during daytime is to the 500 [micro]V/m
(0.5 Vm) contour using a 6 dB protection factor. The distance to the 500
[micro]V/m groundwave contour of the 1 kW station is determined by the
use of the appropriate curve in Sec. 73.184. Since the curve is plotted
for 100 mV/m at a 1 kilometer, to find the distance of the 0.5 mV/m
contour of the 1 kw station, it is necessary to determine the distance
to the 0.1773 m/Vm contour.
(100 x 0.5 / 282 = 0.1773)
Using the 6 mS/m curve, the estimated radius of the 0.5 mV/m contour is
62.5 kilometers. Subtracting this distance from the distance between the
two stations leaves 197.5 kilometers. Using the same propagation curve,
the signal from the 5 kW station at this distance is seen to be 0.059
mV/m. Since a protection ratio of 6 dB, desired to undesired signal,
applies to stations separated by 10 kHz, the undesired signal could have
had a value of up to 0.25 mV/m without causing objectionable
interference. For co-channel studies, a desired to undesired signal
[[Page 56]]
ratio of no less than 20:1 (26 dB) is required to avoid causing
objectionable interference.
(d) Where a signal traverses a path over which different
conductivities exist, the distance to a particular groundwave field
strength contour shall be determined by the use of the equivalent
distance method. Reasonably accurate results may be expected in
determining field strengths at a distance from the antenna by
application of the equivalent distance method when the unattenuated
field of the antenna, the various ground conductivities and the location
of discontinuities are known. This method considers a wave to be
propagated across a given conductivity according to the curve for a
homogeneous earth of that conductivity. When the wave crosses from a
region of one conductivity into a region of a second conductivity, the
equivalent distance of the receiving point from the transmitter changes
abruptly but the field strength does not. From a point just inside the
second region the transmitter appears to be at that distance where, on
the curve for a homogeneous earth of the second conductivity, the field
strength equals the value that occurred just across the boundary in the
first region. Thus the equivalent distance from the receiving point to
the transmitter may be either greater or less than the actual distance.
An imaginary transmitter is considered to exist at that equivalent
distance. This technique is not intended to be used as a means of
evaluating unattenuated field or ground conductivity by the analysis of
measured data. The method to be employed for such determinations is set
out in Sec. 73.186.
(e) Example of the use of the equivalent distance method;
It is desired to determine the distance to the 0.5 mV/m and 0.025
mV/m contours of a station on a frequency of 1000 kHz with an inverse
distance field of 100 mV/m at one kilometer being radiated over a path
having a conductivity of 10 mS/m for a distance of 20 kilometers, 5 mS/m
for the next 30 kilometers and 15 mS/m thereafter. Using the appropriate
curve in Sec. 73.184, Graph 12, at a distance of 20 kilometers on the
curve for 10 mS/m, the field strength is found to be 2.84 mV/m. On the
5mS/m curve, the equivalent distance to this field strength is 14.92
kilometers, which is 5.08 (20-14.92 kilometers nearer to the
transmitter. Continuing on the propagation curve, the distance to a
field strength of 0.5 mV/m is found to be 36.11 kilometers.
The actual length of the path travelled, however, is 41.19 (36.11 +
5.08) kilometers. Continuing on this propagation curve to the
conductivity change at 44.92 (50.00-5.08) kilometers, the field strength
is found to be 0.304 mV/m. On the 15 mS/m propagation curve, the
equivalent distance to this field strength is 82.94 kilometers, which
changes the effective path length by 38.02 (82.94-44.92) kilometers.
Continuing on this propagation curve, the distance to a field strength
of 0.025 mV/m is seen to be 224.4 kilometers. The actual length of the
path travelled, however, is 191.46 (224.4 + 5.08-38.02) kilometers.
[28 FR 13574, Dec. 14, 1963, as amended at 44 FR 36037, June 20, 1979;
48 FR 9011, Mar. 3, 1983; 50 FR 18822, May 2, 1985; 50 FR 24522, June
11, 1985; 51 FR 9965, Mar. 24, 1986; 54 FR 39736, Sept. 28, 1989; 56 FR
64866, Dec. 12, 1991; 57 FR 43290, Sept. 18, 1992]
Sec. 73.184 Groundwave field strength graphs.
(a) Graphs 1 to 20 show, for each of 20 frequencies, the computed
values of groundwave field strength as a function of groundwave
conductivity and distance from the source of radiation. The groundwave
field strength is considered to be that part of the vertical component
of the electric field which has not been reflected from the ionosphere
nor from the troposphere. These 20 families of curves are plotted on
log-log graph paper and each is to be used for the range of frequencies
shown thereon. Computations are based on a dielectric constant of the
ground (referred to air as unity) equal to 15 for land and 80 for sea
water and for the ground conductivities (expressed in mS/m) given on the
curves. The curves show the variation of the groundwave field strength
with distance to be expected for transmission from a vertical antenna at
the surface of a uniformly conducting spherical earth with the
groundwave constants shown on the curves. The curves are for an antenna
power of such efficiency and current distribution that the inverse
distance (unattenuated) field is 100 mV/m at 1 kilometer. The curves are
valid for distances that are large compared to the dimensions of the
antenna for other than short vertical antennas.
[[Page 57]]
(b) The inverse distance field (100 mV/m divided by the distance in
kilometers) corresponds to the groundwave field intensity to be expected
from an antenna with the same radiation efficiency when it is located
over a perfectly conducting earth. To determine the value of the
groundwave field intensity corresponding to a value of inverse distance
field other than 100 mV/m at 1 kilometer, multiply the field strength as
given on these graphs by the desired value of inverse distance field at
1 kilometer divided by 100; for example, to determine the groundwave
field strength for a station with an inverse distance field of 2700 mV/m
at 1 kilometer, simply multiply the values given on the charts by 27.
The value of the inverse distance field to be used for a particular
antenna depends upon the power input to the antenna, the nature of the
ground in the neighborhood of the antenna, and the geometry of the
antenna. For methods of calculating the interrelations between these
variables and the inverse distance field, see ``The Propagation of Radio
Waves Over the Surface of the Earth and in the Upper Atmosphere,'' Part
II, by Mr. K.A. Norton, Proc. I.R.E., Vol. 25, September 1937, pp. 1203-
1237.
Note: The computed values of field strength versus distance used to
plot Graphs 1 to 20 are available in tabular form. For information on
obtaining copies of these tabulations call or write the Consumer Affairs
Office, Federal Communications Commission, Washington, DC 20554, (202)
632-7000.
(c) Provided the value of the dielectric constant is near 15, the
ground conductivity curves of Graphs 1 to 20 may be compared with actual
field strength measurement data to determine the appropriate values of
the ground conductivity and the inverse distance field strength at 1
kilometer. This is accomplished by plotting the measured field strengths
on transparent log-log graph paper similar to that used for Graphs 1 to
20 and superimposing the plotted graph over the Graph corresponding to
the frequency of the station measured. The plotted graph is then shifted
vertically until the plotted measurement data is best aligned with one
of the conductivity curves on the Graph; the intersection of the inverse
distance line on the Graph with the 1 kilometer abscissa on the plotted
graph determines the inverse distance field strength at 1 kilometer. For
other values of dielectric constant, the following procedure may be used
to determine the dielectric constant of the ground, the ground
conductivity and the inverse distance field strength at 1 kilometer.
Graph 21 gives the relative values of groundwave field strength over a
plane earth as a function of the numerical distance p and phase angle b.
On graph paper with coordinates similar to those of Graph 21, plot the
measured values of field strength as ordinates versus the corresponding
distances from the antenna in kilometers as abscissae. The data should
be plotted only for distances greater than one wavelength (or, when this
is greater, five times the vertical height of the antenna in the case of
a nondirectional antenna or 10 times the spacing between the elements of
a directional antenna) and for distances less than 80f1/3 MHz
kilometers (i.e., 80 kilometers at 1 MHz). Then, using a light box,
place the plotted graph over Graph 21 and shift the plotted graph
vertically and horizontally (making sure that the vertical lines on both
sheets are parallel) until the best fit with the data is obtained with
one of the curves on Graph 21. When the two sheets are properly lined
up, the value of the field strength corresponding to the intersection of
the inverse distance line of Graph 21 with the 1 kilometer abscissa on
the data sheet is the inverse distance field strength at 1 kilometer,
and the values of the numerical distance at 1 kilometer, p1,
and of b are also determined. Knowing the values of b and p1
(the numerical distance at one kilometer), we may substitute in the
following approximate values of the ground conductivity and dielectric
constant.
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC13NO91.018
(R/[lambda])1 = Number of wavelengths in 1 kilometer,
* * * * *
fMHz = frequency expressed in megahertz,
[[Page 58]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC13NO91.019
[epsi] = dielectric constant on the ground referred to air as unity.
First solve for [chi] by substituting the known values of
p1, (R/[lambda])1, and cos b in equation (1).
Equation (2) may then be solved for [delta] and equation (3) for [epsi].
At distances greater than 80/f1/3 MHz kilometers the curves
of Graph 21 do not give the correct relative values of field strength
since the curvature of the earth weakens the field more rapidly than
these plane earth curves would indicate. Thus, no attempt should be made
to fit experimental data to these curves at the larger distances.
Note: For other values of dielectric constant, use can be made of
the computer program which was employed by the FCC in generating the
curves in Graphs 1 to 20. For information on obtaining a printout of
this program, call or write the Consumer Affairs Office, Federal
Communications Commission, Washington, DC 200554, (202) 632-7000.
(d) At sufficiently short distances (less than 55 kilometers at AM
broadcast frequencies), such that the curvature of the earth does not
introduce an additional attenuation of the waves, the curves of Graph 21
may be used to determine the groundwave field strength of transmitting
and receiving antennas at the surface of the earth for any radiated
power, frequency, or set of ground constants. First, trace the straight
inverse distance line corresponding to the power radiated on transparent
log-log graph paper similar to that of Graph 21, labelling the ordinates
of the chart in terms of field strength, and the abscissae in terms of
distance. Next, using the formulas given on Graph 21, calculate the
value of the numerical distance, p, at 1 kilometer, and the value of b.
Then superimpose the log-log graph paper over Graph 21, shifting it
vertically until both inverse distance lines coincide and shifting it
horizontally until the numerical distance at 1 kilometer on Graph 21
coincides with 1 kilometer on the log-log graph paper. The curve of
Graph 21 corresponding to the calculated value of b is then traced on
the log-log graph paper giving the field strength versus distance in
kilometers.
(e) This paragraph consists of the following Graphs 1 to 20 and 21.
Note: The referenced graphs are not published in the CFR, nor will
they be included in the Commission's automated rules system. For
information on obtaining copies of the graphs call or write the Consumer
Affairs Office, Federal Communications Commission, Washington, DC 20554,
Telephone: (202) 632-7000.
[28 FR 13574, Dec. 14, 1963, as amended at 50 FR 18823, May 2, 1985; 51
FR 45891, Dec. 23, 1986; 52 FR 36878, Oct. 1, 1987; 56 FR 64866, Dec.
12, 1991; 57 FR 43290, Sept. 18, 1992]
Sec. 73.185 Computation of interfering signal.
(a) Measured values of radiation are not to be used in calculating
overlap, interference, and coverage.
(1) In the case of an antenna which is intended to be non-
directional in the horizontal plane, an ideal non-directional radiation
pattern shall be used in determining interference, overlap, and
coverage, even if the antenna is not actually non-directional.
(2) In the case of an antenna which is directional in the horizontal
plane, the radiation which shall be used in determining interference,
overlap, and coverage is that calculated pursuant to Sec. 73.150 or
Sec. 73.152, depending on whether the station has a standard or
modified standard pattern.
(3) In the case of calculation of interference or overlap to (not
from) a foreign station, the notified radiation shall be used, even if
the notified radiation differs from that in paragraphs (a) (1) or (2) of
this section.
(b) For skywave signals from stations operating on all channels,
interference shall be determined from the appropriate formulas and
Figure 6a contained in Sec. 73.190.
(c) The formulas in Sec. 73.190(d) depicted in Figure 6a of Sec.
73.190, entitled ``Angles of Departure versus Transmission Range'' are
to be used in determining the angles in the vertical pattern of the
antenna of an interfering station to be considered as pertinent to
transmission by one reflection. To provide for variation in the
pertinent vertical angle due to variations of ionosphere height and
ionosphere scattering, the curves 2 and 3 indicate the upper and lower
angles within which the radiated field is to be considered. The maximum
value of field strength occurring between these angles shall be
[[Page 59]]
used to determine the multiplying factor to apply to the 10 percent
skywave field intensity value determined from Formula 2 in Sec. 73.190.
The multiplying factor is found by dividing the maximum radiation
between the pertinent angles by 100 mV/m.
(d) Example of the use of skywave curves and formulas: Assume a
proposed new Class B station from which interference may be expected is
located at a distance of 724 kilometers from a licensed Class B station.
The proposed station specifies geographic coordinates of
40[deg]00[min]00[sec] N and 100[deg]00[min]00[sec] W and the station to
be protected is located at an azimuth of 45[deg] true at geographic
coordinates of 44[deg]26[min]05[sec] N and 93[deg]32[min]54[sec] W. The
critical angles of radiation as determined from Figure 6a of Sec.
73.190 for use with Class B stations are 9.6[deg] and 16.6[deg]. If the
vertical pattern of the antenna of the proposed station in the direction
of the existing station is such that, between the angles of 9.6[deg] and
16.6[deg] above the horizon the maximum radiation is 260 mV/m at one
kilometer, the value of the 50% field, as derived from Formula 1 of
Sec. 73.190, is 0.06217 mV/m at the location of the existing station.
To obtain the value of the 10% field, the 50% value must be adjusted by
a factor derived from Formula 2 of Sec. 73.190. The value in this case
is 8.42 dB. Thus, the 10% field is 0.1616 mV/m. Using this in
conjunction with the co-channel protection ratio of 26 dB, the resultant
nighttime limit from the proposed station to the licensed station is
3.232 mV/m.
(e) In the case of an antenna which is non-directional in the
horizontal plane, the vertical distribution of the relative fields
should be computed pursuant to Sec. 73.160. In the case of an antenna
which is directional in the horizontal plane, the vertical pattern in
the great circle direction toward the point of reception in question
must first be calculated. In cases where the radiation in the vertical
plane, at the pertinent azimuth, contains a large lobe at a higher angle
than the pertinent angle for one reflection, the method of calculating
interference will not be restricted to that just described; each such
case will be considered on the basis of the best knowledge available.
(f) In performing calculations to determine permissible radiation
from stations operating presunrise or postsunset in accordance with
Sec. 73.99, calculated diurnal factors will be multiplied by the values
of skywave field strength for such stations obtained from Formula 1 or 2
of Sec. 73.190.
(1) The diurnal factor is determined using the time of day at the
mid-point of path between the site of the interfering station and the
point at which interference is being calculated. Diurnal factors are
computed using the formula Df = a + bF + cF\2\ + dF\3\ where:
Df represents the diurnal factor,
F is the frequency in MHz,
a,b,c, and d are constants obtained from the tables in paragraph (k)(2)
A diurnal factor greater than one will not be used in calculations and
interpolation is to be used between calculated values where necessary.
For reference purposes, curves for presunrise and postsunset diurnal
factors are contained in Figures 13 and 14 of Sec. 73.190.
(2) Constants used in calculating diurnal factors for the presunrise
and postsunset periods are contained in paragraphs (f)(2) (i) and (ii)
of this section respectively. The columns labeled Tmp
represent the number of hours before and after sunrise and sunset at the
path midpoint.
(i) Presunrise Constants
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Tmp a b c d
------------------------------------------------------------------------
-2.......................... 1.3084 .0083 -.0155 .0144
-1.75....................... 1.3165 -.4919 .6011 -.1884
-1.5........................ 1.0079 .0296 .1488 -.0452
-1.25....................... .7773 .3751 -.1911 .0736
-1.......................... .6230 .1547 .2654 -.1006
-.75........................ .3718 .1178 .3632 -.1172
-.5......................... .2151 .0737 .4167 -.1413
-.25........................ .2027 -.2560 .7269 -.2577
SR.......................... .1504 -.2325 .5374 -.1729
+ .25...................... .1057 -.2092 .4148 -.1239
+ 5........................ .0642 -.1295 .2583 -.0699
+ .75...................... .0446 -.1002 .1754 -.0405
+ 1........................ .0148 .0135 .0462 .0010
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(ii) Postsunset Constants
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Tmp a b c d
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1.75........................ .9495 -.0187 .0720 -.0290
1.5......................... .7196 .3583 -.2280 .0611
1.25........................ .6756 .1518 .0279 -.0163
1.0......................... .5486 .1401 .0952 -.0288
.75......................... .3003 .4050 -.0961 .0256
.5.......................... .1186 .4281 -.0799 .0197
.25......................... .0382 .3706 -.0673 .0171
[[Page 60]]
SS.. .0002 .3024 -.0540 .0086
-.25........................ .0278 .0458 .1473 -.0486
-.5......................... .0203 .0132 .1166 -.0340
-.75........................ .0152 -.0002 .0786 -.0185
-1.0........................ -.0043 .0452 -.0040 .0103
-1.25....................... .0010 .0135 .0103 .0047
-1.5........................ .0018 .0052 .0069 .0042
-1.75....................... -.0012 .0122 -.0076 .0076
-2.0........................ -.0024 .0141 -.0141 .0091
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(f) For stations operating on regional and local channels,
interfering skywave field intensities shall be determined in accordance
with the procedure specified in (d) of this section and illustrated in
(e) of this section, except that Figure 2 of Sec. 73.190 is used in
place of Figure 1a and 1b and the formulas of Sec. 73.190. In using
Figure 2 of Sec. 73.190, one additional parameter must be considered,
i.e., the variation of received field with the latitude of the path.
(g) Figure 2 of Sec. 73.190, ``10 percent Skywave Signal Range
Chart,'' shows the signal as a function of the latitude of the
transmission path, which is defined as the geographic latitude of the
midpoint between the transmitter and receiver. When using Figure 2 of
Sec. 73.190, latitude 35[deg] should be used in case the mid-point of
the path lies below 35[deg] North and latitude 50[deg] should be used in
case the mid-point of the path lies above 50[deg] North.
[30 FR 13783, Oct. 29, 1965, as amended at 33 FR 15420, Oct. 17, 1968;
46 FR 11995, Feb. 12, 1981; 48 FR 42958, Sept. 20, 1983; 50 FR 18843,
May 2, 1985; 56 FR 64867, Dec. 12, 1991]
Sec. 73.186 Establishment of effective field at one kilometer.
(a) Section 73.189 provides that certain minimum field strengths are
acceptable in lieu of the required minimum physical heights of the
antennas proper. Also, in other situations, it may be necessary to
determine the effective field. The following requirements shall govern
the taking and submission of data on the field strength produced:
(1) Beginning as near to the antenna as possible without including
the induction field and to provide for the fact that a broadcast antenna
is not a point source of radiation (not less than one wave length or 5
times the vertical height in the case of a single element, i.e.,
nondirectional antenna or 10 times the spacing between the elements of a
directional antenna), measurements shall be made on six or more radials,
at intervals of approximately 0.2 kilometer up to 3 kilometers from the
antenna, at intervals of approximately one kilometer from 3 kilometers
to 5 kilometers from the antenna, at intervals of approximately 2
kilometers from 5 kilometers to 15 kilometers from the antenna, and a
few additional measurements if needed at greater distances from the
antenna. Where the antenna is rurally located and unobstructed
measurements can be made, there shall be at least 15 measurements on
each radial. These shall include at least 7 measurements within 3
kilometers of the antenna. However, where the antenna is located in a
city where unobstructed measurements are difficult to make, measurements
shall be made on each radial at as many unobstructed locations as
possible, even though the intervals are considerably less than stated
above, particularly within 3 kilometers of the antenna. In cases where
it is not possible to obtain accurate measurements at the closer
distances (even out to 8 or 10 kilometers due to the character of the
intervening terrain), the measurements at greater distances should be
made at closer intervals.
(2) The data required by paragraph (a)(1) of this section should be
plotted for each radial in accordance with either of the two methods set
forth below:
(i) Using log-log coordinate paper, plot field strengths as ordinate
and distance as abscissa.
(ii) Using semi-log coordinate paper, plot field strength times
distance as ordinate on the log scale and distance as abscissa on the
linear scale.
(3) However, regardless of which of the methods in paragraph (a)(2)
of this section is employed, the proper curve to be drawn through the
points plotted shall be determined by comparison with the curves in
Sec. 73.184 as follows: Place the sheet on which the actual points have
been plotted over the appropriate Graph in Sec. 73.184, hold to the
light if necessary and adjust until the curve most closely matching the
points is found. This curve should then be drawn on the sheet on which
the points were plotted, together with the inverse
[[Page 61]]
distance curve corresponding to that curve. The field at 1 kilometer for
the radial concerned shall be the ordinate on the inverse distance curve
at 1 kilometer.
(4) When all radials have been analyzed in accordance with paragraph
(a)(3) of this section, a curve shall be plotted on polar coordinate
paper from the fields obtained, which gives the inverse distance field
pattern at 1 kilometer. The radius of a circle, the area of which is
equal to the area bounded by this pattern, is the effective field. (See
Sec. 73.14.)
(5) The antenna power of the station shall be maintained at the
authorized level during all field measurements. The power determination
will be made using the direct method as described in Sec. 73.51(a) with
instruments of acceptable accuracy specified in Sec. 73.1215.
(b) Complete data taken in conjunction with the field strength
measurements shall be submitted to the Commission in affidavit form
including the following:
(1) Tabulation by number of each point of measurement to agree with
the maps required in paragraph (c) of this section, the date and time of
each measurement, the field strength (E), the distance from the antenna
(D) and the product of the field strength and distance (ED) (if data for
each radial are plotted on semilogarithmic paper, see paragraph
(a)(2)(ii) of this section) for each point of measurement.
(2) Description of method used to take field strength measurements.
(3) The family of theoretical curves used in determining the curve
for each radial properly identified by conductivity and dielectric
constants.
(4) The curves drawn for each radial and the field strength pattern.
(5) The antenna resistance at the operating frequency.
(6) Antenna current or currents maintained during field strength
measurements.
(c) Maps showing each measurement point numbered to agree with the
required tabulation shall be retained in the station records and shall
be available to the FCC upon request.
[28 FR 13574, Dec. 14, 1963, as amended at 41 FR 44178, Oct. 7, 1976; 46
FR 11995, Feb. 12, 1981; 49 FR 49851, Dec. 24, 1984; 50 FR 18843, May 2,
1985; 50 FR 47055, Nov. 14, 1985; 51 FR 2707, Jan. 21, 1986; 52 FR
10570, Apr. 2, 1987; 66 FR 20757, Apr. 25, 2001]
Sec. 73.187 Limitation on daytime radiation.
(a)(1) Except as otherwise provided in paragraphs (a)(2) and (3) of
this section, no authorization will be granted for a Class B or Class D
station on a frequency specified in Sec. 73.25 if the proposed
operation would radiate during the period of critical hours (the two
hours after local sunrise and the two hours before local sunset) toward
any point on the 0.1 mV/m contour of a co-channel U.S. Class A station,
at or below the pertinent vertical angle determined from Curve 2 of
Figure 6a of Sec. 73.190, values in excess of those obtained as
provided in paragraph (b) of this section.
(2) The limitation set forth in paragraph (a)(1) of this section
shall not apply in the following cases:
(i) Any Class B or Class D operation authorized before November 30,
1959; or
(ii) For Class B and Class D stations authorized before November 30,
1959, subsequent changes of facilities which do not involve a change in
frequency, an increase in radiation toward any point on the 0.1 mV/m
contour of a co-channel U.S. Class A station, or the move of transmitter
site materially closer to the 0.1 mV/m contour of such Class A station.
(3) A Class B or Class D station authorized before November 30,
1959, and subsequently authorized to increase daytime radiation in any
direction toward the 0.1 mV/m contour of a co-channel U.S. Class A
station (without a change in frequency or a move of transmitter site
materially closer to such contour), may not, during the two hours after
local sunrise or the two hours before local sunset, radiate in such
directions a value exceeding the higher of:
(i) The value radiated in such directions with facilities last
authorized before November 30, 1959, or
[[Page 62]]
(ii) The limitation specified in paragraph (a)(1) of this section.
(b) To obtain the maximum permissible radiation for a Class B or
Class D station on a given frequency from 640 through 990 kHz, multiply
the radiation value obtained for the given distance and azimuth from the
500 kHz chart (Figure 9 of Sec. 73.190) by the appropriate
interpolation factor shown in the K500 column of paragraph
(c) of this section; and multiply the radiation value obtained for the
given distance and azimuth from the 1000 kHz chart (Figure 10 of Sec.
73.190) by the appropriate interpolation factor shown in the
K1000 column of paragraph (c) of this section. Add the two
products thus obtained; the result is the maximum radiation value
applicable to the Class B or Class D station in the pertinent
directions. For frequencies from 1010 to 1580 kHz, obtain in a similar
manner the proper radiation values from the 1000 and 1600 kHz charts
(Figures 10 and 11 of Sec. 73.190), multiply each of these values by
the appropriate interpolation factors in the K'1000 and
K'1600 columns in paragraph (c) of this section, and add the
products.
(c) Interpolation factors. (1) Frequencies below 1000 kHz.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
fkHz K\500\ K\1000\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
640................................................. 0.720 0.280
650................................................. 0.700 0.300
660................................................. 0.680 0.320
670................................................. 0.660 0.340
680................................................. 0.640 0.360
690................................................. 0.620 0.380
700................................................. 0.600 0.400
710................................................. 0.580 0.420
720................................................. 0.560 0.440
730................................................. 0.540 0.460
740................................................. 0.520 0.480
750................................................. 0.500 0.500
760................................................. 0.480 0.520
770................................................. 0.460 0.540
780................................................. 0.440 0.560
800................................................. 0.400 0.600
810................................................. 0.380 0.620
820................................................. 0.360 0.640
830................................................. 0.340 0.660
840................................................. 0.320 0.680
850................................................. 0.300 0.700
860................................................. 0.280 0.720
870................................................. 0.260 0.740
880................................................. 0.240 0.760
890................................................. 0.220 0.780
900................................................. 0.200 0.800
940................................................. 0.120 0.880
990................................................. 0.020 0.980
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(2) Frequencies above 1000 kHz.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
f'kHz K'\1000\ K'\1600\
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1010................................................ 0.983 0.017
1020................................................ 0.967 0.033
1030................................................ 0.950 0.050
1040................................................ 0.933 0.067
1050................................................ 0.917 0.083
1060................................................ 0.900 0.100
1070................................................ 0.883 0.117
1080................................................ 0.867 0.133
1090................................................ 0.850 0.150
1100................................................ 0.833 0.167
1110................................................ 0.817 0.183
1120................................................ 0.800 0.200
1130................................................ 0.783 0.217
1140................................................ 0.767 0.233
1160................................................ 0.733 0.267
1170................................................ 0.717 0.283
1180................................................ 0.700 0.300
1190................................................ 0.683 0.317
1200................................................ 0.667 0.333
1210................................................ 0.650 0.350
1220................................................ 0.633 0.367
1500................................................ 0.167 0.833
1510................................................ 0.150 0.850
1520................................................ 0.133 0.867
1530................................................ 0.117 0.883
1540................................................ 0.100 0.900
1550................................................ 0.083 0.917
1560................................................ 0.067 0.933
1570................................................ 0.050 0.950
1580................................................ 0.033 0.967
------------------------------------------------------------------------
[28 FR 13574, Dec. 14, 1963, as amended at 49 FR 43962, Nov. 1, 1984; 56
FR 64868, Dec. 12, 1991]
Sec. 73.189 Minimum antenna heights or field strength requirements.
(a) Section 73.45 requires that all applicants for new, additional,
or different broadcast facilities and all licensees requesting authority
to move 0the transmitter of an existing station, shall specify a
radiating system, the efficiency of which complies with the requirements
of good engineering practice for the class and power of the station.
(b) The specifications deemed necessary to meet the requirements of
good engineering practice at the present state of the art are set out in
detail below.
(1) The licensee of a AM broadcast station requesting a change in
power, time of operation, frequency, or transmitter location must also
request authority to install a new antenna system or to make changes in
the existing antenna system which will meet the minimum height
requirements, or submit evidence that the present antenna system meets
the minimum requirements with respect to field strength, before
favorable consideration will be
[[Page 63]]
given thereto. (See Sec. 73.186.) In the event it is proposed to make
substantial changes in an existing antenna system, the changes shall be
such as to meet the minimum height requirements or will be permitted
subject to the submission of field strength measurements showing that it
meets the minimum requirements with respect to effective field strength.
(2) These minimum actual physical vertical heights of antennas
permitted to be installed are shown by curves A, B, and C of Figure 7 of
Sec. 73.190 as follows:
(i) Class C stations, and stations in Alaska, Hawaii, Puerto Rico
and the U.S. Virgin Islands on 1230, 1240, 1340, 1400, 1450 and 1490 kHz
that were formerly Class C and were redesignated as Class B pursuant to
Sec. 73.26(b), 45 meters or a minimum effective field strength of 180
mV/m for 1 kW at 1 kilometer (90 mV/m for 0.25 kW at 1 kilometer). (This
height applies to a Class C station on a local channel only. Curve A
shall apply to any Class C stations in the 48 conterminous States that
are assigned to Regional channels.)
(ii) Class A (Alaska), Class B and Class D stations other than those
covered in Sec. 73.189(b)(2)(i), a minimum effective field strength of
215 mV/m for 1 kW at 1 kilometer.
(iii) Class A stations, a minimum effective field strength of 275
mV/m for 1 kW at 1 kilometer.
(3) The heights given on the graph for the antenna apply regardless
of whether the antenna is located on the ground or on a building. Except
for the reduction of shadows, locating the antenna on a building does
not necessarily increase the efficiency and where the height of the
building is in the order of a quarter wave the efficiency may be
materially reduced.
(4) At the present development of the art, it is considered that
where a vertical radiator is employed with its base on the ground, the
ground system should consist of buried radial wires at least one-fourth
wave length long. There should be as many of these radials evenly spaced
as practicable and in no event less than 90. (120 radials of 0.35 to 0.4
of a wave length in length and spaced 3[deg] is considered an excellent
ground system and in case of high base voltage, a base screen of
suitable dimensions should be employed.)
(5) In case it is contended that the required antenna efficiency can
be obtained with an antenna of height or ground system less than the
minimum specified, a complete field strength survey must be supplied to
the Commission showing that the field strength at a mile without
absorption fulfills the minimum requirements. (See Sec. 73.186.) This
field survey must be made by a qualified engineer using equipment of
acceptable accuracy.
(6) The main element or elements of a directional antenna system
shall meet the above minimum requirements with respect to height or
effective field strength. No directional antenna system will be approved
which is so designed that the effective field of the array is less than
the minimum prescribed for the class of station concerned, or in case of
a Class A station less than 90 percent of the ground wave field which
would be obtained from a perfect antenna of the height specified by
Figure 7 of Sec. 73.190 for operation on frequencies below 1000 kHz,
and in the case of a Class B or Class D station less than 90 percent of
the ground wave field which would be obtained from a perfect antenna of
the height specified by Figure 7 of Sec. 73.190 for operation on
frequencies below 750 kHz.
[28 FR 13574, Dec. 14, 1963, as amended at 31 FR 8069, June 8, 1966; 33
FR 15420, Oct. 17, 1968; 44 FR 36038, June 20, 1979; 50 FR 18844, May 2,
1985; 51 FR 2707, Jan. 21, 1986; 51 FR 4753, Feb. 7, 1986; 52 FR 10570,
Apr. 2, 1987; 56 FR 64868, Dec. 12, 1991; 81 FR 2760, Jan. 19, 2016]
Sec. 73.190 Engineering charts and related formulas.
(a) This section consists of the following Figures: 2, r3, 5, 6a, 7,
8, 9, 10, 11, 12, and 13. Additionally, formulas that are directly
related to graphs are included.
(b) Formula 1 is used for calculation of 50% skywave field strength
values.
Formula 1. Skywave field strength, 50% of the time (at SS + 6):
The skywave field strength, Fc(50), for a characteristic field
strength of 100 mV/m at 1 km is given by:
[[Page 64]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MR91.068
The slant distance, D, is given by:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC13NO91.020
The geomagnetic latitude of the midpoint of the path, [Phi]M, is given
by:
[Phi]M = arcsin[sin aM sin 78.5[deg] + cos aM cos 78.5[deg] cos(69 +
bM)]degrees (Eq. 3)
The short great-circle path distance, d, is given by:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC13NO91.021
Where:
d[deg] = arccos[sin aT sin aR + cos aT cos aR cos(bR -
bT)]degrees (Eq.5)
Where:
aT is the geographic latitude of the transmitting terminal (degrees)
aR is the geographic latitude of the receiving terminal (degrees)
bT is the geographic longitude of the transmitting terminal (degrees)
bR is the geographic longitude of the receiving terminal (degrees)
aM is the geographic latitude of the midpoint of the great-circle path
(degrees) and is given by:
bM is the geographic longitude of the midpoint of the great-circle path
(degrees) and is given by:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MR91.069
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MR91.070
Note (1): If [verbar]FM[verbar] is greater than 60 degrees, equation
(1) is evaluated for [verbar] FM[verbar] = 60 degrees.
Note (2): North and east are considered positive; south and west
negative.
Note (3): In equation (7), k = -1 for west to east paths (i.e., bR
bT), otherwise k = 1.
(c) Formula 2 is used for calculation of 10% skywave field strength
values.
Formula 2. Skywave field strength, 10% of the time (at SS + 6):
The skywave field strength, Fc(10), is given by:
Fc(10) = Fc(50) + [Delta] dB([micro]V/m)
Where:
[Delta] = 6 when [verbar] FM[verbar] <40
[Delta] = 0.2 [verbar] FM[verbar] - 2 when 40 <=[verbar]
FM[verbar] <=60
[Delta] = 10 when [verbar] FM[verbar] 60
(d) Figure 6a depicts angles of departure versus transmission range.
These angles may also be computed using the following formulas:
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MR91.071
Where:
d = distance in kilometers
n = 1 for 50% field strength values
n = 2 or 3 for 10% field strength values
and where
K1 = 0.00752
K2 = 0.00938
K3 = 0.00565
[[Page 65]]
Note: Computations using these formulas should not be carried beyond
0.1 degree.
(e) In the event of disagreement between computed values using the
formulas shown above and values obtained directly from the figures, the
computed values will control.
[[Page 66]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MR91.072
[[Page 67]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MR91.073
[[Page 68]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MR91.074
[[Page 69]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MR91.075
[[Page 70]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MR91.076
[[Page 71]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MR91.077
[[Page 72]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MR91.078
[[Page 73]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MR91.079
[[Page 74]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MR91.080
[[Page 75]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MR91.081
[[Page 76]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MR91.082
[[Page 77]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MR91.083
[[Page 78]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MR91.084
[28 FR 13574, Dec. 14, 1963, as amended at 30 FR 12720, Oct. 6, 1965; 33
FR 15420, Oct. 17, 1968; 48 FR 42959, Sept. 20, 1983; 49 FR 43963, Nov.
1, 1984; 50 FR 18844, May 2, 1985; 51 FR 4753, Feb. 7, 1986; 52 FR
36879, Oct. 1, 1987; 56 FR 64869, Dec. 12, 1991]
Subpart B_FM Broadcast Stations
Sec. 73.201 Numerical designation of FM broadcast channels.
The FM broadcast band consists of that portion of the radio
frequency spectrum between 88 MHz and 108 MHz. It is divided into 100
channels of 200 kHz each. For convenience, the frequencies available for
FM broadcasting (including those assigned to noncommercial educational
broadcasting) are given numerical designations which are shown in the
table below:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Channel
Frequency (Mc/s) No.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
88.1........................................................ 201
88.3........................................................ 202
[[Page 79]]
88.5........................................................ 203
88.7........................................................ 204
88.9........................................................ 205
89.1........................................................ 206
89.3........................................................ 207
89.5........................................................ 208
89.7........................................................ 209
89.9........................................................ 210
90.1........................................................ 211
90.3........................................................ 212
90.5........................................................ 213
90.7........................................................ 214
90.9........................................................ 215
91.1........................................................ 216
91.3........................................................ 217
91.5........................................................ 218
91.7........................................................ 219
91.9........................................................ 220
92.1........................................................ 221
92.3........................................................ 222
92.5........................................................ 223
92.7........................................................ 224
92.9........................................................ 225
93.1........................................................ 226
93.3........................................................ 227
93.5........................................................ 228
93.7........................................................ 229
93.9........................................................ 230
94.1........................................................ 231
94.3........................................................ 232
94.5........................................................ 233
94.7........................................................ 234
94.9........................................................ 235
95.1........................................................ 236
95.3........................................................ 237
95.5........................................................ 238
95.7........................................................ 239
95.9........................................................ 240
96.1........................................................ 241
96.3........................................................ 242
96.5........................................................ 243
96.7........................................................ 244
96.9........................................................ 245
97.1........................................................ 246
97.3........................................................ 247
97.5........................................................ 248
97.7........................................................ 249
97.9........................................................ 250
98.1........................................................ 251
98.3........................................................ 252
98.5........................................................ 253
98.7........................................................ 254
98.9........................................................ 255
99.1........................................................ 256
99.3........................................................ 257
99.5........................................................ 258
99.7........................................................ 259
99.9........................................................ 260
100.1....................................................... 261
100.3....................................................... 262
100.5....................................................... 263
100.7....................................................... 264
100.9....................................................... 265
101.1....................................................... 266
101.3....................................................... 267
101.5....................................................... 268
101.7....................................................... 269
101.9....................................................... 270
102.1....................................................... 271
102.3....................................................... 272
102.5....................................................... 273
102.7....................................................... 274
102.9....................................................... 275
103.1....................................................... 276
103.3....................................................... 277
103.5....................................................... 278
103.7....................................................... 279
103.9....................................................... 280
104.1....................................................... 281
104.3....................................................... 282
104.5....................................................... 283
104.7....................................................... 284
104.9....................................................... 285
105.1....................................................... 286
105.3....................................................... 287
105.5....................................................... 288
105.7....................................................... 289
105.9....................................................... 290
106.1....................................................... 291
106.3....................................................... 292
106.5....................................................... 293
106.7....................................................... 294
106.9....................................................... 295
107.1....................................................... 296
107.3....................................................... 297
107.5....................................................... 298
107.7....................................................... 299
107.9....................................................... 300
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note: The frequency 108.0 MHz may be assigned to VOR test stations
subject to the condition that interference is not caused to the
reception of FM broadcasting stations, present or future.
[28 FR 13623, Dec. 14, 1963, as amended at 30 FR 4480, Apr. 7, 1965; 52
FR 10570, Apr. 2, 1987]
Sec. 73.202 Table of Allotments.
(a) General. The following Table of Allotments contains the channels
(other than noncommercial educational Channels 201-220) designated for
use in communities in the United States, its territories, and
possessions, and not currently assigned to a licensee or permittee or
subject to a pending application for construction permit or license. All
listed channels are for Class B stations in Zones I and I-A and for
Class C stations in Zone II unless otherwise specifically designated.
Channels to which licensed, permitted, and ``reserved'' facilities have
been assigned are reflected in the Media Bureau's publicly available
Consolidated Data Base System.
(1) Channels designated with an asterisk may be used only by
noncommercial educational broadcast stations. The rules governing the
use of those channels are contained in part 73, subpart C of this
chapter. An entity that would be eligible to operate a noncommercial
educational broadcast station can, in conjunction with an initial
petition for rulemaking filed pursuant to part 1, subpart C of this
chapter, request that a nonreserved FM channel
[[Page 80]]
(channels 221 through 300) be allotted as reserved only for
noncommercial educational broadcasting by demonstrating the following:
(i) No reserved channel can be used without causing prohibited
interference to TV channel 6 stations or foreign broadcast stations; or
(ii) The applicant is technically precluded from using the reserved
band by existing stations or previously filed applications and the
proposed station would provide a first or second noncommercial
educational radio service to 2,000 or more people who constitute 10% of
the population within the proposed allocation's 60 dBu (1 mV/m) service
contour.
(2) Each channel listed in the Table of Allotments reflects the
class of station that is authorized to use it based on the minimum and
maximum facility requirements for each class contained in Sec. 73.211.
Note: The provisions of this paragraph [(a)(2) of this section]
become effective [3 years from the effective date of the Report and
Order in BC Docket 80-90].
(b) Table of FM Allotments.
Table 1 to Paragraph (b)
[U.S. States]
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Channel No.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
ALABAMA
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Camden............................................... 230A
Hamilton............................................. 221A
Maplesville.......................................... 292A
Thomaston............................................ 280C3
------------------------------------------------------------------------
ALASKA
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Kotzebue............................................. 280A
Yakutat.............................................. 280A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
ARIZONA
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Aguila............................................... 297C2
Ajo.................................................. 275A
Desert Hills......................................... 292A
Ehrenberg............................................ 228C2
First Mesa........................................... 281C
Fredonia............................................. 266C1
Leupp................................................ 293C1
Overgaard............................................ 234C1
Parker............................................... 257C2
Paulden.............................................. 228C3
Peach Springs........................................ 287A
Pima................................................. 296A
Salome............................................... 231A
Sells................................................ 285A
Snowflake............................................ 259C2
Tusayan.............................................. 222C1
Wickenburg........................................... 229C3
------------------------------------------------------------------------
ARKANSAS
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hermitage............................................ 300A
Lake Village......................................... 278C3
Rison................................................ 255A
Strong............................................... 296C3
------------------------------------------------------------------------
CALIFORNIA
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Alturas.............................................. 277C
Avenal............................................... 269A
Boonville............................................ 300A
Cartago.............................................. 233A
Cedarville........................................... 238A
Coalinga............................................. 247B1
Coalinga............................................. 261B
Cottonwood........................................... 221A
Dos Palos............................................ 240A
Earlimart............................................ 228A
Essex................................................ 280B
Firebaugh............................................ 234A
Ford City............................................ 271A
Ft. Bragg............................................ 253B1
Kettleman City....................................... 299A
Lindsay.............................................. 277B1
Ludlow............................................... 261B1
Portola.............................................. 258A
Randsburg............................................ 275A
Sacramento........................................... 300B
Tecopa............................................... 256A
Visalia.............................................. 241A
Wasco................................................ 224A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
COLORADO
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Battlement Mesa...................................... 275C3
Calhan............................................... 284C3
Dinosaur............................................. 262C1
Dotsero.............................................. 261A
Eckley............................................... 257C1
Hugo................................................. 222A
Idalia............................................... 231A
Lake City............................................ 247A
Olathe............................................... 270C2, 293C
Stratton............................................. 246C1
Walden............................................... 226A
Yampa................................................ 277C3
------------------------------------------------------------------------
CONNECTICUT
------------------------------------------------------------------------
DELAWARE
------------------------------------------------------------------------
DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA
------------------------------------------------------------------------
FLORIDA
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Big Coppitt Key...................................... 265C3
Cross City........................................... 249C3
Fort Walton Beach.................................... 295A
Horseshoe Beach...................................... *234C3
Otter Creek.......................................... 240A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
GEORGIA
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Pembroke............................................. 257C1
Plains............................................... 290A
HAWAII
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Kekaha............................................... 298C3
Koloa................................................ 264A
Lihue................................................ 296A
Princeville.......................................... 236C3
[[Page 81]]
Puhi................................................. 280A
Waimea............................................... 224C3
------------------------------------------------------------------------
IDAHO
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Weiser............................................... 247C1
------------------------------------------------------------------------
ILLINOIS
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Abingdon............................................. 291A
Cedarville........................................... 258A
Greenup.............................................. 230A
Mattoon.............................................. 245B1
Pinckneyville........................................ 282A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
INDIANA
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Columbus............................................. 228A
Fowler............................................... 291A
Madison.............................................. 265A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
IOWA
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Asbury............................................... 254A
Dunkerton............................................ 280A
Keosauqua............................................ 271C3
Moville.............................................. 246A
North English........................................ 246A
Rockford............................................. 225A
Rudd................................................. 268A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
KANSAS
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Council Grove........................................ 281C3
------------------------------------------------------------------------
KENTUCKY
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Irvington............................................ 261A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
LOUISIANA
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Colfax............................................... 267A
Florien.............................................. 222A
Golden Meadow........................................ 289C2
Haynesville.......................................... 286A
Hornbeck............................................. 269A
Oil City............................................. 285A
Wisner............................................... 300C3
------------------------------------------------------------------------
MAINE
------------------------------------------------------------------------
MARYLAND
------------------------------------------------------------------------
MASSACHUSETTS
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Orange............................................... 247A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
West Tisbury......................................... 282A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
MICHIGAN
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Bear Lake............................................ 264C3
Carney............................................... 260A
Custer............................................... 260A
Houghton............................................. 242C1
Lake Isabella........................................ 255A
Lexington............................................ *256A
Onekama.............................................. 227C3
Pigeon............................................... 267A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
MINNESOTA
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Grand Marais......................................... 245C3
Grand Portage........................................ 251A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
MISSISSIPPI
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Bruce................................................ 233A
Calhoun City......................................... 272A
Cleveland............................................ 226C2
Greenwood............................................ 230C3
McLain............................................... 245A
New Albany........................................... 268A
New Augusta.......................................... 269A
MISSOURI
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Bourbon.............................................. 231A
Bunker............................................... 292C3
Cuba................................................. 269A
Eminence............................................. 281A
Maryville............................................ 285C3
Wheatland............................................ 272A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
MONTANA
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Cut Bank............................................. 265C2
Valler............................................... 289C1
------------------------------------------------------------------------
NEBRASKA
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Bayard............................................... 251A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
NEVADA
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Battle Mountain...................................... 253C2
Caliente............................................. 264A
Owyhee............................................... 247C1
Tonopah.............................................. 224A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
NEW HAMPSHIRE
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Enfield.............................................. 282A
Groveton............................................. 268A
Jefferson............................................ 247A
Stratford............................................ 254A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
NEW JERSEY
------------------------------------------------------------------------
NEW MEXICO
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Animas............................................... 279C1
Carrizozo............................................ 261C2
Chama................................................ 241C3
Clovis............................................... 272C3
Des Moines........................................... 287C
Lovington............................................ 269C3
Skyline-Ganipa....................................... 240A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
NEW YORK
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Keeseville........................................... 231A
Narrowsburg.......................................... 275A
Sagaponack........................................... 233A
Shelter Island....................................... 277A
Westfield............................................ 265A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
NORTH CAROLINA
------------------------------------------------------------------------
NORTH DAKOTA
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Beulah............................................... 250A
Gackle............................................... 256C1
Medina............................................... 222C1
Sarles............................................... 290C1
------------------------------------------------------------------------
[[Page 82]]
OHIO
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Dennison............................................. 272A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
OKLAHOMA
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Arnett............................................... 293C2
Cheyenne............................................. 247C2
Clayton.............................................. 262A
Coalgate............................................. 242A
Cordell.............................................. 229A
Covington............................................ 290A
Savanna.............................................. 275A
Vici................................................. 249A
Wayne................................................ 266A
Weatherford.......................................... 286A
Wright City.......................................... 295A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
OREGON
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Arlington............................................ 295C2
Diamond Lake......................................... 251A
Huntington........................................... 228C1, 294C1
Independence......................................... 274C0
Monument............................................. 280C3
Vale................................................. 288C
------------------------------------------------------------------------
PENNSYLVANIA
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Liberty.............................................. 298A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
RHODE ISLAND
------------------------------------------------------------------------
SOUTH CAROLINA
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Edgefield............................................ 238A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
SOUTH DAKOTA
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Edgemont............................................. 289C1
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Murdo................................................ 265A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
TENNESSEE
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Englewood............................................ 250A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Selmer............................................... 288A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
TEXAS
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Albany............................................... 255A
Asherton............................................. 284A
Aspermont............................................ 226C2
Balmorhea............................................ 283C
Benjamin............................................. 237C3
Big Lake............................................. 246A, 252C2,
281C1, 296C3
Bogata............................................... 247A
Bruni................................................ 293A
Camp Wood............................................ 251C3
Canadian............................................. 285C1
Carrizo Springs...................................... 228A, 295A
Centerville.......................................... 274A
Cotulla.............................................. 289A
Crystal Beach........................................ 268A
Dalhart.............................................. 261C2
Denver City.......................................... 248C2
Dickens.............................................. 240A, 294A
Dilley............................................... 291A
Eden................................................. 294A
El Indio............................................. 236A
Encino............................................... 250A, 283A
Estelline............................................ 263C3
Fort Stockton........................................ 263C
Freer................................................ 288A
George West.......................................... 292A
Girard............................................... 248C3
Goree................................................ 277A
Groom................................................ 223A, 273A
Hale Center.......................................... 236C1
Hamilton............................................. 263A
Hamlin............................................... 283C2
Hereford............................................. 278C2
Iraan................................................ 269C2
Jayton............................................... 231C2
Junction............................................. 228C2, 277C3,
290A
Kermit............................................... 289C3
Knox City............................................ 293A
Leakey............................................... 275A, 299A
Lockney.............................................. 271C3
Lometa............................................... 253A
Los Ybanez........................................... 253C2
Lovelady............................................. 288A
Marathon............................................. 276C1
Marquez.............................................. 296A
Mason................................................ 239C2
Matador.............................................. 244C2, 276C3
McCamey.............................................. 233C3, 237C3
McLean............................................... 298C3
Memphis.............................................. 292A
Menard............................................... 265A, 292A
Milano............................................... 274A
Mullin............................................... 224A, 277A
Munday............................................... 270C1
O'Donnell............................................ 249A
Olney................................................ 282A
Ozona................................................ 275A
Palacios............................................. 259C1
Pearsall............................................. 277A
Premont.............................................. 264C3, 287A
Richland Springs..................................... 235A, 299A
Rising Star.......................................... 290C3
Roaring Springs...................................... 227A
Roby................................................. 290A
Rocksprings.......................................... 291A
Roscoe............................................... 228A
Rule................................................. 253A
San Isidro........................................... 255A, 278A
Sanderson............................................ 274C1
Sanger............................................... 281C3
Seymour.............................................. 222C2
Sheffield............................................ 224C2
Silverton............................................ 221A
Sonora............................................... 272C3
South Padre Island................................... 288A
Stamford............................................. 233A
Teague............................................... 237C3
Trinity.............................................. 251A
Turkey............................................... 221C2
Van Alstyne.......................................... 260A
Wellington........................................... 248C3, 253C3
Wells................................................ 254A
Westbrook............................................ 272A
Wharton.............................................. 277C2
Zapata............................................... 292A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
UTAH
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Huntington........................................... 287C3
Milford.............................................. 288C
Paragonah............................................ 258A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
[[Page 83]]
VERMONT
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Barton............................................... 262A
Hardwick............................................. 290A
West Rutland......................................... 298A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
VIRGINIA
------------------------------------------------------------------------
WASHINGTON
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Coupeville........................................... 266A
Kahlotus............................................. 283A
Oak Harbor........................................... 233A
Raymond.............................................. 300A
Trout Lake........................................... 236A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
WEST VIRGINIA
------------------------------------------------------------------------
WISCONSIN
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ashland.............................................. 275A
Crandon.............................................. 276A
Hayward.............................................. 232C2
Laona................................................ 272C3
Lac Du Flambeau...................................... 225A
New Holstein......................................... 258A
Tomahawk............................................. 265C3
------------------------------------------------------------------------
WYOMING
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Albin................................................ 282C3
Bairoil.............................................. 235C3
Basin................................................ 299C1
Cora................................................. 274C2
Dubois............................................... 242A
Jackson.............................................. 294C2
Lusk................................................. 242A
Manville............................................. 255C1
Marbleton............................................ 257C1
Medicine Bow......................................... 259C3
Pine Bluffs.......................................... 287A
Ralston.............................................. 233C
Rawlins.............................................. 298C2
Rozet................................................ 256C3
Wamsutter............................................ 285A
Wheatland............................................ 286A, 293A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
[U.S. Territories]
------------------------------------------------------------------------
AMERICAN SAMOA
------------------------------------------------------------------------
CENTRAL MARIANAS
------------------------------------------------------------------------
GARAPAN
------------------------------------------------------------------------
GUAM
------------------------------------------------------------------------
PUERTO RICO
------------------------------------------------------------------------
VIRGIN ISLANDS
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Charlotte Amalie..................................... 237B
Charlotte Amalie..................................... 275A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
[30 FR 12711, Oct. 6, 1965]
Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting Sec.
73.202, see the List of CFR Sections Affected, which appears in the
Finding Aids section of the printed volume and at www.govinfo.gov.
Sec. 73.203 Availability of channels.
(a) Except as provided for in paragraph (b) of this section and
Sec. 1.401(d) of this chapter and 73.3573(a)(1), applications may be
filed to construct new FM broadcast stations only at the communities and
on the channels contained in the Table of Allotments (Sec. 73.202(b)).
(b) Applications filed on a first come, first served basis for the
minor modification of an existing FM broadcast station may propose any
change in channel and/or class and/or community not defined as major in
Sec. 73.3573(a). Applications for a change in community of license must
comply with the requirements set forth in Sec. 73.3573(g).
Note to Sec. 73.203: This section is limited to non-reserved band
changes in channel and/or class and/or community. Applications
requesting such changes must meet either the minimum spacing
requirements of Sec. 73.207 at the site specified in the application,
without resort to the provisions of the Commission's rules permitting
short spaced stations as set forth in Sec. Sec. 73.213 through 73.215,
or demonstrate by a separate exhibit attached to the application the
existence of a suitable allotment site that fully complies with
Sec. Sec. 73.207 and 73.315 without resort to Sec. Sec. 73.213 through
73.215.
[71 FR 76219, Dec. 20, 2006]
Sec. 73.204 International agreements and other restrictions on use
of channels.
See Sec. Sec. 73.207, 73.220 and 73.1650.
[49 FR 10264, Mar. 20, 1984]
Sec. 73.205 Zones.
For the purpose of allotments and assignments, the United States is
divided into three zones as follows:
(a) Zone I consists of that portion of the United States located
within the confines of the following lines drawn on the United States
Albers Equal Area Projection Map (based on standard parallels 291/2[deg]
and 451/2[deg]; North American datum): Beginning at the most easterly
point on the State boundary line between North Carolina and Virginia;
thence in a straight line to a point on the Virginia-West Virginia
boundary line located at north latitude 37[deg]49[min] and west
longitude 80[deg]12[min]30[sec]; thence westerly along the southern
boundary lines of the States of West Virginia, Ohio, Indiana, and
Illinois to a point at the
[[Page 84]]
junction of the Illinois, Kentucky, and Missouri State boundary lines;
thence northerly along the western boundary line of the State of
Illinois to a point at the junction of the Illinois, Iowa, and Wisconsin
State boundary lines; thence easterly along the northern State boundary
line of Illinois to the 90th meridian; thence north along this meridian
to the 43.5[deg] parallel; thence east along this parallel to the United
States-Canada border; thence southerly and following that border until
it again intersects the 43.5[deg] parallel; thence east along this
parallel to the 71st meridian; thence in a straight line to the
intersection of the 69th meridian and the 45th parallel; thence east
along the 45th parallel to the Atlantic Ocean. When any of the above
lines pass through a city, the city shall be considered to be located in
Zone I. (See Figure 1 of Sec. 73.699.)
(b) Zone I-A consists of Puerto Rico, the Virgin Islands and that
portion of the State of California which is located south of the 40th
parallel.
(c) Zone II consists of Alaska, Hawaii and the rest of the United
States which is not located in either Zone I or Zone I-A.
[29 FR 14116, Oct. 14, 1964, and 31 FR 10125, July 27, 1966, as amended
at 48 FR 29504, June 27, 1983]
Sec. 73.207 Minimum distance separation between stations.
(a) Except for assignments made pursuant to Sec. 73.213 or 73.215,
FM allotments and assignments must be separated from other allotments
and assignments on the same channel (co-channel) and five pairs of
adjacent channels by not less than the minimum distances specified in
paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section. The Commission will not accept
petitions to amend the Table of Allotments unless the reference points
meet all of the minimum distance separation requirements of this
section. The Commission will not accept applications for new stations,
or applications to change the channel or location of existing
assignments unless transmitter sites meet the minimum distance
separation requirements of this section, or such applications conform to
the requirements of Sec. 73.213 or 73.215. However, applications to
modify the facilities of stations with short-spaced antenna locations
authorized pursuant to prior waivers of the distance separation
requirements may be accepted, provided that such applications propose to
maintain or improve that particular spacing deficiency. Class D
(secondary) assignments are subject only to the distance separation
requirements contained in paragraph (b)(3) of this section. (See Sec.
73.512 for rules governing the channel and location of Class D
(secondary) assignments.)
(b) The distances listed in Tables 1, 2, and 3 of this paragraph (b)
apply to allotments and assignments on the same channel and each of five
pairs of adjacent channels. The five pairs of adjacent channels are the
first (200 kHz above and 200 kHz below the channel under consideration),
the second (400 kHz above and below), the third (600 kHz above and
below), the fifty-third (10.6 MHz above and below), and the fifty-fourth
(10.8 MHz above and below). The distances in the Tables apply regardless
of whether the proposed station class appears first or second in the
``Relation'' column of the table.
(1) Domestic distance separation. Domestic allotments and
assignments must be separated from each other by not less than the
distances in Table 1 to this paragraph (b):
Table 1 to Paragraph (b)--Minimum Distance Separation Requirements in Kilometers
[Miles]
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Relation Co-channel 200 kHz 400/600 kHz 10.6/10.8 MHz
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A to A.......................................... 115 (71) 72 (45) 31 (19) 10 (6)
A to B1......................................... 143 (89) 96 (60) 48 (30) 12 (7)
A to B.......................................... 178 (111) 113 (70) 69 (43) 15 (9)
A to C3......................................... 142 (88) 89 (55) 42 (26) 12 (7)
A to C2......................................... 166 (103) 106 (66) 55 (34) 15 (9)
A to C1......................................... 200 (124) 133 (83) 75 (47) 22 (14)
A to C0......................................... 215 (134) 152 (94) 86 (53) 25 (16)
A to C.......................................... 226 (140) 165 (103) 95 (59) 29 (18)
B1 to B1........................................ 175 (109) 114 (71) 50 (31) 14 (9)
[[Page 85]]
B1 to B......................................... 211 (131) 145 (90) 71 (44) 17 (11)
B1 to C3........................................ 175 (109) 114 (71) 50 (31) 14 (9)
B1 to C2........................................ 200 (124) 134 (83) 56 (35) 17 (11)
B1 to C1........................................ 233 (145) 161 (100) 77 (48) 24 (15)
B1 to C0........................................ 248 (154) 180 (112) 87 (54) 27 (17)
B1 to C......................................... 259 (161) 193 (120) 105 (65) 31 (19)
B to B.......................................... 241 (150) 169 (105) 74 (46) 20 (12)
B to C3......................................... 211 (131) 145 (90) 71 (44) 17 (11)
B to C2......................................... 241 (150) 169 (105) 74 (46) 20 (12)
B to C1......................................... 270 (168) 195 (121) 79 (49) 27 (17)
B to C0......................................... 272 (169) 214 (133) 89 (55) 31 (19)
B to C.......................................... 274 (170) 217 (135) 105 (65) 35 (22)
C3 to C3........................................ 153 (95) 99 (62) 43 (27) 14 (9)
C3 to C2........................................ 177 (110) 117 (73) 56 (35) 17 (11)
C3 to C1........................................ 211 (131) 144 (90) 76 (47) 24 (15)
C3 to C0........................................ 226 (140) 163 (101) 87 (54) 27 (17)
C3 to C......................................... 237 (147) 176 (109) 96 (60) 31 (19)
C2 to C2........................................ 190 (118) 130 (81) 58 (36) 20 (12)
C2 to C1........................................ 224 (139) 158 (98) 79 (49) 27 (17)
C2 to C0........................................ 239 (148) 176 (109) 89 (55) 31 (19)
C2 to C......................................... 249 (155) 188 (117) 105 (65) 35 (22)
C1 to C1........................................ 245 (152) 177 (110) 82 (51) 34 (21)
C1 to C0........................................ 259 (161) 196 (122) 94 (58) 37 (23)
C1 to C......................................... 270 (168) 209 (130) 105 (65) 41 (25)
C0 to C0........................................ 270 (168) 207 (129) 96 (60) 41 (25)
C0 to C......................................... 281 (175) 220 (137) 105 (65) 45 (28)
C to C.......................................... 290 (180) 241 (150) 105 (65) 48 (30)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(2) Canadian border distance separation. Under the 1991 United
States-Canada FM Broadcasting Agreement, as amended, any domestic U.S.
allotment or assignment within 320 kilometers (199 miles) of the common
border must either satisfy the contour overlap provisions set out in the
Agreement or be separated from Canadian allotments and assignments by
not less than the distance given in Table 2 to this paragraph (b), using
the distance calculation methodology set out in the Agreement. When
applying Table 2, U.S. Class C0 allotments and assignments are
considered to be Class C; U.S. Class C2 allotments and assignments are
considered to be Class B; and U.S. Class C3 allotments and assignments
are considered to be Class B1.
Table 2 to Paragraph (b)--Minimum Distance Separation Requirements in Kilometers
[Canada]
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.6/10.8 MHz
Relation Co-channel 200 kHz 400 kHz 600 kHz (I.F.)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A1 to A1........................ 78 45 24 20 4
A1 to A......................... 131 78 44 40 7
A1 to B1........................ 164 98 57 53 9
A1 to B......................... 190 117 71 67 12
A1 to C1........................ 223 148 92 88 19
A1 to C......................... 227 162 103 99 26
A to A.......................... 151 98 51 42 10
A to B1......................... 184 119 64 55 12
A to B.......................... 210 137 78 69 15
A to C1......................... 243 168 99 90 22
A to C.......................... 247 182 110 101 29
B1 to B1........................ 197 131 70 57 24
B1 to B......................... 223 149 84 71 24
B1 to C1........................ 256 181 108 92 40
B1 to C......................... 259 195 116 103 40
B to B.......................... 237 164 94 74 24
B to C1......................... 271 195 115 95 40
B to C.......................... 274 209 125 106 40
C1 to C1........................ 292 217 134 101 48
[[Page 86]]
C1 to C......................... 302 230 144 111 48
C to C.......................... 306 241 153 113 48
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(3) Mexican border distance separation. Under the 1992 United
States-Mexico FM Broadcasting Agreement, any domestic U.S. assignment or
allotment within 320 kilometers (199 miles) of the common border must
either satisfy the contour overlap provisions set out in section 7.3 of
the Agreement or be separated from Mexican assignments or allotments by
not less than the distances given in Table 3 to this paragraph (b),
using the distance calculation methodology set out in the Agreement. The
minimum required distance separation between I.F. allotments and
assignments cannot be reduced. When applying Table 3--
(i) U.S. or Mexican assignments or allotments which have been
notified internationally as Class A are limited to a maximum of 3.0 kW
ERP at 100 meters HAAT, or the equivalent;
(ii) U.S. or Mexican assignments or allotments which have been
notified internationally as Class AA are limited to a maximum of 6.0 kW
ERP at 100 meters HAAT, or the equivalent;
(iii) U.S. Class C3 assignments or allotments are considered Class
B1;
(iv) U.S. Class C2 assignments or allotments are considered Class B;
(v) Class C1 assignments or allotments assume maximum facilities of
100 kW ERP at 300 meters HAAT. However, U.S. Class C1 stations may not,
in any event, exceed the domestic U.S. limit of 100 kW ERP at 299 meters
HAAT, or the equivalent; and
(vi) U.S. Class C0 assignments or allotments are considered Class C.
Table 3 to Paragraph (b)--Minimum Distance Separation Requirements in Kilometers
[Mexico]
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
400 kHz or 600 10.6 or 10.8
Relation Co-Channel 200 kHz kHz MHz (I.F.)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A to A.......................................... 100 61 25 8
A to AA......................................... 111 68 31 9
A to B1......................................... 138 88 48 11
A to B.......................................... 163 105 65 14
A to C1......................................... 196 129 74 21
A to C.......................................... 210 161 94 28
AA to AA........................................ 115 72 31 10
AA to B1........................................ 143 96 48 12
AA to B......................................... 178 125 69 15
AA to C1........................................ 200 133 75 22
AA to C......................................... 226 165 95 29
B1 to B1........................................ 175 114 50 14
B1 to B......................................... 211 145 71 17
B1 to C1........................................ 233 161 77 24
B1 to C......................................... 259 193 96 31
B to B.......................................... 237 164 65 20
B to C1......................................... 270 195 79 27
B to C.......................................... 270 215 98 35
C1 to C1........................................ 245 177 82 34
C1 to C......................................... 270 209 102 41
C to C.......................................... 290 228 105 48
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(c) The distances listed below apply only to allotments and
assignments on Channel 253 (98.5 MHz). The Commission will not accept
petitions to amend the Table of Allotments, applications for new
stations, or applications to change the channel or location of existing
assignments where the following
[[Page 87]]
minimum distances (between transmitter sites, in kilometers) from any TV
Channel 6 allotment or assignment are not met:
Minimum Distance Separation From TV Channel 6 (82-88 MHz)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
TV Zones II
FM Class TV Zone I & III
------------------------------------------------------------------------
A............................................. 17 22
B1............................................ 19 23
B............................................. 22 26
C3............................................ 19 23
C2............................................ 22 26
C1............................................ 29 33
C............................................. 36 41
------------------------------------------------------------------------
[48 FR 29504, June 27, 1983, as amended at 49 FR 10264, Mar. 20, 1984;
49 FR 19670, May 9, 1984; 49 FR 50047, Dec. 26, 1984; 51 FR 26250, July
22, 1986; 54 FR 14963, Apr. 14, 1989; 54 FR 16366, Apr. 24, 1989; 54 FR
19374, May 5, 1989; 54 FR 35338, Aug. 25, 1989; 56 FR 27426, June 14,
1991; 56 FR 57293, Nov. 8, 1991; 62 FR 50256, Sept. 25, 1997; 65 FR
79776, Dec. 20, 2000; 87 FR 15342, Mar. 18, 2022]
Sec. 73.208 Reference points and distance computations.
(a)(1) The following reference points must be used to determine
distance separation requirements when petitions to amend the Table of
Allotments (Sec. 73.202(b)) are considered:
(i) First, transmitter sites if authorized, or if proposed in
applications with cut-off protection pursuant to paragraph (a)(3) of
this section;
(ii) Second, reference coordinates designated by the FCC;
(iii) Third, coordinates listed in the United States Department of
Interior publication entitled Index to the National Atlas of the United
States of America; or
(iv) Last, coordinates of the main post office.
(The community's reference points for which the petition is
submitted will normally be the coordinates listed in the above
publication.)
(2) When the distance between communities is calculated using
community reference points and it does not meet the minimum separation
requirements of Sec. 73.207, the channel may still be allotted if a
transmitter site is available that would meet the minimum separation
requirements and still permit the proposed station to meet the minimum
field strength requirements of Sec. 73.315. A showing indicating the
availability of a suitable site should be sumitted with the petition. In
cases where a station is not authorized in a community or communities
and the proposed channel cannot meet the separation requirement a
showing should also be made indicating adequate distance between
suitable transmitter sites for all communities.
(3) Petitions to amend the Table of Allotments that do not meet
minimum distance separation requirements to transmitter sites specified
in pending applications will not be considered unless they are filed no
later than:
(i) The last day of a filing window if the application is for a new
FM facility or a major change in the non-reserved band and is filed
during a filing window established under section 73.3564(d)(3); or
(ii) The cut-off date established in a Commission Public Notice
under Sec. 73.3564(d) and 73.3573(e) if the application is for a new FM
facility or a major change in the reserved band; or
(iii) The date of receipt of all other types of FM applications. If
an application is amended so as to create a conflict with a petition for
rule making filed prior to the date the amendment is filed, the amended
application will be treated as if filed on the date of the amendment for
purposes of this paragraph (a)(3).
Note: If the filing of a conflicting FM application renders an
otherwise timely filed counterproposal unacceptable, the counterproposal
may be considered in the rulemaking proceeding if it is amended to
protect the site of the previously filed FM application within 15 days
after being placed on the Public Notice routinely issued by the staff
concerning the filing of counterproposals. No proposals involving
communities not already included in the proceeding can be introduced
during the reply comment period as a method of resolving conflicts. The
counterproponent is required to make a showing that, at the time it
filed the counterproposal, it did not know, and could not have known by
exercising due diligence, of the pendency of the conflicting FM
application.
(b) Station separations in licensing proceedings shall be determined
by the distance between the coordinates of the proposed transmitter site
in one community and
[[Page 88]]
(1) The coordinates of an authorized transmitter site for the
pertinent channel in the other community; or, where such transmitter
site is not available for use as a reference point,
(2) Reference coordinates designated by the FCC; or, if none are
designated,
(3) The coordinates of the other community as listed in the
publication listed in paragraph (a) of this section; or, if not
contained therein,
(4) The coordinates of the main post office of such other community.
(5) In addition, where there are pending applications in other
communities which, if granted, would have to be considered in
determining station separations, the coordinates of the transmitter
sites proposed in such applications must be used to determine whether
the requirements with respect to minimum separations between the
proposed stations in the respective cities have been met.
(c) The method given in this paragraph shall be used to compute the
distance between two reference points, except that, for computation of
distance involving stations in Canada and Mexico, the method for
distance computation specified in the applicable international agreement
shall be used instead. The method set forth in this paragraph is valid
only for distances not exceeding 475 km (295 miles).
(1) Convert the latitudes and longitudes of each reference point
from degree-minute-second format to degree-decimal format by dividing
minutes by 60 and seconds by 3600, then adding the results to degrees.
(2) Calculate the middle latitude between the two reference points
by averaging the two latitudes as follows:
ML = (LAT1dd + LAT2dd) / 2
(3) Calculate the number of kilometers per degree latitude
difference for the middle latitude calculated in paragraph (c)(2) as
follows:
KPDlat = 111.13209-0.56605 cos(2ML) + 0.00120 cos(4ML)
(4) Calculate the number of kilometers per degree longitude
difference for the middle latitude calculated in paragraph (c)(2) as
follows:
KPDlon = 111.41513 cos(ML)-0.09455 cos(3ML) + 0.00012
cos(5ML)
(5) Calculate the North-South distance in kilometers as follows:
NS = KPDlat(LAT1dd-LAT2dd)
(6) Calculate the East-West distance in kilometers as follows:
EW = KPDlon(LON1dd-LON2dd)
(7) Calculate the distance between the two reference points by
taking the square root of the sum of the squares of the East-West and
North-South distances as follows:
DIST = (NS\2\ + EW\2\)\0.5\
(8) Round the distance to the nearest kilometer.
(9) Terms used in this section are defined as follows:
(i) LAT1dd and LON1dd = the coordinates of the
first reference point in degree-decimal format.
(ii) LAT2dd and LON2dd = the coordinates of
the second reference point in degree-decimal format.
(iii) ML = the middle latitude in degree-decimal format.
(iv) KPDlat = the number of kilometers per degree of
latitude at a given middle latitude.
(v) KPDlon = the number of kilometers per degree of
longitude at a given middle latitude.
(vi) NS = the North-South distance in kilometers.
(vii) EW = the East-West distance in kilometers.
(viii) DIST = the distance between the two reference points, in
kilometers.
[28 FR 13623, Dec. 14, 1963, as amended at 29 FR 14116, Oct. 14, 1964;
48 FR 29505, June 27, 1983; 52 FR 37788, Oct. 9, 1987; 52 FR 39920, Oct.
26, 1987; 54 FR 9806, Mar. 8, 1989; 57 FR 36020, Aug. 12, 1992; 58 FR
38537, July 19, 1993]
Sec. 73.209 Protection from interference.
(a) Permittees and licensees of FM broadcast stations are not
protected from any interference which may be caused by the grant of a
new station, or of authority to modify the facilities of an existing
station, in accordance with the provisions of this subpart. However,
they are protected from interference caused by Class D (secondary)
noncommercial educational FM stations. See Sec. 73.509.
(b) The nature and extent of the protection from interference
afforded FM
[[Page 89]]
broadcast stations operating on Channels 221-300 is limited to that
which results when assignments are made in accordance with the rules in
this subpart.
(c) Permittees and licensees of FM stations are not protected from
interference which may be caused by the grant of a new LPFM station or
of authority to modify an existing LPFM station, except as provided in
subpart G of this part.
[43 FR 39715, Sept. 6, 1978 and 48 FR 29505, June 27, 1983; 54 FR 9802,
Mar. 8, 1989; 65 FR 7640, Feb. 15, 2000; 65 FR 67299, Nov. 9, 2000]
Sec. 73.210 Station classes.
(a) The rules applicable to a particular station, including minimum
and maximum facilities requirements, are determined by its class.
Possible class designations depend upon the zone in which the station's
transmitter is located, or proposed to be located. The zones are defined
in Sec. 73.205. Allotted station classes are indicated in the Table of
Allotments, Sec. 73.202. Class A, B1 and B stations may be authorized
in Zones I and I-A. Class A, C3, C2, C1, C0 and C stations may be
authorized in Zone II.
(b) The power and antenna height requirements for each class are set
forth in Sec. 73.211. If a station has an ERP and an antenna HAAT such
that it cannot be classified using the maximum limits and minimum
requirements in Sec. 73.211, its class shall be determined using the
following procedure:
(1) Determine the reference distance of the station using the
procedure in paragraph (b)(1)(i) of Sec. 73.211. If this distance is
less than or equal to 28 km, the station is Class A; otherwise,
(2) For a station in Zone I or Zone I-A, except for Puerto Rico and
the Virgin Islands:
(i) If this distance is greater than 28 km and less than or equal to
39 km, the station is Class B1.
(ii) If this distance is greater than 39 km and less than or equal
to 52 km, the station is Class B.
(3) For a station in Zone II:
(i) If this distance is greater than 28 km and less than or equal to
39 km, the station is Class C3.
(ii) If this distance is greater than 39 km and less than or equal
to 52 km, the station is Class C2.
(iii) If this distance is greater than 52 km and less than or equal
to 72 km, the station is Class C1.
(iv) If this distance is greater than 72 km and less than or equal
to 83 km, the station is Class C0.
(v) If this distance is greater than 83 km and less than or equal to
92 km, the station is Class C.
(4) For a station in Puerto Rico or the Virgin Islands:
(i) If this distance is less than or equal to 42 km, the station is
Class A.
(ii) If this distance is greater than 42 km and less than or equal
to 46 km, the station is Class B1.
(iii) If this distance is greater then 46 km and less than or equal
to 78 km, the station is Class B.
[52 FR 37788, Oct. 9, 1987; 52 FR 39920, Oct. 26, 1987, as amended at 54
FR 16367, Apr. 24, 1989; 54 FR 19374, May 5, 1989; 54 FR 35339, Aug. 25,
1989; 65 FR 79777, Dec. 20, 2000]
Sec. 73.211 Power and antenna height requirements.
(a) Minimum requirements. (1) Except as provided in paragraphs
(a)(3) and (b)(2) of this section, FM stations must operate with a
minimum effective radiated power (ERP) as follows:
(i) The minimum ERP for Class A stations is 0.1 kW.
(ii) The ERP for Class B1 stations must exceed 6 kW.
(iii) The ERP for Class B stations must exceed 25 kW.
(iv) The ERP for Class C3 stations must exceed 6 kW.
(v) The ERP for Class C2 stations must exceed 25 kW.
(vi) The ERP for Class C1 stations must exceed 50 kW.
(vii) The minimum ERP for Class C and C0 stations is 100 kW.
(2) Class C0 stations must have an antenna height above average
terrain (HAAT) of at least 300 meters (984 feet). Class C stations must
have an antenna height above average terrain (HAAT) of at least 451
meters (1480 feet).
(3) Stations of any class except Class A may have an ERP less than
that specified in paragraph (a)(1) of this section, provided that the
reference distance, determined in accordance with paragraph (b)(1)(i) of
this section, exceeds the distance to the class contour
[[Page 90]]
for the next lower class. Class A stations may have an ERP less than 100
watts provided that the reference distance, determined in accordance
with paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section, equals or exceeds 6
kilometers.
(b) Maximum limits. (1) Except for stations located in Puerto Rico
or the Virgin Islands, the maximum ERP in any direction, reference HAAT,
and distance to the class contour for each FM station class are listed
below:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Class
Reference contour
Station class Maximum ERP HAAT in distance
meters in
(ft.) kilometers
------------------------------------------------------------------------
A.................. 6 kW (7.8 dBk)............ 100 (328) 28
B1................. 25 kW (14.0 dBk).......... 100 (328) 39
B.................. 50 kW (17.0 dBk).......... 150 (492) 52
C3................. 25 kW (14.0 dBk).......... 100 (328) 39
C2................. 50 kW (17.0 dBk).......... 150 (492) 52
C1................. 100 kW (20.0 dBk)......... 299 (981) 72
C0................. 100 kW (20.0 dBk)......... 450 (1476) 83
C.................. 100 kW (20.0 dBk)......... 600 (1968) 92
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(i) The reference distance of a station is obtained by finding the
predicted distance to the 1mV/m contour using Figure 1 of Sec. 73.333
and then rounding to the nearest kilometer. Antenna HAAT is determined
using the procedure in Sec. 73.313. If the HAAT so determined is less
than 30 meters (100 feet), a HAAT of 30 meters must be used when finding
the predicted distance to the 1 mV/m contour.
(ii) If a station's ERP is equal to the maximum for its class, its
antenna HAAT must not exceed the reference HAAT, regardless of the
reference distance. For example, a Class A station operating with 6 kW
ERP may have an antenna HAAT of 100 meters, but not 101 meters, even
though the reference distance is 28 km in both cases.
(iii) Except as provided in paragraph (b)(3) of this section, no
station will be authorized in Zone I or I-A with an ERP equal to 50 kW
and a HAAT exceeding 150 meters. No station will be authorized in Zone
II with an ERP equal to 100 kW and a HAAT exceeding 600 meters.
(2) If a station has an antenna HAAT greater than the reference HAAT
for its class, its ERP must be lower than the class maximum such that
the reference distance does not exceed the class contour distance. If
the antenna HAAT is so great that the station's ERP must be lower than
the minimum ERP for its class (specified in paragraphs (a)(1) and (a)(3)
of this section), that lower ERP will become the minimum for that
station.
(3) For stations located in Puerto Rico or the Virgin Islands, the
maximum ERP in any direction, reference HAAT, and distance to the class
contour for each FM station class are listed below:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Class
Reference contour
Station class Maximum ERP HAAT in distance
meters in
(ft.) kilometers
------------------------------------------------------------------------
A.................. 6kW (7.8 dBk)............. 240 (787) 42
B1................. 25kW (14.0 dBk)........... 150 (492) 46
B.................. 50kW (17.0 dBk)........... 472 (1549) 78
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(c) Existing stations. Stations authorized prior to March 1, 1984
that do not conform to the requirements of this section may continue to
operate as authorized. Stations operating with facilities in excess of
those specified in paragraph (b) of this section may not increase their
effective radiated powers or extend their 1 mV/m field strength contour
beyond the location permitted by their present authorizations. The
provisions of this section will not apply to applications to increase
facilities for those stations operating with less than the minimum power
specified in paragraph (a) of this section.
(d) Existing Class C stations below minimum antenna HAAT. Class C
stations authorized prior to January 19, 2001 that do not meet the
minimum antenna HAAT specified in paragraph (a)(2) of this section for
Class C stations may continue to operate as authorized subject to the
reclassification procedures set forth in Note 4 to Sec. 73.3573.
[53 FR 17042, May 13, 1988, as amended at 54 FR 16367, Apr. 24, 1989; 54
FR 19374, May 5, 1989; 54 FR 35339, Aug. 25, 1989; 65 FR 79777, Dec. 20,
2000]
Sec. 73.212 Administrative changes in authorizations.
(a) In the issuance of FM broadcast station authorizations, the
Commission will specify the transmitter output power and effective
radiated power in accordance with the following tabulation:
[[Page 91]]
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rounded
out to
nearest
Power (watts or kW) figure
(watts or
kW)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 to 3...................................................... .05
3 to 10..................................................... .1
10 to 30.................................................... .5
30 to 100................................................... 1
100 to 300.................................................. 5
300 to 1,000................................................ 10
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(b) Antenna heights above average terrain will be rounded out to the
nearest meter.
[28 FR 13623, Dec. 14, 1963, as amended at 48 FR 29506, June 27, 1983]
Sec. 73.213 Grandfathered short-spaced stations.
(a) Stations at locations authorized prior to November 16, 1964,
that did not meet the separation distances required by Sec. 73.207 and
have remained continuously short-spaced since that time may be modified
or relocated with respect to such short-spaced stations, provided that
(i) any area predicted to receive interference lies completely within
any area currently predicted to receive co-channel or first-adjacent
channel interference as calculated in accordance with paragraph (a)(1)
of this section, or that (ii) a showing is provided pursuant to
paragraph (a)(2) of this section that demonstrates that the public
interest would be served by the proposed changes.
(1) The F(50,50) curves in Figure 1 of Sec. 73.333 are to be used
in conjunction with the proposed effective radiated power and antenna
height above average terrain, as calculated pursuant to Sec. 73.313(c),
(d)(2) and (d)(3), using data for as many radials as necessary, to
determine the location of the desired (service) field strength. The
F(50,10) curves in Figure 1a of Sec. 73.333 are to be used in
conjunction with the proposed effective radiated power and antenna
height above average terrain, as calculated pursuant to Sec. 73.313(c),
(d)(2) and (d)(3), using data for as many radials as necessary, to
determine the location of the undesired (interfering) field strength.
Predicted interference is defined to exist only for locations where the
desired (service) field strength exceeds 0.5 mV/m (54 dBu) for a Class B
station, 0.7 mV/m (57 dBu) for a Class B1 station, and 1 mV/m (60 dBu)
for any other class of station.
(i) Co-channel interference is predicted to exist, for the purpose
of this section, at all locations where the undesired (interfering
station) F(50,10) field strength exceeds a value 20 dB below the desired
(service) F(50,50) field strength of the station being considered (e.g.,
where the protected field strength is 60 dBu, the interfering field
strength must be 40 dBu or more for predicted interference to exist).
(ii) First-adjacent channel interference is predicted to exist, for
the purpose of this section, at all locations where the undesired
(interfering station) F(50,10) field strength exceeds a value 6 dB below
the desired (service) F(50,50) field strength of the station being
considered (e.g., where the protected field strength is 60 dBu, the
interfering field strength must be 54 dBu or more for predicted
interference to exist).
(2) For co-channel and first-adjacent channel stations, a showing
that the public interest would be served by the changes proposed in an
application must include exhibits demonstrating that the total area and
population subject to co-channel or first-adjacent channel interference,
caused and received, would be maintained or decreased. In addition, the
showing must include exhibits demonstrating that the area and the
population subject to co-channel or first-adjacent channel interference
caused by the proposed facility to each short-spaced station
individually is not increased. In all cases, the applicant must also
show that any area predicted to lose service as a result of new co-
channel or first-adjacent-channel interference has adequate aural
service remaining. For the purpose of this section, adequate service is
defined as 5 or more aural services (AM or FM).
(3) For co-channel and first-adjacent-channel stations, a copy of
any application proposing interference caused in any areas where
interference is not currently caused must be served upon the licensee(s)
of the affected short-spaced station(s).
[[Page 92]]
(4) For stations covered by this paragraph (a), there are no
distance separation or interference protection requirements with respect
to second-adjacent and third-adjacent channel short-spacings that have
existed continuously since November 16, 1964.
(b) Stations at locations authorized prior to May 17, 1989, that did
not meet the IF separation distances required by Sec. 73.207 and have
remained short-spaced since that time may be modified or relocated
provided that the overlap area of the two stations' 36 mV/m field
strength contours is not increased.
(c) Short spacings involving at least one Class A allotment or
authorization. Stations that became short spaced on or after November
16, 1964 (including stations that do not meet the minimum distance
separation requirements of paragraph (c)(1) of this section and that
propose to maintain or increase their existing distance separations) may
be modified or relocated in accordance with paragraph (c)(1) or (c)(2)
of this section, except that this provision does not apply to stations
that became short spaced by grant of applications filed after October 1,
1989, or filed pursuant to Sec. 73.215. If the reference coordinates of
an allotment are short spaced to an authorized facility or another
allotment (as a result of the revision of Sec. 73.207 in the Second
Report and Order in MM Docket No. 88-375), an application for the
allotment may be authorized, and subsequently modified after grant, in
accordance with paragraph (c)(1) or (c)(2) of this section only with
respect to such short spacing. No other stations will be authorized
pursuant to these paragraphs.
(1) Applications for authorization under requirements equivalent to
those of prior rules. Each application for authority to operate a Class
A station with no more than 3000 watts ERP and 100 meters antenna HAAT
(or equivalent lower ERP and higher antenna HAAT based on a class
contour distance of 24 km) must specify a transmitter site that meets
the minimum distance separation requirements in this paragraph. Each
application for authority to operate a Class A station with more than
3000 watts ERP (up to a maximum of 5800 watts), but with an antenna HAAT
lower than 100 meters such that the distance to the predicted 0.05 mV/m
(34 dB[micro]V/m) F(50,10) field strength contour does not exceed 98 km
must specify a transmitter site that meets the minimum distance
separation requirements in this paragraph. Each application for
authority to operate an FM station of any class other than Class A must
specify a transmitter site that meets the minimum distance separation
requirements in this paragraph with respect to Class A stations
operating pursuant to this paragraph or paragraph (c)(2) of this
section, and that meets the minimum distance separation requirements of
Sec. 73.207 with respect to all other stations.
Minimum Distance Separation Requirements in Kilometers (miles)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Relation Co-channel 200 kHz 400/600 kHz 10.6/10.8 MHz
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A to A.............................. 105 (65) 64 (40) 27 (17) 8 (5)
A to B1............................. 138 (86) 88 (55) 48 (30) 11 (6)
A to B.............................. 163 (101) 105 (65) 69 (43) 14 (9)
A to C3............................. 138 (86) 84 (52) 42 (26) 11 (6)
A to C2............................. 163 (101) 105 (65) 55 (34) 14 (9)
A to C1............................. 196 (122) 129 (80) 74 (46) 21 (13)
A to C.............................. 222 (138) 161 (100) 94 (58) 28 (17)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(2) Applications for authorization of Class A facilities greater
than 3,000 watts ERP and 100 meters HAAT. Each application to operate a
Class A station with an ERP and HAAT such that the reference distance
would exceed 24 kilometers must contain an exhibit demonstrating the
consent of the licensee of each co-channel, first, second or third
adjacent channel station (for which the requirements of Sec. 73.207 are
not met) to a grant of that application. Each such application must
specify a transmitter site that meets the applicable IF-related channel
distance separation requirements of Sec. 73.207. Applications that
specify a new transmitter site which is short-spaced to an FM
[[Page 93]]
station other than another Class A station which is seeking a mutual
increase in facilities may be granted only if no alternative fully-
spaced site or less short-spaced site is available. Licensees of Class A
stations seeking mutual increases in facilities need not show that a
fully spaced site or less short-spaced site is available. Applications
submitted pursuant to the provisions of this paragraph may be granted
only if such action is consistent with the public interest.
[52 FR 37789, Oct. 9, 1987, as amended at 54 FR 14964, Apr. 14, 1989; 54
FR 35339, Aug. 25, 1989; 56 FR 27426, June 14, 1991; 62 FR 50521, Sept.
26, 1997; 63 FR 33876, June 22, 1998]
Sec. 73.215 Contour protection for short-spaced assignments.
The Commission will accept applications that specify short-spaced
antenna locations (locations that do not meet the domestic co-channel
and adjacent channel minimum distance separation requirements of Sec.
73.207); Provided That, such applications propose contour protection, as
defined in paragraph (a) of this section, with all short-spaced
assignments, applications and allotments, and meet the other applicable
requirements of this section. Each application to be processed pursuant
to this section must specifically request such processing on its face,
and must include the necessary exhibit to demonstrate that the requisite
contour protection will be provided. Such applications may be granted
when the Commission determines that such action would serve the public
interest, convenience, and necessity.
(a) Contour protection. Contour protection, for the purpose of this
section, means that on the same channel and on the first, second and
third adjacent channels, the predicted interfering contours of the
proposed station do not overlap the predicted protected contours of
other short-spaced assignments, applications and allotments, and the
predicted interfering contours of other short-spaced assignments,
applications and allotments do not overlap the predicted protected
contour of the proposed station.
(1) The protected contours, for the purpose of this section, are
defined as follows. For all Class B and B1 stations on Channels 221
through 300 inclusive, the F(50,50) field strengths along the protected
contours are 0.5 mV/m (54 dB[micro]) and 0.7 mV/m (57 dB[micro]),
respectively. For all other stations, the F(50,50) field strength along
the protected contour is 1.0 mV/m (60 dB[micro]).
(2) The interfering contours, for the purpose of this section, are
defined as follows. For co-channel stations, the F(50,10) field strength
along the interfering contour is 20 dB lower than the F(50,50) field
strength along the protected contour for which overlap is prohibited.
For first adjacent channel stations (200 kHz), the
F(50,10) field strength along the interfering contour is 6 dB lower than
the F(50,50) field strength along the protected contour for which
overlap is prohibited. For both second and third adjacent channel
stations (400 kHz and 600
kHz), the F(50,10) field strength along the interfering contour is 40 dB
higher than the F(50,50) field strength along the protected contour for
which overlap is prohibited.
(3) The locations of the protected and interfering contours of the
proposed station and the other short-spaced assignments, applications
and allotments must be determined in accordance with the procedures of
paragraphs (c), (d)(2) and (d)(3) of Sec. 73.313, using data for as
many radials as necessary to accurately locate the contours.
(4) Protected and interfering contours (in dBu) for stations in
Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin Islands are as follows:
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Station with protected contour
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Station with interfering contour Class A Class B1 Class B
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Interfering Protected Interfering Protected Interfering Protected
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Co-Channel:
Class A....................... 46 66 41 61 40 60
Class B1...................... 43 63 39 59 38 58
Class B....................... 45 65 41 61 41 61
1st Adj. Channel:
[[Page 94]]
Class A....................... 61 67 56 62 59 65
Class B1...................... 57 63 54 60 54 60
Class B....................... 62 68 56 62 57 63
2nd-3rd Adj. Channel:
Class A....................... 107 67 100 60 104 64
Class B1...................... 99 59 100 60 104 64
Class B....................... 94 54 94 54 104 64
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maximum permitted facilities assumed for each station pursuant to 47 CFR 73.211(b)(3):
6 kW ERP/240 meters HAAT--Class A
25 kW ERP/150 meters HAAT--Class B1
50 kW ERP/472 meters HAAT--Class B
(b) Applicants requesting short-spaced assignments pursuant to this
section must take into account the following factors in demonstrating
that contour protection is achieved:
(1) The ERP and antenna HAAT of the proposed station in the
direction of the contours of other short-spaced assignments,
applications and allotments. If a directional antenna is proposed, the
pattern of that antenna must be used to calculate the ERP in particular
directions. See Sec. 73.316 for additional requirements for directional
antennas.
(2) The ERP and antenna HAAT of other short-spaced assignments,
applications and allotments in the direction of the contours of the
proposed station. The ERP and antenna HAATs in the directions of concern
must be determined as follows:
(i) For vacant allotments, contours are based on the presumed use,
at the allotment's reference point, of the maximum ERP that could be
authorized for the station class of the allotment, and antenna HAATs in
the directions of concern that would result from a non-directional
antenna mounted at a standard eight-radial antenna HAAT equal to the
reference HAAT for the station class of the allotment.
(ii) For existing stations that were not authorized pursuant to this
section, including stations with authorized ERP that exceeds the maximum
ERP permitted by Sec. 73.211 for the standard eight-radial antenna HAAT
employed, and for applications not requesting authorization pursuant to
this section, contours are based on the presumed use of the maximum ERP
for the applicable station class (as specified in Sec. 73.211), and the
antenna HAATs in the directions of concern that would result from a non-
directional antenna mounted at a standard eight-radial antenna HAAT
equal to the reference HAAT for the applicable station class, without
regard to any other restrictions that may apply (e.g. zoning laws, FAA
constraints, application of Sec. 73.213).
(iii) For stations authorized pursuant to this section, except
stations with authorized ERP that exceeds the maximum ERP permitted by
Sec. 73.211 for the standard eight-radial antenna HAAT employed,
contours are based on the use of the authorized ERP in the directions of
concern, and HAATs in the directions of concern derived from the
authorized standard eight-radial antenna HAAT. For stations with
authorized ERP that exceeds the maximum ERP permitted by Sec. 73.211
for the standard eight-radial antenna HAAT employed, authorized under
this section, contours are based on the presumed use of the maximum ERP
for the applicable station class (as specified in Sec. 73.211), and
antenna HAATs in the directions of concern that would result from a non-
directional antenna mounted at a standard eight-radial antenna HAAT
equal to the reference HAAT for the applicable station class, without
regard to any other restrictions that may apply.
(iv) For applications containing a request for authorization
pursuant to this section, except for applications to continue operation
with authorized ERP that exceeds the maximum ERP permitted by Sec.
73.211 for the standard eight-radial antenna HAAT employed, contours are
based on the use of the
[[Page 95]]
proposed ERP in the directions of concern, and antenna HAATs in the
directions of concern derived from the proposed standard eight-radial
antenna HAAT. For applications to continue operation with an ERP that
exceeds the maximum ERP permitted by Sec. 73.211 for the standard
eight-radial HAAT employed, if processing is requested under this
section, contours are based on the presumed use of the maximum ERP for
the applicable station class (as specified in Sec. 73.211), and antenna
HAATs in the directions of concern that would result from a
nondirectional antenna mounted at a standard eight-radial antenna HAAT
equal to the reference HAAT for the applicable station class, without
regard to any other restrictions that may apply.
Note to paragraph (b): Applicants are cautioned that the antenna
HAAT in any particular direction of concern will not usually be the same
as the standard eight-radial antenna HAAT or the reference HAAT for the
station class.
(c) Applications submitted for processing pursuant to this section
are not required to propose contour protection of any assignment,
application or allotment for which the minimum distance separation
requirements of Sec. 73.207 are met, and may, in the directions of
those assignments, applications and allotments, employ the maximum ERP
permitted by Sec. 73.211 for the standard eight-radial antenna HAAT
employed.
(d) Stations authorized pursuant to this section may be subsequently
authorized on the basis of compliance with the domestic minimum
separation distance requirements of Sec. 73.207, upon filing of an FCC
Form 301 or FCC Form 340 (as appropriate) requesting a modification of
authorization.
(e) The Commission will not accept applications that specify a
short-spaced antenna location for which the following minimum distance
separation requirements, in kilometers (miles), are not met:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
400/600
Relation Co-Channel 200 kHz kHz
------------------------------------------------------------------------
A to A.............................. 92 (57) 49 (30) 25 (16)
A to B1............................. 119 (74) 72 (45) 42 (26)
A to B.............................. 143 (89) 96 (60) 63 (39)
A to C3............................. 119 (74) 72 (45) 36 (22)
A to C2............................. 143 (89) 89 (55) 49 (30)
A to C1............................. 178 (111) 111 (69) 69 (43)
A to C0............................. 193 (120) 130 (81) 80 (50)
A to C.............................. 203 (126) 142 (88) 89 (55)
B1 to B1............................ 143 (89) 96 (60) 44 (27)
B1 to B............................. 178 (111) 114 (71) 65 (40)
B1 to C3............................ 143 (89) 96 (60) 44 (27)
B1 to C2............................ 175 (109) 114 (71) 50 (31)
B1 to C1............................ 200 (124) 134 (83) 71 (44)
B1 to C0............................ 0215 (134) 153 (95) 81 (50)
B1 to C............................. 233 (145) 165 (103) 99 (61)
B to B.............................. 211 (131) 145 (90) 68 (42)
B to C3............................. 178 (111) 114 (70) 65 (40)
B to C2............................. 211 (131) 145 (90) 68 (42)
B to C1............................. 241 (150) 169 (105) 73 (45)
B to C0............................. 266 (165) 195 (121) 83 (52)
B to C.............................. 268 (163) 195 (121) 99 (61)
C3 to C3............................ 142 (88) 89 (55) 37 (23)
C3 to C2............................ 166 (103) 106 (66) 50 (31)
C3 to C1............................ 200 (124) 133 (83) 70 (43)
C3to C0............................. 215 (134) 152 (94) 81 (50)
C3 to C............................. 226 (140) 165 (103) 90 (56)
C2 to C2............................ 177 (110) 117 (73) 52 (32)
C2 to C1............................ 211 (131) 144 (90) 73 (45)
C2 to C0............................ 227 (141) 163 (101) 83 (52)
C2 to C............................. 237 (147) 176 (109) 96 (61)
C1 to C1............................ 224 (139) 158 (98) 76 (47)
C1 to C0............................ 239 (148) 176 (109) 88 (55)
C1 to C............................. 249 (155) 188 (117) 99 (61)
C0 to C0............................ 259 (161) 196 (122) 90 (56)
C0 to C............................. 270 (168) 207 (129 99 (61)
C to C.............................. 270 (168) 209 (130) 99 (61)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
[54 FR 9802, Mar. 8, 1989, as amended at 54 FR 35340, Aug. 25, 1989; 56
FR 57294, Nov. 8, 1991; 57 FR 46325, Oct. 8, 1992; 65 FR 79777, Dec. 20,
2000; 66 FR 8149, Jan. 29, 2001]
Sec. 73.220 Restrictions on use of channels.
(a) The frequency 89.1 MHz (channel 206) is revised in the New York
City metropolitan area for the use of the United Nations with the
equivalent of an antenna height of 150 meters (492 feet) above average
terrain and effective radiated power of 20 kWs, and the FCC will make no
assignments which would cause objectionable interference with such use.
(b) [Reserved]
[43 FR 45845, Oct. 4, 1978, as amended at 46 FR 50376, Oct. 13, 1981, 47
FR 30068, July 12, 1982; 48 FR 29507, June 27, 1983; 70 FR 46676, Aug.
10, 2005]
Sec. 73.232 Territorial exclusivity.
No licensee of an FM broadcast station shall have any arrangement
with a network organization which prevents or hinders another station
serving substantially the same area from broadcasting the network's
programs not taken by the former station, or which prevents or hinders
another station
[[Page 96]]
serving a substantially different area from broadcasting any program of
the network organization: Provided, however, That this section does not
prohibit arrangements under which the station is granted first call
within its primary service area upon the network's programs. The term
``network organization'' means any organization originating program
material, with or without commercial messages, and furnishing the same
to stations interconnected so as to permit simultaneous broadcast by all
or some of them. However, arrangements involving only stations under
common ownership, or only the rebroadcast by one station of programming
from another with no compensation other than a lump-sum payment by the
station rebroadcasting, are not considered arrangements with a network
organization. The term ``arrangement`` means any contract, arrangement
or understanding, express or implied.
[42 FR 16422, Mar. 28, 1977, as amended at 57 FR 48333, Oct. 23, 1992]
Sec. 73.258 Indicating instruments.
(a) Each FM broadcast station shall be equipped with indicating
instruments which conform with the specifications described in Sec.
73.1215 for determining power by the indirect method; for indicating the
relative amplitude of the transmission line radio frequency current,
voltage, or power; and with such other instruments as are necessary for
the proper adjustment, operation, and maintenance of the transmitting
system.
(b) The function of each instrument shall be clearly and permanently
shown in the instrument itself or on the panel immediately adjacent
thereto.
(c) In the event that any one of these indicating instruments
becomes defective when no substitute which conforms with the required
specifications is available, the station may be operated without the
defective instrument pending its repair or replacement for a period not
in excess of 60 days without further authority of the FCC: Provided
that, if the defective instrument is the transmission line meter of a
station which determines the output power by the direct method, the
operating power shall be determined by the indirect method in accordance
with Sec. 73.267(c) during the entire time the station is operated
without the transmission line meter.
(d) If conditions beyond the control of the licensee prevent the
restoration of the meter to service within the above allowed period, an
informal letter request in accordance with Sec. 73.3549 may be filed
with the FCC, Attention: Audio Division, Media Bureau, in Washington, DC
for such additional time as may be required to complete repairs of the
defective instrument.
[41 FR 36818, Sept. 1, 1976, as amended at 48 FR 44805, Sept. 30, 1983;
50 FR 32416, Aug. 12, 1985; 63 FR 33876, June 22, 1998; 67 FR 13231,
Mar. 21, 2002]
Sec. 73.267 Determining operating power.
(a) The operating power of each FM station is to be determined by
either the direct or indirect method.
(b) Direct method. The direct method of power determination for an
FM station uses the indications of a calibrated transmission line meter
(responsive to relative voltage, current, or power) located at the RF
output terminals of the transmitter. This meter must be calibrated
whenever there is any indication that the calibration is inaccurate or
whenever any component of the metering circuit is repaired or replaced.
The calibration must cover, as a minimum, the range from 90% to 105% of
authorized power. The meter calibration may be checked by measuring the
power at the transmitter terminals while either:
(1) Operating the transmitter into the transmitting antenna, and
determining actual operating power by the indirect method described in
Sec. 73.267(c); or
(2) Operating the transmitter into a load (of substantially zero
reactance and a resistance equal to the transmission line characteristic
impedance) and using an electrical device (within 5% accuracy) or temperature and coolant flow indicator
(within 4% accuracy) to determine the power.
(3) The calibration must cover, as a minimum, the range from 90% to
105% of authorized power and the meter must provide clear indications
which will permit maintaining the operating
[[Page 97]]
power within the prescribed tolerance or the meter shall be calibrated
to read directly in power units.
(c) Indirect method. The operating power is determined by the
indirect method by applying an appropriate factor to the input power to
the last radio-frequency power amplifier stage of the transmitter, using
the following formula:
Transmitter output power = Ep x Ip x F
Where:
Ep = DC input voltage of final radio stage.
Ip = Total DC input current of final radio stage.
F = Efficiency factor.
(1) If the above formula is not appropriate for the design of the
transmitter final amplifier, use a formula specified by the transmitter
manufacturer with other appropriate operating parameters.
(2) The value of the efficiency factor, F, established for the
authorized transmitter output power is to be used for maintaining the
operating power, even though there may be some variation in F over the
power operating range of the transmitter.
(3) The value of F is to be determined and a record kept thereof by
one of the following procedures listed in order of preference:
(i) Using the most recent measurement data for calibration of the
transmission line meter according to the procedures described in
paragraph (b) of this section or the most recent measurements made by
the licensee establishing the value of F. In the case of composite
transmitters or those in which the final amplifier stages have been
modified pursuant to FCC approval, the licensee must furnish the FCC and
also retain with the station records the measurement data used as a
basis for determining the value of F.
(ii) Using measurement data shown on the transmitter manufacturer's
test data supplied to the licensee; Provided, That measurements were
made at the authorized frequency and transmitter output power.
(iii) Using the transmitter manufacturer's measurement data
submitted to the FCC for type acceptance and as shown in the instruction
book supplied to the licensee.
(Secs. 4, 5, 303, 48 Stat., as amended, 1066, 1068, 1082 (47 U.S.C. 154,
155, 303))
[44 FR 58731, Oct. 11, 1979, as amended at 45 FR 28141, Apr. 28, 1980;
48 FR 38479, Aug. 24, 1983; 49 FR 4210, Feb. 3, 1984; 49 FR 49851, Dec.
24, 1984]
Sec. 73.277 Permissible transmissions.
(a) No FM broadcast licensee or permittee shall enter into any
agreement, arrangement or understanding, oral or written, whereby it
undertakes to supply, or receives consideration for supplying, on its
main channel a functional music, background music, or other subscription
service (including storecasting) for reception in the place or places of
business of any subscriber.
(b) The transmission (or interruption) of radio energy in the FM
broadcast band is permissible only pursuant to a station license,
program test authority, construction permit, or experimental
authorization and the provisions of this part of the rules.
[29 FR 7471, June 10, 1964. Redesignated at 39 FR 38655, Nov. 1, 1974
and amended at 48 FR 28454, June 22, 1983]
Sec. 73.293 Use of FM multiplex subcarriers.
Licensees of FM broadcast stations may transmit, without further
authorization, subcarrier communication services in accordance with the
provisions of Sec. Sec. 73.319 and 73.322.
[51 FR 17028, May 8, 1986]
Sec. 73.295 FM subsidiary communications services.
(a) Subsidiary communication services are those transmitted on a
subcarrier within the FM baseband signal, but do not include services
which enhance the main program broadcast service, or exclusively relate
to station operations (see Sec. 73.293). Subsidiary communications
include, but are not limited to services such as functional music,
specialized foreign language programs, radio reading services, utility
load management, market and financial data and news, paging and calling,
traffic control signal switching, bilingual television audio, and point
to point or multipoint messages.
[[Page 98]]
(b) FM subsidiary communications services that are common carrier in
nature are subject to common carrier regulation. Licensees operating
such services are required to apply to the FCC for the appropriate
authorization and to comply with all policies and rules applicable to
the service. Responsibility for making the initial determinations of
whether a particular activity is common carriage rests with the FM
station licensee. Initial determinations by licensees are subject to FCC
examination and may be reviewed at the FCC's discretion.
(c) Subsidiary communications services are of a secondary nature
under the authority of the FM station authorization, and the authority
to provide such communications services may not be retained or
transferred in any manner separate from the station's authorization. The
grant or renewal of an FM station permit or license is not furthered or
promoted by proposed or past services. The permittee or licensee must
establish that the broadcast operation is in the public interest wholly
apart from the subsidiary communications services provided.
(d) The station identification, delayed recording and sponsor
identification announcements required by Sec. Sec. 73.1201, 73.1208,
and 73.1212 are not applicable to material transmitted under an SCA.
(e) The licensee or permittee must retain control over all material
transmitted in a broadcast mode via the station's facilities, with the
right to reject any material that it deems inappropriate or undesirable.
[48 FR 28454, June 22, 1983, as amended at 48 FR 44805, Sept. 30, 1983;
49 FR 33663, Aug. 15, 1984; 50 FR 32416, Aug. 12, 1985; 57 FR 48333,
Oct. 23, 1992]
Sec. 73.297 FM stereophonic sound broadcasting.
(a) An FM broadcast station may, without specific authority from the
FCC, transmit stereophonic (biphonic, quadraphonic, etc.) sound programs
upon installation of stereophonic sound transmitting equipment under the
provisions of Sec. Sec. 2.1001, 73.322, and 73.1590 of the Rules. Prior
to commencement of stereophonic sound broadcasting, equipment
performance measurements must be made to ensure that the transmitted
signal complies with all applicable rules and standards.
(b) Each licensee or permittee engaging in multichannel broadcasting
must measure the pilot subcarrier frequency as often as necessary to
ensure that it is kept at all times within 2 Hz of the authorized
frequency.
[48 FR 28454, June 22, 1983, and 48 FR 38479, Aug. 24, 1983]
Sec. 73.310 FM technical definitions.
(a) Frequency modulation. Antenna height above average terrain
(HAAT). HAAT is calculated by: determining the average of the antenna
heights above the terrain from 3 to 16 kilometers (2 to 10 miles) from
the antenna for the eight directions evenly spaced for each 45[deg] of
azimuth starting with True North (a different antenna height will be
determined in each direction from the antenna): and computing the
average of these separate heights. In some cases less than eight
directions may be used. (See Sec. 73.313(d).) Where circular or
elliptical polarization is used, the antenna height above average
terrain must be based upon the height of the radiation of the antenna
that transmits the horizontal component of radiation.
Antenna power gain. The square of the ratio of the root-mean-square
(RMS) free space field strength produced at 1 kilometer in the
horizontal plane in millivolts per meter for 1 kW antenna input power to
221.4 mV/m. This ratio is expressed in decibels (dB). If specified for a
particular direction, antenna power gain is based on that field strength
in the direction only.
Auxiliary facility. An auxiliary facility is an antenna separate
from the main facility's antenna, permanently installed on the same
tower or at a different location, from which a station may broadcast for
short periods without prior Commission authorization or notice to the
Commission while the main facility is not in operation (e.g., where
tower work necessitates turning off the main antenna or where lightning
has caused damage to the main antenna or transmission system) (See Sec.
73.1675).
Center frequency. The term ``center frequency'' means:
[[Page 99]]
(1) The average frequency of the emitted wave when modulated by a
sinusoidal signal.
(2) The frequency of the emitted wave without modulation.
Composite antenna pattern. The composite antenna pattern is a
relative field horizontal plane pattern for 360 degrees of azimuth, for
which the value at a particular azimuth is the greater of the
horizontally polarized or vertically polarized component relative field
values. The composite antenna pattern is normalized to a maximum of
unity (1.000) relative field.
Composite baseband signal. A signal which is composed of all program
and other communications signals that frequency modulates the FM
carrier.
Effective radiated power. The term ``effective radiated power''
means the product of the antenna power (transmitter output power less
transmission line loss) times: (1) The antenna power gain, or (2) the
antenna field gain squared. Where circular or elliptical polarization is
employed, the term effective radiated power is applied separately to the
horizontal and vertical components of radiation. For allocation
purposes, the effective radiated power authorized is the horizontally
polarized component of radiation only.
Equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP). The term
``equivalent isotropically radiated power (also known as ``effective
radiated power above isotropic) means the product of the antenna input
power and the antenna gain in a given direction relative to an isotropic
antenna.
FM Blanketing. Blanketing is that form of interference to the
reception of other broadcast stations which is caused by the presence of
an FM broadcast signal of 115 dBu (562 mV/m) or greater signal strength
in the area adjacent to the antenna of the transmitting station. The 115
dBu contour is referred to as the blanketing contour and the area within
this contour is referred to as the blanketing area.
FM broadcast band. The band of frequencies extending from 88 to 108
MHz, which includes those assigned to noncommercial educational
broadcasting.
FM broadcast channel. A band of frequencies 200 kHz wide and
designated by its center frequency. Channels for FM broadcast stations
begin at 88.1 MHz and continue in successive steps of 200 kHz to and
including 107.9 MHz.
FM broadcast station. A station employing frequency modulation in
the FM broadcast band and licensed primarily for the transmission of
radiotelephone emissions intended to be received by the general public.
Field strength. The electric field strength in the horizontal plane.
Free space field strength. The field strength that would exist at a
point in the absence of waves reflected from the earth or other
reflecting objects.
Frequency departure. The amount of variation of a carrier frequency
or center frequency from its assigned value.
Frequency deviation. The peak difference between modulated wave and
the carrier frequency.
Frequency modulation. A system of modulation where the instantaneous
radio frequency varies in proportion to the instantaneous amplitude of
the modulating signal (amplitude of modulating signal to be measured
after pre-emphasis, if used) and the instantaneous radio frequency is
independent of the frequency of the modulating signal.
Frequency swing. The peak difference between the maximum and the
minimum values of the instantaneous frequency of the carrier wave during
modulation.
Multiplex transmission. The term ``multiplex transmission'' means
the simultaneous transmission of two or more signals within a single
channel. Multiplex transmission as applied to FM broadcast stations
means the transmission of facsimile or other signals in addition to the
regular broadcast signals.
Percentage modulation. The ratio of the actual frequency deviation
to the frequency deviation defined as 100% modulation, expressed in
percentage. For FM broadcast stations, a frequency deviation of 75kHz is defined as 100% modulation.
(b) Stereophonic sound broadcasting. Cross-talk. An undesired signal
occurring in one channel caused by an electrical signal in another
channel.
FM stereophonic broadcast. The transmission of a stereophonic
program by a single FM broadcast station utilizing
[[Page 100]]
the main channel and a stereophonic subchannel.
Left (or right) signal. The electrical output of a microphone or
combination of microphones placed so as to convey the intensity, time,
and location of sounds originating predominately to the listener's left
(or right) of the center of the performing area.
Left (or right) stereophonic channel. The left (or right) signal as
electrically reproduced in reception of FM stereophonic broadcasts.
Main channel. The band of frequencies from 50 to 15,000 Hz which
frequency-modulate the main carrier.
Pilot subcarrier. A subcarrier that serves as a control signal for
use in the reception of FM stereophonic sound broadcasts.
Stereophonic separation. The ratio of the electrical signal caused
in sound channel A to the signal caused in sound channel B by the
transmission of only a channel B signal. Channels A and B may be any two
channels of a stereophonic sound broadcast transmission system.
Stereophonic sound. The audio information carried by plurality of
channels arranged to afford the listener a sense of the spatial
distribution of sound sources. Stereophonic sound broadcasting includes,
but is not limited to, biphonic (two channel), triphonic (three channel)
and quadrophonic (four channel) program services.
Stereophonic sound subcarrier. A subcarrier within the FM broadcast
baseband used for transmitting signals for stereophonic sound reception
of the main broadcast program service.
Stereophonic sound subchannel. The band of frequencies from 23 kHz
to 99 kHz containing sound subcarriers and their associated sidebands.
(c) Visual transmissions. Communications or message transmitted on a
subcarrier intended for reception and visual presentation on a viewing
screen, teleprinter, facsimile printer, or other form of graphic display
or record.
(d) Control and telemetry transmissions. Signals transmitted on a
multiplex subcarrier intended for any form of control and switching
functions or for equipment status data and aural or visual alarms.
[28 FR 13623, Dec. 14, 1963, as amended at 39 FR 10575, Mar. 21, 1974;
44 FR 36038, June 20, 1979; 48 FR 28454, June 22, 1983; 48 FR 29507,
June 27, 1983; 48 FR 37216, Aug. 17, 1983; 49 FR 45145, Nov. 15, 1984;
57 FR 48333, Oct. 23, 1992; 62 FR 51058, Sept. 30, 1997]
Sec. 73.311 Field strength contours.
(a) Applications for FM broadcast authorizations must show the field
strength contours required by FCC Form 301 or FCC Form 340, as
appropriate.
(b) The field strength contours provided for in this section shall
be considered for the following purposes only:
(1) In the estimation of coverage resulting from the selection of a
particular transmitter site by an applicant for an FM broadcast station.
(2) In connection with problems of coverage arising out of
application of Sec. 73.3555.
(3) In determining compliance with Sec. 73.315(a) concerning the
minimum field strength to be provided over the principal community to be
served.
(4) In determining compliance with Sec. 73.215 concerning contour
protection.
[28 FR 13623, Dec. 14, 1963, as amended at 31 FR 10126, July 27, 1966;
32 FR 11471, Aug. 9, 1967; 52 FR 10570, Apr. 2, 1987; 54 FR 9802, Mar.
8, 1989]
Sec. 73.312 Topographic data.
(a) In the preparation of the profile graphs previously described,
and in determining the location and height above mean sea level of the
antenna site, the elevation or contour intervals shall be taken from
United States Geological Survey Topographic Quadrangle Maps, United
States Army Corps of Engineers Maps or Tennessee Valley Authority maps,
whichever is the latest, for all areas for which such maps are
available. If such maps are not published for the area in question, the
next best topographic information should be used. Topographic data may
sometimes be obtained from state and municipal agencies. The data from
the Sectional Aeronautical Charts (including bench marks) or railroad
depot elevations and highway elevations from road maps
[[Page 101]]
may be used where no better information is available. In cases where
limited topographic data can be obtained, use may be made of an
altimeter in a car driven along roads extending generally radially from
the transmitter site.
(b) The Commission will not ordinarily require the submission of
topographical maps for areas beyond 24 km (15 miles) from the antenna
site, but the maps must include the principal city or cities to be
served. If it appears necessary, additional data may be requested.
(c) The U.S. Geological Survey Topography Quadrangle Sheets may be
obtained from the U.S. Geological Survey Department of the Interior,
Washington, DC 20240. The Sectional Aeronautical Charts are available
from the U.S. Coast and Geodetic Survey, Department of Commerce,
Washington, DC 20235. These maps may also be secured from branch offices
and from authorized agents or dealers in most principal cities.
(d) In lieu of maps, the average terrain elevation may be computer
generated except in cases of dispute, using elevations from a 30 second,
point or better topographic data file. The file must be identified and
the data processed for intermediate points along each radial using
linear interpolation techniques. The height above mean sea level of the
antenna site must be obtained manually using appropriate topographic
maps.
[28 FR 13623, Dec. 14, 1963, as amended at 31 FR 10126, July 27, 1966;
49 FR 48937, Dec. 17, 1984; 58 FR 44950, Aug. 25, 1993; 63 FR 33877,
June 22, 1998]
Sec. 73.313 Prediction of coverage.
(a) All predictions of coverage made pursuant to this section shall
be made without regard to interference and shall be made only on the
basis of estimated field strengths.
(b) Predictions of coverage shall be made only for the same purposes
as relate to the use of field strength contours as specified in Sec.
73.311.
(c) In predicting the distance to the field strength contours, the
F(50,50) field strength chart, Figure 1 of Sec. 73.333 must be used.
The 50% field strength is defined as that value exceeded for 50% of the
time.
(1) The F(50,50) chart gives the estimated 50% field strengths
exceeded at 50% of the locations in dB above 1 uV/m. The chart is based
on an effective power radiated from a half-wave dipole antenna in free
space, that produces an unattenuated field strength at 1 kilometer of
about 107 dB above 1 uV/m (221.4 mV/m).
(2) To use the chart for other ERP values, convert the ordinate
scale by the appropriate adjustment in dB. For example, the ordinate
scale for an ERP of 50 kW should be adjusted by 17 dB [10 log (50 kW) =
17 dBk], and therefore a field strength of 60 dBu would correspond to
the field strength value at (60-17 =) 44 dBu on the chart. When
predicting the distance to field strength contours, use the maximum ERP
of the main radiated lobe in the pertinent azimuthal direction (do not
account for beam tilt). When predicting field strengths over areas not
in the plane of the maximum main lobe, use the ERP in the direction of
such areas, determined by considering the appropriate vertical radiation
pattern.
(d) The antenna height to be used with this chart is the height of
the radiation center of the antenna above the average terrain along the
radial in question. In determining the average elevation of the terrain,
the elevations between 3 and 16 kilometers from the antenna site are
used.
(1) Profile graphs must be drawn for eight radials beginning at the
antenna site and extending 16 kilometers therefrom. The radials should
be drawn for each 45[deg] of azimuth starting with True North. At least
one radial must include the principal community to be served even though
it may be more than 16 kilometers from the antenna site. However, in the
event none of the evenly spaced radials include the principal community
to be served, and one or more such radials are drawn in addition, these
radials must not be used in computing the antenna height above average
terrain.
(2) Where the 3 to 16 kilometers portion of a radial extends in
whole or in part over a large body of water or extends over foreign
territory but the 50
[[Page 102]]
uV/m (34 dBu) contour encompasses land area within the United States
beyond the 16 kilometers portion of the radial, the entire 3 to 16
kilometers portion of the radial must be included in the computation of
antenna height above average terrain. However, where the 50 uV/m (34
dBu) contour does not so encompass United States land area, and (i) the
entire 3 to 16 kilometers portion of the radial extends over large
bodies of water or over foreign territory, such radial must be
completely omitted from the computation of antenna height above average
terrain, and (ii) where a part of the 3 to 16 kilometers portion of a
radial extends over large bodies of water or foreign territory, only
that part of the radial extending from 3 kilometers to the outermost
portion of land in the United States covered by the radial used must be
used in the computation of antenna height above average terrain.
(3) The profile graph for each radial should be plotted by contour
intervals of from 12 to 30 meters and, where the data permits, at least
50 points of elevation (generally uniformly spaced) should be used for
each radial. In instances of very rugged terrain where the use of
contour intervals of 30 meters would result in several points in a short
distance, 60 or 120 meter contour intervals may be used for such
distances. On the other hand, where the terrain is uniform or gently
sloping the smallest contour interval indicated on the topographic map
should be used, although only relatively few points may be available.
The profile graph should indicate the topography accurately for each
radial, and the graphs should be plotted with the distance in kilometers
as the abscissa and the elevation in meters above mean sea level as the
ordinate. The profile graphs should indicate the source of the
topographical data used. The graph should also show the elevation of the
center of the radiating system. The graph may be plotted either on
rectangular coordinate paper or on special paper that shows the
curvature of the earth. It is not necessary to take the curvature of the
earth into consideration in this procedure as this factor is taken care
of in the charts showing signal strengths. The average elevation of the
13 kilometer distance between 3 and 16 kilometers from the antenna site
should then be determined from the profile graph for each radial. This
may be obtained by averaging a large number of equally spaced points, by
using a planimeter, or by obtaining the median elevation (that exceeded
for 50% of the distance) in sectors and averaging those values.
(4) Examples of HAAT calculations:
(i) The heights above average terrain on the eight radials are as
follows:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Meters
------------------------------------------------------------------------
0[deg]........................................................ 120
45[deg]....................................................... 255
90[deg]....................................................... 185
135[deg]...................................................... 90
180[deg]...................................................... -10
225[deg]...................................................... -85
270[deg]...................................................... 40
315[deg]...................................................... 85
------------------------------------------------------------------------
The antenna height above terrain (defined in Sec. 73.310(a)) is
computed as follows:
(120 + 255 + 185 + 90 - 10 - 85 + 40 + 85) / 8 = 85 meters.
(ii) Same as paragraph (d)(4)(i) of this section, except the 0[deg]
radial is entirely over sea water. The antenna height above average
terrain is computed as follows (note that the divisor is 7 not 8):
(255 + 185 + 90 - 10 - 85 + 40 + 85) / 7 = 80 meters.
(iii) Same as paragraph (d)(4)(i) of this section, except that only
the first 10 kilometers of the 90[deg] radial are in the United States;
beyond 10 kilometers the 90[deg] radial is in a foreign country. The
height above average terrain of the 3 to 10 kilometer portion of the
90[deg] radial is 105 meters. The antenna height above average terrain
is computed as follows (note that the divisor is 8 not 7.5):
(120 + 255 + 105 + 90 - 10 - 85 + 40 + 85) / 8 = 75 meters.
(e) In cases where the terrain in one or more directions from the
antenna site departs widely from the average elevation of the 3 to 16
kilometer sector, the prediction method may indicate contour distances
that are different from what may be expected in practice. For example, a
mountain
[[Page 103]]
ridge may indicate the practical limit of service although the
prediction method may indicate otherwise. In such cases, the prediction
method should be followed, but a supplemental showing may be made
concerning the contour distances as determined by other means. Such
supplemental showings should describe the procedure used and should
include sample calculations. Maps of predicted coverage should include
both the coverage as predicted by the regular method and as predicted by
a supplemental method. When measurements of area are required, these
should include the area obtained by the regular prediction method and
the area obtained by the supplemental method. In directions where the
terrain is such that antenna heights less than 30 meters for the 3 to 16
kilometer sector are obtained, an assumed height of 30 meters must be
used for the prediction of coverage. However, where the actual contour
distances are critical factors, a supplemental showing of expected
coverage must be included together with a description of the method used
in predicting such coverage. In special cases, the FCC may require
additional information as to terrain and coverage.
(f) The effect of terrain roughness on the predicted field strength
of a signal at points distant from an FM transmitting antenna is assumed
to depend on the magnitude of a terrain roughness factor (h) which, for
a specific propagation path, is determined by the characteristics of a
segment of the terrain profile for that path 40 kilometers in length
located between 10 and 50 kilometers from the antenna. The terrain
roughness factor has a value equal to the distance, in meters, between
elevations exceeded by all points on the profile for 10% and 90%
respectively, of the length of the profile segment. (See Sec. 73.333,
Figure 4.)
(g) If the lowest field strength value of interest is initially
predicted to occur over a particular propagation path at a distance that
is less than 50 kilometers from the antenna, the terrain profile segment
used in the determination of terrain roughness factor over that path
must be that included between points 10 kilometers from the transmitter
and such lesser distances. No terrain roughness correction need be
applied when all field strength values of interest are predicted to
occur 10 kilometers or less from the transmitting antenna.
(h) Profile segments prepared for terrain roughness factor
determinations are to be plotted in rectangular coordinates, with no
less than 50 points evenly spaced within the segment using data obtained
from topographic maps with contour intervals of approximately 15 meters
(50 feet) or less if available.
(i) The field strength charts (Sec. 73.333, Figs. 1-1a) were
developed assuming a terrain roughness factor of 50 meters, which is
considered to be representative of average terrain in the United States.
Where the roughness factor for a particular propagation path is found to
depart appreciably from this value, a terrain roughness correction
([Delta]F) should be applied to field strength values along this path,
as predicted with the use of these charts. The magnitude and sign of
this correction, for any value of [Delta]h, may be determined from a
chart included in Sec. 73.333 as Figure 5.
(j) Alternatively, the terrain roughness correction may be computed
using the following formula:
[Delta]F = 1.9-0.03([Delta]h)(1 + f/300)
Where:
[Delta]F = terrain roughness correction in dB
[Delta]k = terrain roughness factor in meters
f = frequency of signal in MHz (MHz)
(Secs. 4, 5, 303, 48 Stat., as amended, 1066, 1068, 1082 (47 U.S.C. 154,
155, 303))
[28 FR 13623, Dec. 14, 1963, as amended at 40 FR 27678, July 1, 1975; 48
FR 29507, June 27, 1983; 52 FR 11655, Apr. 10, 1987; 52 FR 37789, Oct.
9, 1987; 57 FR 48333, Oct. 23, 1992; 63 FR 33877, June 22, 1998]
Effective Date Note: At 42 FR 25736, May 19, 1977, the effective
date of Sec. 73.313 paragraphs (i) and (j) was stayed indefinitely.
Sec. 73.314 Field strength measurements.
(a) Except as provided for in Sec. 73.209, FM broadcast stations
shall not be protected from any type of interference or propagation
effect. Persons desiring to submit testimony, evidence or data to the
Commission for the purpose of showing that the technical standards
contained in this subpart do not properly reflect the levels of any
given type
[[Page 104]]
of interference or propagation effect may do so only in appropriate rule
making proceedings concerning the amendment of such technical standards.
Persons making field strength measurements for formal submission to the
Commission in rule making proceedings, or making such measurements upon
the request of the Commission, shall follow the procedure for making and
reporting such measurements outlined in paragraph (b) of this section.
In instances where a showing of the measured level of a signal
prevailing over a specific community is appropriate, the procedure for
making and reporting field strength measurements for this purpose is set
forth in paragraph (c) of this section.
(b) Collection of field strength data for propagation analysis.
(1) Preparation for measurements. (i) On large scale topographic
maps, eight or more radials are drawn from the transmitter location to
the maximum distance at which measurements are to be made, with the
angles included between adjacent radials of approximately equal size.
Radials should be oriented so as to traverse representative types of
terrain. The specific number of radials and their orientation should be
such as to accomplish this objective.
(ii) Each radial is marked, at a point exactly 16 kilometers from
the transmitter and, at greater distances, at successive 3 kilometer
intervals. Where measurements are to be conducted over extremely rugged
terrain, shorter intervals may be used, but all such intervals must be
of equal length. Accessible roads intersecting each radial as nearly as
possible at each 3 kilometer marker are selected. These intersections
are the points on the radial at which measurements are to be made, and
are referred to subsequently as measuring locations. The elevation of
each measuring location should approach the elevation at the
corresponding 3 kilometer marker as nearly as possible.
(2) Measurement procedure. All measurements must be made utilizing a
receiving antenna designed for reception of the horizontally polarized
signal component, elevated 9 meters above the roadbed. At each measuring
location, the following procedure must be used:
(i) The instrument calibration is checked.
(ii) The antenna is elevated to a height of 9 meters.
(iii) The receiving antenna is rotated to determine if the strongest
signal is arriving from the direction of the transmitter.
(iv) The antenna is oriented so that the sector of its response
pattern over which maximum gain is realized is in the direction of the
transmitter.
(v) A mobile run of at least 30 meters is made, that is centered on
the intersection of the radial and the road, and the measured field
strength is continuously recorded on a chart recorder over the length of
the run.
(vi) The actual measuring location is marked exactly on the
topographic map, and a written record, keyed to the specific location,
is made of all factors which may affect the recorded field, such as
topography, height and types of vegetation, buildings, obstacles,
weather, and other local features.
(vii) If, during the test conducted as described in paragraph
(b)(2)(iii) of this section, the strongest signal is found to come from
a direction other than from the transmitter, after the mobile run
prescribed in paragraph (b)(2)(v) of this section is concluded,
additional measurements must be made in a ``cluster'' of at least five
fixed points. At each such point, the field strengths with the antenna
oriented toward the transmitter, and with the antenna oriented so as to
receive the strongest field, are measured and recorded. Generally, all
points should be within 60 meters of the center point of the mobile run.
(viii) If overhead obstacles preclude a mobile run of at least 30
meters, a ``cluster'' of five spot measurements may be made in lieu of
this run. The first measurement in the cluster is identified. Generally,
the locations for other measurements must be within 60 meters of the
location of the first.
(3) Method of reporting measurements. A report of measurements to
the Commission shall be submitted in affidavit form, in triplicate, and
should contain the following information:
[[Page 105]]
(i) Tables of field strength measurements, which, for each measuring
location, set forth the following data:
(A) Distance from the transmitting antenna.
(B) Ground elevation at measuring location.
(C) Date, time of day, and weather.
(D) Median field in dBu for 0 dBk, for mobile run or for cluster, as
well as maximum and minimum measured field strengths.
(E) Notes describing each measuring location.
(ii) U.S. Geological Survey topographic maps, on which is shown the
exact location at which each measurement was made. The original plots
shall be made on maps of the largest available scale. Copies may be
reduced in size for convenient submission to the Commission, but not to
the extent that important detail is lost. The original maps shall be
made available, if requested. If a large number of maps is involved, an
index map should be submitted.
(iii) All information necessary to determine the pertinent
characteristics of the transmitting installation, including frequency,
geographical coordinates of antenna site, rated and actual power output
of transmitter, measured transmission line loss, antenna power gain,
height of antenna above ground, above mean sea level, and above average
terrain. The effective radiated power should be computed, and horizontal
and vertical plane patterns of the transmitting antenna should be
submitted.
(iv) A list of calibrated equipment used in the field strength
survey, which, for each instrument, specifies its manufacturer, type,
serial number and rated accuracy, and the date of its most recent
calibration by the manufacturer, or by a laboratory. Complete details of
any instrument not of standard manufacture shall be submitted.
(v) A detailed description of the calibration of the measuring
equipment, including field strength meters, measuring antenna, and
connecting cable.
(vi) Terrain profiles in each direction in which measurements were
made, drawn on curved earth paper for equivalent 4/3 earth radius, of
the largest available scale.
(c) Collection of field strength data to determine FM broadcast
service in specific communities.
(1) Preparation for measurement. (i) The population (P) of the
community, and its suburbs, if any, is determined by reference to an
appropriate source, e.g., the 1970 U.S. Census tables of population of
cities and urbanized areas.
(ii) The number of locations at which measurements are to be made
shall be at least 15, and shall be approximately equal to
0.1(P)1/2, if this product is a number greater than 15.
(iii) A rectangular grid, of such size and shape as to encompass the
boundaries of the community is drawn on an accurate map of the
community. The number of line intersections on the grid included within
the boundaries of the community shall be at least equal to the required
number of measuring locations. The position of each intersection on the
community map determines the location at which a measurement shall be
made.
(2) Measurement procedure. All measurements must be made using a
receiving antenna designed for reception of the horizontally polarized
signal component, elevated 9 meters above ground level.
(i) Each measuring location shall be chosen as close as feasible to
a point indicated on the map, as previously prepared, and at as nearly
the same elevation as that point as possible.
(ii) At each measuring location, after equipment calibration and
elevation of the antenna, a check is made to determine whether the
strongest signal arrives from a direction other than from the
transmitter.
(iii) At 20 percent or more of the measuring locations, mobile runs,
as described in paragraph (b)(2) of this section shall be made, with no
less than three such mobile runs in any case. The points at which mobile
measurements are made shall be well separated. Spot measurements may be
made at other measuring points.
(iv) Each actual measuring location is marked exactly on the map of
the community, and suitably keyed. A written record shall be maintained,
describing, for each location, factors which may affect the recorded
field,
[[Page 106]]
such as the approximate time of measurement, weather, topography,
overhead wiring, heights and types of vegetation, buildings and other
structures. The orientation, with respect to the measuring location
shall be indicated of objects of such shape and size as to be capable of
causing shadows or reflections. If the strongest signal received was
found to arrive from a direction other than that of the transmitter,
this fact shall be recorded.
(3) Method of reporting measurements. A report of measurements to
the Commission shall be submitted in affidavit form, in triplicate, and
should contain the following information:
(i) A map of the community showing each actual measuring location,
specifically identifying the points at which mobile runs were made.
(ii) A table keyed to the above map, showing the field strength at
each measuring point, reduced to dBu for the actual effective radiated
power of the station. Weather, date, and time of each measurement shall
be indicated.
(iii) Notes describing each measuring location.
(iv) A topographic map of the largest available scale on which are
marked the community and the transmitter site of the station whose
signals have been measured, which includes all areas on or near the
direct path of signal propagation.
(v) Computations of the mean and standard deviation of all measured
field strengths, or a graph on which the distribution of measured field
strength values is plotted.
(vi) A list of calibrated equipment used for the measurements, which
for each instrument, specifies its manufacturer, type, serial number and
rated accuracy, and the date of its most recent calibration by the
manufacturer, or by a laboratory. Complete details of any instrument not
of standard manufacture shall be submitted.
(vii) A detailed description of the procedure employed in the
calibration of the measuring equipment, including field strength meters,
measuring antenna, and connecting cable.
[40 FR 27682, July 1, 1975; 40 FR 28802, July 9, 1975, as amended at 48
FR 29508, June 27, 1983]
Sec. 73.315 FM transmitter location.
(a) The transmitter location shall be chosen so that, on the basis
of the effective radiated power and antenna height above average terrain
employed, a minimum field strength of 70 dB above one uV/m (dBu), or
3.16 mV/m, will be provided over the entire principal community to be
served.
(b) The transmitter location should be chosen to maximize coverage
to the city of license while minimizing interference. This is normally
accomplished by locating in the least populated area available while
maintaining the provisions of paragraph (a) of this section. In general,
the transmitting antenna of a station should be located in the most
sparsely populated area available at the highest elevation available.
The location of the antenna should be so chosen that line-of-sight can
be obtained from the antenna over the principle city or cities to be
served; in no event should there be a major obstruction in this path.
(c) The transmitting location should be selected so that the 1 mV/m
contour encompasses the urban population within the area to be served.
It is recognized that topography, shape of the desired service area, and
population distribution may make the choice of a transmitter location
difficult. In such cases consideration may be given to the use of a
directional antenna system, although it is generally preferable to
choose a site where a nondirectional antenna may be employed.
(d) In cases of questionable antenna locations it is desirable to
conduct propagation tests to indicate the field strength expected in the
principal city or cities to be served and in other areas, particularly
where severe shadow problems may be expected. In considering
applications proposing the use of such locations, the Commission may
require site tests to be made. Such tests should include measurements
made in accordance with the measurement procedures described in Sec.
73.314, and full data thereon shall be supplied to the Commission. The
test transmitter should employ an antenna having a height as close as
possible to the proposed antenna height, using a balloon or other
support if necessary and feasible. Information concerning the
[[Page 107]]
authorization of site tests may be obtained from the Commission upon
request.
(e) Cognizance must of course be taken regarding the possible hazard
of the proposed antenna structure to aviation and the proximity of the
proposed site to airports and airways. Procedures and standards with
respect to the Commission's consideration of proposed antenna structures
which will serve as a guide to persons intending to apply for radio
station licenses are contained in Part 17 of this chapter (Construction,
Marking, and Lighting of Antenna Structures).
[28 FR 13623, Dec. 14, 1963, as amended at 41 FR 22943, June 8, 1976; 49
FR 38131, Sept. 27, 1984; 49 FR 45146, Nov. 15, 1984; 51 FR 9965, Mar.
24, 1986; 52 FR 10570, Apr. 2, 1987; 65 FR 79778, Dec. 20, 2000]
Sec. 73.316 FM antenna systems.
(a) It shall be standard to employ horizontal polarization; however,
circular or elliptical polarization may be employed if desired.
Clockwise or counterclockwise rotation may be used. The supplemental
vertically polarized effective radiated power required for circular or
elliptical polarization shall in no event exceed the effective radiated
power authorized.
(b) Directional antennas. A directional antenna is an antenna that
is designed or altered for the purpose of obtaining a non-circular
radiation pattern.
(1) Applications for the use of directional antennas that propose a
ratio of maximum to minimum radiation in the horizontal plane of more
than 15 dB will not be accepted.
(2) Directional antennas used to protect short-spaced stations
pursuant to Sec. 73.213 or Sec. 73.215 of the rules, that have a
radiation pattern which varies more than 2 dB per 10 degrees of azimuth
will not be authorized.
(c) Applications for directional antennas. (1) Applications for
construction permit proposing the use of directional antenna systems
must include a tabulation of the composite antenna pattern for the
proposed directional antenna. A value of 1.0 must be used to correspond
to the direction of maximum radiation. The pattern must be tabulated
such that 0[deg] corresponds to the direction of maximum radiation or
alternatively, in the case of an asymmetrical antenna pattern, the
pattern must be tabulated such that 0[deg] corresponds to the actual
azimuth with respect to true North. In the case of a composite antenna
composed of two or more individual antennas, the pattern required is
that for the composite antenna, not the patterns for each of the
individual antennas. Applications must include valuations tabulated at
intervals of not greater than ten (10) degrees. In addition, tabulated
values of all maximas and minimas, with their corresponding azimuths,
must be submitted.
(2) Applications for license upon completion of antenna construction
must include the following:
(i) A complete description of the antenna system, including the
manufacturer and model number of the directional antenna. It is not
sufficient to label the antenna with only a generic term such as
``dipole.'' In the case of individually designed antennas with no model
number, or in the case of a composite antenna composed of two or more
individual antennas, the antenna must be described as a ``custom'' or
``composite'' antenna, as appropriate. A full description of the design
of the antenna must also be submitted.
(ii) A plot of the composite pattern of the directional antenna. A
value of 1.0 must be used to correspond to the direction of maximum
radiation. The plot of the pattern must be oriented such that 0[deg]
corresponds to the direction of maximum radiation or alternatively, in
the case of an asymmetrical antenna pattern, the plot must be oriented
such that 0[deg] corresponds to the actual azimuth with respect to true
North. The horizontal plane pattern must be plotted to the largest scale
possible on unglazed letter-size polar coordinate paper (main engraving
approximately 18 cm x 25 cm (7 inches x 10 inches)) using only scale
divisions and subdivisions of 1, 2, 2.5, or 5 times 10-nth. Values of
field strength less than 10% of the maximum field strength plotted on
that pattern must be shown on an enlarged scale. In the case of a
composite antenna composed of two or
[[Page 108]]
more individual antennas, the composite antenna pattern should be
provided, and not the pattern for each of the individual antennas.
(iii) A tabulation of the measured or computer modeled relative
field pattern required in paragraph (c)(1) of this section. The
tabulation must use the same zero degree reference as the plotted
pattern, and must contain values for at least every 10 degrees.
Sufficient vertical patterns to indicate clearly the radiation
characteristics of the antenna above and below the horizontal plane.
Complete information and patterns must be provided for angles of -10
deg. from the horizontal plane and sufficient additional information
must be included on that portion of the pattern lying between + 10 deg.
and the zenith and -10 deg. and the nadir, to conclusively demonstrate
the absence of undesirable lobes in these areas. The vertical plane
pattern must be plotted on rectangular coordinate paper with reference
to the horizontal plane. In the case of a composite antenna composed of
two or more individual antennas, the composite antenna pattern should be
used, and not the pattern for each of the individual antennas.
(iv) When the relative field pattern is computer modeled, as
permitted in paragraphs (c)(2)(iii) and (x) of this section and in Sec.
73.1690(c)(2), the computer model must be generated by the manufacturer
of the antenna, and must include a statement from the engineer(s)
responsible for designing the antenna, performing the modeling, and
preparing the manufacturer's instructions for installation of the
antenna, that identifies and describes the software tool(s) used in the
modeling and the procedures applied in using the software. It must also
include a certification that the software executed normally without
generating any error messages or warnings indicating an error in the
program inputs. Such computer modeling shall include modeling of the
antenna mounted on a tower or tower section, and the tower or tower
section model must include transmission lines, ladders, conduits,
appurtenances, other antennas, and any other installations that may
affect the computer modeled directional pattern. The first time the
directional pattern of a particular model of antenna is verified using a
particular modeling software, the license applicant must submit to the
Commission both the results of the computer modeling and measurements of
either a full-size or scale model of the antenna or elements thereof,
demonstrating reasonable correlation between the measurements achieved
and the computer model results. Once a particular antenna model or
series of elements has been verified by any license applicant using a
particular modeling software, subsequent license applicants using the
same antenna model number or elements and using the same modeling
software to verify the directional pattern may submit the computer model
for the subsequent antenna installation and cross-reference the original
submission by providing the application file number.
(v) A statement that the antenna is mounted on the top of an antenna
tower recommended by the antenna manufacturer, or is side-mounted on a
particular type of antenna tower in accordance with specific
instructions provided by the antenna manufacturer.
(vi) A statement that the directional antenna is not mounted on the
top of an antenna tower which includes a top-mounted platform larger
than the nominal cross-sectional area of the tower in the horizontal
plane.
(vii) A statement that no other antenna of any type is mounted on
the same tower level as a directional antenna, and that no antenna of
any type is mounted within any horizontal or vertical distance specified
by the antenna manufacturer as being necessary for proper directional
operation.
(viii) A statement from an engineer listing such individual
engineer's qualifications and certifying that the antenna has been
installed pursuant to the manufacturer's instructions.
(ix) A statement from a licensed surveyor that the installed antenna
is properly oriented.
(x)(A) For a station authorized pursuant to Sec. 73.215 or Sec.
73.509, a showing that the root mean square (RMS) of the measured or
computer modeled composite antenna pattern (encompassing both the
horizontally and vertically polarized radiation components (in relative
field)) is at least 85 percent of the
[[Page 109]]
RMS of the authorized composite directional antenna pattern (in relative
field). The RMS value, for a composite antenna pattern specified in
relative field values, may be determined from the following formula:
RMS = the square root of:
[(relative field value 1)\2\ + (relative field value 2)\2\ + .... +
(last relative field value)\2\]
total number of relative field values
(B) Where the relative field values are taken from at least 36
evenly spaced radials for the entire 360 degrees of azimuth. The
application for license must also demonstrate that coverage of the
community of license by the 70 dBu contour is maintained for stations
authorized pursuant to Sec. 73.215 on Channels 221 through 300, as
required by Sec. 73.315(a), while noncommercial educational stations
operating on Channels 201 through 220 must show that the 60 dBu contour
covers at least a portion of the community of license.
(d) Applications proposing the use of FM transmitting antennas in
the immediate vicinity (i.e., 60 meters or less) of other FM or TV
broadcast antennas must include a showing as to the expected effect, if
any, of such proximate operation.
(e) Where an FM licensee or permittee proposes to mount its antenna
on or near an AM tower, as defined in Sec. 1.30002, the FM licensee or
permittee must comply with Sec. 1.30003 or Sec. 1.30002, depending on
whether the antenna is proposed to be mounted on an AM tower (Sec.
1.30003) or near an AM tower (Sec. 1.30002).
[28 FR 13623, Dec. 14, 1963, as amended at 34 FR 14222, Sept. 10, 1969;
37 FR 25841, Dec. 5, 1972; 43 FR 53738, Nov. 17, 1978; 48 FR 29508, June
27, 1983; 51 FR 17028, May 8, 1986; 54 FR 9804, Mar. 8, 1989; 56 FR
57294, Nov. 8, 1991; 62 FR 51058, Sept. 30, 1997; 63 FR 70047, Dec. 18,
1998; 78 FR 66298, Nov. 5, 2013; 87 FR 15343, Mar. 18, 2022; 87 FR
35430, June 10, 2022]
Sec. 73.317 FM transmission system requirements.
(a) FM broadcast stations employing transmitters authorized after
January 1, 1960, must maintain the bandwidth occupied by their emissions
in accordance with the specification detailed below. FM broadcast
stations employing transmitters installed or type accepted before
January 1, 1960, must achieve the highest degree of compliance with
these specifications practicable with their existing equipment. In
either case, should harmful interference to other authorized stations
occur, the licensee shall correct the problem promptly or cease
operation.
(b) Any emission appearing on a frequency removed from the carrier
by between 120 kHz and 240 kHz inclusive must be attenuated at least 25
dB below the level of the unmodulated carrier. Compliance with this
requirement will be deemed to show the occupied bandwidth to be 240 kHz
or less.
(c) Any emission appearing on a frequency removed from the carrier
by more than 240 kHz and up to and including 600 kHz must be attenuated
at least 35 dB below the level of the unmodulated carrier.
(d) Any emission appearing on a frequency removed from the carrier
by more than 600 kHz must be attenuated at least 43 + 10
Log10 (Power, in watts) dB below the level of the unmodulated
carrier, or 80 dB, whichever is the lesser attenuation.
(e) Preemphasis shall not be greater than the impedance-frequency
characteristics of a series inductance resistance network having a time
constant of 75 microseconds. (See upper curve of Figure 2 of Sec.
73.333.)
[51 FR 17028, May 8, 1986]
Sec. 73.318 FM blanketing interference.
Areas adjacent to the transmitting antenna that receive a signal
with a strength of 115 dBu (562 mV/m) or greater will be assumed to be
blanketed. In determining the blanketed area, the 115 dBu contour is
determined by calculating the inverse distance field using the effective
radiated power of the maximum radiated lobe of the antenna without
considering its vertical radiation pattern or height. For directional
antennas, the effective radiated power in the pertinent bearing shall be
used.
(a) The distance to the 115 dBu contour is determined using the
following equation:
D (in kilometers) = 0.394[radic] P
D (in miles) = 0.245[radic] P
[[Page 110]]
Where P is the maximum effective radiated power (ERP), measured in
kilowatts, of the maximum radiated lobe.
(b) After January 1, 1985, permittees or licensees who either (1)
commence program tests, or (2) replace their antennas, or (3) request
facilities modifications and are issued a new construction permit must
satisfy all complaints of blanketing interference which are received by
the station during a one year period. The period begins with the
commencement of program tests, or commencement of programming utilizing
the new antenna. Resolution of complaints shall be at no cost to the
complainant. These requirements specifically do not include interference
complaints resulting from malfunctioning or mistuned receivers,
improperly installed antenna systems, or the use of high gain antennas
or antenna booster amplifiers. Mobile receivers and non-RF devices such
as tape recorders or hi-fi amplifiers (phonographs) are also excluded.
(c) A permittee collocating with one or more existing stations and
beginning program tests on or after January 1, 1985, must assume full
financial responsibility for remedying new complaints of blanketing
interference for a period of one year. Two or more permittees that
concurrently collocate on or after January 1, 1985, shall assume shared
responsibility for remedying blanketing complaints within the blanketing
area unless an offending station can be readily determined and then that
station shall assume full financial responsibility.
(d) Following the one year period of full financial obligation to
satisfy blanketing complaints, licensees shall provide technical
information or assistance to complainants on remedies for blanketing
interference.
[28 FR 13623, Dec. 14, 1963, as amended at 52 FR 25866, July 9, 1987]
Sec. 73.319 FM multiplex subcarrier technical standards.
(a) The technical specifications in this Section apply to all
transmissions of FM multiplex subcarriers except those used for
stereophonic sound broadcasts under the provisions of Sec. 73.322.
(b) Modulation. Any form of modulation may be used for subcarrier
operation.
(c) Subcarrier baseband. (1) During monophonic program
transmissions, multiplex subcarriers and their significant sidebands
must be within the range of 20 kHz to 99 kHz.
(2) During stereophonic sound program transmissions (see Sec.
73.322), multiplex subcarriers and their significant sidebands must be
within the range of 53 kHz to 99 kHz.
(3) During periods when broadcast programs are not being
transmitted, multiplex subcarriers and their significant sidebands must
be within the range of 20 kHz to 99 kHz.
(d) Subcarrier injection. (1) During monophonic program
transmissions, modulation of the carrier by the arithmetic sum of all
subcarriers may not exceed 30% referenced to 75 kHz modulation
deviation. However, the modulation of the carrier by the arithmetic sum
of all subcarriers above 75 kHz may not modulate the carrier by more
than 10%.
(2) During stereophonic program transmissions, modulation of the
carrier by the arithmetic sum of all subcarriers may not exceed 20%
referenced to 75 kHz modulation deviation. However, the modulation of
the carrier by the arithmetic sum of all subcarriers above 75 kHz may
not modulate the carrier by more than 10%.
(3) During periods when no broadcast program service is transmitted,
modulation of the carrier by the arithmetic sum of all subcarriers may
not exceed 30% referenced to 75 kHz modulation deviation. However, the
modulation of the carrier by the arithmetic sum of all subcarriers above
75 kHz may not modulate the carrier by more than 10%.
(4) Total modulation of the carrier wave during transmission of
multiplex subcarriers used for subsidiary communications services must
comply with the provisions Sec. 73.1570(b).
(e) Subcarrier generators may be installed and used with a type
accepted FM broadcast transmitter without specific authorization from
the FCC provided the generator can be connected to the transmitter
without requiring
[[Page 111]]
any mechanical or electrical modifications in the transmitter FM exciter
circuits.
(f) Stations installing multiplex subcarrier transmitting equipment
must ensure the proper suppression of spurious or harmonic radiations.
See Sec. Sec. 73.317, 73.1590 and 73.1690. If the subcarrier operation
causes the station's transmissions not to comply with the technical
provisions for FM broadcast stations or causes harmful interference to
other communication services, the licensee or permittee must correct the
problem promptly or cease operation. The licensee may be required to
verify the corrective measures with supporting data. Such data must be
retained at the station and be made available to the FCC upon request.
[48 FR 28455, June 22, 1983, as amended at 48 FR 37216, Aug. 17, 1983;
49 FR 15080, Apr. 17, 1984; 49 FR 38131, Sept. 27, 1984; 50 FR 1534,
Jan. 11, 1985; 51 FR 17029, May 8, 1986; 57 FR 48333, Oct. 23, 1992]
Sec. 73.322 FM stereophonic sound transmission standards.
(a) An FM broadcast station shall not use 19 kHz 20 Hz, except as the stereophonic pilot frequency in a
transmission system meeting the following parameters:
(1) The modulating signal for the main channel consists of the sum
of the right and left signals.
(2) The pilot subcarrier at 19 kHz 2 Hz, must
frequency modulate the main carrier between the limits of 8 and 10
percent.
(3) One stereophonic subcarrier must be the second harmonic of the
pilot subcarrier (i.e., 38 kHz) and must cross the time axis with a
positive slope simultaneously with each crossing of the time axis by the
pilot subcarrier. Additional stereophomic subcarriers are not precluded.
(4) Double sideband, suppressed-carrier, amplitude modulation of the
stereophonic subcarrier at 38 kHz must be used.
(5) The stereophonic subcarrier at 38 kHz must be suppressed to a
level less than 1% modulation of the main carrier.
(6) The modulating signal for the required stereophonic subcarrier
must be equal to the difference of the left and right signals.
(7) The following modulation levels apply:
(i) When a signal exists in only one channel of a two channel
(biphonic) sound transmission, modulation of the carrier by audio
components within the baseband range of 50 Hz to 15 kHz shall not exceed
45% and modulation of the carrier by the sum of the amplitude modulated
subcarrier in the baseband range of 23 kHz to 53 kHz shall not exceed
45%.
(ii) When a signal exists in only one channel of a stereophonic
sound transmission having more than one stereophonic subcarrier in the
baseband, the modulation of the carrier by audio components within the
audio baseband range of 23 kHz to 99 kHz shall not exceed 53% with total
modulation not to exceed 90%.
(b) Stations not transmitting stereo with the method described in
(a), must limit the main carrier deviation caused by any modulating
signals occupying the band 19 kHz 20 Hz to 125 Hz.
(c) All stations, regardless of the stereophonic transmission system
used, must not exceed the maximum modulation limits specified in Sec.
73.1570(b)(2). Stations not using the method described in (a), must
limit the modulation of the carrier by audio components within the audio
baseband range of 23 kHz to 99 kHz to not exceed 53%.
[51 FR 17029, May 8, 1986]
Sec. 73.333 Engineering charts.
This section consists of the following Figures 1, 1a, 2, and slider
4 and 5.
Note: The figures reproduced herein, due to their small scale, are
not to be used in connection with material submitted to the F.C.C.
[[Page 112]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MR91.085
[[Page 113]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MR91.086
[[Page 114]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MR91.087
[[Page 115]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MR91.088
[[Page 116]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MR91.089
[[Page 117]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MR91.090
(Secs. 4, 5, 303, 48 Stat., as amended, 1066, 1068, 1082 (47 U.S.C. 154,
155, 303))
[28 FR 13623, Dec. 14, 1963, as amended at 35 FR 2591, Feb. 5, 1970; 40
FR 27679, July 1, 1975; 45 FR 28141, Apr. 28, 1980; 48 FR 29508, June
27, 1983; 49 FR 19670, May 9, 1984]
Effective Date Note: At 42 FR 25736, May 19, 1977, in Sec. 73.333,
the effective date of Figures 4 and 5 was stayed indefinitely.
[[Page 118]]
Subpart C_Digital Audio Broadcasting
Source: 72 FR 45692, Aug. 15, 2007, unless otherwise noted.
Sec. 73.401 Scope.
This subpart contains those rules which apply exclusively to the
digital audio broadcasting (DAB) service, and are in addition to those
rules in Subparts A, B, C, G and H which apply to AM and FM broadcast
services, both commercial and noncommercial.
Sec. 73.402 Definitions.
(a) DAB. Digital audio broadcast stations are those radio stations
licensed by the Commission and use the In-band On-channel (``IBOC'')
system for broadcasting purposes.
(b) In Band On Channel DAB System. A technical system in which a
station's digital signal is broadcast in the same spectrum and on the
same channel as its analog signal.
(c) Hybrid DAB System. A system which transmits both the digital and
analog signals within the spectral emission mask of a single AM or FM
channel.
(d) Extended hybrid operation. An enhanced mode of FM IBOC DAB
operation which includes additional DAB subcarriers transmitted between
the analog FM signal and the inner edges of the primary DAB sidebands.
(e) Primary AM DAB Sidebands. The two groups of hybrid AM IBOC DAB
subcarriers which are transmitted 10 to 15 kHz above carrier frequency
(the upper primary DAB sideband), and 10 to 15 kHz below carrier
frequency (the lower primary DAB sideband).
(f) Multicasting. Subdividing the digital bitstream into multiple
channels for additional audio programming uses.
(g) Datacasting. Subdividing the digital bitstream into multiple
channels for additional data or information services uses.
(h) All-digital AM station. An AM station broadcasting an IBOC
waveform that consists solely of digitally modulated subcarriers and the
unmodulated AM carrier.
[72 FR 45692, Aug. 15, 2007, as amended at 85 FR 78027, Dec. 3, 2020]
Sec. 73.403 Digital audio broadcasting service requirements.
(a) Broadcast radio stations using IBOC must transmit at least one
over-the-air digital audio programming stream at no direct charge to
listeners. In addition, a hybrid broadcast radio station must simulcast
its analog audio programming on one of its digital audio programming
streams. The DAB audio programming stream that is provided pursuant to
this paragraph (a) must be at least comparable in sound quality with a
standard analog broadcast.
(b) Emergency information. The emergency information requirements
found in Sec. 73.1250 shall apply to all free DAB programming streams.
[72 FR 45692, Aug. 15, 2007, as amended at 85 FR 78027, Dec. 3, 2020]
Sec. 73.404 IBOC DAB operation.
(a) The licensee of an AM or FM station, or the permittee of a new
AM or FM station which has commenced program test operation pursuant to
Sec. 73.1620, may commence hybrid IBOC DAB operation with digital
facilities which conform to the technical specifications specified for
hybrid DAB operation in the (2002) First Report and Order in MM Docket
No. 99-325, as revised in the Media Bureau's subsequent Order in MM
Docket No. 99-325. In addition, the licensee of an AM station, or the
permittee of a new AM station that has commenced program test authority
pursuant to Sec. 73.1620, may, with reasonable notice to listeners,
commence all-digital IBOC operation with digital facilities that conform
to the requirements set out in the (2020) Report and Order in MB Docket
No. 19-311 and MB Docket No. 13-249. An AM or FM station may transmit
IBOC signals during all hours for which the station is licensed to
broadcast.
(b) In situations where interference to other stations is
anticipated or actually occurs, hybrid AM licensees may, upon
notification to the Commission, reduce the power of the primary DAB
sidebands by up to 6 dB. All-digital AM licensees, may, upon
notification to the Commission, reduce the power of the secondary and
tertiary sidebands by up to 6 dB, even if doing
[[Page 119]]
so results in non-compliance with Sec. 73.1560(a)(1). Any greater
reduction of sideband power requires prior authority from the Commission
via the filing of a request for special temporary authority or an
informal letter request for modification of license.
(c) Hybrid IBOC AM stations must use the same licensed main or
auxiliary antenna to transmit the analog and digital signals.
(d) FM stations may transmit hybrid IBOC signals in combined mode;
i.e., using the same antenna for the analog and digital signals; or may
employ separate analog and digital antennas. Where separate antennas are
used, the digital antenna:
(1) Must be a licensed auxiliary antenna of the station;
(2) Must be located within 3 seconds latitude and longitude from the
analog antenna;
(3) Must have a radiation center height above average terrain
between 70 and 100 percent of the height above average terrain of the
analog antenna.
[72 FR 45692, Aug. 15, 2007, as amended at 75 FR 17877, Apr. 8, 2010; 85
FR 18151, Apr. 1, 2020; 85 FR 78027, Dec. 3, 2020]
Sec. 73.406 Notification.
(a) Hybrid AM and FM licensees must electronically file a digital
notification to the Commission in Washington, DC, within 10 days of
commencing IBOC digital operation.
(1) All-digital licensees must file a digital notification within 10
days of the following changes:
(i) Any reduction in nominal power of an all-digital AM station;
(ii) A transition from enhanced to core-only operating mode; or
(iii) A reversion from all-digital to hybrid or analog operation.
(2) All-digital licensees will not be permitted to commence
operation sooner than 30 calendar days from public notice of digital
notification of the following changes:
(i) The commencement of new all-digital operation;
(ii) An increase in nominal power of an all-digital AM station; or
(iii) A transition from core-only to enhanced operating mode.
(b) Every digital notification must include the following
information:
(1) The call sign and facility identification number of the station;
(2) If applicable, the date on which the new or modified IBOC
operation commenced or ceased;
(3) The name and telephone number of a technical representative the
Commission can call in the event of interference;
(4) A certification that the operation will not cause human exposure
to levels of radio frequency radiation in excess of the limits specified
in Sec. 1.1310 of this chapter and is therefore categorically excluded
from environmental processing pursuant to Sec. 1.1306(b) of this
chapter. Any station that cannot certify compliance must submit an
environmental assessment (``EA'') pursuant to Sec. 1.1311 of this
chapter and may not commence IBOC operation until such EA is ruled upon
by the Commission.
(c) Each AM digital notification must also include the following
information:
(1) A certification that the IBOC DAB facilities conform to
applicable nominal power limits and emissions mask limits;
(2) The nominal power of the station; if separate analog and digital
transmitters are used, the nominal power for each transmitter;
(3) If applicable, the amount of any reduction in an AM station's
digital carriers;
(4) For all-digital stations, the type of notification (all-digital
notification, increase in nominal power, reduction in nominal power,
transition from core-only to enhanced, transition from enhanced to core-
only, reversion from all-digital to hybrid or analog operation);
(5) For all-digital stations, if a notification of commencement of
new all-digital service or a nominal power change, whether the station
is operating in core-only or enhanced mode; and
(6) For all-digital stations, a certification that the all-digital
station complies with all Emergency Alert System (EAS) requirements in
part 11 of this chapter.
(d) Each FM digital notification must also include the following
information:
[[Page 120]]
(1) A certification that the IBOC DAB facilities conform to the HD
Radio emissions mask limits;
(2) FM digital effective radiated power used and certification that
the FM analog effective radiated power remains as authorized;
(3) If applicable, the geographic coordinates, elevation data, and
license file number of the auxiliary antenna employed by an FM station
as a separate digital antenna; and
(4) If applicable, for FM systems employing interleaved antenna
bays, a certification that adequate filtering and/or isolation equipment
has been installed to prevent spurious emissions in excess of the limits
specified in Sec. 73.317.
[85 FR 78027, Dec. 3, 2020]
Subpart D_Noncommercial Educational FM Broadcast Stations
Source: 28 FR 13651, Dec. 14, 1963, unless otherwise noted.
Redesignated at 72 FR 45692, Aug. 15, 2007.
Sec. 73.501 Channels available for assignment.
(a) The following frequencies, except as provided in paragraph (b)
of this section, are available for noncommercial educational FM
broadcasting:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Channel
Frequency (MHz) No.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
87.9........................................................ \1\ 200
88.1........................................................ 201
88.3........................................................ 202
88.5........................................................ 203
88.7........................................................ 204
88.9........................................................ 205
89.1........................................................ \2\ 206
89.3........................................................ 207
89.5........................................................ 208
89.7........................................................ 209
89.9........................................................ 210
90.1........................................................ 211
90.3........................................................ 212
90.5........................................................ 213
90.7........................................................ 214
90.9........................................................ 215
91.1........................................................ 216
91.3........................................................ 217
91.5........................................................ 218
91.7........................................................ 219
91.9........................................................ 220
------------------------------------------------------------------------
\1\ The frequency 87.9 MHz, Channel 200, is available only for use of
existing Class D stations required to change frequency. It is
available only on a noninterference basis with respect to TV Channel 6
stations and adjacent channel noncommercial educational FM stations.
It is not available at all within 402 kilometers (250 miles) of Canada
and 320 kilometers (199 miles) of Mexico. The specific standards
governing its use are contained in Sec. 73.512.
\2\ The frequency 89.1 MHz, Channel 206, in the New York City
metropolitan area, is reserved for the use of the United Nations with
the equivalent of an antenna height of 150 meters (492 feet) above
average terrain and effective radiated power of 20 kW and the
Commission will make no assignments which would cause objectionable
interference with such use.
(b) [Reserved]
[43 FR 39715, Sept. 6, 1978, as amended at 47 FR 30068, July 12, 1982;
52 FR 43765, Nov. 16, 1987; 58 FR 44950, Aug. 25, 1993; 87 FR 15343,
Mar. 18, 2022]
Sec. 73.503 Licensing requirements and service.
The operation of, and the service furnished by noncommercial
educational FM broadcast stations shall be governed by the following:
(a) A noncommercial educational FM broadcast station will be
licensed only to a nonprofit educational organization and upon showing
that the station will be used for the advancement of an educational
program.
(1) In determining the eligibility of publicly supported educational
organizations, the accreditation of their respective state departments
of education shall be taken into consideration.
(2) In determining the eligibility of privately controlled
educational organizations, the accreditation of state departments of
education and/or recognized regional and national educational
accrediting organizations shall be taken into consideration.
(b) Each station may transmit programs directed to specific schools
in a system or systems for use in connection with the regular courses as
well as routine and administrative material pertaining thereto and may
transmit educational, cultural, and entertainment programs to the
public.
(c) A noncommercial educational FM broadcast station may broadcast
programs produced by, or at the expense of, or furnished by persons
other than the licensee, if no other consideration than the furnishing
of the program and
[[Page 121]]
the costs incidental to its production and broadcast are received by the
licensee. The payment of line charges by another station network, or
someone other than the licensee of a noncommercial educational FM
broadcast station, or general contributions to the operating costs of a
station, shall not be considered as being prohibited by this paragraph.
(d) Each station shall furnish a nonprofit and noncommercial
broadcast service. Noncommercial educational FM broadcast stations are
subject to the provisions of Sec. 73.1212 to the extent they are
applicable to the broadcast of programs produced by, or at the expense
of, or furnished by others. No promotional announcement on behalf of for
profit entities shall be broadcast at any time in exchange for the
receipt, in whole or in part, of consideration to the licensee, its
principals, or employees. However, acknowledgements of contributions can
be made. The scheduling of any announcements and acknowledgements may
not interrupt regular programming, except as permitted under paragraph
(e) of this section.
(e) A noncommercial educational FM broadcast station may interrupt
regular programming to conduct fundraising activities on behalf of a
third-party non-profit organization, provided that all such fundraising
activities conducted during any given year do not exceed one percent of
the station's total annual airtime. A station may use the prior year's
total airtime for purposes of determining how many hours constitute one
percent of its total annual airtime. With respect to stations that
multicast programming on two or more separate channels, the one-percent
annual limit will apply separately to each individual programming
stream. For purposes of this paragraph, a non-profit organization is an
entity that qualifies as a non-profit organization under 26 U.S.C.
501(c)(3).
(1) Audience disclosure. A noncommercial educational FM broadcast
station that interrupts regular programming to conduct fundraising
activities on behalf of a third-party non-profit organization must air a
disclosure during such activities clearly stating that the fundraiser is
not for the benefit of the station itself and identifying the entity for
which it is fundraising. The station must air the audience disclosure at
the beginning and the end of each fundraising program and at least once
during each hour in which the program is on the air.
(2) Reimbursement. A noncommercial educational FM broadcast station
that interrupts regular programming to conduct fundraising activities on
behalf of a third-party non-profit organization may accept reimbursement
of expenses incurred in conducting third-party fundraising activities or
airing third-party fundraising programs.
(3) Exemption. No noncommercial educational FM broadcast station
that receives funding from the Corporation for Public Broadcasting shall
have the authority to interrupt regular programming to conduct
fundraising activities on behalf of a third-party non-profit
organization.
(f) Mutually exclusive applications for noncommercial educational
radio stations operating on reserved channels will be resolved pursuant
to the point system in subpart K.
(g) Application limit. An applicant may file no more than a total of
10 applications in the 2021 NCE FM filing window. A party to an
application filed in the 2021 NCE FM filing window may hold attributable
interests, as defined in Sec. 73.7000, in no more than a total of 10
applications filed in the window. If it is determined that any party to
an application has an attributable interest in more than 10
applications, the Media Bureau will retain the 10 applications that were
filed first--based on the date of application receipt--and dismiss all
other applications.
Note to Sec. 73.503: Commission interpretation on this rule,
including the acceptable form of acknowledgements, may be found in the
Second Report and Order in Docket No. 21136 (Commission Policy
Concerning the Noncommercial Nature of Educational Broadcast Stations),
86 FCC 2d 141 (1981); the Memorandum Opinion and Order in Docket No.
21136, 90 FCC 2d 895 (1982); the Memorandum Opinion and Order in Docket
21136, 97 FCC 2d 255 (1984); and the Report and Order in Docket No. 12-
106 (Noncommercial Educational Station Fundraising for Third-Party Non-
Profit Organizations), FCC 17-41, April 20, 2017. See also Commission
Policy Concerning the Noncommercial Nature of Educational Broadcast
Stations, Public Notice, 7 FCC Rcd 827 (1992), which can be retrieved
[[Page 122]]
through the Internet at http://www.fcc.gov/mmb/asd/nature.html.
(Secs. 4, 5, 303, 48 Stat., as amended, 1066, 1068, 1082 (47 U.S.C. 154,
155, 303))
[28 FR 13651, Dec. 14, 1963, as amended at 35 FR 7558, May 15, 1970; 47
FR 36178, Aug. 19, 1982; 49 FR 29069, July 18, 1984; 63 FR 33877, June
22, 1998; 65 FR 36378, June 8, 2000; 82 FR 21135, May 5, 2017; 86 FR
26838, May 5, 2021]
Sec. 73.504 Channel assignments in the Mexican border area.
(a) NCE-FM stations within 199 miles (320 km) of the United States-
Mexican border shall comply with the separation requirements and other
provisions of the ``Agreement between the United States of America and
the United Mexican States Concerning Frequency Modulation Broadcasting
in the 88 to 108 MHz Band'' as amended.
(b) Applicants for noncommercial educational FM stations within 199
miles (320 km) of the United States-Mexican border shall propose at
least Class A minimum facilities (see Sec. 73.211(a)). However,
existing Class D noncommercial educational stations may apply to change
frequency within the educational portion of the FM band in accordance
with the requirements set forth in Sec. 73.512.
(c) Section 73.208 of this chapter shall be complied with as to the
determination of reference points and distance computations used in
applications for new or changed facilities. However, if it is necessary
to consider a Mexican channel assignment or authorization, the
computation of distance will be determined as follows: if a transmitter
site has been established, on the basis of the coordinates of the site;
if a transmitter site has not been established, on the basis of the
reference coordinates of the community, town, or city.
[52 FR 43765, Nov. 16, 1987]
Sec. 73.505 Zones.
For the purpose of assignment of noncommercial educational FM
stations, the United States is divided into three zones, Zone I, Zone I-
A, and Zone II, having the boundaries specified in Sec. 73.205.
[42 FR 36828, July 18, 1977]
Sec. 73.506 Classes of noncommercial educational FM stations and channels.
(a) Noncommercial educational stations operating on the channels
specified in Sec. 73.501 are divided into the following classes:
(1) A Class D educational station is one operating with no more than
10 watts transmitter power output.
(2) A Class D educational (secondary) station is one operating with
no more than 10 watts transmitter power output in accordance with the
terms of Sec. 73.512 or which has elected to follow these requirements
before they become applicable under the terms of Sec. 73.512.
(3) Noncommercial educational FM (NCE-FM) stations with more than 10
watts transmitter power output are classified as Class A, B1, B, C3, C2,
C1, or C depending on the station's effective radiated power and antenna
height above average terrain, and on the zone in which the station's
transmitter is located, on the same basis as set forth in Sec. Sec.
73.210 and 73.211 for commercial stations.
(b) Any noncommercial educational station except Class D may be
assigned to any of the channels listed in Sec. 73.501. Class D
noncommercial educational FM stations applied for or authorized prior to
June 1, 1980, may continue to operate on their authorized channels
subject to the provisions of Sec. 73.512.
[43 FR 39715, Sept. 6, 1978, as amended at 49 FR 10264, Mar. 20, 1984;
52 FR 47569, Dec. 15, 1987; 54 FR 16367, Apr. 24, 1989; 54 FR 19374, May
5, 1989]
Sec. 73.507 Minimum distance separations between stations.
(a) Minimum distance separations. No application for a new station,
or change in channel or transmitter site or increase in facilities of an
existing station, will be granted unless the proposed facilities will be
located so as to meet the adjacent channel distance separations
specified in Sec. 73.207(a) for the class of station involved with
respect to assignment on Channels 221, 222, and 223 listed in Sec.
73.201 (except where in the case of an existing station the proposed
facilities fall within the provisions of Sec. 73.207(b)), or where a
Class D station is changing frequency to comply with the requirements of
Sec. 73.512.
[[Page 123]]
(b) Stations authorized as of September 10, 1962, which do not meet
the requirements of paragraph (a) of this section and Sec. 73.511, may
continue to operate as authorized; but any application to change
facilities will be subject to the provisions of this section.
(c)(1) Stations separated in frequency by 10.6 or 10.8 MHz (53 or 54
channels) from allotments or assignments on non-reserved channels will
not be authorized unless they conform to the separations given in Table
1 to paragraph (b) of Sec. 73.207.
(2) Under the United States-Mexican FM Broadcasting Agreement, for
stations and assignments differing in frequency by 10.6 to 10.8 MHz (53
or 54 channels), U.S. noncommercial educational FM allotments and
assignments must meet the separations given in Table 3 to paragraph (b)
of Sec. 73.207 to Mexican allotments or assignments in the border area.
[42 FR 36828, July 18, 1977, as amended at 43 FR 39716, Sept. 6, 1978;
44 FR 65764, Nov. 15, 1979; 49 FR 10264, Mar. 20, 1984; 49 FR 19670, May
9, 1984; 87 FR 15343, Mar. 18, 2022]
Sec. 73.508 Standards of good engineering practice.
(a) All noncommercial educational stations and LPFM stations
operating with more than 10 watts transmitter power output shall be
subject to all of the provisions of the FM Technical Standards contained
in subpart B of this part. Class D educational stations and LPFM
stations operating with 10 watts or less transmitter output power shall
be subject to the definitions contained in Sec. 73.310, and also to
those other provisions of the FM Technical Standards which are
specifically made applicable to them by the provisions of this subpart.
(b) The transmitter and associated transmitting equipment of each
noncommercial educational FM station and LPFM station licensed for
transmitter power output above 10 watts must be designed, constructed
and operated in accordance with Sec. 73.317.
(c) The transmitter and associated transmitting equipment of each
noncommercial educational FM station licensed for transmitter power
output of 10 watts or less, although not required to meet all
requirements of Sec. 73.317, must be constructed with the safety
provisions of the current national electrical code as approved by the
American National Standards Institute. These stations must be operated,
tuned, and adjusted so that emissions are not radiated outside the
authorized band causing or which are capable of causing interference to
the communications of other stations. The audio distortion, audio
frequency range, carrier hum, noise level, and other essential phases of
the operation which control the external effects, must be at all times
capable of providing satisfactory broadcast service. Studio equipment
properly covered by an underwriter's certificate will be considered as
satisfying safety requirements.
[65 FR 7640, Feb. 15, 2000]
Sec. 73.509 Prohibited overlap.
(a) An application for a new or modified NCE-FM station other than a
Class D (secondary) station will not be accepted if the proposed
operation would involve overlap of signal strength contours with any
other station licensed by the Commission and operating in the reserved
band (Channels 200-220, inclusive) as set forth in Table 1 to this
paragraph (a):
Table 1 to Paragraph (a)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Contour of Contour of other
Frequency separation proposed station station
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Co-channel...................... 0.1mV/m (40 dBu).. 1 mV/m (60 dBu)
1 mV/m (60 dBu)... 0.1 mV/m (40 dBu)
200 kHz......................... 0.5 mV/m (54 dBu). 1 mV/m (60 dBu)
1 mV/m (60 dBu)1.. 0.5 mV/m (54 dBu)
400 kHz/600 kHz................. 100 mV/m (100 dBu) 1 mV/m (60 dBu)
1 mV/m (60 dBu)... 100 mV/m (100 dBu)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(b) An application by a Class D (secondary) station, other than an
application to change class, will not be accepted if the proposed
operation would involve overlap of signal strength contours with any
other station as set forth in Table 2 to this paragraph (b):
[[Page 124]]
Table 2 to Paragraph (b)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Contour of Contour of any other
Frequency separation proposed station station
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Co-channel................... 0.1 mV/m (40 1 mV/m (60 dBu)
dBu).
200 kHz...................... 0.5 mV/m (54 1 mV/m (60 dBu)
dBu).
400/600 kHz.................. 100 mV/m (100 1 mV/m (60 dBu)
dBu).
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(c) The following standards must be used to compute the distances to
the pertinent contours:
(1) The distance of the 60 dBu (1 mV/m) contours are to be computed
using Figure 1 of Sec. 73.333 [F(50,50) curves] of this part.
(2) The distance to the other contours are to be computed using
Figure 1a of Sec. 73.333 [F(50,10) curves]. In the event that the
distance to the contour is below 16 kilometers (approximately 10 miles),
and therefore not covered by Figure 1a, curves in Figure 1 must be used.
(3) The effective radiated power (ERP) that is the maximum ERP for
any elevation plane on any bearing will be used.
(d) An application for a change (other than a change in channel) in
the facilities of a NCE-FM broadcast station will be accepted even
though overlap of signal strength contours, as specified in paragraphs
(a) and (b) of this section, would occur with another station in an area
where such overlap does not already exists, if:
(1) The total area of overlap with that station would not be
increased;
(2) The area of overlap with any other station would not increase;
(3) The area of overlap does not move significantly closer to the
station receiving the overlap; and,
(4) No area of overlap would be created with any station with which
the overlap does not now exist.
(e) The provisions of this section concerning prohibited overlap
will not apply where the area of such overlap lies entirely over water.
[50 FR 27962, July 9, 1985, as amended at 52 FR 43765, Nov. 16, 1987; 65
FR 79778, Dec. 20, 2000; 87 FR 15343, Mar. 18, 2022]
Sec. 73.510 Antenna systems.
(a) All noncommercial educational stations operating with more than
10 watts transmitter output power shall be subject to the provisions of
Sec. 73.316 concerning antenna systems contained in subpart B of this
part.
(b) Directional antenna. No application for a construction permit of
a new station, or change in channel, or change in an existing facility
on the same channel will be accepted for filing if a directional antenna
with a maximum-to-minimum ratio of more than 15 dB is proposed.
[42 FR 36829, July 18, 1977]
Sec. 73.511 Power and antenna height requirements.
(a) No new noncommercial educational station will be authorized with
less power than minimum power requirements for commercial Class A
facilities. (See Sec. 73.211.)
(b) No new noncommercial educational FM station will be authorized
with facilities greater than Class B in Zones I and I-A or Class C in
Zone II, as defined in Sec. 73.211.
(c) Stations licensed before December 31, 1984, and operating above
50 kW in Zones I and I-A, and above 100 kW and in Zone II may continue
to operate as authorized.
[50 FR 27963, July 9, 1985, as amended at 50 FR 31379, Aug. 2, 1985; 54
FR 3602, Jan. 25, 1989]
Sec. 73.512 Special procedures applicable to Class D noncommercial
educational stations.
(a) All Class D stations seeking renewal of license for any term
expiring June 1, 1980, or thereafter shall comply with the requirements
set forth below and shall simultaneously file an application on FCC Form
340, containing full information regarding such compliance with the
provisions set forth below.
(1) To the extent possible, each applicant shall select a commercial
FM channel on which it proposes to operate in lieu of the station's
present
[[Page 125]]
channel. The station may select any commercial channel provided no
objectionable interference, as set forth in Sec. 73.509(b), would be
caused. The application shall include the same engineering information
as is required to change the frequency of an existing station and any
other information necessary to establish the fact that objectionable
interference would not result. If no commercial channel is available
where the station could operate without causing such interference, the
application shall set forth the basis upon which this conclusion was
reached.
(2) If a commercial channel is unavailable, to the extent possible
each applicant should propose operation on Channel 200 (87.9 MHz) unless
the station would be within 402 kilometers (250 miles) of the Canadian
border or 320 kilometers (199 miles) of the Mexican border or would
cause interference to an FM station operating on Channels 201, 202, or
203 or to TV Channel 6, as provided in Sec. 73.509.
(3) If a channel is not available under either paragraph (a) (1) or
(2) of this section, the renewal applicant shall study all 20
noncommercial educational FM channels and shall propose operation on the
channel which would cause the least preclusion to the establishment of
new stations or increases in power by existing stations. Full
information regarding the basis for the selection should be provided.
(b) At any time before the requirements of paragraph (a) become
effective, any existing Class D station may file a construction permit
application on FCC Form 340 to change channel in the manner described
above which shall be subject to the same requirements. In either case,
any license granted shall specify that the station's license is for a
Class D (secondary) station.
(c) Except in Alaska, no new Class D applications nor major change
applications by existing Class D stations are acceptable for filing
except by existing Class D stations seeking to change frequency. Upon
the grant of such application, the station shall become a Class D
(secondary) station.
(d) Class D noncommercial educational (secondary) stations (see
Sec. 73.506(a)(2)) will be permitted to continue to operate only so
long as no interference (as defined in Sec. 73.509) is caused to any TV
or commercial FM broadcast stations. In the event that the Class D
(secondary) station would cause interference to a TV or commercial FM
broadcast station after that Class D (secondary) station is authorized,
the Class D (secondary) station must cease operation when program tests
for the TV or commercial FM broadcast station commence. The Class D
(secondary) station may apply for a construction permit (see Sec.
73.3533) to change to another frequency or antenna site where it would
not cause interference (as defined in Sec. 73.509). If the Class D
(secondary) station must cease operation before the construction permit
is granted, an application for temporary authorization (pursuant to
Sec. 73.3542) to operate with the proposed facilities may be submitted;
where appropriate, such temporary authorization can be granted. With
respect to Class D (secondary) applications on Channels 201 through 220
required to protect television stations operating on TV Channel 6, the
non-interference requirements in the preceding sentences will apply
unless the application is accompanied by a written agreement between the
Class D (secondary) applicant and each affected TV Channel 6 broadcast
station concurring with the proposed Class D facilities.
[43 FR 39716, Sept. 6, 1978, as amended at 44 FR 48226, Aug. 17, 1979;
47 FR 28388, June 30, 1982; 50 FR 8326, Mar. 1, 1985; 85 FR 35573, June
11, 2020]
Sec. 73.513 Noncommercial educational FM stations operating on
unreserved channels.
(a) Noncommercial educational FM stations other than Class D
(secondary) which operate on Channels 221 through 300 but which comply
with Sec. 73.503 as to licensing requirements and the nature of the
service rendered, must comply with the provisions of the following
sections of subpart B: Sec. Sec. 73.201 through 73.213 (Classification
of FM Broadcast Stations and Allocations of Frequencies) and such other
sections of subpart B as are made specially applicable by the provisions
of this subpart C. Stations in Alaska authorized before August 11, 1982,
using Channels 261-300
[[Page 126]]
need not meet the minimum effective radiated power requirement specified
in Sec. 73.211(a). In all other respects, stations operating on
Channels 221 through 300 are to be governed by the provisions of this
subpart and not subpart B.
(b) When a noncommercial educational applicant is among mutually
exclusive applications for an unreserved FM channel, the mutually
exclusive applications will be considered pursuant to Subpart I--
Competitive Bidding Procedures and not Subpart K--Application and
Selection Procedures On Reserved Noncommercial Educational Channels.
[47 FR 30068, July 12, 1982, as amended at 65 FR 36378, June 8, 2000]
Sec. 73.514 Protection from interference.
Permittees and licensees of NCE FM stations are not protected from
interference which may be caused by the grant of a new LPFM station or
of authority to modify an existing LPFM station, except as provided in
subpart G of this part.
[65 FR 67299, Nov. 9, 2000]
Sec. 73.515 NCE FM transmitter location.
The transmitter location shall be chosen so that, on the basis of
effective radiated power and antenna height above average terrain
employed, a minimum field strength of l mV/m (60 dBu) will be provided
over at least 50 percent of its community of license or reach 50 percent
of the population within the community.
[65 FR 79779, Dec. 20, 2000]
Sec. 73.525 TV Channel 6 protection.
The provisions of this section apply to all applications for
construction permits for new or modified facilities for a NCE-FM station
on Channels 200-220 unless the application is accompanied by a written
agreement between the NCE-FM applicant and each affected TV Channel 6
broadcast station concurring with the proposed NCE-FM facilities.
(a) Affected TV Channel 6 station. (1) An affected TV Channel 6
station is a TV broadcast station which is authorized to operate on
Channel 6 that is located within the following distances of a NCE-FM
station operating on Channels 201-220:
Table A
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Distance Distance
NCE-FM channel (kilometers) NCE-FM channel (kilometers)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
201 265 211 196
202 257 212 195
203 246 213 193
204 235 214 187
205 225 215 180
206 211 216 177
207 196 217 174
208 196 218 166
209 196 219 159
210 196 220 154
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(2) Where a NCE-FM application has been accepted for filing or
granted, the subsequent acceptance of an application filed by a relevant
TV Channel 6 station will not require revision of the pending NCE-FM
application or the FM station's authorized facilities, unless the
provisions of paragraph (e)(3) of this section for TV translator or
satellite stations apply.
(b) Existing NCE-FM stations. (1) A NCE-FM station license
authorized to operate on channels 201-220 as of December 31, 1984, or a
permittee, granted a construction permit for a NCE-FM station as of
December 31, 1984, are not subject to this section unless they propose
either:
(i) To make changes in operating facilities or location which will
increase predicted interference as calculated under paragraph (e) of
this section to TV Channel 6 reception in any direction; or,
(ii) To increase its ratio of vertically polarized to horizontally
polarized transmissions.
(2) Applicants must comply with the provision of paragraphs (c) or
(d) of this section unless the application for modification demonstrates
that, for each person predicted to receive new interference as a result
of the change, existing predicted interference to two person will be
eliminated. Persons predicted to receive new interference are those
located outside the area predicted to receive interference from the
station's currently authorized facilities (``existing predicted
interference area'') but within the area predicted to receive
interference from the proposed
[[Page 127]]
facilities (``proposed predicted interference area''). Persons for whom
predicted interference will be eliminated are those located within the
existing predicted interference area and outside the proposed predicted
interference area.
(i) In making this calculation, the provisions contained at
paragraph (e) will be used except as modified by paragraph (b)(3) of
this section.
(ii) The following adjustment to the population calculation may be
made: up to 1,000 persons may be subtracted from the population
predicted to receive new interference if, for each person substracted,
the applicant effectively installs two filters within 90 days after
commencing program tests with the proposed facilities and, no later than
45 days thereafter, provides the affected TV Channel 6 station (as
defined in paragraph (a) of this section) with a certification
containing sufficient information to permit verification of such
installation. The required number of filters will be installed on
television receivers located within the predicted interference area;
provided that half of the installations are within the area predicted to
receive new interference.
(3) Where an NCE-FM applicant wishes to operate with facilities in
excess of that permitted under the provisions of paragraphs (c) or (d)
of this section, by proposing to use vertically polarized transmissions
only, or to increase its ratio of vertically to horizontally polarized
transmissions, the affected TV Channel 6 station must be given an option
to pay for the required antenna and, if it takes that option, the NCE-FM
vertically polarized component of power will be one half (-3 dB) that
which would be allowed by the provisions of paragraph (e)(4) of this
section.
(4) Applications for modification will include a certification that
the applicant has given early written notice of the proposed
modification to all affected TV Channel 6 stations (as defined in
paragraph (a) of this section).
(5) Where the NCE-FM station demonstrates in its application that it
must make an involuntary modification (e.g., due to loss of its
transmitter site) that would not otherwise be permitted under this
section, its application will be considered on a case-by-case basis. In
such cases, the provisions of paragraph (b)(3) of this section do not
apply.
(c) New NCE-FM stations. Except as provided for by paragraph (d) of
this section, applicants for NCE-FM stations proposing to operate on
Channels 201-220 must submit a showing indicating that the predicted
interference area resulting from the proposed facility contains no more
than 3,000 persons.
(1) In making these calculations, the provisions in paragraph (e) of
this section will be used.
(2) The following adjustment to population may be made: up to 1,000
persons may be subtracted from the population within the predicted
interference area if, for each person subtracted, the applicant
effectively installs one filter within 90 days after commencing program
tests and, no later than 45 days thereafter, provides the affected TV
Channel 6 station with a certification containing sufficient information
to permit verification of such installation. The required number of
filters will be installed on television receivers located within the
predicted interference area.
(d) Collocated stations. As an alternative to the provisions
contained in paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section, an application for
a NCE-FM station operating on Channels 201-220 and located at 0.4
kilometer (approximately 0.25 mile) or less from a TV Channel 6 station
will be accepted under the following requirements:
(1) The effective radiated power cannot exceed the following values:
Table B
------------------------------------------------------------------------
NCE-FM channel Power (kilowatt) NCE-FM channel Power (kilowatt)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
201 1.1 211 26.3
202 1.9 212 31.6
203 3.1 213 38.0
204 5.0 214 46.8
205 8.3 215 56.2
206 10.0 216 67.6
207 12.0 217 83.2
208 14.8 218 100.0
209 17.8 219 100.0
210 21.4 220 100.0
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(2) The NCE-FM application will include a certification that the
applicant has coordinated its antenna with the
[[Page 128]]
affected TV station by employing either: The same number of antenna bays
with radiation centers separated by no more than 30 meters
(approximately 100 feet) verticially; or, the FM vertical pattern not
exceeding the TV vertical pattern by more than 2dB.
(e) Calculation of predicted interference area and population.
Predictions of interference required under this section and calculations
to determine the number of persons within a predicted interference area
for NCE-FM operation on Channels 201-220 are made as follows:
(1) The predicted interference area will be calculated as follows:
(i) The distances to the TV Channel 6 field strength contours will
be predicted according to the procedures specified in Sec. 73.684,
``Prediction of coverage,'' using the F(50,50) curves in Figure 9, Sec.
73.699.
(ii) For each TV Channel 6 field strength contour, there will be an
associated F(50,10) FM interference contour, the value of which (in
units of dBu) is defined as the sum of the TV Channel 6 field strength
(in dBu) and the appropriate undesired-to-desired (U/D) signal ratio (in
dB) obtained from Figures 1 and 2, Sec. 73.599, corresponding to the
channel of the NCE-FM applicant and the appropriate F(50,50) field
strength contour of the TV Channel 6 station.
(iii) An adjustment of 6 dB for television receiving antenna
directivity will be added to each NCE-FM interference contour at all
points outside the Grade A field strength contour (Sec. 73.683) of the
TV Channel 6 station and within an arc defined by the range of angles,
of which the FM transmitter site is the vertex, from 110[deg] relative
to the azimuth from the FM transmitter site to the TV Channel 6
transmitter site, counterclockwise to 250[deg] relative to that azimuth.
At all points at and within the Grade A field strength contour of the TV
Channel 6 station, the 6 dB adjustment is applicable over the range of
angles from 70[deg] clockwise to 110[deg] and from 250[deg] clockwise to
290[deg].
(iv) The distances to the applicable NCE-FM interference contours
will be predicted according to the procedures specified in Sec. 73.313,
``Prediction of Coverage,'' using the proposed antenna height and
horizontally polarized, or the horizontal equivalent of the vertically
polarized, effective radiated power in the pertinent direction and the
F(50,10) field strength curves (Figure 1a, Sec. 73.333).
(v) The predicted interference area will be defined as the area
within the TV Channel 6 station's 47 dBu field strength contour that is
bounded by the locus of intersections of a series of TV Channel 6 field
strength contours and the applicable NCE-FM interference contours.
(vi) In cases where the terrain in one or more directions departs
widely from the surrounding terrain average (for example, an intervening
mountain), a supplemental showing may be made. Such supplemental
showings must describe the procedure used and should include sample
calculations. The application must also include maps indicating the
predicted interference area for both the regular method and the
supplemental method.
(vii) In cases where the predicted interference area to Channel 6
television from a noncommercial educational FM station will be located
within the 90 dBu F(50,50) contour of the television Channel 6 station,
the location of the FM interfering contour must be determined using the
assumption that the Channel 6 field strength remains constant at 90 dBu
everywhere within the 90 dBu TV contour. The FM to Channel 6 U/D signal
strength ratio specified in Sec. 73.599 corresponding to the Channel 6
TV field strength of 90 dBu shall be used.
(2) The number of persons contained within the predicted
interference area will be based on data contained in the most recently
published U.S. Census of Population and will be determined by plotting
the predicted interference area on a County Subdivision Map of the state
published for the Census, and totalling the number of persons in each
County Subdivision (such as, Minor Civil Division (MCD), Census County
Division (CCD), or equivalent areas) contained within the predicted
interference area. Where only a portion of County Subdivision is
contained within the interference area:
(i) The population of all incorporated places or Census designated
places will
[[Page 129]]
be subtracted from the County Subdivision population;
(ii) Uniform distribution of the remaining population over the
remaining area of the County Subdivision will be assumed in determining
the number of persons within the predicted interference area in
proportion to the share of the remaining area of the County Subdivision
that lies within the predicted interference area; and,
(iii) The population of the incorporated places or Census designated
places contained within the predicted interference area will then be
added to the total, again assuming uniform distribution of the
population within the area of each place and adding a share of the
population proportional to the share of the area if only a portion of
such a place is within the predicted interference area.
(iv) At the option of either the NCE-FM applicant or an affected TV
Channel 6 station which provides the appropriate analysis, more detailed
population data may be used.
(3) Adjustments to the population calculated pursuant to paragraph
(e)(2) of this section may be made as follows:
(i) If any part of the predicted interference area is within the
Grade A field strength contour (Sec. 73.683) of a TV translator station
carrying the affected TV Channel 6 station, the number of persons within
that overlap area will be subtracted, provided the NCE-FM construction
permit and license will contain the following conditions:
(A) When the TV translator station ceases to carry the affected TV
Channel 6 station's service and the cessation is not the choice of the
affected TV Channel 6 station, the NCE-FM station will modify its
facilities, within a reasonable transition period, to meet the
requirements of this section which would have applied if no adjustment
to population for translator service had been made in its application.
(B) The transition period may not exceed 1 year from the date the
NCE-FM station is notified by the TV Channel 6 station that the
translator station will cease to carry the affected TV Channel 6
station's service or 6 months after the translator station ceases to
carry the affected TV Channel 6 station's service, whichever is earlier.
(ii) If any part of the interference area is within the Grade B
field strength contour (Sec. 73.683) of a satellite station of the
affected TV Channel 6 station, the number of persons within the overlap
area will be subtracted, provided the NCE-FM permit and license will
contain the following conditions:
(A) If the satellite station ceases to carry the affected TV Channel
6 station's service and the cessation is not the choice of the affected
TV Channel 6 station, the NCE-FM station will modify its facilities,
within a reasonable transition period, to meet the requirements of this
rule which would have applied if no adjustment to population for
satellite station service had been made in its application.
(B) The transition period may not exceed 1 year from the date the
NCE-FM station is notified by the TV Channel 6 station that the
satellite station will cease to carry the affected TV Channel 6
stations's service or 6 months after the satellite station ceases to
carry the affected TV Channel 6 station's service, whichever is earlier.
(iii) If any part of the predicted interference area is located
outside the affected TV Channel 6 station's Area of Dominant Influence
(ADI), outside the Grade A field strength contour (Sec. 73.683), and
within the predicted city grade field strength contour (73.685(a)) of a
TV broadcast station whose only network affiliation is the same as the
only network affiliation of the affected TV Channel 6 station, the
number of persons within that part will be subtracted. (For purposes of
this provision, a network is defined as ABC, CBS, NBC, or their
successors.) In addition, the ADI of an affected TV Channel 6 station
and the program network affiliations of all relevant TV broadcast
stations will be assumed to be as they were on the filing date of the
NCE-FM application or June 1, 1985, whichever is later.
(iv) In calculating the population within the predicted interference
area, an exception will be permitted upon a showing (e.g., as survey of
actual television reception) that the number of persons within the
predicted interference area should be reduced to account for persons
actually experiencing
[[Page 130]]
co-channel or adjacent channel interference to reception of the affected
TV Channel 6 station. The area within which such a showing may be made
will be limited to the area calculated as follows:
(A) The distances to the field strength contours of the affected TV
Channel 6 station will be predicted according to the procedures
specified in Sec. 73.684, ``Prediction of coverage,'' using the
F(50,50) curves in Figure 9, Sec. 73.699.
(B) For each field strength contour of the affected TV Channel 6
station, there will be an associated co-channel or adjacent channel TV
broadcast station interference contour, the value of which (in units of
dBu) is defined as the sum of the affected TV Channel 6 station's field
strength (in dBu) and the appropriate undesired-to-desired signal ratio
(in dB) as follows:
Co-channel, normal offset, -22 dB
Co-channel, no offset, -39 dB
Adjacent channel, + 12 dB
(C) The distances to the associated co-channel or adjacent channel
TV broadcast station interference contour will be predicted according to
the procedures specified in Sec. 73.684, ``Prediction of coverage,''
using the F(50,10) curves in Figure 9a, Sec. 73.699.
(D) The area within which the showing of actual interference may be
made will be the area bounded by the locus of intersections of a series
of the affected TV Channel 6 station's field strength contours and the
associated interference contours of the co-channel or adjacent channel
TV broadcast station.
(4) The maximum permissible effective radiated power (ERP) and
antenna height may be adjusted for vertical polarity as follows:
(i) If the applicant chooses to use vertically polarized
transmissions only, the maximum permissible vertically polarized ERP
will be the maximum horizontally polarized ERP permissible at the same
proposed antenna height, calculated without the adjustment for
television receiving antenna directivity specified in paragraph
(e)(1)(iii) of this section, multiplied by either: 40 if the predicted
interference area lies entirely outside the limits of a city of 50,000
persons or more; or 10 if it does not.
(ii) If the applicant chooses to use mixed polarity, the permissible
ERP is as follows:
[H + (V/A)] is no greater than P
Where:
H is the horizontally polarized ERP in kilowatts for mixed polarity;
V is the vertically polarized ERP in kilowatts for mixed polarity;
A is 40 if the predicted interference area lies entirely outside the
limits of a city of 50,000 persons or more, or 10 if it does
not; and
P is the maximum permitted horizontally polarized-only power in
kilowatts.
(f) Channel 200 Applications. No application for use of NCE-FM
Channel 200 will be accepted if the requested facility would cause
objectionable interference to TV Channel 6 operations. Such
objectionable interference will be considered to exist whenever the 15
dBu contour based on the F(50,10) curves in Sec. 73.333 Figure 1a would
overlap the 40 dBu contour based on the F(50,50) curves in Sec. 73.699,
Figure 9.
[50 FR 27963, July 9, 1985; 50 FR 30187, July 24, 1985; 50 FR 31379,
Aug. 2, 1985, as amended at 51 FR 26250, July 22, 1986; 52 FR 25867,
July 9, 1987; 62 FR 51059, Sept. 30, 1997]
Sec. 73.558 Indicating instruments.
The requirements for indicating instruments described in Sec.
73.258 are applicable to all educational FM broadcast stations licensed
with a transmitter power greater than 0.01 kw.
[51 FR 17029, May 8, 1986]
Sec. 73.561 Operating schedule; time sharing.
(a) All noncommercial educational FM stations will be licensed for
unlimited time operation except those stations operating under a time
sharing arrangement. All noncommercial educational FM stations are
required to operate at least 36 hours per week, consisting of at least 5
hours of operation per day on at least 6 days of the week; however,
stations licensed to educational institutions are not required to
operate on Saturday or Sunday or to observe the minimum operating
requirements during those days designated on the official school
calendar as vacation or recess periods.
[[Page 131]]
(b) All stations, including those meeting the requirements of
paragraph (a) of this section, but which do not operate 12 hours per day
each day of the year, will be required to share use of the frequency
upon the grant of an appropriate application proposing such share time
arrangement. Such applications shall set forth the intent to share time
and shall be filed in the same manner as are applications for new
stations. They may be filed at any time, but in cases where the parties
are unable to agree on time sharing, action on the application will be
taken only in connection with the renewal of application for the
existing station. In order to be considered for this purpose, such an
application to share time must be filed no later than the deadline for
filing petitions to deny the renewal application of the existing
licensee, or, in the case of renewal applications filed by the existing
licensee on or before May 1, 1995, no later than the deadline for filing
applications in conflict with the such renewal applications.
(1) The licensee and the prospective licensee(s) shall endeavor to
reach an agreement for a definite schedule of periods of time to be used
by each. Such agreement shall be in writing and shall set forth which
licensee is to operate on each of the hours of the day throughout the
year. Such agreement shall not include simultaneous operation of the
stations. Each licensee shall file the same in triplicate with each
application to the Commission for initial construction permit or renewal
of license. Such written agreements shall become part of the terms of
each station's license.
(2) The Commission desires to facilitate the reaching of agreements
on time sharing. However, if the licensees of stations authorized to
share time are unable to agree on a division of time, the Commission
shall be so notified by statement to that effect filed with the
application proposing time sharing. Thereafter the Commission will
designate the application for hearing on any qualification issues
arising regarding the renewal or new applicants. If no such issues
pertain, the Commission will set the matter for expedited hearing
limited solely to the issue of the sharing of time. In the event the
stations have been operating under a time sharing agreement but cannot
agree on its continuation, a hearing will be held, and pending such
hearing, the operating schedule previously adhered to shall remain in
full force and effect.
(c) A departure from the regular schedule set forth in a time-
sharing agreement will be permitted only in cases where a written
agreement to that effect is reduced to writing, is signed by the
licensees of the stations affected thereby, and is filed in triplicate
by each licensee with the Commission, Attention: Audio Division, Media
Bureau, prior to the time of the proposed change. If time is of the
essence, the actual departure in operating schedule may precede the
actual filing of the written agreement, provided that appropriate notice
is sent to the Commission in Washington, DC, Attention: Audio Division,
Media Bureau.
(d) In the event that causes beyond the control of a permittee or
licensee make it impossible to adhere to the operating schedule in
paragraph (a) or (b) of this section or to continue operating, the
station may limit or discontinue operation for a period not exceeding 30
days without further authority from the Commission provided that
notification is sent to the Commission in Washington, DC, Attention:
Audio Division, Media Bureau, no later than the 10th day of limited or
discontinued operation. During such period, the permittee shall continue
to adhere to the requirements of the station license pertaining to the
lighting of antenna structures. In the event normal operation is
restored prior to the expiration of the 30 day period, the permittee or
licensee will notify the FCC, Attention: Audio Division of the date that
normal operations resumed. If causes beyond the control of the permittee
or licensee make it impossible to comply within the allowed period,
Special Temporary Authority (see Sec. 73.1635) must be requested to
remain silent for such additional time as deemed necessary. The license
of a broadcasting station that fails to transmit broadcast signals for
any consecutive 12 month period expires as a matter of law at the end of
[[Page 132]]
that period, notwithstanding any provision, term, or condition of
license to the contrary.
Note 1 to Sec. 73.561: For allocations purposes, both (all)
stations sharing time will be treated as unlimited time stations.
Note 2 to Sec. 73.561: See Sec. Sec. 73.1705, 73.1715, and
73.1740.
(Secs. 4, 5, 303, 48 Stat., as amended, 1066, 1068, 1082 (47 U.S.C. 154,
155, 303))
[43 FR 39717, Sept. 6, 1978, as amended at 43 FR 45845, Oct. 4, 1978; 44
FR 3416, Jan. 19, 1979; 44 FR 65764, Nov. 15, 1979; 47 FR 54448, Dec. 3,
1982; 50 FR 13974, Apr. 9, 1985; 61 FR 18291, Apr. 25, 1996; 61 FR
28767, June 6, 1996; 63 FR 33877, June 22, 1998; 67 FR 13231, Mar. 21,
2002]
Sec. 73.567 Determining operating power.
The procedures for determining operating power described in Sec.
73.267 are applicable to noncommercial education FM stations.
[44 FR 58732, Oct. 11, 1979]
Sec. 73.593 Subsidiary communications services.
The licensee of a noncommercial educational FM station is not
required to use its subcarrier capacity, but if it chooses to do so, it
is governed by Sec. Sec. 73.293 through 73.295 of the Commission's
Rules regarding the types of permissible subcarrier uses and the manner
in which subcarrier operations shall be conducted; Provided, however,
that remunerative use of a station's subcarrier capacity shall not be
detrimental to the provision of existing or potential radio reading
services for the blind or otherwise inconsistent with its public
broadcasting responsibilities.
[48 FR 26615, June 9, 1983]
Sec. 73.597 FM stereophonic sound broadcasting.
A noncommercial educational FM broadcast station may, without
specific authority from the FCC, transmit stereophonic sound programs
upon installation of stereophonic sound transmitting equipment under the
provisions of Sec. Sec. 2.977, 2.1001, 73.322, and 73.1590 of the FCC's
Rules.
[51 FR 17029, May 8, 1986]
Sec. 73.599 NCE-FM engineering charts.
This section consists of the following Figures 1 and 2.
[[Page 133]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MR91.091
[[Page 134]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MR91.092
[50 FR 27965, July 9, 1985]
[[Page 135]]
Subpart E_Television Broadcast Stations
Sec. 73.601 Scope of subpart.
This subpart contains the rules and regulations (including
engineering standards) governing TV broadcast stations, including
noncommercial educational TV broadcast stations and, where indicated,
low power TV and TV translator stations in the United States, its
Territories and possessions. TV broadcast, low power TV, and TV
translator stations are assigned channels 6 MHz wide, designated as set
forth in Sec. 73.603(a).
[47 FR 21494, May 18, 1982]
Sec. 73.602 Cross reference to rules in other parts.
See Sec. 73.1010.
[43 FR 32781, July 28, 1978]
Sec. 73.603 Numerical designation of television channels.
(a)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Frequency
Channel No. band (MHz)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
2........................................................... 54-60
3........................................................... 60-66
4........................................................... 66-72
5........................................................... 76-82
6........................................................... 82-88
7........................................................... 174-180
8........................................................... 180-186
9........................................................... 186-192
10.......................................................... 192-198
11.......................................................... 198-204
12.......................................................... 204-210
13.......................................................... 210-216
14.......................................................... 470-476
15.......................................................... 476-482
16.......................................................... 482-488
17.......................................................... 488-494
18.......................................................... 494-500
19.......................................................... 500-506
20.......................................................... 506-512
21.......................................................... 512-518
22.......................................................... 518-524
23.......................................................... 524-530
24.......................................................... 530-536
25.......................................................... 536-542
26.......................................................... 542-548
27.......................................................... 548-554
28.......................................................... 554-560
29.......................................................... 560-566
30.......................................................... 566-572
31.......................................................... 572-578
32.......................................................... 578-584
33.......................................................... 584-590
34.......................................................... 590-596
35.......................................................... 596-602
36.......................................................... 602-608
37.......................................................... 608-614
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(b) [Reserved]
(c) Channel 37, 608-614 MHz is reserved exclusively for the radio
astronomy service.
(d) In Hawaii, the frequency band 488-494 MHz is allocated for non-
broadcast use. This frequency band (Channel 17) will not be assigned in
Hawaii for use by television broadcast stations.
[28 FR 13660, Dec. 14, 1963, as amended at 35 FR 11179, July 11, 1970;
39 FR 10576, Mar. 21, 1974; 47 FR 16789, Apr. 20, 1982; 47 FR 30068,
July 12, 1982; 47 FR 35989, Aug. 18, 1982; 51 FR 18450, May 20, 1986; 70
FR 46676, Aug. 10, 2005; 86 FR 66195, Nov. 22, 2021]
Sec. 73.606 Table of allotments.
The table of allotments set forth in Sec. 73.622(j) contains the
channels designated for the listed communities in the United States, its
Territories, and possessions. Channels designated with an asterisk are
assigned for use by noncommercial educational broadcast stations only.
[86 FR 66195, Nov. 22, 2021]
Sec. 73.609 Zones.
(a) For the purpose of allotment and assignment, the United States
is divided into three zones as follows:
(1) Zone I consists of that portion of the United States located
within the confines of the following lines drawn on the U.S. Albers
Equal Area Projection Map (based on standard parallels 29\1/2\[deg] and
45\1/2\[deg]; North American datum): Beginning at the most easterly
point on the State boundary line between North Carolina and Virginia;
thence in a straight line to a point on the Virginia-West Virginia
boundary line located at north latitude 37[deg]49[min] and west
longitude 80[deg]12[min]30[sec]; thence westerly along the southern
boundary lines of the States of West Virginia, Ohio, Indiana, and
Illinois to a point at the junction of the Illinois, Kentucky, and
Missouri State boundary lines; thence northerly along the western
boundary line of the State of Illinois to a point at the junction of the
Illinois, Iowa, and Wisconsin State boundary lines; thence easterly
along the northern State boundary line of Illinois to the 90th meridian;
thence north along this meridian to the 43.5[deg] parallel; thence east
along this parallel to the United States-Canada border; thence southerly
[[Page 136]]
and following that border until it again intersects the 43.5[deg]
parallel; thence east along this parallel to the 71st meridian; thence
in a straight line to the intersection of the 69th meridian and the 45th
parallel; thence east along the 45th parallel to the Atlantic Ocean.
When any of the above lines pass through a city, the city shall be
considered to be located in Zone I. (See Figure 1 of Sec. 73.699.)
(2) Zone II consists of that portion of the United States which is
not located in either Zone I or Zone III, and Puerto Rico, Alaska,
Hawaiian Islands and the Virgin Islands.
(3) Zone III consists of that portion of the United States located
south of a line, drawn on the United States Albers Equal Area Projection
Map (based on standard parallels 29.50 and 45.50 North American datum),
beginning at a point on the east coast of Georgia and the 31st parallel
and ending at the United States-Mexican border, consisting of arcs drawn
with a 241.4 kilometer (150 mile) radius to the north from the following
specified points:
------------------------------------------------------------------------
North West
latitude longitude
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(a)......................................... 29[deg]40[mi 83[deg]24[mi
n]00[sec] n]00[sec]
(b)......................................... 30[deg]07[mi 84[deg]12[mi
n]00[sec] n]00[sec]
(c)......................................... 30[deg]31[mi 86[deg]30[mi
n]00[sec] n]00[sec]
(d)......................................... 30[deg]48[mi 87[deg]58[mi
n]00[sec] n]30[sec]
(e)......................................... 30[deg]00[mi 90[deg]38[mi
n]00[sec] n]30[sec]
(f)......................................... 30[deg]04[mi 93[deg]19[mi
n]30[sec] n]00[sec]
(g)......................................... 29[deg]46[mi 95[deg]05[mi
n]00[sec] n]00[sec]
(h)......................................... 28[deg]43[mi 96[deg]39[mi
n]00[sec] n]30[sec]
(i)......................................... 27[deg]52[mi 97[deg]32[mi
n]30[sec] n]00[sec]
------------------------------------------------------------------------
When any of the above arcs pass through a city, the city shall be
considered to be located in Zone II. (See Figure 2 of Sec. 73.699.)
[28 FR 13660, Dec. 14, 1963, as amended at 33 FR 15422, Oct. 17, 1968;
50 FR 23697, June 5, 1985; 51 FR 44070, Dec. 8, 1986]
Sec. 73.611 Emission levels and mask filter.
(a) The power level of emissions on frequencies outside the
authorized channel of operation must be attenuated no less than the
following amounts below the average transmitted power within the
authorized channel. In the first 500 kHz from the channel edge the
emissions must be attenuated no less than 47 dB. More than 6 MHz from
the channel edge, emissions must be attenuated no less than 110 dB. At
any frequency between 0.5 and 6 MHz from the channel edge, emissions
must be attenuated no less than the value determined by the following
formula:
Formula 1 to Paragraph (a)
Attenuation in dB = -11.5([Delta]f + 3.6);
Where:
[Delta]f = frequency difference in MHz from the edge of the channel.
(b) This attenuation is based on a measurement bandwidth of 500 kHz.
Other measurement bandwidths may be used as long as appropriate
correction factors are applied. Measurements need not be made any closer
to the band edge than one half of the resolution bandwidth of the
measuring instrument. Emissions include sidebands, spurious emissions
and radio frequency harmonics. Attenuation is to be measured at the
output terminals of the transmitter (including any filters that may be
employed). In the event of interference caused to any service, greater
attenuation may be required.
[89 FR 7243, Feb. 1, 2024]
Sec. 73.612 Protection from interference.
(a) Permittees and licensees of TV broadcast stations are not
protected from any interference which may be caused by the grant of a
new station or of authority to modify the facilities of an existing
station in accordance with the provisions of subpart E of this part. The
nature and extent of the protection from interference accorded to TV
broadcast stations is limited solely to the protection which results
from the interference protection requirements set forth in subpart E of
this part.
(b) [Reserved]
[89 FR 7243, Feb. 1, 2024]
Sec. 73.613 [Reserved]
Sec. 73.614 Power and antenna height requirements.
(a) Minimum requirements. Applications will not be accepted for
filing if they specify less than 100 watts horizontally polarized
effective radiated power (ERP) in any horizontal direction. No minimum
antenna height
[[Page 137]]
above average terrain (HAAT) is specified. For stations requesting DTS
operation pursuant to Sec. 73.626, this requirement applies to at least
one site in the DTS.
(b) Maximum power. Applications for new full power television
stations, for changes in authorized full power television stations, and
petitions for changes to the Table of TV Allotments, will not be
accepted for filing if they specify a power which exceeds the maximum
permitted boundaries specified in the following formulas:
(1) A TV station that operates on a channel 2-6 allotment will be
allowed a maximum ERP of 10 kW if its antenna HAAT is at or below 305
meters and it is located in Zone I or a maximum ERP of 45 kW if its
antenna HAAT is at or below 305 meters and it is located in Zone II or
Zone III.
(i) At higher HAAT levels, such TV stations will be allowed to
operate with lower maximum ERP levels in accordance with the following
table and formulas (the allowable maximum ERP for intermediate values of
HAAT is determined using linear interpolation based on the units
employed in the table):
Table 1 to Paragraph (b)(1)(i)--Maximum Allowable ERP and Antenna Height
for TV Stations in Zones II or III on Channels 2-6
------------------------------------------------------------------------
ERP
Antenna HAAT (meters) (kW)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
610............................................................ 10
580............................................................ 11
550............................................................ 12
520............................................................ 14
490............................................................ 16
460............................................................ 19
425............................................................ 22
395............................................................ 26
365............................................................ 31
335............................................................ 37
305............................................................ 45
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(ii) For TV stations located in Zone I that operate on channels 2-6
with an HAAT that exceeds 305 meters, the allowable maximum ERP
expressed in decibels above 1 kW (dBk) is determined using the following
formula, with HAAT expressed in meters:
ERPmax = 92.57-33.24 * log10(HAAT)
(iii) For TV stations located in Zone II or III that operate on
channels 2-6 with an HAAT that exceeds 610 meters, the allowable maximum
ERP expressed in decibels above 1 kW (dBk) is determined using the
following formula, with HAAT expressed in meters:
ERPmax = 57.57-17.08 * log10(HAAT)
(2) A TV station that operates on a channel 7-13 allotment will be
allowed a maximum ERP of 30 kW if its antenna HAAT is at or below 305
meters and it is located in Zone I or a maximum ERP of 160 kW if its
antenna HAAT is at or below 305 meters and it is located in Zone II or
Zone III.
(i) At higher HAAT levels, such TV stations will be allowed to
operate with lower maximum ERP levels in accordance with the following
table and formulas (the allowable maximum ERP for intermediate values of
HAAT is determined using linear interpolation based on the units
employed in the table):
Table 2 to Paragraph (b)(2)(i)--Maximum Allowable ERP and Antenna Height
for TV Stations in Zones II or III on Channels 7-13
------------------------------------------------------------------------
ERP
Antenna HAAT (meters) (kW)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
610............................................................ 30
580............................................................ 34
550............................................................ 40
520............................................................ 47
490............................................................ 54
460............................................................ 64
425............................................................ 76
395............................................................ 92
365............................................................ 110
335............................................................ 132
305............................................................ 160
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(ii) For TV stations located in Zone I that operate on channels 7-13
with an HAAT that exceeds 305 meters, the allowable maximum ERP
expressed in decibels above 1 kW (dBk) is determined using the following
formula, with HAAT expressed in meters:
ERPmax = 97.35-33.24 * log10(HAAT)
(iii) For TV stations located in Zone II or III that operate on
channels 7-13 with an HAAT that exceeds 610 meters, the allowable
maximum ERP expressed in decibels above 1 kW (dBk) is determined using
the following formula, with HAAT expressed in meters:
ERPmax = 62.34-17.08 * log10(HAAT)
(3) A TV station that operates on a channel 14-36 allotment will be
allowed
[[Page 138]]
a maximum ERP of 1000 kW if its antenna HAAT is at or below 365 meters.
(i) At higher HAAT levels, such TV stations will be allowed to
operates with lower maximum ERP levels in accordance with the following
table and formulas (the allowable maximum ERP for intermediate values of
HAAT is determined using linear interpolation based on the units
employed in the table):
Table 3 to Paragraph (b)(3)(i)--Maximum Allowable ERP and Antenna Height
for TV Stations on Channels 14-36, All Zones
------------------------------------------------------------------------
ERP
Antenna HAAT (meters) (kW)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
610............................................................ 316
580............................................................ 350
550............................................................ 400
520............................................................ 460
490............................................................ 540
460............................................................ 630
425............................................................ 750
395............................................................ 900
365............................................................ 1000
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(ii) For TV stations located in Zone I, II or III that operate on
channels 14-36 with an HAAT that exceeds 610 meters, the allowable
maximum ERP expressed in decibels above 1 kW (dBk) is determined using
the following formula, with HAAT expressed in meters:
ERPmax = 72.57-17.08 * log10(HAAT)
Where:
ERPmax = Maximum Effective Radiated Power measured in
decibels above 1 kW (dBk).
HAAT = Height Above Average Terrain measured in meters.
(4)-(5) [Reserved]
(6) The effective radiated power in any horizontal or vertical
direction may not exceed the maximum values permitted by this section,
except that licensees and permittees may request an increase in either
ERP in some azimuthal direction or antenna HAAT, or both, up to the
maximum permissible limits on TV power set forth in paragraph (b)(1),
(2), or (3) of this section, as appropriate, up to that needed to
provide the same geographic coverage area as the largest station within
their market. Such requests must be accompanied by a technical showing
that the increase complies with the technical criteria in Sec. 73.620,
and thereby will not result in new interference exceeding the de minimis
standard set forth in that section, or statements agreeing to the change
from any co-channel or adjacent channel stations that might be affected
by potential new interference, in accordance with Sec. 73.620(e). For
the purposes of this paragraph:
(i) The maximum ERP value shall not exceed the maximum permitted at
any height within the relevant zone consistent with the values permitted
in paragraph (b)(1), (2), or (3) of this section. The associated maximum
height for that given ERP may be exceeded.
(ii) Stations in the same Nielsen DMA are considered to be in the
same market.
(iii) ``Geographic coverage area'' is defined as the number of
square kilometers found within a station's F(50,90) contour as
calculated in Sec. 73.619. A station taking advantage of this provision
need not specify coverage that is congruent with or encompassed by the
largest station in the market.
(c) Determination of applicable rules. The zone in which the
transmitter of a television station is located or proposed to be located
determines the applicable rules with respect to maximum antenna heights
and powers for VHF stations when the transmitter is located in Zone I
and the channel to be employed is located in Zone II, or the transmitter
is located in Zone II and the channel to be employed is located in Zone
I.
[28 FR 13660, Dec. 14, 1963, as amended at 42 FR 20823, Apr. 22, 1977;
42 FR 48881, Sept. 26, 1977; 47 FR 35990, Aug. 18, 1982; 50 FR 23698,
June 5, 1985; 56 FR 49707, Oct. 1, 1991; 58 FR 51250, Oct. 1, 1993; 86
FR 66195, Nov. 22, 2021; 89 FR 7244, Feb. 1, 2024]
Sec. 73.616 References to TV station interference protection
methodology.
(a)-(c) [Reserved]
(d) Calculation of interference (1) For evaluating compliance with
the requirements of this paragraph, interference to populations served
is to be predicted based on the most recent official decennial U.S.
Census population data as identified by the Media Bureau in a Public
Notice issued not less than 60 days prior to use of the data for a
specific year in application processing and otherwise according to the
procedure set forth in OET Bulletin No. 69:
[[Page 139]]
``Longley-Rice Methodology for Evaluating TV Coverage and Interference''
(February 6, 2004) (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 73.8000),
including population served within service areas determined in
accordance with Sec. 73.619, consideration of whether F(50,10)
undesired signals will exceed the following desired-to-undesired (D/U)
signal ratios, assumed use of a directional receiving antenna, and use
of the terrain dependent Longley-Rice point-to-point propagation model.
Applicants may request the use of a cell size other than the default of
2.0 km per side, but only requests for cell sizes of 1.0 km per side or
0.5 km per side will be considered. The threshold levels at which
interference is considered to occur are:
(i) For co-channel stations, the D/U ratio is + 15 dB. This value is
only valid at locations where the signal-to-noise ratio is 28 dB or
greater. At the edge of the noise-limited service area, where the
signal-to-noise (S/N) ratio is 16 dB, this value is + 23 dB. At
locations where the S/N ratio is greater than 16 dB but less than 28 dB,
D/U values are computed from the following formula:
D/U = 15 + 10log10[1.0/(1.0-10-x/10)]
Where x = S/N-15.19 (minimum signal to noise ratio)
(ii) For interference from a lower first-adjacent channel, the D/U
ratio is -28 dB.
(iii) For interference from an upper first-adjacent channel, the D/U
ratio is -26 dB.
(2) [Reserved]
(e)-(g) [Reserved]
[73 FR 5682, Jan. 30, 2008, as amended at 83 FR 5021, Feb. 2, 2018; 83
FR 5544, Feb. 8, 2018; 86 FR 66195, Nov. 22, 2021; 89 FR 7245, Feb. 1,
2024]
Sec. 73.617 Interference protection of other services.
(a) Protection of land mobile operations on channels 14-20. The
Commission will not accept petitions to amend the Table of TV
Allotments, applications for new TV stations, or applications to change
the channel or location of authorized TV stations that would use
channels 14-20 where the distance between the TV reference coordinates
as defined in Sec. 73.622(d), would be located less than 250 km from
the city center of a co-channel land mobile operation or 176 km from the
city center of an adjacent channel land mobile operation. Such filings
that do not meet the minimum TV-to-land mobile spacing standards will,
however, be considered where all affected land mobile licensees consent
to the requested action. Land mobile operations are authorized on these
channels in the following markets:
Table 1 to Paragraph (a)--Land Mobile Operations To Be Protected
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
City Channels Latitude Longitude
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Boston, MA....................... 14, 16................... 42[deg]21[min]24.4[sec] 71[deg]03[min]23.2[sec]
Chicago, IL...................... 14, 15................... 41[deg]52[min]28.1[sec] 87[deg]38[min]22.2[sec]
Cleveland, OH.................... 14, 15................... 41[deg]29[min]51.2[sec] 81[deg]49[min]49.5[sec]
Dallas, TX....................... 16....................... 32[deg]47[min]09.5[sec] 96[deg]47[min]38.0[sec]
Detroit, MI...................... 15, 16................... 42[deg]19[min]48.1[sec] 83[deg]02[min]56.7[sec]
Houston, TX...................... 17....................... 29[deg]45[min]26.8[sec] 95[deg]21[min]37.8[sec]
Los Angeles, CA.................. 14, 16, 20............... 34[deg]03[min]15.0[sec] 118[deg]14[min]31.3[sec]
Miami, FL........................ 14....................... 25[deg]46[min]38.4[sec] 80[deg]11[min]31.2[sec]
New York, NY..................... 14, 15, 16............... 40[deg]45[min]06.4[sec] 73[deg]59[min]37.5[sec]
Philadelphia, PA................. 19, 20................... 39[deg]56[min]58.4[sec] 75[deg]09[min]19.6[sec]
Pittsburgh, PA................... 14, 18................... 40[deg]26[min]19.2[sec] 79[deg]59[min]59.2[sec]
San Francisco, CA................ 16, 17................... 37[deg]46[min]38.7[sec] 122[deg]24[min]43.9[sec]
Washington, DC................... 17, 18................... 38[deg]53[min]51.4[sec] 77[deg]00[min]31.9[sec]
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note 1 to paragraph (a). The Chief, Public Safety and Homeland
Security Bureau, waived the rules to allow channel 15 to be used for
land mobile operation in Los Angeles County, CA (DA 08-2823; adopted
December 30, 2008). Notwithstanding the channels listed in paragraph (a)
of this section, the waiver requires television stations to protect this
land mobile operation.
(b) Protection of land mobile operations below channel 14. (1) TV
broadcast stations operating on Channel 14 must
[[Page 140]]
take special precautions to avoid interference to adjacent spectrum land
mobile radio service facilities. Where a TV station is authorized and
operating prior to the authorization and operation of the land mobile
facility, a Channel 14 station must attenuate its emissions within the
frequency range 467 to 470 MHz if necessary to permit reasonable use of
the adjacent frequencies by land mobile licensees.
(2) The requirements listed below apply to permittees authorized to
construct a new station on TV Channel 14, and to licensees authorized to
change the channel of an existing station to Channel 14, to increase
effective radiated power (ERP) (including any change in directional
antenna characteristics that results in an increase in ERP in any
direction), or to change the transmitting location of an existing
station.
(i) For the purposes of this paragraph (b), a protected land mobile
facility is a receiver that is intended to receive transmissions from
licensed land mobile stations within the frequency band below 470 MHz,
and is associated with one or more land mobile stations for which a
license has been issued by the Commission, or a proper application has
been received by the Commission prior to the date of the filing of the
TV construction permit application. However, a land mobile facility will
not be protected if it is proposed in an application that is denied or
dismissed and that action is no longer subject to Commission review.
Further, if the land mobile station is not operating when the TV
facility commences operation and it does not commence operation within
the time permitted by its authorization in accordance with part 90 of
this chapter, it will not be protected.
(ii) A TV permittee must take steps before construction to identify
potential interference to normal land mobile operation that could be
caused by TV emissions outside the authorized channel, land mobile
receiver desensitization or intermodulation. It must install filters and
take other precautions as necessary, and submit evidence that no
interference is being caused before it will be permitted to transmit
programming on the new facilities pursuant to the provisions of Sec.
73.1615 or Sec. 73.1620. A TV permittee must reduce its emissions
within the land mobile channel of a protected land mobile facility that
is receiving interference caused by the TV emission producing a
vertically polarized signal and a field strength in excess of 17 dBu at
the land mobile receiver site on the land mobile frequency. The TV
emission should be measured with equipment set to a 30 kHz measurement
bandwidth including the entire applicable land mobile channel. A TV
permittee must correct a desensitization problem if its occurrence can
be directly linked to the start of the TV operation and the land mobile
station is using facilities with typical desensitization rejection
characteristics. A TV permittee must identify the source of an
intermodulation product that is generated when the TV operation
commences. If the intermodulation source is under its control, the TV
permittee must correct the problem. If the intermodulation source is
beyond the TV permittee's control, it must cooperate in the resolution
of the problem and should provide whatever technical assistance it can.
(c) Channel 6 protection of FM radio stations. Parties requesting
new allotments on channel 6 be added to the Table of TV Allotments must
submit an engineering study demonstrating that no interference would be
caused to existing FM radio stations on FM channels 200-220.
(d) Blanketing interference. Present information is not sufficiently
complete to establish blanketing interference areas for television
broadcast stations. Blanketing interference is interference in an area
adjacent to a transmitter in which the reception of other stations is
subject to interference due to the strong signal from this station. The
authorization of station construction in areas where blanketing
interference is found to be excessive will be on the basis that the
applicant will assume full responsibility for the adjustment of
reasonable complaints arising from excessively strong signals of the
applicant's station or take other corrective action.
(e) Medical telemetry device notification condition. Stations should
be aware that a condition is placed on all TV
[[Page 141]]
broadcast station authorizations that result in a change in coverage
area, including all authorizations for new stations, which requires TV
broadcasters to identify and notify hospital and other health care
facilities within the station's coverage area to avoid interference to
medical telemetry devices.
[89 FR 7245, Feb. 1, 2024]
Sec. 73.618 Antenna location and principal community coverage.
(a) The TV antenna location shall be chosen so that, on the basis of
the effective radiated power (ERP) and antenna height above average
terrain (HAAT) employed, the following minimum F(50,90) field strength
in dB above one uV/m will be provided over the entire principal
community to be served:
Table 1 to Paragraph (a)--Minimum Field Strength Required Over Principal
Community
------------------------------------------------------------------------
dBu
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Channels 2-6................................................... 35
Channels 7-13.................................................. 43
Channels 14-36................................................. 48
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(b) The location of the antenna must be so chosen that there is not
a major obstruction in the path over the principal community to be
served.
(c) For the purposes of this section, coverage is to be determined
in accordance with Sec. 73.619(b). Under actual conditions, the true
coverage may vary from these estimates because the terrain over any
specific path is expected to be different from the average terrain on
which the field strength charts were based. Further, the actual extent
of service will usually be less than indicated by these estimates due to
interference from other stations. Because of these factors, the
predicted field strength contours give no assurance of service to any
specific percentage of receiver locations within the distances
indicated.
[89 FR 7246, Feb. 1, 2024]
Sec. 73.619 Contours and service areas.
(a) Purposes of the field strength contours. The field strength
contours will be considered for the following purposes only:
(1) In the estimation of coverage resulting from the selection of a
particular transmitting antenna site by an applicant for a TV station.
(2) In connection with problems of coverage arising out of
application of Sec. 73.3555.
(3) In determining compliance with Sec. 73.618(a) concerning the
minimum field strength to be provided over the principal community to be
served.
(b) Determining coverage. (1) In predicting the distance to the
field strength contours, the F (50,50) field strength charts (Figures 9,
10 and 10b of Sec. 73.699) and the F (50,10) field strength charts
(Figures 9a, 10a and 10c of Sec. 73.699) shall be used. To use the
charts to predict the distance to a given F (50,90) contour, the
following procedure is used: Convert the effective radiated power in
kilowatts for the appropriate azimuth into decibel value referenced to 1
kW (dBk). Subtract the power value in dBk from the contour value in dBu.
Note that for power less than 1 kW, the difference value will be greater
than the contour value because the power in dBk is negative. Locate the
difference value obtained on the vertical scale at the left edge of the
appropriate F (50,50) chart for the TV station's channel. Follow the
horizontal line for that value into the chart to the point of
intersection with the vertical line above the height of the antenna
above average terrain for the appropriate azimuth located on the scale
at the bottom of the chart. If the point of intersection does not fall
exactly on a distance curve, interpolate between the distance curves
below and above the intersection point. The distance values for the
curves are located along the right edge of the chart. Using the
appropriate F (50,10) chart for the DTV station's channel, locate the
point where the distance coincides with the vertical line above the
height of the antenna above average terrain for the appropriate azimuth
located on the scale at the bottom of the chart. Follow a horizontal
line from that point to the left edge of the chart to determine the F
(50,10) difference value. Add the power value in dBk to this difference
value to determine the F (50,10) contour value in dBu. Subtract the F
(50,50) contour value in dBu from this F
[[Page 142]]
(50,10) contour value in dBu. Subtract this difference from the F
(50,50) contour value in dBu to determine the F (50,90) contour value in
dBu at the pertinent distance along the pertinent radial.
(2)(i) The effective radiated power to be used is that radiated at
the vertical angle corresponding to the depression angle between the
transmitting antenna center of radiation and the radio horizon as
determined individually for each azimuthal direction concerned. The
depression angle is based on the difference in elevation of the antenna
center of radiation above the average terrain and the radio horizon,
assuming a smooth spherical earth with a radius of 8,495.5 kilometers
(5,280 miles) and shall be determined by the following equation:
Equation 1 to Paragraph (b)(2)(i)
A = 0.0277 x [radic]H
Where:
A is the depression angle in degrees.
H is the height in meters of the transmitting antenna radiation center
above average terrain of the 3.2-16.1 kilometers (2-10 miles)
sector of the pertinent radial.
(ii) This equation is empirically derived for the limited purpose
specified here of determining distance to filed strength contours for
coverage. Its use for any other purpose may be inappropriate.
(3) Applicants for new TV stations or changes in the facilities of
existing TV stations must submit to the FCC a showing as to the location
of their stations' or proposed stations' contour. This showing is to
include a map showing this contour, except where applicants have
previously submitted material to the FCC containing such information and
it is found upon careful examination that the contour locations
indicated therein would not change, on any radial, when the locations
are determined under this section. In the latter cases, a statement by a
qualified engineer to this effect will satisfy this requirement and no
contour maps need be submitted.
(4) The antenna height to be used with these charts is the height of
the radiation center of the antenna above the average terrain along the
radial in question. In determining the average elevation of the terrain,
the elevations between 3.2-16.1 kilometers (2-10 miles) from the antenna
site are employed. Path profiles shall be determined for 8 radials
beginning at the antenna site and extending 16.1 kilometers (10 miles)
therefrom. The radials should be determined for each 45 degrees of
azimuth starting with True North. 10 points per kilometer of elevation
(uniformly spaced) should be used for each radial. It is not necessary
to take the curvature of the earth into consideration in this procedure,
as this factor is taken care of in the charts showing signal strengths.
The average elevation of the 12.9 kilometer (8 miles) distance between
3.2-16.1 kilometers (2-10 miles) from the antenna site should then be
determined from the path profile for each radial. In directions where
the terrain is such that negative antenna heights or heights below 30.5
meters (100 feet) for the 3.2 to 16.1 kilometers (2 to 10 mile) sector
are obtained, an assumed height of 30.5 meters (100 feet) shall be used
for the prediction of coverage. Actual calculated values should be used
for computation of height above average terrain.
(5) In the preparation of the path profiles previously described,
and in determining the location and height above sea level of the
antenna site, the elevation or contour intervals shall be taken from a
high quality bald earth terrain map or dataset such as the United States
Geological Survey Topographic Quadrangle Maps or the National Elevation
Dataset. If a dataset is used, the data must be processed for
intermediate points along each radial using linear interpolation
techniques.
(6) It is anticipated that many of these calculations may be done
using computer software and with computerized datasets. If software or
datasets besides those officially adopted by the FCC are utilized, the
alternate software or data must be identified.
(c) TV Service Areas. (1) The service area of a TV station is the
geographic area within the station's noise-limited F(50,90) contour
where its signal strength is predicted to exceed the noise-limited
service level. The noise-limited contour is the area in which the
predicted F(50,90) field strength of
[[Page 143]]
the station's signal, in dB above 1 microvolt per meter (dBu) as
determined using the method in Sec. 73.619(b) exceeds the following
levels (these are the levels at which reception of TV service is limited
by noise):
Table 1 to Paragraph (c)(1)--Noise Limited Service Levels
------------------------------------------------------------------------
dBu
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Channels 2-6................................................... 28
Channels 7-13.................................................. 36
Channels 14-36................................................. 41
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(2) Within this contour, service is considered available at
locations where the station's signal strength, as predicted using the
terrain dependent Longley-Rice point-to-point propagation model, exceeds
the levels in table 1 to paragraph (c)(1). Guidance for evaluating
coverage areas using the Longley-Rice methodology is provided in OET
Bulletin No. 69. For availability of OET Bulletin No. 69 (which is
incorporated by reference elsewhere in this part), contact FCC (see
Sec. 73.8000 for contact information).
(d) Protected facilities of an allotment. The protected facilities
of a TV allotment shall be the facilities (effective radiated power,
antenna height and antenna directional radiation pattern, if any)
authorized by a construction permit or license, or, where such an
authorization is not available for establishing reference facilities,
the facilities designated in the FCC order creating or modifying the
Table of TV Allotments.
[89 FR 7246, Feb. 1, 2024]
Sec. 73.620 Interference calculation and protection of TV broadcast
services.
(a) Due to the frequency spacing that exists between Channels 4 and
5, between Channels 6 and 7, and between Channels 13 and 14, the minimum
adjacent channel technical criteria specified in this section shall not
be applicable to these pairs of channels (see Sec. 73.603(a)).
(b) Interference is to be predicted based on the procedures found in
Sec. 73.616(d)(1).
(c) An application will not be accepted if it is predicted to cause
interference to more than an additional 0.5 percent of the population
served by another TV station. For this purpose, the population served by
the station receiving additional interference does not include portions
of the population within the noise-limited service contour of that
station that are predicted to receive interference from the TV allotment
facilities of the applicant or portions of that population receiving
masking interference from any other station.
(d) A petition to add a new channel to the TV Table or any
application to modify an existing TV station or allotment will not be
accepted if it is predicted to cause more than 0.5 percent new
interference, consistent with paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section, to
a Class A TV station authorized pursuant to subpart J of this part,
within the protected contour defined in Sec. 73.6010.
(e) Negotiated agreements on interference. TV stations may operate
with increased effective radiated power (ERP) and/or antenna height
above average terrain (HAAT) that would result in more than 0.5 percent
additional interference to another TV station if that station agrees, in
writing, to accept the additional interference. Such agreements must be
submitted with the application for authority to construct or modify the
affected TV station. Negotiated agreements under this paragraph can
include the exchange of money or other considerations from one station
to another, including payments to and from noncommercial television
stations assigned to reserved channels. Applications submitted pursuant
to the provisions of this paragraph will be granted only if the
Commission finds that such action is consistent with the public
interest.
(f) The interference protection requirements contained in this
section apply to television station operations under both the TV
transmission standard in Sec. 73.682(d) and the Next Gen TV
transmission standard in Sec. 73.682(f).
[89 FR 7247, Feb. 1, 2024]
Sec. 73.621 Noncommercial educational TV stations.
In addition to the other provisions of this subpart, the following
shall be applicable to noncommercial educational television broadcast
stations:
[[Page 144]]
(a) Except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section,
noncommercial educational broadcast stations will be licensed only to
nonprofit educational organizations upon a showing that the proposed
stations will be used primarily to serve the educational needs of the
community; for the advancement of educational programs; and to furnish a
nonprofit and noncommercial television broadcast service.
(1) In determining the eligibility of publicly supported educational
organizations, the accreditation of their respective state departments
of education shall be taken into consideration.
(2) In determining the eligibility of privately controlled
educational organizations, the accreditation of state departments of
education or recognized regional and national educational accrediting
organizations shall be taken into consideration.
(b) Where a municipality or other political subdivision has no
independently constituted educational organization such as, for example,
a board of education having autonomy with respect to carrying out the
municipality's educational program, such municipality shall be eligible
for a noncommercial educational television broadcast station. In such
circumstances, a full and detailed showing must be made that a grant of
the application will be consistent with the intent and purpose of the
Commission's rules and regulations relating to such stations.
(c) Noncommercial educational television broadcast stations may
transmit educational, cultural and entertainment programs, and programs
designed for use by schools and school systems in connection with
regular school courses, as well as routine and administrative material
pertaining thereto.
(d) A noncommercial educational television station may broadcast
programs produced by or at the expense of, or furnished by persons other
than the licensee, if no other consideration than the furnishing of the
program and the costs incidental to its production and broadcast are
received by the licensee. The payment of line charges by another
station, network, or someone other than the licensee of a noncommercial
educational television station, or general contributions to the
operating costs of a station, shall not be considered as being
prohibited by this paragraph.
(e) Each station shall furnish a nonprofit and noncommercial
broadcast service. Noncommercial educational television stations shall
be subject to the provisions of Sec. 73.1212 to the extent that they
are applicable to the broadcast of programs produced by, or at the
expense of, or furnished by others. No promotional announcements on
behalf of for profit entities shall be broadcast at any time in exchange
for the receipt, in whole or in part, of consideration to the licensee,
its principals, or employees. However, acknowledgements of contributions
can be made. The scheduling of any announcements and acknowledgements
may not interrupt regular programming, except as permitted under
paragraph (f) of this section.
Note to paragraph (e): Commission interpretation of this rule,
including the acceptable form of acknowledgements, may be found in the
Second Report and Order in Docket No. 21136 (Commission Policy
Concerning the Noncommercial Nature of Educational Broadcast Stations),
86 F.C.C. 2d 141 (1981); the Memorandum Opinion and Order in Docket No.
21136, 90 FCC 2d 895 (1982); the Memorandum Opinion and Order in Docket
21136, 49 FR 13534, April 5, 1984; and the Report and Order in Docket
No. 12-106 (Noncommercial Educational Station Fundraising for Third-
Party Non-Profit Organizations), FCC 17-41, April 20, 2017.
(f) A noncommercial educational television station may interrupt
regular programming to conduct fundraising activities on behalf of a
third-party non-profit organization, provided that all such fundraising
activities conducted during any given year do not exceed one percent of
the station's total annual airtime. A station may use the prior year's
total airtime for purposes of determining how many hours constitute one
percent of its total annual airtime. With respect to stations that
multicast programming on two or more separate channels, the one-percent
annual limit will apply separately to each individual programming
stream. For purposes of this paragraph, a non-profit organization is an
entity that qualifies as a non-profit organization under 26 U.S.C.
501(c)(3).
[[Page 145]]
(1) Audience disclosure. A noncommercial educational television
station that interrupts regular programming to conduct fundraising
activities on behalf of a third-party non-profit organization must air a
disclosure during such activities clearly stating that the fundraiser is
not for the benefit of the station itself and identifying the entity for
which it is fundraising. The station must air the audience disclosure at
the beginning and the end of each fundraising program and at least once
during each hour in which the program is on the air.
(2) Reimbursement. A noncommercial educational television station
that interrupts regular programming to conduct fundraising activities on
behalf of a third-party non-profit organization may accept reimbursement
of expenses incurred in conducting third-party fundraising activities or
airing third-party fundraising programs.
(3) Exemption. No noncommercial educational television station that
receives funding from the Corporation for Public Broadcasting shall have
the authority to interrupt regular programming to conduct fundraising
activities on behalf of a third-party non-profit organization.
(g)-(h) [Reserved]
(i) Mutually exclusive applications for noncommercial educational TV
stations operating on reserved channels shall be resolved pursuant to
the point system in subpart K.
(j) The requirements of this section apply to the entire digital
bitstream of noncommercial educational television stations, including
the provision of ancillary or supplementary services.
[28 FR 13660, Dec. 14, 1963, as amended at 35 FR 7558, May 15, 1970; 47
FR 36179, Aug. 19, 1982; 48 FR 27068, June 13, 1983; 49 FR 29069, July
18, 1984; 50 FR 4664, Feb. 1, 1985; 50 FR 4684, Feb. 1, 1985; 61 FR
36304, July 10, 1996; 65 FR 36378, June 8, 2000; 66 FR 58982, Nov. 26,
2001; 82 FR 21135, May 5, 2017; 89 FR 7248, Feb. 1, 2024]
Sec. 73.622 Digital television table of allotments.
(a) General. The following table of TV allotments contains the
television channel allotments designated for the listed communities in
the United States, its Territories, and possessions. Requests for
addition of new TV allotments, or requests to change the channels
allotted to a community, must be made in a petition for rule making to
amend the Table of TV Allotments. A request to amend the Table of TV
Allotments to add an allotment or change the channel of an allotment in
the Table will be evaluated for technical acceptability using
engineering criteria set forth in Sec. Sec. 73.617, 73.618, and 73.620.
A request to amend the TV table to add a new allotment will be evaluated
for technical acceptability using the geographic spacing criteria set
forth in Sec. 73.622(k) and the engineering criteria set forth in
Sec. Sec. 73.614, 73.617, 73.618, and 73.620(a) and (d). TV allotments
designated with an asterisk are assigned for use by non-commercial
educational broadcast stations only. Rules governing noncommercial
educational TV stations are contained in Sec. 73.621.
(b)-(c) [Reserved]
(d) Reference points and distance computations. The reference
coordinates of a TV allotment shall be the coordinates of the authorized
facility. Where such a transmitter site is not available for use as
reference coordinates, such as a new allotment, the coordinates shall be
those designated in the FCC order modifying the Table of TV Allotments.
(e)-(i) [Reserved]
(j) Table of TV Allotments.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Community Channel No.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Alabama
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Anniston................................ 9
Bessemer................................ 14
Birmingham.............................. 7, *10, 20, 29, 30
Demopolis............................... *19
Dothan.................................. 21, 36
Dozier.................................. *10
[[Page 146]]
Florence................................ 2, *22
Gadsden................................. 26
Gulf Shores............................. 27
Homewood................................ 21
Hoover.................................. 33
Huntsville.............................. 15, 17, 18, 19, *24
Louisville.............................. *30
Mobile.................................. 9, 15, 18, 20, 23, *30
Montgomery.............................. 8, 22, *27, 28, 31
Mount Cheaha............................ *12
Opelika................................. 17
Ozark................................... 33
Selma................................... 25, 34
Troy.................................... 19
Tuscaloosa.............................. 6, 36
Tuskegee................................ 18
Vernon.................................. *4
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Alaska
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Anchorage............................... 7, *8, 10, 12, 20, *26, 28, 33
Bethel.................................. *3
Fairbanks............................... 7, *9, 18, 26
Juneau.................................. *10, 11
Ketchikan............................... 13
North Pole.............................. 20
Sitka................................... 7
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Arizona
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Douglas................................. 36
Flagstaff............................... 13, 22, 32
Green Valley............................ 34
Holbrook................................ *11
Kingman................................. 19
Mesa.................................... 18
Phoenix................................. *8, 10, 15, 17, 20, 24, 26, 27, 29, 33
Prescott................................ 7
Sierra Vista............................ 21
Tolleson................................ 31
Tucson.................................. 9, 16, 19, 23, 25, *28, *30, 32
Yuma.................................... 13, 27
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Arkansas
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Arkadelphia............................. *13
Camden.................................. 18
El Dorado............................... *10, 27
Eureka Springs.......................... 25
Fayetteville............................ *9, 15
Fort Smith.............................. 18, 21, 27
Harrison................................ 31
Hot Springs............................. 16
Jonesboro............................... 18, *20, 27
Little Rock............................. *7, 12, 22, 28, 30, 32, *36
Mountain View........................... *13
Pine Bluff.............................. 24, 34
Rogers.................................. 33
Springdale.............................. 29
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
California
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Anaheim................................. 12
Arcata.................................. 22
Avalon.................................. S
Bakersfield............................. 10, 25, 26, 33
Bishop.................................. 20
Calipatria.............................. 36
Ceres................................... *15
Chico................................... 20, 36
Clovis.................................. 27
Colusa.................................. *2
Concord................................. S
Corona.................................. 25
Cotati.................................. *5
[[Page 147]]
El Centro............................... 9, 22
Eureka.................................. 3, *11, 17, 28
Fort Bragg.............................. * 4, 8
Fremont................................. S
Fresno.................................. 7, 20, 30, *32, 34
Garden Grove............................ S
Hanford................................. 21
Huntington Beach........................ *S
Inglewood............................... S
Long Beach.............................. 18
Los Angeles............................. 4, 7, 9, 11, 13, *28, 31, 34, 35, 36, *S
Merced.................................. 11
Modesto................................. 18
Monterey................................ 32, S
Oakland................................. 31
Ontario................................. 29
Palm Springs............................ 26, 28
Palo Alto............................... S
Paradise................................ 30
Porterville............................. 23
Rancho Palos Verdes..................... 30
Redding................................. *9, 15
Riverside............................... S
Sacramento.............................. *9, 10, 21, 22, 24, 35
Salinas................................. 8, 11
San Bernardino.......................... *5, 24
San Diego............................... 8, 10, 17, 18, *19, 26
San Francisco........................... 7, 12, 20, 28, 29, *30, 32, S, S, *S
San Jose................................ 13, 19, 33, 36, *S
San Luis Obispo......................... 15, 34
San Mateo............................... *27
Sanger.................................. 36
Santa Ana............................... 33
Santa Barbara........................... 21, 27
Santa Maria............................. 19
Stockton................................ 23, 25, 26
Tulare.................................. *3
Twentynine Palms........................ 23
Vallejo................................. 34
Ventura................................. S
Visalia................................. *22, 28
Watsonville............................. *25
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Colorado
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Boulder................................. 32
Broomfield.............................. *13
Castle Rock............................. 15
Colorado Springs........................ 22, 24, 26
Denver.................................. 7, 9, 18, *20, 28, 31, *33, 34, 35, 36
Durango................................. 15, *20, 33
Fort Collins............................ 21
Glenwood Springs........................ 23
Grand Junction.......................... 2, 7, 12, 15, *18
Greeley................................. 17
Longmont................................ 29
Montrose................................ 13
Pueblo.................................. *8, 25, 27
Steamboat Springs....................... 10
Sterling................................ 23
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Connecticut
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Bridgeport.............................. S
Hartford................................ *30, 34, 36, S
New Britain............................. 31
New Haven............................... 10, S, *S
New London.............................. 28
Norwich................................. *9
Stamford................................ *21
Waterbury............................... 33
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Delaware
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Dover................................... 5
[[Page 148]]
Seaford................................. *24
Wilmington.............................. 2, *13, 34
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
District of Columbia
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Washington.............................. 7, 9, *31, *33, 34, 36, S, S
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Florida
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Boca Raton.............................. *25
Boynton Beach........................... *S
Bradenton............................... 29
Cape Coral.............................. 34
Clearwater.............................. 21
Clermont................................ 23
Cocoa................................... *30, 32
Daytona Beach........................... 11, 15
Destin.................................. 29
Fort Lauderdale......................... 30
Fort Myers.............................. 15, *22, 31
Fort Pierce............................. *18, 20
Fort Walton Beach....................... 14, 21, 25
Gainesville............................. 8, 16, *36
High Springs............................ 29
Hollywood............................... 24
Jacksonville............................ *9, 14, 18, 19, 20, *21, 33
Key West................................ 3, 8
Lake Worth.............................. 36
Lakeland................................ 18
Leesburg................................ 7, *S
Live Oak................................ 17
Marianna................................ 26
Melbourne............................... 14, 22
Miami................................... 9, 10, 21, 22, 23, *26, 27, 28, *29, 31, 32
Naples.................................. 28, 32
New Smyrna Beach........................ *24
Ocala................................... 31
Orange Park............................. 10
Orlando................................. 26, 27, 28, 33, *34, 35
Palm Beach.............................. 7
Panama City............................. 9, 13, 16, *28
Panama City Beach....................... 33
Pensacola............................... 17, *24, 34, 35
Sarasota................................ 24
St. Petersburg.......................... 10, 19, S
Stuart.................................. 34
Tallahassee............................. 22, 24, 27, *32
Tampa................................... 9, 12, *13, 17, 20, *S
Tequesta................................ 16
Tice.................................... 33
Venice.................................. 25
West Palm Beach......................... 12, 13, 35
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Georgia
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Albany.................................. 10, 29
Athens.................................. *7, 18
Atlanta................................. 10, 19, *21, 25, 27, 31, 32, *34, 36
Augusta................................. 27, 28, 36
Bainbridge.............................. 19
Baxley.................................. 35
Brunswick............................... 24
Chatsworth.............................. *4
Cochran................................. *9
Columbus................................ *5, 11, 15, 24, 35
Cordele................................. 34
Dalton.................................. 28
Dawson.................................. *7
Macon................................... 13, 26, 30, 33
Monroe.................................. 22
Pelham.................................. *6
Perry................................... 23
Rome.................................... 16
Savannah................................ *8, 16, 22, 23
[[Page 149]]
Thomasville............................. 20
Toccoa.................................. 24
Valdosta................................ 31
Waycross................................ *7
Wrens................................... *6
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hawaii
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hilo.................................... 9, 11, 13, 22, 23
Honolulu................................ 8, *11, *18, 19, 20, 22, 23, *26, 27, 31, 33, 35
Kailua.................................. 29
Kailua-Kona............................. 25
Kaneohe................................. 32
Wailuku................................. 7, *10, 12, 16, 21, 24
Waimanalo............................... 15
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Idaho
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Boise................................... 15, 20, *21, 23
Caldwell................................ 10
Coeur d'Alene........................... *18
Filer................................... *18
Idaho Falls............................. 18, 20, 36
Lewiston................................ 32
Moscow.................................. *12
Nampa................................... 13, 24
Pocatello............................... *17, 23, 31
Sun Valley.............................. 5
Twin Falls.............................. 11, *22, 34
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Illinois
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Aurora.................................. S
Bloomington............................. 28
Carbondale.............................. *8
Champaign............................... 32, 34
Charleston.............................. *30
Chicago................................. 12, 19, 22, 23, 24, *25, 33, 34, S
Decatur................................. 20, 22
East St. Louis.......................... 28
Freeport................................ 9
Galesburg............................... 8
Harrisburg.............................. 34
Jacksonville............................ *18
Joliet.................................. 35
Macomb.................................. *36
Marion.................................. 30
Moline.................................. *23, 31
Mount Vernon............................ 13
Naperville.............................. S
Olney................................... *23
Oswego.................................. 10
Peoria.................................. 24, 25, 26, *35
Quincy.................................. 22, 32, *34
Rock Island............................. 4
Rockford................................ 13, 16, 36
Springfield............................. 11, 15, 16
Urbana.................................. *9, 36
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Indiana
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Angola.................................. 12
Bloomington............................. 27, 28, *33, S
Elkhart................................. 30
Evansville.............................. *9, 12, 22, 26, 28
Fort Wayne.............................. *18, 20, 24, 32, 34
Gary.................................... *17, S
Hammond................................. 21
Indianapolis............................ 7, 9, 13, *21, 22, *23, 25
Kokomo.................................. 15
Lafayette............................... 11
Marion.................................. S
Muncie.................................. 19
Richmond................................ S
Salem................................... 16
[[Page 150]]
South Bend.............................. 27, 29, *31, 36
Terre Haute............................. 10, 18, 35
Vincennes............................... *31
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Iowa
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ames.................................... 5, *21, 23
Burlington.............................. 21
Cedar Rapids............................ 22, 27, 29, 32
Council Bluffs.......................... *33
Davenport............................... 17, 30, *34
Des Moines.............................. 8, 13, 16, 19, *34
Dubuque................................. 14
Fort Dodge.............................. *25
Iowa City............................... *12, 25
Mason City.............................. *18, 24
Newton.................................. 36
Ottumwa................................. 15
Red Oak................................. *35
Sioux City.............................. 9, 14, *28, 30, 32
Waterloo................................ 7, *35
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Kansas
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Colby................................... 17, *19
Derby................................... 31
Dodge City.............................. *21
Ensign.................................. 6
Garden City............................. 11, 13
Goodland................................ 10
Great Bend.............................. 22
Hays.................................... 7, *16
Hoisington.............................. 14
Hutchinson.............................. *8, 19, 35
Lakin................................... *8
Lawrence................................ 25
Pittsburg............................... 7, 13
Salina.................................. 17
Topeka.................................. *11, 12, 13, 16, 27
Wichita................................. 10, 15, 26, 28
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Kentucky
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ashland................................. 13, *36
Beattyville............................. 7
Bowling Green........................... 13, *18, 24, *29
Covington............................... *22
Danville................................ 19
Elizabethtown........................... *23
Harlan.................................. S
Hazard.................................. 20, *33
Lexington............................... 21, 27, 28, *35
Louisville.............................. 8, 11, 14, *30, 32, *34, 36
Madisonville............................ *31
Morehead................................ *30
Murray.................................. *17
Newport................................. 15
Owensboro............................... 17
Owenton................................. *24
Paducah................................. 19, *23, 25
Pikeville............................... *23
Richmond................................ 25
Somerset................................ *17
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Louisiana
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Alexandria.............................. 26, 31, *33, 35
Baton Rouge............................. 9, 13, 24, *25, 34
Columbia................................ 11
Hammond................................. 35
Lafayette............................... 10, 16, *23, 28
Lake Charles............................ 7, 18, *20
Minden.................................. 32
Monroe.................................. *13, 24
New Iberia.............................. 17
[[Page 151]]
New Orleans............................. 15, 19, 21, *23, 26, 27, *28, 29, 33
Shreveport.............................. 16, *17, 23, 28, 34
Slidell................................. 17
West Monroe............................. 19, 22
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maine
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Augusta................................. *20
Bangor.................................. 2, 7, 13
Biddeford............................... *36
Calais.................................. *10
Lewiston................................ 24
Orono................................... *22
Poland Spring........................... 8
Portland................................ 15, 31, 34
Presque Isle............................ 8, *10
Waterville.............................. 17
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Maryland
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Annapolis............................... *21
Baltimore............................... 11, 12, *22, 25, 26, 27, S
Frederick............................... *28
Hagerstown.............................. 23, *29
Oakland................................. *26
Salisbury............................... *16, 29, 32
Silver Spring........................... S
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Massachusetts
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Boston.................................. *5, 20, 21, 22, *32, 33, 34, 35
Cambridge............................... S
Foxborough.............................. S
Lowell.................................. *S
Marlborough............................. 27
New Bedford............................. 24, S
Norwell................................. 36
Pittsfield.............................. 7
Springfield............................. 11, *13, 26
Woburn.................................. S
Worcester............................... 19
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Michigan
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Alpena.................................. 11, *24
Ann Arbor............................... 24
Bad Axe................................. *15
Battle Creek............................ 17, 21
Bay City................................ 23, 30
Cadillac................................ 9, 32, *34
Calumet................................. 5
Cheboygan............................... 16
Detroit................................. 7, *20, 21, 25, 31, 32, 34
East Lansing............................ *33
Escanaba................................ 32
Flint................................... 12, 16
Grand Rapids............................ 7, *11, 13, 19
Ishpeming............................... 10
Kalamazoo............................... *5, 8, 22
Lansing................................. 14, 28, S
Manistee................................ *20
Marquette............................... *8, 19, 35
Mount Clemens........................... 27
Mount Pleasant.......................... *26
Muskegon................................ 24
Onondaga................................ 10
Saginaw................................. 18, 36
Sault Ste. Marie........................ 8, 10
Traverse City........................... 29, 35
Vanderbilt.............................. 21
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Minnesota
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Alexandria.............................. 7, 24
Appleton................................ *10
[[Page 152]]
Austin.................................. *20, 36
Bemidji................................. *9, 26
Brainerd................................ *28
Chisholm................................ 11
Crookston............................... *16
Duluth.................................. *8, 10, 18, 27, 33
Hibbing................................. 13, *31
Mankato................................. 12
Minneapolis............................. 9, 22, 29, 30, 31, 32
Redwood Falls........................... 27
Rochester............................... 10, 26
St. Cloud............................... 16
St. Paul................................ *23, *34, 35
Thief River Falls....................... 10
Walker.................................. 12
Worthington............................. *15
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Mississippi
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Biloxi.................................. *16, 32
Booneville.............................. *9
Bude.................................... *18
Columbus................................ 27
Greenville.............................. 15
Greenwood............................... *25, 32
Gulfport................................ 25
Hattiesburg............................. 22
Holly Springs........................... 26
Jackson................................. 12, 14, *20, 21, 23, 30
Laurel.................................. 7
Magee................................... 34
Meridian................................ 13, 24, *28, 31
Mississippi State....................... *8
Natchez................................. 15
Oxford.................................. *36
Senatobia............................... *S
Tupelo.................................. 11, 17
Vicksburg............................... 36
West Point.............................. 16
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Missouri
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Cape Girardeau.......................... 32, 36
Columbia................................ 17, 27
Hannibal................................ 22
Jefferson City.......................... 20, 29
Joplin.................................. 17, 23, *35
Kansas City............................. *18, 24, 29, 30, 31, 32, 34, 36
Kirksville.............................. 33
Osage Beach............................. 22
Poplar Bluff............................ 15
Sedalia................................. 15
Springfield............................. 10, *16, 19, 28
St. Joseph.............................. 7, 21
St. Louis............................... 14, *23, 24, 26, 31, 33, 35
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Montana
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Billings................................ 11, *16, 18, 20
Bozeman................................. * 8, 27
Butte................................... 15, 19, 20, 24
Glendive................................ 5
Great Falls............................. 8, 17, * 21, 22, 26
Hardin.................................. 22
Havre................................... 9
Helena.................................. 29, 31
Kalispell............................... * 15, 17
Miles City.............................. 3
Missoula................................ *11, 21, 23, 25
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Nebraska
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Alliance................................ *13
Bassett................................. *7
Grand Island............................ 11
[[Page 153]]
Hastings................................ 5, *28
Hayes Center............................ 6
Kearney................................. 18
Lexington............................... *26
Lincoln................................. 8, 10, 15, *27
McCook.................................. 12
Merriman................................ *12
Missoula................................ *11, 20, 23, 25
Norfolk................................. *19
North Platte............................ 2, *9
Omaha................................... *17, 20, 22, 26, 29, 31
Scottsbluff............................. 29
Sidney.................................. 7
York.................................... 24
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Nevada
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Elko.................................... 20
Ely..................................... 27
Henderson............................... 24
Las Vegas............................... 2, 7, *11, 16, 22, 26, 29
Laughlin................................ 32
Paradise................................ 20
Reno.................................... 8, 11, 12, *15, 20, 23, 26
Tonopah................................. 9
Winnemucca.............................. 16
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
New Hampshire
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Concord................................. 23
Derry................................... S
Durham.................................. *11
Keene................................... *18
Littleton............................... *23
Manchester.............................. 9
Merrimack............................... 29
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
New Jersey
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Atlantic City........................... 4
Camden.................................. *23
Jersey City............................. S
Linden.................................. 35
Middletown Township..................... 3
Millville............................... S
Montclair............................... *S
Mount Laurel............................ S
New Brunswick........................... *8
Newark.................................. 12, 26
Newton.................................. 18
Paterson................................ S
Princeton............................... S
Secaucus................................ 25
Trenton................................. *S
Vineland................................ S
Wildwood................................ 36
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
New Mexico
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Alamogordo.............................. *4
Albuquerque............................. 7, 13, 16, *17, 22, 24, 26, *35, 36
Carlsbad................................ 19, 25
Clovis.................................. 12
Farmington.............................. 12
Hobbs................................... 29
Las Cruces.............................. *23, 26
Portales................................ *32
Roswell................................. 8, 10, 21, 27
Santa Fe................................ *8, 10, 27, 29
Silver City............................. 10, 12
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
New York
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Albany.................................. 8, 21, 24
Amsterdam............................... 19
[[Page 154]]
Batavia................................. 24
Binghamton.............................. 7, 8, 27, *31
Buffalo................................. 16, *31, 32, 33, 34, 36, S
Carthage................................ 8
Corning................................. *25, 30
Elmira.................................. 23, 35
Garden City............................. *32
Ithaca.................................. 13
Jamestown............................... 5
New Rochelle............................ S
New York................................ 7, 11, *24, 27, 34, 36, S
Norwood................................. *23
Plattsburgh............................. 14, *36
Riverhead............................... 29
Rochester............................... 9, 10, 21, *22, 28
Saranac Lake............................ 34
Schenectady............................. 22, *25, 35
Smithtown............................... 23
Springville............................. 7
Syracuse................................ 14, 15, 17, 18, 19, *20, 36
Utica................................... 29, 30, 34
Watertown............................... *26, 31
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
North Carolina
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Archer Lodge............................ S
Asheville............................... 13, *20, S
Belmont................................. 25
Burlington.............................. 26
Chapel Hill............................. *20
Charlotte............................... *9, 18, 19, 23, 24
Concord................................. *21
Durham.................................. 9, 14
Edenton................................. *29
Fayetteville............................ 22
Goldsboro............................... 8
Greensboro.............................. 28, 35, S
Greenville.............................. 12, 19, *25, 36
Hickory................................. 14
High Point.............................. 31
Jacksonville............................ 16, *28
Kannapolis.............................. 32
Lexington............................... S
Linville................................ *36
Lumberton............................... *30
Manteo.................................. 13
New Bern................................ 10
Raleigh................................. 15, 17, 18
Roanoke Rapids.......................... *27
Rocky Mount............................. 32
Wake Forest............................. S
Washington.............................. 34
Wilmington.............................. *21, 23, 24, 29
Winston-Salem........................... 16, 29, *33
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
North Dakota
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Bismarck................................ 12, 17, *22, 26, 31
Devils Lake............................. 8, *25
Dickinson............................... 7, *9, 19
Ellendale............................... *20
Fargo................................... *13, 19, 21, 36
Grand Forks............................. *15, 27
Jamestown............................... 7
Minot................................... 10, 13, 14, *15, 24
Pembina................................. 12
Valley City............................. 24
Williston............................... 8, *11, 14
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ohio
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Akron................................... 17, 22, *24
Alliance................................ *29
Athens.................................. *32
[[Page 155]]
Bowling Green........................... *22
Cambridge............................... *6
Canton.................................. S, S
Chillicothe............................. 23
Cincinnati.............................. 12, *17, 18, 20, 26
Cleveland............................... 8, 15, 19, *35, 36
Columbus................................ 14, *16, 21, 27, 28
Dayton.................................. 31, 33, 34, *35, 36
Lima.................................... 4, 8
London.................................. S
Lorain.................................. S
Mansfield............................... 12
Oxford.................................. *29
Portsmouth.............................. 15
Sandusky................................ 3
Shaker Heights.......................... 10
Springfield............................. S
Steubenville............................ 9
Toledo.................................. 11, 13, 23, 26, *29, 35
Youngstown.............................. 31, 33, S
Zanesville.............................. 30
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Oklahoma
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Ada..................................... 17
Bartlesville............................ 36
Cheyenne................................ *8
Claremore............................... *32
Eufaula................................. *31
Lawton.................................. 11
Muskogee................................ 20
Norman.................................. 16
Oklahoma City........................... 7, *13, 15, 18, 19, 23, 24, 25, 27, 33
Okmulgee................................ 28
Shawnee................................. 29
Tulsa................................... 8, *11, 12, 14, 16, 22, 26, 34
Woodward................................ 35
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Oregon
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Bend.................................... *11, 18, 21
Coos Bay................................ 22, 34
Corvallis............................... *7
Eugene.................................. 9, 17, 28, *29, 31
Grants Pass............................. 30
Jacksonville............................ *4
Klamath Falls........................... 13, 29, *33
La Grande............................... *13, 16
Medford................................. 5, *8, 12, 16, 26
Pendleton............................... 11
Portland................................ *10, 21, 24, 25, 26, 32
Roseburg................................ 18, 19, 36
Salem................................... 22, 33
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Pennsylvania
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Allentown............................... S, *S
Altoona................................. 6, 24, 31
Bethlehem............................... 9
Clearfield.............................. *15
Erie.................................... 12, 21, 26, *27, 28
Greensburg.............................. 28
Harrisburg.............................. 10, 32, *36
Hazleton................................ 22
Jeannette............................... 11
Johnstown............................... 8, 35
Lancaster............................... 8, S
Philadelphia............................ 6, 17, 28, 30, 31, 33, *S
Pittsburgh.............................. *4, 16, 20, 21, 23, 25, 27
Red Lion................................ S
Scranton................................ 12, 21, 33, 34, *S
Wilkes-Barre............................ 11
Williamsport............................ 29
Willow Grove............................ S
[[Page 156]]
York.................................... S
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Rhode Island
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Newport................................. 17
Providence.............................. *2, 7, 12, 25
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
South Carolina
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Allendale............................... *21
Anderson................................ 35
Beaufort................................ *32
Charleston.............................. 17, 19, 20, *24, 25, 34
Columbia................................ 7, 10, 15, 22, 25, *33
Conway.................................. *28
Florence................................ 13, *16, 26, 27
Greenville.............................. *8, 17, 29, 30
Greenwood............................... *26
Hardeeville............................. 26
Myrtle Beach............................ 32, 36
Rock Hill............................... 34, S
Spartanburg............................. 11, *S
Sumter.................................. *29, 31
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
South Dakota
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Aberdeen................................ 9, *17
Brookings............................... *8
Eagle Butte............................. *13
Florence................................ 3
Huron................................... 12
Lead.................................... 5, 10
Lowry................................... *11
Martin.................................. *8
Mitchell................................ 26
Pierre.................................. *10, 19
Rapid City.............................. 2, 7, 16, 21, *26
Reliance................................ 13
Sioux Falls............................. 7, 11, 13, 21, *24, 36
Vermillion.............................. *34
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Tennessee
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Chattanooga............................. 8, 9, 13, 14, *35
Cleveland............................... 23
Cookeville.............................. *22
Crossville.............................. 31
Franklin................................ 32
Greeneville............................. 28
Hendersonville.......................... 33
Jackson................................. 21, 35
Jellico................................. 18
Johnson City............................ 9
Kingsport............................... 32
Knoxville............................... 10, 15, 21, 26, *29, 34
Lebanon................................. 25
Lexington............................... *27
Memphis................................. 13, 23, 25, 28, *29, 30, 31, 33
Murfreesboro............................ 16
Nashville............................... *7, 10, 20, 21, 27, 30, 36
Sneedville.............................. *24
Tazewell................................ 36
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Texas
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Abilene................................. 15, 29, 30
Alvin................................... 36
Amarillo................................ *9, 10, 15, 19, 20
Arlington............................... 25
Austin.................................. 7, 21, *22, 23, 33, 34
Baytown................................. 31
Beaumont................................ 12, 15, *29
Belton.................................. 17
Big Spring.............................. 33
Blanco.................................. 18
[[Page 157]]
Borger.................................. 31
Bryan................................... 24
College Station......................... 16, 29
Conroe.................................. *12
Corpus Christi.......................... 8, 10, 19, *23, 26, 27
Dallas.................................. 8, *14, 21, 27, 32, 35, 36
Decatur................................. 30
Del Rio................................. 28
Denton.................................. *29
Eagle Pass.............................. 18
El Paso................................. *13, 15, 16, 17, 18, 20, *21, 25
Farwell................................. 18
Fort Worth.............................. 9, 18, 19, 24
Fredericksburg.......................... 8
Galveston............................... 22, *23
Garland................................. 33
Greenville.............................. 23
Harlingen............................... 16, 18, *21
Houston................................. *8, 11, 13, 19, 21, *24, 26, 34, 35
Irving.................................. 34
Jacksonville............................ 22
Katy.................................... 25
Kerrville............................... 32
Killeen................................. 13
Lake Dallas............................. 31
Laredo.................................. 8, 19
Llano................................... 27
Longview................................ 20, S
Lubbock................................. 16, *25, 27, 31, 35, 36
Lufkin.................................. 24
McAllen................................. 17
Midland................................. 18, 26
Nacogdoches............................. 15
Odessa.................................. 9, 15, 23, *28, 30, 31
Port Arthur............................. 27
Rio Grande.............................. 14
Rosenberg............................... 30
San Angelo.............................. 11, 16, 19
San Antonio............................. *9, 12, 15, *16, 24, 28, 29, 30
Sherman................................. 12
Snyder.................................. 17
Sweetwater.............................. 20
Temple.................................. 9
Texarkana............................... 26
Tyler................................... 7
Uvalde.................................. 26
Victoria................................ 11, 20
Waco.................................... 10, *20, 26, 28
Weslaco................................. 13
Wichita Falls........................... 15, 22, 28
Wolfforth............................... 23
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Utah
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Cedar City.............................. 14
Logan................................... 12
Ogden................................... 24, 35, *36
Price................................... 11
Provo................................... *17, 29, 32
Richfield............................... *19
Salt Lake City.......................... 19, 20, 23, *27, 28, 30, 34
St. George.............................. *18, 21
Vernal.................................. 16
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Vermont
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Burlington.............................. 7, 16, 20, *32
Montpelier.............................. S
Rutland................................. *10
St. Johnsbury........................... *28
Windsor................................. *S
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Virginia
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Arlington............................... 15
[[Page 158]]
Ashland................................. 8
Bristol................................. 35
Charlottesville......................... 2, *26, 32
Culpeper................................ *S
Danville................................ S
Grundy.................................. 14
Hampton................................. 35
Hampton-Norfolk......................... *31
Harrisonburg............................ 20
Lynchburg............................... 7, 21
Manassas................................ 35
New Market.............................. *S
Norfolk................................. 16, 32, 33
Petersburg.............................. 28
Portsmouth.............................. 19, 20
Richmond................................ 10, *22, 23, 24, *29
Roanoke................................. *13, 27, 30, 34, 36
Spotsylvania............................ *S
Staunton................................ *15
Virginia Beach.......................... 7, 21
Waynesboro.............................. *12
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Washington
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Bellevue................................ 24, 33
Bellingham.............................. 14, 19
Centralia............................... *19
Everett................................. 31
Kennewick............................... 27
Pasco................................... 18
Pullman................................. *10, 24
Richland................................ *22, 26
Seattle................................. *9, 16, 23, 25, 30, 36
Spokane................................. *7, 13, 15, 20, 28, 34, 36
Tacoma.................................. 11, 13, 21, *27, *34
Vancouver............................... 30
Walla Walla............................. 9
Yakima.................................. 14, 16, *21, 33
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
West Virginia
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Bluefield............................... 17, 25
Charleston.............................. 18, 24, 29
Clarksburg.............................. 12, 13
Grandview............................... *8
Huntington.............................. *9, 10, 22
Lewisburg............................... 11
Martinsburg............................. 13
Morgantown.............................. *34
Oak Hill................................ 31
Parkersburg............................. 35
Weston.................................. 33
Wheeling................................ 7
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Wisconsin
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Antigo.................................. 19
Appleton................................ 36
Chippewa Falls.......................... 21
Crandon................................. 13
Eagle River............................. 26, 28
Eau Claire.............................. 17, 25
Fond du Lac............................. 5
Green Bay............................... 14, 18, 22, 23, *25
Janesville.............................. 21
Kenosha................................. 30
La Crosse............................... 8, *15, 28, 33
Madison................................. 11, 18, 19, *20, 26
Mayville................................ 34
Menomonie............................... *27
Milwaukee............................... *8, 27, 28, 29, 31, 32, S, *S
Park Falls.............................. *36
Racine.................................. S
Rhinelander............................. 16
[[Page 159]]
Shawano................................. 31
Superior................................ 19
Suring.................................. 15
Wausau.................................. 7, 9, *24
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Wyoming
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Casper.................................. *8, 12, 14, 17, 20
Cheyenne................................ 11, 27, 30
Jackson................................. 11
Lander.................................. 7, *8
Laramie................................. *8
Rawlins................................. 9
Riverton................................ 10
Rock Springs............................ 13
Sheridan................................ 7, 13
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Guam
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hag[aring]t[ntilde]a.................... 8, 12
Tamuning................................ 14
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Puerto Rico
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Aguada.................................. 25
Aguadilla............................... 12, 17
Arecibo................................. 35
Bayam[oacute]n.......................... S
Caguas.................................. 11, *24
Carolina................................ 30
Fajardo................................. 13, *15, 16
Guayama................................. 34
Humacao................................. 23
Mayag[uuml]ez........................... 20, 29, 31, 32
Naranjito............................... 18
Ponce................................... 7, 9, 14, *19, 36, S
San Juan................................ 21, *26, 27, 28, S
San Sebasti[aacute]n.................... 33
Toa Baja................................ *S
Yauco................................... S
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
US Virgin Islands
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Charlotte Amalie........................ 17, 21, *36
Christiansted........................... 20, 23
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(k) Minimum geographic spacing requirements for new TV allotments.
No petition to add a new channel to the Table of TV Allotments will be
accepted unless it shows compliance with the requirements of this
paragraph.
(1) Requests filed pursuant to this paragraph must demonstrate
compliance with the principal community coverage requirements of Sec.
73.618.
(2) Requests filed pursuant to this paragraph must meet the
following requirements for geographic spacing with regard to all other
TV stations and allotments:
(i) For VHF channels 2-13 in Zone I, co-channel allotments must be
separated by 244.6 km, and no adjacent-channel allotments are permitted
between 20 km and 110 km.
(ii) For UHF channels 14-36 in Zone I, co-channel allotments must be
separated by 196.3 km, and no adjacent-channel allotments are permitted
between 24 km and 110 km.
(iii) For VHF channels 2-13 in Zones II and III, co-channel
allotments must be separated by 273.6 km, and no adjacent-channel
allotments are permitted between 23 km and 110 km.
(iv) For UHF channels 14-36 in Zones II and III, co-channel
allotments must be separated by 223.7 km, and no adjacent-channel
allotments are permitted between 24 km and 110 km.
(3) Zones are defined in Sec. 73.609. The minimum distance
separation between a TV station in one zone and TV station in another
zone shall be that of
[[Page 160]]
the zone requiring the lower separation.
(4) Due to the frequency spacing that exists between Channels 4 and
5, between Channels 6 and 7, and between Channels 13 and 14, the minimum
geographic spacing requirements specified in paragraph (k)(2) of this
section shall not be applicable to these pairs of channels (Sec.
73.603(a)).
[62 FR 26712, May 14, 1997]
Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting Sec.
73.622, see the List of CFR Sections Affected, which appears in the
Finding Aids section of the printed volume and at www.govinfo.gov.
Effective Date Notes: 1. At 89 FR 73729, Sept. 6, 2024, Sec. 73.622
was amended by revising the entry for Augusta, under Georgia, effective
Oct. 7, 2024. For the convenience of the user, the revised text is set
forth as follows:
Sec. 73.622 Digital television table of allotments.
* * * * *
(j) * * *
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Community Channel No.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
* * * * *
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Georgia
------------------------------------------------------------------------
* * * * *
Augusta............................................. 12, 28, 36
* * * * *
------------------------------------------------------------------------
* * * * *
Effective Date Notes: 2. At 89 FR 75976, Sept. 17, 2024, Sec.
73.622 was amended by revising, the entry for Cape Girardeau, under
Missouri, effective Oct. 17, 2024. For the convenience of the user, the
revised text is set forth as follows:
Sec. 73.622 Digital television table of allotments.
* * * * *
(j) * * *
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Community Channel No.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
* * * *
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Missouri
------------------------------------------------------------------------
Cape Girardeau.......................... 11, 36
* * * *
------------------------------------------------------------------------
* * * * *
Sec. 73.623 TV application processing.
(a) General. Applications for new TV broadcast stations or for
changes in authorized TV stations filed pursuant to this section will
not be accepted for filing if they fail to comply with the requirements
of this section and Sec. Sec. 73.614, 73.617, 73.618, and 73.620.
(b) Availability of channels. Applications may be filed to construct
TV broadcast stations only on the channels designated in the Table of TV
Allotments set forth in Sec. 73.622(j), and only in the communities
listed therein. Applications that fail to comply with this requirement,
whether or not accompanied by a petition to amend the TV Table, will not
be accepted for filing.
(c) through (g) [Reserved]
(h) TV application processing priorities are as follows:
(1) [Reserved]
(2) TV applications for a construction permit or a modified
construction permit:
(i) Shall be afforded the interference protection set forth in Sec.
73.620:
(A) through (C) [Reserved]
(D) By later-filed TV applications; and
(E) By later-filed rulemaking petitions to amend the Table of TV
Allotments;
(ii) Must demonstrate the requisite interference protection set
forth in Sec. 73.620 to:
(A) TV licensed stations;
(B) TV construction permits;
(C) Earlier-filed TV applications;
(D) Existing TV allotments;
(E) Rulemaking petitions to amend the Table of TV Allotments for
which a Notice of Proposed Rule Making has been released and the comment
deadline specified therein has passed prior to the filing date of the TV
application;
(F) through (J) [Reserved]
(iii) That do not provide the requisite interference protection set
forth Sec. 73.620
[[Page 161]]
to the following applications and petitions will be deemed mutually
exclusive with those applications and petitions:
(A) Other TV applications filed the same day;
(B) Rulemaking petitions to amend the Table of TV Allotments for
which a Notice of Proposed Rule Making had been released and the comment
deadline specified therein had not passed prior to the filing date of
the TV application; and
(C) Earlier-filed rulemaking petitions to amend the Table of TV
Allotments for which a Notice of Proposed Rule Making had not been
released.
(3) TV applicants and TV rulemaking petitioners that are mutually
exclusive pursuant to this section will be notified by Public Notice and
provided with a 90-day period of time to resolve their mutual
exclusivity via engineering amendment or settlement. Those applications
and petitions that remain mutually exclusive upon conclusion of the 90-
day settlement period will be dismissed.
[89 FR 7248, Feb. 1, 2024]
Sec. 73.624 Television broadcast stations.
(a) Television broadcast stations are assigned channels 6 MHz wide.
(b) Minimum programming requirements. The TV service that is
provided pursuant to this paragraph (b) must have a resolution of at
least 480i (vertical resolution of 480 lines, interlaced).
(1) TV licensees or permittees that broadcast in ATSC 1.0 (using the
transmission standard in 73.682(d)) shall transmit at least one free
over the air video program signal at no direct charge to viewers.
(2) [Reserved]
(3) TV licensees or permittees that choose to broadcast an ATSC 3.0
signal (using the Next Gen TV transmission standard in Sec. 73.682(f))
shall transmit at least one free over the air video programming stream
on that signal that requires at most the signal threshold of a
comparable received TV signal. TV licensees or permittees that choose to
broadcast an ATSC 3.0 signal (using the Next Gen TV transmission
standard in Sec. 73.682(f)) shall also simulcast the primary video
programming stream on its ATSC 3.0 signal by broadcasting an ATSC 1.0
signal (using the TV transmission standard in Sec. 73.682(d)) from
another broadcast television facility within its local market in
accordance with the local simulcasting requirement in Sec. 73.3801 and
Sec. 73.6029 and Sec. 74.782 of this chapter.
(c) Provided that TV broadcast stations comply with paragraph (b) of
this section, TV broadcast stations are permitted to offer services of
any nature, consistent with the public interest, convenience, and
necessity, on an ancillary or supplementary basis. The kinds of services
that may be provided include, but are not limited to computer software
distribution, data transmissions, teletext, interactive materials, aural
messages, paging services, audio signals, subscription video, and any
other services that do not derogate TV broadcast stations' obligations
under paragraph (b) of this section. Such services may be provided on a
broadcast, point-to-point or point-to-multipoint basis, provided,
however, that any video broadcast signal provided at no direct charge to
viewers shall not be considered ancillary or supplementary.
(1) TV licensees that provide ancillary or supplementary services
that are analogous to other services subject to regulation by the
Commission must comply with the Commission regulations that apply to
those services, provided, however, that no ancillary or supplementary
service shall have any rights to carriage under Sec. Sec. 614 or 615 of
the Communications Act of 1934, as amended, or be deemed a multichannel
video programming distributor for purposes of section 628 of the
Communications Act of 1934, as amended.
(2) In all arrangements entered into with outside parties affecting
service operation, the TV licensee or permittee must retain control over
all material transmitted in a broadcast mode via the station's
facilities, with the right to reject any material in the sole judgement
of the permittee or licensee. The license or permittee is also
responsible for all aspects of technical operation involving such
telecommunications services.
[[Page 162]]
(3) In any application for renewal of a broadcast license for a
television station that provides ancillary or supplementary services, a
licensee shall establish that all of its program services are in the
public interest. Any violation of the Commission's rules applicable to
ancillary or supplementary services will reflect on the licensee's
qualifications for renewal of its license.
(d) through (f) [Reserved]
(g) Commercial TV licensees and permittees, and low power
television, TV translator, and Class A licensees and permittees, must
annually remit a fee of 5 percent of the gross revenues derived from all
ancillary and supplementary services, as defined by paragraph (c) of
this section, which are feeable, as defined in paragraphs (g)(1)(i) and
(ii) of this section. Noncommercial TV licensees and permittees must
annually remit a fee of 5 percent of the gross revenues derived from all
ancillary and supplementary services, as defined by paragraph (c) of
this section, which are feeable, as defined in paragraphs (g)(1)(i) and
(ii) of this section, except that such licensees and permittees must
annually remit a fee of 2.5 percent of the gross revenues from such
ancillary or supplementary services which are nonprofit, noncommercial,
and educational.
(1)(i) All ancillary or supplementary services for which payment of
a subscription fee or charge is required in order to receive the service
are feeable. The fee required by this provision shall be imposed on any
and all revenues from such services, including revenues derived from
subscription fees and from any commercial advertisements transmitted on
the service.
(ii) Any ancillary or supplementary service for which no payment is
required from consumers in order to receive the service is feeable if
the TV licensee directly or indirectly receives compensation from a
third party in return for the transmission of material provided by that
third party (other than commercial advertisements used to support
broadcasting for which a subscription fee is not required). The fee
required by this provision shall be imposed on any and all revenues from
such services, other than revenues received from a third party in return
for the transmission of commercial advertisements used to support
broadcasting for which a subscription fee is not required.
(2) Payment of fees. (i) Each December 1, all commercial and
noncommercial TV licensees and permittees that provided feeable
ancillary or supplementary services as defined in this section at any
point during the 12-month period ending on the preceding September 30
will electronically report, for the applicable period:
(A) A brief description of the feeable ancillary or supplementary
services provided;
(B) Gross revenues received from all feeable ancillary and
supplementary services provided during the applicable period; and
(C) The amount of bitstream used to provide feeable ancillary or
supplementary services during the applicable period. Licensees and
permittees will certify under penalty of perjury the accuracy of the
information reported. Failure to file information required by this
section may result in appropriate sanctions.
(ii) A commercial or noncommercial TV licensee or permittee that has
provided feeable ancillary or supplementary services at any point during
a 12-month period ending on September 30 must additionally file the
FCC's standard remittance form (Form 159) on the subsequent December 1.
Licensees and permittees will certify the amount of gross revenues
received from feeable ancillary or supplementary services for the
applicable 12-month period and will remit the payment of the required
fee.
(iii) The Commission reserves the right to audit each licensee's or
permittee's records which support the calculation of the amount
specified on line 23A of Form 159. Each licensee or permittee,
therefore, is required to retain such records for three years from the
date of remittance of fees.
[89 FR 7429, Feb. 1, 2024]
Sec. 73.625 TV antenna system.
(a)-(b) [Reserved]
(c) Antenna system. (1) The antenna system shall be designed so that
the effective radiated power at any angle above the horizontal shall be
as low as
[[Page 163]]
the state of the art permits, and in the same vertical plane may not
exceed the effective radiated power in either the horizontal direction
or below the horizontal, whichever is greater.
(2) An antenna designed or altered to produce a noncircular
radiation pattern in the horizontal plane is considered to be a
directional antenna. Antennas purposely installed in such a manner as to
result in the mechanical beam tilting of the major vertical radiation
lobe are included in this category.
(3) Applications proposing the use of directional antenna systems
must be accompanied by the following:
(i) Complete description of the proposed antenna system, including
the manufacturer and model number of the proposed directional antenna.
(ii) Relative field azimuth plane pattern (patterns for both
horizontal and vertical polarization should be included if elliptical or
circular polarization is used consistent with paragraph (d) of this
section) of the proposed directional antenna. A value of 1.0 should be
used for the maximum radiation in the horizontal polarization. The plot
of the pattern should be oriented so that 0 degrees corresponds to true
North. Where mechanical beam tilt is intended, the amount of tilt in
degrees of the antenna vertical axis and the orientation of the downward
tilt with respect to true North must be specified, and a tabulation of
the elevation pattern included consistent with paragraph (c)(3)(vii) of
this section. A horizontal plane pattern reflecting the use of
mechanical beam tilt may be requested if required to facilitate
international coordination.
(iii) A tabulation of the relative field pattern required in
paragraph (c)(3)(ii) of this section. The tabulation should use the same
zero degree reference as the plotted pattern, and be tabulated at least
every 10 degrees. In addition, tabulated values of all maxima and
minima, with their corresponding azimuths, should be submitted.
(iv) Horizontal and vertical plane radiation patterns showing the
effective radiated power, in dBk, for each direction. Sufficient
vertical plane patterns must be included to indicate clearly the
radiation characteristics of the antenna above and below the horizontal
plane. In cases where the angles at which the maximum vertical radiation
varies with azimuth, a separate vertical radiation pattern must be
provided for each pertinent radial direction.
(v) All azimuth plane patterns must be plotted in a PDF attachment
to the application in a size sufficient to be easily viewed.
(vi) The horizontal and vertical plane patterns that are required
are the patterns for the complete directional antenna system. In the
case of a composite antenna composed of two or more individual antennas,
this means that the patterns for the composite antenna, not the patterns
for each of the individual antennas, must be submitted.
(vii) If an elevation pattern is submitted in the application form,
similar tabulations and PDF attachments shall be provided for the
elevation pattern.
(viii) If a matrix pattern is submitted in the application form,
similar tabulations shall be provided as necessary in the form of a
spreadsheet to accurately represent the pattern.
(4) Where simultaneous use of antennas or antenna structures is
proposed, the following provisions shall apply:
(i) In cases where it is proposed to use a tower of an AM broadcast
station as a supporting structure for a TV broadcast antenna, an
appropriate application for changes in the radiating system of the AM
broadcast station must be filed by the licensee thereof. A formal
application (FCC Form 301, or FCC Form 340 for a noncommercial
educational station) will be required if the proposal involves
substantial change in the physical height or radiation characteristics
of the AM broadcast antennas; otherwise an informal application will be
acceptable. (In case of doubt, an informal application (letter) together
with complete engineering data should be submitted.) An application may
be required for other classes of stations when the tower is to be used
in connection with a TV station.
(ii) When the proposed TV antenna is to be mounted on a tower in the
vicinity of an AM station directional antenna system and it appears that
the
[[Page 164]]
operation of the directional antenna system may be affected, an
engineering study must be filed with the TV application concerning the
effect of the TV antenna on the AM directional radiation pattern. Field
measurements of the AM stations may be required prior to and following
construction of the TV station antenna, and readjustments made as
necessary.
(iii) In any case, where the TV licensee or permittee proposes to
mount its antenna on or near an AM tower, as defined in Sec. 1.30002,
the TV licensee or permittee must comply with Sec. 1.30002 or Sec.
1.30003, as applicable.
(5) Applications proposing the use of electrical beam tilt must be
accompanied by the following:
(i) Complete description of the proposed antenna system, including
the manufacturer and model number. Vertical plane radiation patterns
conforming with paragraphs (c)(3)(iv), (c)(3)(v) and (c)(3)(vi) of this
section.
(ii) For at least 36 evenly spaced radials, including 0 degrees
corresponding to true North, a determination of the depression angle
between the transmitting antenna center of radiation and the radio
horizon using the formula in paragraph (b)(2) of this section.
(iii) For each such radial direction, the ERP at the depression
angle, taking into account the effect of the electrical beam tilt,
mechanical beam tilt, if used, and directional antenna pattern if a
directional antenna is specified.
(iv) The maximum ERP toward the radio horizon determined by this
process must be clearly indicated. In addition, a tabulation of the
relative fields representing the effective radiation pattern toward the
radio horizon in the 36 radial directions must be submitted. A value of
1.0 should be used for the maximum radiation.
(d) It shall be standard to employ horizontal polarization. However,
circular or elliptical polarization may be employed if desired, in which
case clockwise (right hand) rotation, as defined in the IEEE Standard
Definition 42A65-3E2, and transmission of the horizontal and vertical
components in time and space quadrature shall be used. For either
omnidirectional or directional antennas the licensed effective radiated
power of the vertically polarized component may not exceed the licensed
effective radiated power of the horizontally polarized component. For
directional antennas, the maximum effective radiated power of the
vertically polarized component shall not exceed the maximum effective
radiated power of the horizontally polarized component in any specified
horizontal or vertical direction.
[62 FR 26990, May 16, 1997, as amended at 63 FR 13562, Mar. 20, 1998; 66
FR 9985, Feb. 13, 2001; 66 FR 65135, Dec. 18, 2001; 83 FR 5544, Feb. 8,
2018; 86 FR 66209, Nov. 22, 2021; 89 FR 7250, Feb. 1, 2024]
Sec. 73.626 TV distributed transmission systems.
(a) Distributed transmission systems. A TV station may be authorized
to operate multiple synchronized transmitters on its assigned channel to
provide service consistent with the requirements of this section. Such
operation is called a distributed transmission system (DTS). Except as
expressly provided in this section, TV stations operating a DTS facility
must comply with all rules applicable to TV single-transmitter stations.
(b) Authorized service area. For purposes of compliance with this
section, a station's ``authorized service area'' is defined as the area
within its predicted noise-limited service contour determined using the
facilities authorized for the station in a license or construction
permit for non-DTS, single-transmitter-location operation (its
``authorized facility'').
(c) Table of Distances. The following Table of Distances describes
(by channel and zone) a station's maximum service area that can be
obtained in applying for a DTS authorization and the maximum
interference area that can be created by its facilities.
[[Page 165]]
Table 1 to Paragraph (c)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Distance from reference point Reference Node
Service field -------------------------------- interference Distance from interfering
Channel Zone strength (dBu) field strength reference point field strength
F(50,90) (km) F(50,50) (km) (dBu) F(50,10) (km) F(50,10) (dBu)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
2-6............................. 1................. 28 108 132 28 183 18.8
2-6............................. 2 and 3........... 28 128 158 28 209 18.8
7-13............................ 1................. 36 101 121 33 182 23.8
7-13............................ 2 and 3........... 36 123 149 33 208 23.8
14-36........................... 1, 2, and 3....... 41 103 142 36 246 26.8
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[[Page 166]]
(1) TV station zones are defined in Sec. 73.609.
(2) DTS reference point. A station's DTS reference point is
established in the FCC Order that created or made final modifications to
the Table of TV Allotments, Sec. 73.622(j), and the corresponding
facilities for the station's channel assignment as set forth in that FCC
Order.
(d) Determining DTS coverage. The coverage for each DTS transmitter
is determined based on the F(50,90) field strength given in the Table of
Distances (in paragraph (c) of this section), calculated in accordance
with Sec. 73.619(b). The combined coverage of a DTS station is the
logical union of the coverage of all DTS transmitters.
(e) DTS protection from interference. A DTS station must be
protected from interference in accordance with the criteria specified in
Sec. 73.620. To determine compliance with the interference protection
requirements of Sec. 73.620, the population served by a DTS station
shall be the population within the station's combined coverage contour,
excluding the population in areas that are outside both the TV station's
authorized service area and the Table of Distances area (in paragraph
(c) of this section). Only population that is predicted to receive
service by the method described in Sec. 73.619(c)(2) from at least one
individual DTS transmitter will be considered.
(f) Applications for DTS. An application proposing use of a DTS will
not be accepted for filing unless it meets all of the following
conditions:
(1) The combined coverage from all of the DTS transmitters covers
all of the applicant's authorized service area;
(2) Each DTS transmitter's coverage is contained within either the
TV station's Table of Distances area (pursuant to paragraph (c) of this
section) or its authorized service area, except where such extension of
coverage meets the following criteria:
(i) In no event shall the F(50,50) service contour of any DTS
transmitter extend beyond that of its authorized facility and its Table
of Distances F(50,50) area; and
(ii) In no event shall the F(50,10) node-interfering contour of any
DTS transmitter, aside from one located at the site of its authorized
facility, extend beyond the F(50,10) reference-interfering contour of
its authorized facility and its Table of Distances F(50,10) reference
area; and
(iii) In no event shall the F(50,10) reference-interfering contour
of a facility located at the site of its authorized facility extend
beyond the F(50,10) reference-interfering contour of its authorized
facility;
(3) Each DTS transmitter's coverage is contiguous with at least one
other DTS transmitter's coverage;
(4) The coverage from one or more DTS transmitter(s) is shown to
provide principal community coverage as required in Sec. 73.618;
(5) The ``combined field strength'' of all the DTS transmitters in a
network does not cause interference to another station in excess of the
criteria specified in Sec. 73.620, where the combined field strength
level is determined by a ``root-sum-square'' calculation, in which the
combined field strength level at a given location is equal to the square
root of the sum of the squared field strengths from each transmitter in
the DTS network at that location.
(6) Each DTS transmitter must be located within either the TV
station's Table of Distances area or its authorized service area.
(g) All transmitters operating under a single DTS license must
follow the same digital broadcast television transmission standard.
[73 FR 74063, Dec. 5, 2008, as amended at 83 FR 5022, Feb. 2, 2018; 86
FR 21226, Apr. 22, 2021; 89 FR 7250, Feb. 1, 2024]
Sec. 73.658 Affiliation agreements and network program practices;
territorial exclusivity in non-network program arrangements.
(a) Exclusive affiliation of station. No license shall be granted to
a television broadcast station having any contract, arrangement, or
understanding, express or implied, with a network organization under
which the station is prevented or hindered from, or penalized for,
broadcasting the programs of any other network organization. (The term
``network organization'' as used in this section includes national and
regional network organizations. See ch. VII, J, of Report on Chain
Broadcasting.)
[[Page 167]]
(b) Territorial exclusively. No license shall be granted to a
television broadcast station having any contract, arrangement, or
understanding, express or implied, with a network organization which
prevents or hinders another broadcast station located in the same
community from broadcasting the network's programs not taken by the
former station, or which prevents or hinders another broadcast station
located in a different community from broadcasting any program of the
network organization. This section shall not be construed to prohibit
any contract, arrangement, or understanding between a station and a
network organization pursuant to which the station is granted the first
call in its community upon the programs of the network organization. As
employed in this paragraph, the term ``community'' is defined as the
community specified in the instrument of authorization as the location
of the station.
(c) [Reserved]
(d) Station commitment of broadcast time. No license shall be
granted to a television broadcast station having any contract,
arrangement, or understanding, express or implied, with any network
organization, which provides for optioning of the station's time to the
network organization, or which has the same restraining effect as time
optioning. As used in this section, time optioning is any contract,
arrangement, or understanding, express or implied, between a station and
a network organization which prevents or hinders the station from
scheduling programs before the network agrees to utilize the time during
which such programs are scheduled, or which requires the station to
clear time already scheduled when the network organization seeks to
utilize the time.
(e) Right to reject programs. No license shall be granted to a
television broadcast station having any contract, arrangement, or
understanding, express or implied, with a network organization which,
with respect to programs offered or already contracted for pursuant to
an affiliation contract, prevents or hinders the station from:
(1) Rejecting or refusing network programs which the station
reasonably believes to be unsatisfactory or unsuitable or contrary to
the public interest, or
(2) Substituting a program which, in the station's opinion, is of
greater local or national importance.
(f) [Reserved]
(g) Dual network operation. A television broadcast station may
affiliate with a person or entity that maintains two or more networks of
television broadcast stations unless such dual or multiple networks are
composed of two or more persons or entities that, on February 8, 1996,
were ``networks'' as defined in Sec. 73.3613(a)(1) of the Commission's
regulations (that is, ABC, CBS, Fox, and NBC).
(h) Control by networks of station rates. No license shall be
granted to a television broadcast station having any contract,
arrangement, or understanding, express or implied, with a network
organization under which the station is prevented or hindered from, or
penalized for, fixing or altering its rates for the sale of broadcast
time for other than the network's programs.
(i) No license shall be granted to a television broadcast station
which is represented for the sale of non-network time by a network
organization or by an organization directly or indirectly controlled by
or under common control with a network organization, if the station has
any contract, arrangement or understanding, express or implied, which
provides for the affiliation of the station with such network
organization: Provided, however, That this rule shall not be applicable
to stations licensed to a network organization or to a subsidiary of a
network organization.
(j)-(l) [Reserved]
(m) Territorial exclusivity in non-network arrangements. (1) No
television station shall enter into any contract, arrangement, or
understanding, expressed or implied; with a non-network program
producer, distributor, or supplier, or other person; which prevents or
hinders another television station located in a community over 56.3
kilometers (35 miles) away, as determined by the reference points
contained in Sec. 76.53 of this chapter, (if reference points for a
community are not listed in Sec. 76.53, the location of the main post
office will be used) from broadcasting any program purchased by the
former
[[Page 168]]
station from such non-network program producer, distributor, supplier,
or other person, except that a television station may secure exclusivity
against a television station licensed to another designated community in
a hyphenated market specified in the market listing as contained in
Sec. 76.51 of this chapter for those 100 markets listed, and for
markets not listed in Sec. 76.51 of this chapter, the listing as
contained in the Nielsen Media Research DMA Rankings for the most recent
year at the time that the exclusivity contract, arrangement or
understanding is complete under practices of the industry. As used in
this paragraph, the term ``community'' is defined as the community
specified in the instrument of authorization as the location of the
station.
(2) Notwithstanding paragraph (m)(1) of this section, a television
station may enter into a contract, arrangement, or understanding with a
producer, supplier, or distributor of a non-network program if that
contract, arrangement, or understanding provides that the broadcast
station has exclusive national rights such that no other television
station in the United States may broadcast the program.
Note 1: Contracts, arrangements, or understandings that are complete
under the practices of the industry prior to August 7, 1973, will not be
disturbed. Extensions or renewals of such agreements are not permitted
because they would in effect be new agreements without competitive
bidding. However, such agreements that were based on the broadcaster's
advancing ``seed money'' for the production of a specific program or
series that specify two time periods--a tryout period and period
thereafter for general exhibition--may be extended or renewed as
contemplated in the basic agreement.
Note 2: It is intended that the top 100 major television markets
listed in Sec. 76.51 of this chapter shall be used for the purposes of
this rule and that the listing of the top 100 television markets
appearing in the ARB Television Market Analysis shall not be used. The
reference in this rule to the listing of markets in the ARB Television
Market Analysis refers to hyphenated markets below the top-100 markets
contained in the ARB Television Market Analysis. If a community is
listed in a hyphenated market in Sec. 76.51 and is also listed in one
of the markets in the ARB listing, the listing in Sec. 76.51 shall
govern.
Note 3: The provisions of this paragraph apply only to U.S.
commercial television broadcast stations in the 50 states, and not to
stations in Puerto Rico or the Virgin Islands, foreign stations or
noncommercial educational television or ``public'' television stations
(either by way of restrictions on their exclusivity or on exclusivity
against them).
Note 4: New stations authorized in any community of a hyphenated
market listed in Sec. 76.51 of this chapter or in any community of a
hyphenated market listed in the ARB Television Market Analysis (for
markets below the top-100 markets) are subject to the same rules as
previously existing stations therein. New stations authorized in other
communities are considered stations in separate markets unless and until
Sec. 76.51 is amended by Commission action, or the ARB listing is
changed.
(Sec. 5, 48 Stat. 1068 (47 U.S.C. 155))
[28 FR 13660, Dec. 14, 1963]
Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting Sec.
73.658, see the List of CFR Sections Affected, which appears in the
Finding Aids section of the printed volume and at www.govinfo.gov.
Sec. Sec. 73.659-73.663 [Reserved]
Sec. 73.664 Determining operating power.
(a) Required method. The operating power of each TV transmitter
shall normally be determined by the direct method.
(b) Direct method. The direct method of power determination for a TV
transmitter uses the indications of a calibrated transmission line meter
located at the RF output terminals of the transmitter. The indications
of the calibrated meter are used to observe and maintain the authorized
operating power of the transmitter. This meter must be calibrated
whenever any component in the metering circuit is repaired or replaced
and as often as necessary to ensure operation in accordance with the
provisions of Sec. 73.1560. The following calibration procedures are to
be used:
(1) The transmission line meter is calibrated by measuring the
average power at the output terminals of the transmitter, including any
filters which may be used in normal operation. For this determination
the average power output is measured while operating into a dummy load
of substantially zero reactance and a resistance
[[Page 169]]
equal to the transmission line characteristic impedance.
(2) If electrical devices are used to determine the output power,
such devices must permit determination of this power to within an
accuracy of 5% of the power indicated by the full
scale reading of the electrical indicating instrument of the device. If
temperature and coolant flow indicating devices are used to determine
the power output, such devices must permit determination of this power
to within an accuracy of 4% of measured average
power output. During this measurement the input voltage and current to
the final radio frequency amplifier stage and the transmission line
meter are to be read and compared with similar readings taken with the
dummy load replaced by the antenna. These readings must be in
substantial agreement.
(3) The meter must be calibrated with the transmitter operating at
80%, 100%, and 110% of the authorized power as often as may be necessary
to maintain its accuracy and ensure correct transmitter operating power.
In cases where the transmitter is incapable of operating at 110% of the
authorized power output, the calibration may be made at a power output
between 100% and 110% of the authorized power output. However, where
this is done, the output meter must be marked at the point of
calibration of maximum power output, and the station will be deemed to
be in violation of this rule if that power is exceeded. The upper and
lower limits of permissible power deviation as determined by the
prescribed calibration, must be shown upon the meter either by means of
adjustable red markers incorporated in the meter or by red marks placed
upon the meter scale or glass face. These markings must be checked and
changed, if necessary, each time the meter is calibrated.
(c) Indirect method. The operating power is determined by the
indirect method by applying an appropriate factor to the input power to
the final radio-frequency amplifier stage of the transmitter using the
following formula:
Formula 1 to introductory text of paragraph (c)
Transmitter output power = Ep x Ip x F
Where:
Ep = DC input voltage of the final radio-frequency amplifier stage.
Ip = DC input current of the final radio-frequency amplifier stage.
F = Efficiency factor.
(1) If the above formula is not appropriate for the design of the
transmitter final amplifier, use a formula specified by the transmitter
manufacturer with other appropriate operating parameters.
(2) The value of the efficiency factor, F established for the
authorized transmitter output power is to be used for maintaining the
operating power, even though there may be some variation in F over the
power operating range of the transmitter.
(3) The value of F is to be determined and a record kept thereof by
one of the following procedures listed in order of preference:
(i) Using the most recent measurement data for calibration of the
transmission line meter according to the procedures described in
paragraph (b) of this section or the most recent measurements made by
the licensee establishing the value of F. In the case of composite
transmitters or those in which the final amplifier stages have been
modified pursuant to FCC approval, the licensee must furnish the FCC and
also retain with the station records the measurement data used as a
basis for determining the value of F.
(ii) Using measurement data shown on the transmitter manufacturer's
test data supplied to the licensee, provided that measurements were made
at the authorized channel and transmitter output power.
(iii) Using the transmitter manufacturer's measurement data.
[89 FR 7251, Feb. 1, 2024]
Sec. 73.670 Commercial limits in children's programs.
(a) No commercial television broadcast station licensee shall air
more than 10.5 minutes of commercial matter per hour during children's
programming on weekends, or more than 12
[[Page 170]]
minutes of commercial matter per hour on weekdays.
(b) The display of Internet Web site addresses during program
material or promotional material not counted as commercial time is
permitted only if the Web site:
(1) Offers a substantial amount of bona fide program-related or
other noncommercial content;
(2) Is not primarily intended for commercial purposes, including
either e-commerce or advertising;
(3) The Web site's home page and other menu pages are clearly
labeled to distinguish the noncommercial from the commercial sections;
and
(4) The page of the Web site to which viewers are directed by the
Web site address is not used for e-commerce, advertising, or other
commercial purposes (e.g., contains no links labeled ``store'' and no
links to another page with commercial material).
(c) If an Internet address for a Web site that does not meet the
test in paragraph (b) of this section is displayed during a promotion in
a children's program, in addition to counting against the commercial
time limits in paragraph (a) of this section the promotion must be
clearly separated from program material.
(d)(1) Entities subject to commercial time limits under the
Children's Television Act shall not display a Web site address during or
adjacent to a program if, at that time, on pages that are primarily
devoted to free noncommercial content regarding that specific program or
a character appearing in that program:
(i) Products are sold that feature a character appearing in that
program; or
(ii) A character appearing in that program is used to actively sell
products.
(2) The requirements of this paragraph do not apply to:
(i) Third-party sites linked from the companies' Web pages;
(ii) On-air third-party advertisements with Web site references to
third-party Web sites; or
(iii) Pages that are primarily devoted to multiple characters from
multiple programs.
Note 1: Commercial matter means air time sold for purposes of
selling a product or service and promotions of television programs or
video programming services other than children's or other age-
appropriate programming appearing on the same channel or promotions for
children's educational and informational programming on any channel.
Note 2: For purposes of this section, children's programming refers
to programs originally produced and broadcast primarily for an audience
of children 12 years old and younger.
[70 FR 36, Jan. 3, 2005, as amended at 71 FR 64164, Nov. 1, 2006]
Sec. 73.671 Educational and informational programming for children.
(a) Each commercial and noncommercial educational television
broadcast station licensee has an obligation to serve, over the term of
its license, the educational and informational needs of children through
both the licensee's overall programming and programming specifically
designed to serve such needs.
(b) Any special nonbroadcast efforts which enhance the value of
children's educational and informational television programming, and any
special effort to produce or support educational and informational
television programming by another station in the licensee's marketplace,
may also contribute to meeting the licensee's obligation to serve, over
the term of its license, the educational and informational needs of
children.
(c) For purposes of this section, educational and informational
television programming is any television programming that furthers the
educational and informational needs of children 16 years of age and
under in any respect, including the child's intellectual/cognitive or
social/emotional needs. Programming specifically designed to serve the
educational and informational needs of children (``Core Programming'')
is educational and informational programming that satisfies the
following additional criteria:
(1) It has serving the educational and informational needs of
children ages 16 and under as a significant purpose;
(2) It is aired between the hours of 6:00 a.m. and 10:00 p.m.;
(3) It is a regularly scheduled weekly program, except that a
licensee may
[[Page 171]]
air a limited amount of programming that is not regularly scheduled on a
weekly basis, including educational specials and regularly scheduled
non-weekly programming, and have that programming count as Core
Programming, as described in paragraph (d) of this section;
(4) It is at least 30 minutes in length, except that a licensee may
air a limited amount of short-form programming, including public service
announcements and interstitials, and have that programming count as Core
Programming, as described in paragraph (d) of this section;
(5) For commercial broadcast stations only, the program is
identified as specifically designed to educate and inform children by
the display on the television screen throughout the program of the
symbol E/I;
(6) The target child audience is specified in writing in the
licensee's Children's Television Programming Report, as described in
Sec. 73.3526(e)(11)(iii); and
(7) Instructions for listing the program as educational/
informational are provided by the licensee to publishers of program
guides, as described in Sec. 73.673.
(d) The Commission will apply the processing guideline in this
paragraph (d) to digital stations in assessing whether a television
broadcast licensee has complied with the Children's Television Act of
1990 (``CTA'') on its digital channel(s). A digital television licensee
will be deemed to have satisfied its obligation to air such programming
and shall have the CTA portion of its license renewal application
approved by the Commission staff if it has aired: At least three hours
per week of Core Programming (as defined in paragraph (c) of this
section and as averaged over a six-month period), or a total of 156
hours of Core Programming annually, including at least 26 hours per
quarter of regularly scheduled weekly programming and up to 52 hours
annually of Core Programming of at least 30 minutes in length that is
not regularly scheduled weekly programming, such as educational specials
and regularly scheduled non-weekly programming. A licensee will also
been deemed to have satisfied the obligation in this paragraph (d) and
be eligible for such staff approval if it has aired a total of 156 hours
of Core Programming annually, including at least 26 hours per quarter of
regularly scheduled weekly programming and up to 52 hours of Core
Programming that is not regularly scheduled on a weekly basis, such as
educational specials and regularly scheduled non-weekly programming, and
short-form programs of less than 30 minutes in length, including public
service announcements and interstitials. Licensees that multicast are
permitted to air up to 13 hours per quarter of regularly scheduled
weekly programming on a multicast stream. The remainder of a station's
Core Programming must be aired on the station's primary stream.
Licensees that do not meet the processing guidelines in this paragraph
(d) will be referred to the Commission, where they will have full
opportunity to demonstrate compliance with the CTA by relying in part on
sponsorship of Core educational/informational programs on other stations
in the market that increases the amount of Core educational and
informational programming on the station airing the sponsored program
and/or on special non-broadcast efforts which enhance the value of
children's educational and informational television programming.
(e) A station that preempts an episode of a regularly scheduled
weekly Core Program will be permitted to count the episode toward the
processing guidelines set forth in paragraph (d) of this section as
follows:
(1) A station that preempts an episode of a regularly scheduled
weekly Core Program on its primary stream will be permitted to air the
rescheduled episode on its primary stream at any time during Core
Programming hours within seven days before or seven days after the date
the episode was originally scheduled to air. The broadcast station must
make an on-air notification of the schedule change during the same time
slot as the preempted episode. If a station intends to air the
rescheduled episode within the seven days before the date the episode
was originally scheduled to air, the station must make the on-air
notification during the same timeslot as the preceding week's episode of
that program. If the
[[Page 172]]
station intends to air the rescheduled episode within the seven days
after the date the preempted episode was originally scheduled to air,
the station must make the on-air notification during the timeslot when
the preempted episode was originally scheduled to air. The on-air
notification must include the alternate date and time when the program
will air.
(2) A station that preempts an episode of a regularly scheduled
weekly Core Program on a multicast stream will be permitted to air the
rescheduled episode on that same multicast stream at any time during
Core Programming hours within seven days before or seven days after the
date the episode was originally scheduled to air. The broadcast station
must make an on-air notification of the schedule change during the same
time slot as the preempted episode. If a station intends to air the
rescheduled episode within the seven days before the date the episode
was originally scheduled to air, the station must make the on-air
notification during the same timeslot as the preceding week's episode of
that program. If the station intends to air the rescheduled episode
within the seven days after the date the preempted episode was
originally scheduled to air, the station must make the on-air
notification during the timeslot when the preempted episode was
originally scheduled to air. The on-air notification must include the
alternate date and time when the program will air.
(3) A station that preempts an episode of a regularly scheduled
weekly Core Program to air non-regularly scheduled live programming
produced locally by the station will not be required to reschedule the
episode.
Note 1 to Sec. 73.671: For purposes of determining under this
section whether programming has a significant purpose of serving the
educational and informational needs of children, the Commission will
ordinarily rely on the good faith judgments of the licensee. Commission
review of compliance with that element of the definition will be done
only as a last resort.
[56 FR 19616, Apr. 29, 1991. Redesignated at 56 FR 28825, June 25, 1991,
as amended at 61 FR 43997, Aug. 27, 1996; 70 FR 37, Jan. 3, 2005; 71 FR
64165, Nov. 1, 2006; 83 FR 5544, Feb. 8, 2018; 84 FR 41934, 41935, Aug.
16, 2019]
Sec. 73.672 [Reserved]
Sec. 73.673 Public information initiatives regarding educational and
informational programming for children.
Each commercial television broadcast station licensee shall provide
information identifying programming specifically designed to educate and
inform children to publishers of program guides.
[70 FR 9877, Mar. 1, 2005, as amended at 84 FR 41935, Aug. 16, 2019]
Sec. 73.681 Definitions.
Antenna electrical beam tilt. The shaping of the radiation pattern
in the vertical plane of a transmitting antenna by electrical means so
that maximum radiation occurs at an angle below the horizontal plane.
Antenna height above average terrain. The average of the antenna
heights above the terrain from approximately 3.2 (2 miles) to 16.1
kilometers (10 miles) from the antenna for the eight directions spaced
evenly for each 45 degrees of azimuth starting with True North. (In
general, a different antenna height will be determined in each direction
from the antenna. The average of these various heights is considered the
antenna height above the average terrain. Where circular or elliptical
polarization is employed, the antenna height above average terrain shall
be based upon the height of the radiation center of the antenna which
transmits the horizontal component of radiation.
Antenna mechanical beam tilt. The intentional installation of a
transmitting antenna so that its axis is not vertical, in order to
change the normal angle of maximum radiation in the vertical plane.
Antenna power gain. The square of the ratio of the root-mean-square
free space field strength produced at 1 kilometer in the horizontal
plane, in millivolts per meter for one kW antenna input power to 221.4
mV/m. This ratio should be expressed in decibels (dB). (If specified for
a particular direction, antenna power gain is based on the field
strength in that direction only.)
Aspect ratio. The ratio of picture width to picture height as
transmitted.
[[Page 173]]
Auxiliary facility. An auxiliary facility is an antenna separate a
from the main facility's antenna, permanently installed on the same
tower or at a different location, from which a station may broadcast for
short periods without prior Commission authorization or notice to the
Commission while the main facility is not in operation (e.g., where
tower work necessitates turning off the main antenna or where lightning
has caused damage to the main antenna or transmission system) (See Sec.
73.1675).
Effective radiated power. The product of the antenna input power and
the antenna power gain. This product should be expressed in kW and in dB
above 1 kW (dBk). (If specified for a particular direction, effective
radiated power is based on the antenna power gain in that direction
only. The licensed effective radiated power is based on the maximum
antenna power gain. When a station is authorized to use a directional
antenna or an antenna beam tilt, the direction of the maximum effective
radiated power will be specified.) Where circular or elliptical
polarization is employed, the term effective radiated power is applied
separately to the horizontally and vertically polarized components of
radiation. For assignment purposes, only the effective radiated power
authorized for the horizontally polarized component will be considered.
Equivalent isotropically radiated power (EIRP). The term
``equivalent isotropically radiated power'' (also known as ``effective
radiated power above isotropic'') means the product of the antenna input
power and the antenna gain in a given direction relative to an isotropic
antenna.
Free space field strength. The field strength that would exist at a
point in the absence of waves reflected from the earth or other
reflecting objects.
Interlaced scanning. A scanning process in which successively
scanned lines are spaced an integral number of line widths, and in which
the adjacent lines are scanned during successive cycles of the field
frequency.
Polarization. The direction of the electric field as radiated from
the transmitting antenna.
Standard television signal. A signal which conforms to the
television transmission standards.
Synchronization. The maintenance of one operation in step with
another.
Television broadcast band. The frequencies in the band extending
from 54 to 608 megahertz which are assignable to television broadcast
stations. These frequencies are 54 to 72 megahertz (channels 2 through
4), 76 to 88 megahertz (channels 5 and 6), 174 to 216 megahertz
(channels 7 through 13), and 470 to 608 megahertz (channels 14 through
36).
Television broadcast station. A station in the television broadcast
band transmitting simultaneous visual and aural signals intended to be
received by the general public.
Television channel. A band of frequencies 6 MHz wide in the
television broadcast band and designated either by number or by the
extreme lower and upper frequencies.
Television transmission standards. The standards which determine the
characteristics of a television signal as radiated by a television
broadcast station.
Television transmitter. The radio transmitter or transmitters for
the transmission of both visual and aural signals.
Vestigial sideband transmission. A system of transmission wherein
one of the generated sidebands is partially attenuated at the
transmitter and radiated only in part.
[89 FR 7252, Feb. 1, 2024]
Sec. 73.682 TV transmission standards.
(a)-(c) [Reserved]
(d) Broadcast television transmission standards.
(1) Transmission of broadcast television signals shall comply with
the standards (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 73.8000) for such
transmissions set forth in:
(i) ATSC A/52;
(ii) ATSC A/53, Parts 1-4 and 6: 2007 and ATSC A/53 Part 5:2010; and
(iii) ATSC A/65C.
(2) Although not incorporated by reference, licensees may also
consult:
(i) ATSC A/54A: ``Recommended Practice: Guide to Use of the ATSC
Digital
[[Page 174]]
Television Standard, including Corrigendum No. 1,'' (December 4, 2003,
Corrigendum No. 1 dated December 20, 2006, and
(ii) ATSC A/69: ``Recommended Practice PSIP Implementation
Guidelines for Broadcasters,'' (June 25, 2002).
(3) For availability of this material, contact ATSC (see Sec.
73.8000 for contact information).
(e) Transmission of commercial advertisements by television
broadcast station. (1) Mandatory compliance with ATSC A/85 RP. Effective
December 13, 2012, television broadcast stations must comply with the
ATSC A/85 RP incorporated by reference, see Sec. 73.8000), insofar as
it concerns the transmission of commercial advertisements.
(2) Commercials inserted by station. A television broadcast station
that installs, utilizes, and maintains in a commercially reasonable
manner the equipment and associated software to comply with ATSC A/85 RP
shall be deemed in compliance with respect to locally inserted
commercials, which for the purposes of this provision are commercial
advertisements added to a programming stream by a station prior to or at
the time of transmission to viewers. In order to be considered to have
installed, utilized and maintained the equipment and associated software
in a commercially reasonable manner, a television broadcast station
must:
(i) Install, maintain and utilize equipment to properly measure the
loudness of the content and to ensure that the dialnorm metadata value
correctly matches the loudness of the content when encoding the audio
into AC-3 for transmitting the content to the consumer;
(ii) Provide records showing the consistent and ongoing use of this
equipment in the regular course of business and demonstrating that the
equipment has undergone commercially reasonable periodic maintenance and
testing to ensure its continued proper operation;
(iii) Certify that it either has no actual knowledge of a violation
of the ATSC A/85 RP, or that any violation of which it has become aware
has been corrected promptly upon becoming aware of such a violation; and
(iv) Certify that its own transmission equipment is not at fault for
any pattern or trend of complaints.
(3) Embedded commercials--safe harbor. With respect to embedded
commercials, which, for the purposes of this provision, are those
commercial advertisements placed into the programming stream by a third
party (i.e., programmer) and passed through by the station to viewers, a
television broadcast station must certify that its own transmission
equipment is not at fault for any pattern or trend of complaints, and
may demonstrate compliance with the ATSC A/85 RP through one of the
following methods:
(i) Relying on a network's or other programmer's certification of
compliance with the ATSC A/85 RP with respect to commercial programming,
provided that:
(A) The certification is widely available by Web site or other means
to any television broadcast station, cable operator, or multichannel
video programming distributor that transmits that programming; and
(B) The television broadcast station has no reason to believe that
the certification is false; and
(C) The television broadcast station performs a spot check, as
defined in Sec. 73.682(e)(3)(iv)(A), (B), (D), and (E), on programming
in response to an enforcement inquiry concerning a pattern or trend of
complaints regarding commercials contained in that programming.
(ii) If transmitting any programming that is not certified as
described in Sec. 73.682(e)(3)(i), a television broadcast station that
had more than $14,000,000 in annual receipts for the calendar year 2011
must perform annual spot checks, as defined in Sec.
73.682(e)(3)(iv)(A), (B), (C), and (E), of all the non-certified
commercial programming it receives from a network or other programmer
and perform a spot check, as defined in Sec. 73.682(e)(3)(iv)(A), (B),
(D), and (E), on programming in response to an enforcement inquiry
concerning a pattern or trend of complaints regarding commercials
contained in that programming;
[[Page 175]]
(iii) A television broadcast station that had $14,000,000 or less in
annual receipts for the year 2011 need not perform annual spot checks
but must perform a spot check, as defined in Sec. 73.682(e)(3)(iv)(A),
(B), (D), and (E), on programming in response to an enforcement inquiry
concerning a pattern or trend of complaints regarding commercials
contained in that programming.
(iv) For purposes of this section, a ``spot check'' of embedded
commercials requires monitoring 24 uninterrupted hours of programming
with an audio loudness meter employing the measurement technique
specified in the ATSC A/85 RP, and reviewing the records from that
monitoring to detect any commercials transmitted in violation of the
ATSC A/85 RP. The television broadcast station must not inform the
network or programmer of the spot check prior to performing it.
(A) Spot-checking must be conducted after the signal has passed
through the television broadcast station's processing equipment (e.g.,
at the output of a television receiver). If a problem is found, the
television broadcast station must determine the source of the
noncompliance.
(B) To be considered valid, the television broadcast station must
demonstrate appropriate maintenance records for the audio loudness
meter.
(C) With reference to the annual ``safe harbor'' spot check in Sec.
73.682(e)(3)(ii):
(1) To be considered valid, the television broadcast station must
demonstrate, at the time of any enforcement inquiry, that appropriate
spot checks had been ongoing.
(2) If there is no single 24 hour period in which all programmers of
a given program stream are represented, an annual spot check may consist
of a series of loudness measurements over the course of a 7 day period,
totaling no fewer than 24 hours, that measure at least one program, in
its entirety, provided by each non-certified programmer that supplies
programming for that program stream.
(3) If annual spot checks are performed for two consecutive years
without finding evidence of noncompliance with the ATSC A/85 RP, no
further annual spot checks are required to remain in the safe harbor for
existing programming.
(4) Non-certified program streams must be spot-checked annually
using the approach described in this section. If annual spot checks of
the program stream are performed for two consecutive years without
finding evidence of noncompliance with the ATSC A/85 RP, no further
annual spot checks are required to remain in the safe harbor for that
program stream.
(5) Even after the two year period for annual spot checks, if a spot
check shows noncompliance on a non-certified program stream, the station
must once again perform annual spot checks of that program stream to be
in the safe harbor for that programming. If these renewed annual spot
checks are performed for two consecutive years without finding
additional evidence of noncompliance with the ATSC A/85 RP, no further
annual spot checks are required to remain in the safe harbor for that
program stream.
(D) With reference to the spot checks in response to an enforcement
inquiry pursuant to Sec. 73.682(e)(3)(i)(C), (2), or (3):
(1) If notified of a pattern or trend of complaints, the television
broadcast station must perform the 24-hour spot check of the program
stream at issue within 30 days or as otherwise specified by the
Enforcement Bureau; and
(2) If the spot check reveals actual compliance, the television
broadcast station must notify the Commission in its response to the
enforcement inquiry.
(E) If any spot check shows noncompliance with the ATSC A/85 RP, the
television station must notify the Commission and the network or
programmer within 7 days, direct the programmer's attention to any
relevant complaints, and must perform a follow-up spot check within 30
days of providing such notice. The station must notify the Commission
and the network or programmer of the results of the follow-up spot
check. Notice to the Federal Communications Commission must be provided
to the Chief, Investigations and Hearings Division, Enforcement Bureau,
or as otherwise directed in a Letter of Inquiry to which the station is
responding.
[[Page 176]]
(1) If the follow-up spot check shows compliance with the ATSC A/85
RP, the station remains in the safe harbor for that program stream.
(2) If the follow-up spot check shows noncompliance with the ATSC A/
85 RP, the station will not be in the safe harbor with respect to
commercials contained in the program stream for which the spot check
showed noncompliance until a subsequent spot check shows that the
program stream is in compliance.
(4) Use of a real-time processor. A television broadcast station
that installs, maintains and utilizes a real-time processor in a
commercially reasonable manner will be deemed in compliance with the
ATSC A/85 RP with regard to any commercial advertisements on which it
uses such a processor, so long as it also:
(i) Provides records showing the consistent and ongoing use of this
equipment in the regular course of business and demonstrating that the
equipment has undergone commercially reasonable periodic maintenance and
testing to ensure its continued proper operation;
(ii) Certifies that it either has no actual knowledge of a violation
of the ATSC A/85 RP, or that any violation of which it has become aware
has been corrected promptly upon becoming aware of such a violation; and
(iii) Certifies that its own transmission equipment is not at fault
for any pattern or trend of complaints.
(5) Commercials locally inserted by a station's agent--safe harbor.
With respect to commercials locally inserted, which for the purposes of
this provision are commercial advertisements added to a programming
stream for the television broadcast station by a third party after it
has been received from the programmer but prior to or at the time of
transmission to viewers, a station may demonstrate compliance with the
ATSC A/85 RP by relying on the third party local inserter's
certification of compliance with the ATSC A/85 RP, provided that:
(i) The television broadcast station has no reason to believe that
the certification is false;
(ii) The television broadcast station certifies that its own
transmission equipment is not at fault for any pattern or trend of
complaints; and
(iii) The television broadcast station performs a spot check, as
defined in Sec. 73.682(e)(3)(iv)(A), (B), (D), and (E), on the
programming at issue in response to an enforcement inquiry concerning a
pattern or trend of complaints regarding commercials inserted by that
third party.
(6) Instead of demonstrating compliance pursuant to paragraphs
(e)(2) through (5) of this section, a station may demonstrate compliance
with paragraph (e)(1) of this section in response to an enforcement
inquiry prompted by a pattern or trend of complaints by demonstrating
actual compliance with ATSC A/85 RP with regard to the commercial
advertisements that are the subject of the inquiry, and certifying that
its own transmission equipment is not at fault for any such pattern or
trend of complaints.
(7) For additional information regarding this requirement, see
Implementation of the Commercial Advertisement Loudness Mitigation
(CALM) Act, FCC 11-182.
(f) Next Gen TV broadcast television transmission standard
authorized. (1) As an alternative to broadcasting only an ATSC 1.0
signal using the DTV transmission standard set forth in paragraph (d) of
this section, DTV licensees or permittees may choose to broadcast an
ATSC 3.0 signal using the Next Gen TV transmission standard set forth in
this paragraph (f), provided it also broadcasts a simulcast signal in
ATSC 1.0 (using the DTV transmission standard in Sec. 73.682(d)).
(2)(i) Effective March 5, 2018, transmission of Next Gen TV
broadcast television (ATSC 3.0) signals shall comply with the standards
for such transmissions set forth in ATSC A/321:2016, ``System Discovery
and Signaling'' (March 23, 2016) (incorporated by reference, see Sec.
73.8000). To the extent that virtual channels (specified in the DTV
transmission standard referenced in ATSC A/65C:2006 in paragraph (d) of
this section) are used in the transmission of Next Gen TV broadcasting,
major channel numbers shall be assigned as required by ATSC A/65C:2006
Annex B (incorporated by reference, see Sec. 73.8000).
[[Page 177]]
(ii) In addition, such signals shall also comply with the standards
set forth in ATSC A/322:2017 ``Physical Layer Protocol'' (June 6, 2017)
(incorporated by reference, see Sec. 73.8000) with respect to the
transmission of at least one free over the air primary video programming
stream.
(iii) Paragraph (f)(2)(ii) of this section will sunset on July 17,
2027.
(Secs. 4, 5, 303, 48 Stat., as amended, 1066, 1068, 1082 (47 U.S.C. 154,
155, 303))
[28 FR 13660, Dec. 14, 1963]
Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting Sec.
73.682, see the List of CFR Sections Affected, which appears in the
Finding Aids section of the printed volume and at www.govinfo.gov.
Sec. 73.683 Presumptive determination of field strength at individual
locations.
(a) See Sec. 73.619(c). For purposes of the cross-reference from
Sec. 90.307(b), the Grade B contour is defined as the F(50,50) contour
at 64 dBu.
(b) - (c) [Reserved]
(d) For purposes of determining the eligibility of individual
households for satellite retransmission of distant network signals under
the copyright law provisions of 17 U.S.C. 119(d)(10)(A), field strength
shall be determined by the Individual Location Longley-Rice (ILLR)
propagation prediction model. Such eligibility determinations shall
consider only the signals of network stations located in the
subscriber's Designated Market Area. Guidance for use of the ILLR model
in predicting the field strength of television signals for such
determinations is provided in OET Bulletin No. 73. For availability of
OET Bulletin No. 73, contact FCC (see Sec. 73.8000 for contact
information).
(e) If a location was predicted to be unserved by a local network
station using a version of the ILLR model specified in OET Bulletin No.
72 or OET Bulletin No. 73, as appropriate, and the satellite subscriber
at that location is receiving a distant signal affiliated with the same
network from its satellite provider, the satellite subscriber shall
remain eligible for receiving the distant signal from its satellite
provider if that location is subsequently predicted to be served by the
local station due to either a change in the ILLR model or a change in
the station's operations that change its coverage.
(f) A satellite carrier is exempt from the verification requirements
of 47 U.S.C. 339(c)(4)(A) with respect to a test requested by a
satellite subscriber to whom the retransmission of the signals of local
broadcast stations is available under 47 U.S.C. 338 from such carrier.
The definitions of satellite carrier, subscriber, and local market
contained in 47 CFR 76.66(a) apply to this paragraph (f).
[44 FR 36039, June 20, 1979, as amended at 47 FR 35990, Aug. 18, 1982;
50 FR 23699, June 5, 1985; 50 FR 32416, Aug. 12, 1985; 65 FR 36641, June
9, 2000; 70 FR 21670, Apr. 27, 2005; 75 FR 80363, Dec. 22, 2010; 85 FR
64408, Oct. 13, 2020; 88 FR 21446, Apr. 10, 2023; 89 FR 7252, Feb. 1,
2024]
Sec. 73.686 Field strength measurements.
(a) Except as provided for in Sec. 73.612, television broadcast
stations shall not be protected from any type of interference or
propagation effect. Persons desiring to submit testimony, evidence or
data to the Commission for the purpose of showing that the technical
standards contained in this subpart do not properly reflect the levels
of any given type of interference or propagation effect may do so only
in appropriate rulemaking proceedings concerning the amendment of such
technical standards. Persons making field strength measurements for
formal submission to the Commission in rulemaking proceedings, or making
such measurements upon the request of the Commission, shall follow the
procedure for making and reporting such measurements outlined in
paragraph (b) of this section. In instances where a showing of the
measured level of a signal prevailing over a specific community is
appropriate, the procedure for making and reporting field strength
measurements for this purpose is set forth in paragraph (c) of this
section.
(b) Collection of field strength data for propagation analysis--(1)
Preparation for measurements. (i) On large scale topographic maps, eight
or more radials are drawn from the transmitter location to the maximum
distance at which measurements are to be made, with the angles included
between adjacent radials of approximately equal size. Radials
[[Page 178]]
should be oriented so as to traverse representative types of terrain.
The specific number of radials and their orientation should be such as
to accomplish this objective.
(ii) At a point exactly 16.1 kilometers (10 miles) from the
transmitter, each radial is marked, and at greater distances at
successive 3.2 kilometer (2 mile) intervals. Where measurements are to
be conducted at UHF, or over extremely rugged terrain, shorter intervals
may be employed, but all such intervals shall be of equal length.
Accessible roads intersecting each radial as nearly as possible at each
3.2 kilometer (2 mile) marker are selected. These intersections are the
points on the radial at which measurements are to be made, and are
referred to subsequently as measuring locations. The elevation of each
measuring location should approach the elevation at the corresponding
3.2 kilometer (2 mile) marker as nearly as possible.
(2) Measurement procedure. The field strength of the visual carrier
shall be measured with a voltmeter capable of indicating accurately the
peak amplitude of the synchronizing signal. All measurements shall be
made utilizing a receiving antenna designed for reception of the
horizontally polarized signal component, elevated 9.1 meters (30 feet)
above the roadbed. At each measuring location, the following procedure
shall be employed.
(i) The instrument calibration is checked.
(ii) The antenna is elevated to a height of 30 feet.
(iii) The receiving antenna is rotated to determine if the strongest
signal is arriving from the direction of the transmitter.
(iv) The antenna is oriented so that the sector of its response
pattern over which maximum gain is realized is in the direction of the
transmitter.
(v) A mobile run of at least 30.5 meters (100 feet) is made, which
is centered on the intersection of the radial and the road, and the
measured field strength is continuously recorded on a chart recorder
over the length of the run.
(vi) The actual measuring location is marked exactly on the
topographic map, and a written record, keyed to the specific location,
is made of all factors which may affect the recorded field, such as
topography, height and types of vegetation, buildings, obstacles,
weather, and other local features.
(vii) If, during the test conducted as described in paragraph
(b)(2)(iii) of this section, the strongest signal is found to come from
a direction other than from the transmitter, after the mobile run
prescribed in paragraph (b)(2)(v) of this section is concluded,
additional measurements shall be made in a ``cluster'' of at least five
fixed points. At each such point, the field strengths with the antenna
oriented toward the transmitter, and with the antenna oriented so as to
receive the strongest field, are measured and recorded. Generally, all
points should be within 61.0 meters (200 feet) of the center point of
the mobile run.
(viii) If overhead obstacles preclude a mobile run of at leat 30.5
meters (100 feet), a ``cluster'' of five spot measurements may be made
in lieu of this run. The first measurement in the cluster is identified.
Generally, the locations for other measurements shall be within 61.0
meters (200 feet) of the location of the first.
(3) Method of reporting measurements. A report of measurements to
the Commission shall be submitted in affidavit form, in triplicate, and
should contain the following information:
(i) Tables of field strength measurements, which, for each measuring
location, set forth the following data:
(A) Distance from the transmitting antenna.
(B) Ground elevation at measuring location.
(C) Date, time of day, and weather.
(D) Median field in dBu for 0 dBk, for mobile run or for cluster, as
well as maximum and minimum measured field strengths.
(E) Notes describing each measuring location.
(ii) U.S. Geological Survey topographic maps, on which is shown the
exact location at which each measurement was made. The original plots
shall be made on maps of the largest available scale. Copies may be
reduced in size for convenient submission to the Commission, but not to
the extent
[[Page 179]]
that important detail is lost. The original maps shall be made
available, if requested. If a large number of maps is involved, an index
map should be submitted.
(iii) All information necessary to determine the pertinent
characteristics of the transmitting installation, including frequency,
geographical coordinates of antenna site, rated and actual power output
of transmitter, measured transmission line loss, antenna power gain,
height of antenna above ground, above mean sea level, and above average
terrain. The effective radiated power should be computed, and horizontal
and vertical plane patterns of the transmitting antenna should be
submitted.
(iv) A list of calibrated equipment used in the field strength
survey, which, for each instrument, specifies its manufacturer, type,
serial number and rated accuracy, and the date of its most recent
calibration by the manufacturer, or by a laboratory. Complete details of
any instrument not of standard manufacture shall be submitted.
(v) A detailed description of the calibration of the measuring
equipment, including field strength meters, measuring antenna, and
connecting cable.
(vi) Terrain profiles in each direction in which measurements were
made, drawn on curved earth paper for equivalent 4/3 earth radius, of
the largest available scale.
(c) Collection of field strength data to determine television
service in specific communities--(1) Preparation for measurement. (i)
The population (P) of the community, and its suburbs, if any, is
determined by reference to the most recent official decennial U.S.
Census population data as identified by the Media Bureau in a Public
Notice. (See Sec. 73.620(b)).
(ii) The number of locations at which measurements are to be made
shall be at least 15, and shall be approximately equal to 0.1 (P) \1/2\,
if this product is a number greater than 15.
(iii) A rectangular grid, of such size and shape as to encompass the
boundaries of the community is drawn on an accurate map of the
community. The number of line intersections on the grid included within
the boundaries of the community shall be at least equal to the required
number of measuring locations. The position of each intersection on the
community map determines the location at which a measurement shall be
made.
(2) Measurement procedure. The field strength of the visual carrier
shall be measured, with a voltmeter capable of indicating accurately the
peak amplitude of the synchronizing signal. All measurements shall be
made utilizing a receiving antenna designed for reception of the
horizontally polarized signal component, elevated 9.1 meter (30 feet)
above street level.
(i) Each measuring location shall be chosen as close as feasible to
a point indicated on the map, as previously prepared, and at as nearly
the same elevation as that point as possible.
(ii) At each measuring location, after equipment calibration and
elevation of the antenna, a check is made to determine whether the
strongest signal arrives from a direction other than from the
transmitter.
(iii) At 20 percent or more of the measuring locations, mobile runs,
as described in paragraph (b)(2) of this section shall be made, with no
less than three such mobile runs in any case. The points at which mobile
measurements are made shall be well separated. Spot measurements may be
made at other measuring points.
(iv) Each actual measuring location is marked exactly on the map of
the community, and suitably keyed. A written record shall be maintained,
describing, for each location, factors which may affect the recorded
field, such as the approximate time of measurement, weather, topography,
overhead wiring, heights and types of vegetation, buildings and other
structures. The orientation, with respect to the measuring location
shall be indicated of objects of such shape and size as to be capable of
causing shadows or reflections. If the strongest signal received was
found to arrive from a direction other than that of the transmitter,
this fact shall be recorded.
(3) Method of reporting measurements. A report of measurements to
the Commission shall be submitted in affidavit form, in triplicate, and
should contain the following information:
[[Page 180]]
(i) A map of the community showing each actual measuring location,
specifically identifying the points at which mobile runs were made.
(ii) A table keyed to the above map, showing the field strength at
each measuring point, reduced to dBu for the actual effective radiated
power of the station. Weather, date, and time of each measurement shall
be indicated.
(iii) Notes describing each measuring location.
(iv) A topographic map of the largest available scale on which are
marked the community and the transmitter site of the station whose
signals have been measured, which includes all areas on or near the
direct path of signal propagation.
(v) Computations of the mean and standard deviation of all measured
field strengths, or a graph on which the distribution of measured field
strength values is plotted.
(vi) A list of calibrated equipment used for the measurements, which
for each instrument, specifies its manufacturer, type, serial number and
rated accuracy, and the date of its most recent calibration by the
manufacturer, or by a laboratory. Complete details of any instrument not
of standard manufacture shall be submitted.
(vii) A detailed description of the procedure employed in the
calibration of the measuring equipment, including field strength meters
measuring antenna, and connecting cable.
(d) [Reserved]
(e) Collection of field strength data to determine television signal
intensity at an individual location--cluster measurements--(1)
Preparation for measurements--(i) Testing antenna. The test antenna
shall be either a standard half-wave dipole tuned to the center
frequency of the channel being tested or a gain antenna provided its
antenna factor for the channel(s) under test has been determined. Use
the antenna factor supplied by the antenna manufacturer as determined on
an antenna range.
(ii) Testing locations--At the test site, choose a minimum of five
locations as close as possible to the specific site where the site's
receiving antenna is located. If there is no receiving antenna at the
site, choose a minimum of five locations as close as possible to a
reasonable and likely spot for the antenna. The locations shall be at
least three meters apart, enough so that the testing is practical. If
possible, the first testing point should be chosen as the center point
of a square whose corners are the four other locations. Calculate the
median of the five measurements (in units of dB[micro]) and report it as
the measurement.
(iii) Multiple signals--
(A) If more than one signal is being measured (i.e., signals from
different transmitters), use the same locations to measure each signal.
(B) For establishing eligibility of a satellite subscriber to
receive distant network signals, only stations affiliated with the
network in question that are located in the same Nielsen Designated
Market Area (DMA) as the test site may be considered and tested.
(2) Measurement procedure. Measurements shall be made in accordance
with good engineering practice and in accordance with this section of
this chapter. At each measuring location, the following procedure shall
be employed:
(i) Testing equipment. Perform an on-site calibration of the test
instrument in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. Tune a
calibrated instrument to the center of the channel being tested. Measure
the integrated average power over the full 6 megahertz bandwidth of the
television signal. The intermediate frequency of the instrument should
be set to 100 kilohertz unless the instrument is specifically designed
by the manufacturer to use an alternative i.f. setting. The instrument
must be capable of integrating over the selected i.f. for the 6
megahertz channel bandwidth. Take all measurements with a horizontally
polarized antenna. Use a shielded transmission line between the testing
antenna and the field strength meter. Match the antenna impedance to the
transmission line at all frequencies measured, and, if using an un-
balanced line, employ a suitable balance. Take account of the
transmission line loss for each frequency being measured.
(ii) Weather. Do not take measurements during periods of inclement
weather, including, but not limited to,
[[Page 181]]
periods of heavy rainfall, snowfall accumulation, high windspeed, or any
combination thereof.
(iii) Antenna elevation. When field strength is being measured for a
one-story building, elevate the testing antenna to 6.1 meters (20 feet)
above the ground. In situations where the field strength is being
measured for a building taller than one-story, elevate the testing
antenna 9.1 meters (30 feet) above the ground.
(iv) Antenna orientation. Orient the testing antenna in the
direction which maximizes the value of field strength for the signal
being measured. If more than one station's signal is being measured,
orient the testing antenna separately for each station.
(3) Written record shall be made and shall include at least the
following:
(i) A list of calibrated equipment used in the field strength
survey, which for each instrument specifies the manufacturer, type,
serial number and rated accuracy, and the date of the most recent
calibration by the manufacturer or by a laboratory. Include complete
details of any instrument not of standard manufacture.
(ii) A detailed description of the calibration of the measuring
equipment, including field strength meters, measuring antenna, and
connecting cable.
(iii) For each spot at the measuring site, all factors which may
affect the recorded field, such as topography, height and types of
vegetation, buildings, obstacles, weather, and other local features.
(iv) A description of where the cluster measurements were made.
(v) Time and date of the measurements and signature of the person
making the measurements.
(vi) For each channel being measured, a list of the measured value
of field strength (in units of dB[micro] after adjustment for line loss
and antenna factor) of the five readings made during the cluster
measurement process, with the median value highlighted.
[40 FR 27683, July 1, 1975, as amended at 50 FR 23701, June 5, 1985; 64
FR 7127, Feb. 12, 1999; 64 FR 73433, Dec. 30, 1999; 75 FR 81498, Dec.
28, 2010; 89 FR 7253, Feb. 1, 2024]
Sec. 73.687 Transmission system requirements.
(a)-(b) [Reserved]
(c) Requirements applicable to transmitters are as follows: (1)
[Reserved]
(2) The transmitters shall be equipped with suitable indicating
instruments for the determination of operating power and with other
instruments necessary for proper adjustment, operation, and maintenance
of the equipment.
(3) Adequate provision shall be made for varying the output power of
the transmitters to compensate for excessive variations in line voltage
or for other factors affecting the output power.
(4) Adequate provisions shall be provided in all component parts to
avoid overheating at the rated maximum output powers.
(d) The construction, installation, and operation of broadcast
equipment is expected to conform with all applicable local, state, and
federally imposed safety regulations and standards, enforcement of which
is the responsibility of the issuing regulatory agency.
(Secs. 4, 5, 303, 48 Stat., as amended, 1066, 1068, 1082 (47 U.S.C. 154,
155, 303))
[28 FR 13660, Dec. 14, 1963]
Editorial Note: For Federal Register citations affecting Sec.
73.687, see the List of CFR Sections Affected, which appears in the
Finding Aids section of the printed volume and at www.govinfo.gov.
Sec. 73.688 Indicating instruments.
(a) Each TV broadcast station shall be equipped with indicating
instruments which conform with the specifications described in Sec.
73.1215 for measuring the operating parameters of the last radio stage
of the transmitter, and with such other instruments as are necessary for
the proper adjustment, operation, and maintenance of the transmitting
system.
(b) The function of each instrument shall be clearly and permanently
shown on the instrument itself or on the panel immediately adjacent
thereto.
(c) In the event that any one of these indicating instruments
becomes defective, when no substitute which conforms with the required
specifications
[[Page 182]]
is available, the station may be operated without the defective
instrument pending its repair or replacement for a period not in excess
of 60 days without further authority of the FCC, provided that:
(1) If the defective instrument is the transmission line meter used
for determining the output power by the direct method, the operating
power shall be determined or maintained by the indirect method whenever
possible or by using the operating parameters of the last radio stage of
the transmitter during the time the station is operated without the
transmission line meter.
(2) If conditions beyond the control of the licensee prevent the
restoration of the meter to service within the above allowed period,
informal request in accordance with Sec. 73.3549 may be filed for such
additional time as may be required to complete repairs of the defective
instrument.
[41 FR 36818, Sept. 1, 1976, as amended at 48 FR 38480, Aug. 24, 1983;
49 FR 50048, Dec. 26, 1984; 50 FR 26568, June 27, 1985; 80 FR 53750,
Sept. 8, 2015; 89 FR 7253, Feb. 1, 2024 ]
Sec. 73.699 TV engineering charts.
This section consists of the following Figures: 1-5, 5a, 6-10, 10a-
10e, 11-12, 13-16.
Note: The charts as reproduced herein, due to their small scale, are
not to be used in connection with material submitted to the FCC.
[[Page 183]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MR91.093
[[Page 184]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MR91.094
[[Page 185]]
Figures 3--8 [Reserved]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MR91.100
[[Page 186]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MR91.101
[[Page 187]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MR91.102
[[Page 188]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MR91.103
[[Page 189]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22NO21.000
[[Page 190]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR22NO21.001
[[Page 191]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MR91.106
[[Page 192]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TC01MR91.107
Figures 11--15 [Reserved]
[28 FR 13660, Dec. 14, 1963, as amended at 36 FR 17429, Aug. 31, 1971;
39 FR 40957, Nov. 22, 1974; 40 FR 27684, July 1, 1975; 41 FR 56326, Dec.
28, 1976; 44 FR 36040, June 20, 1979; 47 FR 3790, Jan. 27, 1982; 47 FR
35990, Aug. 18, 1982; 50 FR 13972, Apr. 9, 1985; 50 FR 23701, June 5,
1985; 50 FR 32205, Aug. 9, 1985; 52 FR 11656, Apr. 10, 1987; 54 FR 9807,
Mar. 8, 1989; 58 FR 29983, May 25, 1993; 86 FR 66210, Nov. 22, 2021; 89
FR 7253]
[[Page 193]]
Effective Date Note: At 42 FR 25736, May 19, 1977, the effective
date of Sec. 73.699 Figure 10e was stayed indefinitely.
Subpart F_International Broadcast Stations
Sec. 73.701 Definitions.
The following definitions apply to terminology employed in this
subpart:
(a) International broadcast stations. A broadcasting station
employing frequencies allocated to the broadcasting service between 5900
and 26100 kHz, the transmissions of which are intended to be received
directly by the general public in foreign countries. (A station may be
authorized more than one transmitter.) There are both Federal and non-
Federal Government international broadcast stations; only the latter are
licensed by the Commission and are subject to the rules of this subpart.
(b) Transmitter-hour. One frequency used on one transmitter for one
hour.
(c) Frequency-hour. One frequency used for one hour regardless of
the number of transmitters over which it is simultaneously broadcast by
a station during that hour.
(d) Multiple operation. Broadcasting by a station on one frequency
over two or more transmitters simultaneously. If a station uses the same
frequency simultaneously on each of two (three, etc.) transmitters for
an hour, it uses one frequency-hour and two (three, etc.) transmitter-
hours.
(e) Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). Time scale, based on the
second (SI), as defined in Recommendation ITU-R TF.460-6. For most
practical purposes associated with the ITU Radio Regulations, UTC is
equivalent to mean solar time at the prime meridian (0[deg] longitude),
formerly expressed in GMT. (RR)
(f) Sunspot number. The 12-month running average of the number of
sunspots for any month as indicated in the U.S. Department of Commerce
Telecommunications Research and Engineering Report No. 13--available
from the Superintendent of Documents, Washington, DC 20402. The sunspot
number varies in an approximate 11-year cycle.
(g) Day. Any twenty-four hour period beginning 0100 UTC and ending
0100 UTC.
(h) Schedule A. That portion of any year commencing at 0100 UTC on
the last Sunday in March and ending at 0100 UTC on the last Sunday in
October.
(i) Schedule B. That portion of any year commencing at 0100 UTC on
the last Sunday in October and ending at 0100 UTC on the last Sunday in
March.
(j) [Reserved]
(k) Seasonal schedule. An assignment, for a season, of a frequency
or frequencies, and other technical parameters, to be used by a station
for transmission to particular zones or areas of reception during
specified hours.
(l) Reference month. That month of a season which is used for
determining predicted propagation characteristics for the season. The
reference month for Schedule A is July and the reference month for
Schedule B is December.
(m) Maximum usable frequency (MUF). The highest frequency which is
returned by ionospheric radio propagation to the surface of the earth
for a particular path and time of day for 50 percent of the days of the
reference month.
(n) Optimum working frequency (FOT). The highest frequency which is
returned by ionospheric radio propagation to the surface of the earth
for a particular path and time of day for 90 percent of the days of the
reference month.
Note: The international abbreviation for optimum working frequency,
FOT, is formed with the initial letters of the French words for
``optimum working frequency'' which are ``frequence optimum de
travail.''
(o) Zone of reception. Any geographic zone indicated in Sec. 73.703
in which the reception of particular programs is specifically intended
and in which broadcast coverage is contemplated.
(p) Area of reception. Any geographic area smaller than a zone of
reception in which the reception of particular programs is specifically
intended and
[[Page 194]]
in which broadcast coverage is contemplated, such areas being indicated
by countries or parts of countries.
(q) Delivered median field strength, or field strength. The field
strength incident upon the zone or area of reception expressed in
microvolts per meter, or decibels above one microvolt per meter, which
is exceeded by the hourly median value for 50 percent of the days of the
reference month.
(r) Carrier power. The average power supplied to the antenna
transmission line by a transmitter during one radio frequency cycle
under conditions of no modulation.
[38 FR 18892, July 16, 1973, as amended at 68 FR 25538, May 13, 2003; 70
FR 46676, Aug. 10, 2005]
Sec. 73.702 Assignment and use of frequencies.
(a) Frequencies will be assigned by the Commission prior to the
start of each season to authorized international broadcasting stations
for use during the season at specified hours and for transmission to
specified zones or areas of reception, with specified power and antenna
bearing. Six months prior to the start of each season, licensees and
permittees shall by informal written request, submitted to the
Commission electronically in the International Communications Filing
System (ICFS), indicate for the season the frequency or frequencies
desired for transmission to each zone or area of reception specified in
the license or permit, the specific hours during which it desires to
transmit to such zones or areas on each frequency, and the power,
antenna gain, and antenna bearing it desires to use. Requests will be
honored to the extent that interference and propagation conditions
permit and that they are otherwise in accordance with the provisions of
this section.
(b) After necessary processing of the requests required by paragraph
(a) of this section, the Commission will notify each licensee and
permittee of the frequencies, hours of use thereof to specified zones or
areas of reception, power, and antenna bearing which it intends to
authorize for the season in question. After receipt of such
notification, the licensee or permittee shall, in writing, not later
than two months before the start of the season in question,
electronically inform the Commission in ICFS either that it plans to
operate in accordance with the authorization which the Commission
intends to issue, or that it plans to operate in another manner. If the
licensee or permittee indicates that it plans to operate in another
manner, it shall furnish explanatory details.
(c) If after submitting the request required under the provisions of
paragraph (a) of this section, but before receipt of the Commission's
notification referred to in paragraph (b) of this section, the licensee
or permittee submits a request for changes of its original request
electronically in ICFS such requests will be accepted for consideration
only if accompanied by statements showing good cause therefor and will
be honored only if conditions permit. If the information required to be
submitted by the licensee or permittee under the provisions of paragraph
(b) of this section indicates that operation in another manner is
contemplated, and the explanatory details contain a request for change
in the originally proposed manner of operation, such requests will be
accepted for consideration only if accompanied by statements showing
good cause therefor and will be honored only if conditions permit. If
after the licensee or permittee submits the information required under
the provisions of paragraph (b) of this section, but before the start of
the season in question, the licensee or permittee submits electronically
in ICFS a request for changes in its manner of operation for the season
in question, the request will be accepted for consideration only if
accompanied by statements showing good cause therefor and will be
honored only if conditions permit. If after the start of a season the
licensee or permittee submits a request for changes in the manner of
operation as authorized, the request will be considered only if
accompanied by statements showing good cause therefor, and will be
honored only if conditions permit.
(d) The provisions of paragraphs (a), (b), and (c) of the section
shall apply to licensees, to permittees operating under program test
authority, and to permittees who anticipate applying for
[[Page 195]]
and receiving program test authority for operation during the specified
season. Permittees who during the process of construction wish to engage
in equipment tests shall by informal written request, submitted to the
Commission electronically in ICFS not less than 30 days before they
desire to begin such testing, indicate the frequencies they desire to
use for testing and the hours they desire to use those frequencies. No
equipment testing shall occur until the Commission has authorized
frequencies and hours for such testing. Such authorizations shall be
only for one season, and if it is desired to continue equipment testing
in a following season, new requests for frequencies and hours must be
submitted at least 30 days before it is desired to begin testing in the
following season.
(e) Within 14 days after the end of each season, a report shall be
filed with the Commission electronically in ICFS by each licensee or
permittee operating under program test authority who has been issued a
seasonal schedule for that season. The report shall state whether the
licensee or permittee has operated the number of frequency-hours
authorized by the seasonal schedule to each of the zones or areas of
reception specified in the schedule. If such operation has not occurred,
a detailed explanation of that fact shall also be submitted which
includes specific dates, frequency-hours not used, and reasons for the
failure to operate as authorized. The report shall also contain
information that has been received by the licensee or permittee as to
reception or interference, and conclusions with regard to propagation
characteristics of frequencies that were assigned for the season in
question.
(f) Assigned frequencies. To the extent practicable, the frequencies
assigned to international broadcast stations shall be within the
following frequency bands, which are allocated to the broadcasting
service on a primary and exclusive basis, except as noted in paragraph
(f)(1)(ii) of this section:
(1) In all Regions:
(i) Exclusive: 5,900-6,200 kHz; 7,300-7,350 kHz; 9,400-9,900 kHz;
11,600-12,100 kHz; 13,570-13,870 kHz; 15,100-15,800 kHz; 17,480-17,900
kHz; 18,900-19,020 kHz; 21,450-21,850 kHz; and 25,670-26,100 kHz.
(ii) Co-primary: 7,350-7,400 kHz, except in the countries listed in
47 CFR 2.106, footnote 5.143C, where this band is also allocated to the
fixed service on a primary basis.
(2) In Region 1 and Region 3: 7,200-7,300 kHz and 7,400-7,450 kHz.
Note to paragraph (f): For the allocation of frequencies, the ITU
has divided the world into three Regions, which are defined in 47 CFR
2.104(b). The bands 7,200-7,300 kHz and 7,400-7,450 kHz are not
allocated to the broadcasting service in Region 2. Subject to not
causing harmful interference to the broadcasting service, fixed and
mobile services may operate in certain of the international broadcasting
bands; see 47 CFR 2.106, footnotes 5.136, 5.143, 5.143A, 5.143B, 5.143D,
5.146, 5.147, and 5.151.
(g) [Reserved]
(h) Requirements for Regional operation. (1) Frequency assignments
in the bands 7,200-7,300 kHz and 7,400-7,450 kHz shall be restricted to
international broadcast stations in the Pacific insular areas that are
located in Region 3 (as defined in 47 CFR 2.105(a), note 3) that
transmit to geographical zones and areas of reception in Region 1 or
Region 3.
(2) During the hours of 0800-1600 UTC (Coordinated Universal Time)
antenna gain with reference to an isotropic radiator in any easterly
direction that would intersect any area in Region 2 shall not exceed
2.15 dBi, except in the case where a transmitter power of less than 100
kW is used. In this case, antenna gain on restricted azimuths shall not
exceed that which is determined in accordance with equation below.
Stations desiring to operate in this band must submit sufficient antenna
performance information electronically in ICFS to ensure compliance with
these restrictions.Permitted gain for transmitter powers less than 100
kW:
Where:
[[Page 196]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR01OC21.001
Gi = maximum gain permitted with reference to an isotropic radiator. Pa
= Transmitter power employed in kW.
(i) Frequencies requested for assignment must be as near as
practicable to the optimum working frequency (unless otherwise
justified) for the zone or area of reception for the period and path of
transmission, and should be chosen so that a given frequency will
provide the largest period of reliable transmission to the selected zone
or area of reception. Moreover, at the zone or area of reception
frequencies shall provide protection to the transmissions of other
broadcasting stations which, in the opinion of the Commission, have
priority of assignment.
(1) Requests for frequency-hours shall be accompanied by all
pertinent technical data with reference to the frequencies and hours of
operation, including calculated field strengths delivered to the zones
or areas of reception.
(2) It is preferable that calculated field strengths delivered to
zones or areas of reception be equal to or greater than those required
by I.F.R.B. Technical Standards, Series A (and supplements thereto), in
order for the I.F.R.B. to afford the notified assignment protection from
interference. Nevertheless, calculated field strengths less than those
required by the I.F.R.B. standards for protection will be acceptable to
the Commission. However, licensees should note that if such lesser field
strengths are submitted no protection from interference will be provided
by the I.F.R.B. if their technical examination of such notifications
show incompatibilities with other notified assignments fully complying
with I.F.R.B. technical standards.
(3) Licensees are permitted to engage in multiple operation as
defined in Sec. 73.701(d).
(4) Seasonal requests for frequency-hours will be only for
transmissions to zones or areas of reception specified in the basic
instrument of authorization. Changes in such zones or areas will be made
only on separate application for modification of such instruments made
electronically in ICFS.
(j) Not more than one frequency will be assigned for use at any one
time for any one program transmission except in instances where a
program is intended for reception in more than one zone or area of
reception and the intended zones or areas cannot be served by a single
frequency: Provided, however, That on a showing of good cause made
electronically in ICFS a licensee may be authorized to operate on more
than one frequency at any one time to transmit any one program to a
single zone or area of reception.
(k) Any frequency assigned to a licensee or permittee shall also be
available for assignment to other licensees or permittees.
(l) All assignments of frequencies and the hours during which they
will be used will be made with the express understanding that they are
subject to immediate cancellation or change without hearing whenever the
Commission determines that interference or propagation conditions so
require and that each frequency-hour assignment for a given seasonal
schedule is unique unto itself and not necessarily available for use
during a subsequent season.
(m) The total maximum number of frequency-hours which will be
authorized to all licensees of international broadcasting stations
during any one day for any season is 100. The number of frequency-hours
allocated to any licensee will depend on past usage, availability, and
need. If for a forthcoming season the total of the requests for daily
frequency-hours of all licensees exceeds 100, all licensees will be
notified and each licensee that makes an adequate showing electronically
in ICFS that good cause exists for not
[[Page 197]]
having its requested number of frequency-hours reduced and that
operation of its station without such reduction would be consistent with
the public interest may be authorized the frequency-hours requested.
Note: The provisions of this paragraph are not to be construed to
mean that a total of 100 (or more) frequency-hours per day is assured
licensees. Frequency-hours will only be assigned to the extent that they
are available. It is the responsibility of each licensee to make all
technical studies to show that frequency-hours requested by it are
available and suitable for use as proposed.
[38 FR 18892, July 16, 1973, as amended at 51 FR 9965, Mar. 24, 1986; 68
FR 25538, May 13, 2003; 70 FR 46676, Aug. 10, 2005; 73 FR 25496, May 6,
2008; 75 FR 63031, Oct. 13, 2010; 86 FR 54399, Oct. 1, 2021; 88 FR
21446, Apr. 10, 2023]
Sec. 73.703 Geographical zones and areas of reception.
The zones or areas of reception to be served by international
broadcasting stations shall be based on the following map, and directive
antennas shall be employed to direct transmissions thereto:
[[Page 198]]
[GRAPHIC] [TIFF OMITTED] TR13MY03.047
[38 FR 18893, July 16, 1973, as amended at 68 FR 25538, May 13, 2003]
[[Page 199]]
Sec. 73.712 Equipment tests.
(a) During the process of construction of an international
broadcasting station, the permittee, having obtained authorization for
frequencies and hours as set forth in the Note to Sec. 73.702(d) may,
without further authority of the FCC, conduct equipment tests for the
purpose of such adjustments and measurements as may be necessary to
assure compliance with the terms of the construction permit, the
technical provisions of the application therefor and the rules and
regulations. Such tests shall use voice identification and test tones
only. No programming shall be conducted during equipment tests.
(b) The Commission may notify the permittee to conduct no tests or
may cancel, suspend, or change the date for the beginning of equipment
tests when and if such action may appear to be in the public interest,
convenience, and necessity.
(c) Equipment tests may be continued so long as the construction
permit shall remain valid: Provided, however, That the procedure set
forth in paragraph (a) of this section must be repeated prior to the
conducting of such tests in each season after the season in which the
testing began.
(d) The authorization for tests embodied in this section shall not
be construed as constituting a license to operate but as a necessary
part of construction.
[28 FR 13696, Dec. 14, 1963, as amended at 37 FR 25842, Dec. 5, 1972.
Redesignated and amended at 38 FR 18894, July 16, 1973; 47 FR 40174,
Sept. 13, 1982]
Sec. 73.713 Program tests.
(a) Upon completion of construction of an international broadcasting
station in accordance with the terms of the construction permit, the
technical provisions of the application therefor, and the rules and
regulations and the applicable engineering standards, and when an
application for station license has been filed showing the station to be
in satisfactory operating condition, the permittee may request authority
to conduct program tests. Such request shall be electronically filed
with the FCC in the International Communications Filing System (ICFS) at
least 10 days prior to the date on which it is desired to begin such
operation. All data necessary to show compliance with the terms and
conditions of the construction permit must be filed with the license
application.
(b) Program tests shall not commence until specific Commission
authority is received. The Commission reserves the right to change the
date of the beginning of such tests or to suspend or revoke the
authority for program tests as and when such action may appear to be in
the public interest, convenience, and necessity.
(c) Unless sooner suspended or revoked, program test authority
continues valid during Commission consideration of the application for
license and during this period further extension of the construction
permit is not required. Program test authority shall be automatically
terminated by final determination upon the application for station
license.
(d) All operation under program test authority shall be in strict
compliance with the rules governing international broadcasting stations
and in strict accordance with representations made in the application
for license pursuant to which the tests were authorized.
(e) The granting of program test authority shall not be construed as
approval by the Commission of the application for station license.
[38 FR 18894, July 16, 1973, as amended at 47 FR 40174, Sept. 13, 1982;
86 FR 54401, Oct. 1, 2021; 88 FR 21447, Apr. 10, 2023]
Sec. 73.731 Licensing requirements.
(a) A license for an international broadcasting station will be
issued only after a satisfactory showing has been made in regard to the
following, among others:
(1) That there is a need for the international broadcasting service
proposed to be rendered.
(2) That the necessary program sources are available to the
applicant to render the international service proposed.
(3) That the production of the program service and the technical
operation of the proposed station will be conducted by qualified
persons.
(4) That the applicant is legally, technically and financially
qualified
[[Page 200]]
and possesses adequate technical facilities to carry forward the service
proposed.
(5) That the public interest, convenience and necessity will be
served through the operation of the proposed station.
[38 FR 18895, July 16, 1973]
Sec. 73.732 Authorizations.
Authorizations issued to international broadcasting stations by the
Commission will be authorizations to permit the construction or use of a
particular transmitting equipment combination and related antenna
systems for international broadcasting, and to permit broadcasting to
zones or areas of reception specified on the instrument of
authorization. The authorizations will not specify the frequencies to be
used or the hours of use. Requests for frequencies and hours of use will
be made by electronic filing in the International Communications Filing
System (ICFS) as provided in Sec. 73.702. Seasonal schedules, when
issued pursuant to the provisions of Sec. 73.702, will become
attachments to and part of the instrument of authorization, replacing
any such prior attachments.
[88 FR 21447, Apr. 10, 2023]
Sec. 73.733 Normal license period.
All international broadcast station licenses will be issued so as to
expire at the hour of 3 a.m. local time and will be issued for a normal
period of 8 years expiring November 1.
[62 FR 5347, Feb. 5, 1997]
Sec. 73.751 Operating power.
No international broadcast station shall be authorized to install,
or be licensed for operation of, transmitter equipment with:
(a) A rated carrier power of less than 50 kilowatts (kW) if double-
sideband (DSB) modulation is used,
(b) A peak envelope power of less than 50 kW if single-sideband
(SSB) modulation is used, or
(c) A mean power of less than 10 kW if digital modulation is used.
[70 FR 46676, Aug. 10, 2005]
Sec. 73.753 Antenna systems.
All international broadcasting stations shall operate with
directional antennas. Such antennas shall be designed and operated so
that the radiated power in the maximum lobe toward the specific zone or
area of reception intended to be served shall be at least 10 times the
average power from the antenna in the horizontal plane. Radiation in all
other directions shall be suppressed to the maximum extent technically
feasible. In order to eliminate or mitigate harmful interference, the
direction of the maximum lobe may be adjusted upon approval of the
Commission.
(Secs. 4, 5, 303, 48 Stat., as amended, 1066, 1068, 1082 (47 U.S.C. 154,
155, 303))
[38 FR 18895, July 16, 1973, as amended at 44 FR 65765, Nov. 15, 1979]
Sec. 73.754 Frequency monitors.
(a) The licensee of each international broadcast station shall
operate a frequency monitor at the transmitter independent of the
frequency control of the transmitter.
(b) The frequency monitor shall be designed and constructed in
accordance with good engineering practice. It shall have an accuracy
sufficient to determine that the operating frequency is within one-half
of the allowed tolerance.
[37 FR 25842, Dec. 5, 1972]
Sec. 73.755 Modulation monitors.
The licensee of each international broadcast station shall have a
modulation monitor in operation at the transmitter.
[37 FR 25842, Dec. 5, 1972]
Sec. 73.756 System specifications for double-sideband (DBS)
modulated emissions in the HF broadcasting service.
(a) Channel spacing. The nominal spacing for DSB shall be 10 kHz.
However, the interleaved channels with a separation of 5 kHz may be used
in accordance with the relative protection criteria, provided that the
interleaved emission is not to the same geographical area as either of
the emissions between which it is interleaved.
[[Page 201]]
(b) Emission characteristics--(1) Nominal carrier frequencies.
Nominal carrier frequencies shall be integral multiples of 5 kHz.
(2) Audio-frequency band. The upper limit of the audio-frequency
band (at--3 dB) of the transmitter shall not exceed 4.5 kHz and the
lower limit shall be 150 Hz, with lower frequencies attenuated at a
slope of 6 dB per octave.
(3) Modulation processing. If audio-frequency signal processing is
used, the dynamic range of the modulating signal shall be not less than
20 dB.
(4) Necessary bandwidth. The necessary bandwidth shall not exceed 9
kHz.
[70 FR 46677, Aug. 10, 2005]
Sec. 73.757 System specifications for single-sideband (SSB)
modulated emissions in the HF broadcasting service.
(a) System parameters--(1) Channel spacing. In a mixed DSB, SSB and
digital environment (see Resolution 517 (Rev.WRC-03)), the channel
spacing shall be 10 kHz. In the interest of spectrum conservation, it is
also permissible to interleave SSB emissions midway between two adjacent
DSB channels, i.e., with 5 kHz separation between carrier frequencies,
provided that the interleaved emission is not to the same geographical
area as either of the emissions between which it is interleaved. In an
all inclusive SSB environment, the channel spacing and carrier frequency
separation shall be 5 kHz.
(2) Equivalent sideband power. When the carrier reduction relative
to peak envelope power is 6 dB, an equivalent SSB emission is one giving
the same audio-frequency signal-to-noise ratio at the receiver output as
the corresponding DSB emission, when it is received by a DSB receiver
with envelope detection. This is achieved when the sideband power of the
SSB emission is 3 dB larger than the total sideband power of the DSB
emission. (The peak envelope power of the equivalent SSB emission and
the carrier power are the same as that of the DSB emission.)
(b) Emission characteristics--(1) Nominal carrier frequencies.
Nominal carrier frequencies shall be integral multiples of 5 kHz.
(2) Frequency tolerance. The frequency tolerance shall be 10 Hz.
Note 1 to paragraph (b)(2): The ITU suggests that administrations
avoid carrier frequency differences of a few hertz, which cause
degradations similar to periodic fading. This could be avoided if the
frequency tolerance were 0.1 Hz, a tolerance which would be suitable for
SSB emissions.
Note 2 to paragraph (b)(2): The SSB system adopted for the bands
allocated exclusively to HF broadcasting does not require a frequency
tolerance less than 10 Hz. The degradation mentioned in Note 1 occurs
when the ratio of wanted-to-interfering signal is well below the
required protection ratio. This remark is equally valid for both DSB and
SSB emissions.
(3) Audio-frequency band. The upper limit of the audio-frequency
band (at--3 dB) of the transmitter shall not exceed 4.5 kHz with a
further slope of attenuation of 35 dB/kHz and the lower limit shall be
150 Hz with lower frequencies attenuated at a slope of 6 dB per octave.
(4) Modulation processing. If audio-frequency signal processing is
used, the dynamic range of the modulating signal shall be not less than
20 dB.
(5) Necessary bandwidth. The necessary bandwidth shall not exceed
4.5 kHz.
(6) Carrier reduction (relative to peak envelope power). In a mixed
DSB, SSB and digital environment, the carrier reduction shall be 6 dB to
allow SSB emissions to be received by conventional DSB receivers with
envelope detection without significant deterioration of the reception
quality.
(7) Sideband to be emitted. Only the upper sideband shall be used.
(8) Attenuation of the unwanted sideband. The attenuation of the
unwanted sideband (lower sideband) and of intermodulation products in
that part of the emission spectrum shall be at least 35 dB relative to
the wanted sideband signal level. However, since there is in practice a
large difference between signal amplitudes in adjacent channels, a
greater attenuation is recommended.
[70 FR 46677, Aug. 10, 2005]
Sec. 73.758 System specifications for digitally modulated emissions
in the HF broadcasting service.
(a) For digitally modulated emissions, the Digital Radio Mondiale
[[Page 202]]
(DRM) standard shall be employed. Both digital audio broadcasting and
datacasting are authorized. The RF requirements for the DRM system are
specified in paragraphs (b) and (c), of this section.
(b) System parameters--(1) Channel spacing. The initial spacing for
digitally modulated emissions shall be 10 kHz. However, interleaved
channels with a separation of 5 kHz may be used in accordance with the
appropriate protection criteria appearing in Resolution 543 (WRC-03),
provided that the interleaved emission is not to the same geographical
area as either of the emissions between which it is interleaved.
(2) Channel utilization. Channels using digitally modulated
emissions may share the same spectrum or be interleaved with analog
emissions in the same high frequency broadcasting (HFBC) band, provided
the protection afforded to the analog emissions is at least as great as
that which is currently in force for analog-to-analog protection.
Accomplishing this may require that the digital spectral power density
(and total power) be lower by several dB than is currently used for
either DSB or SSB emissions.
(c) Emission characteristics--(1) Bandwidth and center frequency. A
full digitally modulated emission will have a 10 kHz bandwidth with its
center frequency at any of the 5 kHz center frequency locations in the
channel raster currently in use within the HFBC bands. Among several
possible ``simulcast'' modes are those having a combination of analog
and digital emissions of the same program in the same channel, that may
use a digital emission of 5 kHz or 10 kHz bandwidth, next to either a 5
kHz or 10 kHz analog emission. In all cases of this type, the 5 kHz
interleaved raster used in HFBC shall be adhered to in placing the
emission within these bands.
(2) Frequency tolerance. The frequency tolerance shall be 10 Hz. See
Section 73.757(b)(2), notes 1 and 2.
(3) Audio-frequency band. The quality of service, using digital
source coding within a 10 kHz bandwidth, taking into account the need to
adapt the emission coding for various levels of error avoidance,
detection and correction, can range from the equivalent of monophonic FM
(approximately 15 kHz) to the low-level performance of a speech codec
(of the order of 3 kHz). The choice of audio quality is connected to the
needs of the broadcaster and listener, and includes the consideration of
such characteristics as the propagation conditions expected. There is no
single specification, only the upper and lower bounds noted in this
paragraph.
(4) Modulation. Quadrature amplitude modulation (QAM) with
orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) shall be used. 64-QAM
is feasible under many propagation conditions; others such as 32-, 16-
and 8-QAM are specified for use when needed.
(5) RF protection ratio values. The protection ratio values for
analogue and digital emissions for co-channel and adjacent channel
conditions shall be in accordance with Resolution 543 (WRC-03) as
provisional RF protection ratio values subject to revision or
confirmation by a future competent conference.
[70 FR 46677, Aug. 10, 2005]
Sec. 73.759 Auxiliary transmitters.
Upon showing that a need exists for the use of auxiliary
transmitters, a license may be issued provided that:
(a) Auxiliary transmitters may be installed either at the same
location as the main transmitters or at another location.
(b) [Reserved]
(c) The auxiliary transmitters shall be maintained so that they may
be put into immediate operation at any time for the following purposes:
(1) The transmission of the regular programs upon the failure of the
main transmitters.
(2) The transmission of regular programs during maintenance or
modification work on the main transmitter, necessitating discontinuance
of its operation for a period not to exceed 5 days. (This includes the
equipment changes which may be made without authority as set forth
elsewhere in the rules and regulations or as authorized by the
Commission by letter or by construction permit. Where such operation is
required for periods in excess of 5 days,
[[Page 203]]
request therefor shall be made electronically in the International
Communications Filing System (ICFS) in accordance with Sec. 73.3542).
(3) Upon request by a duly authorized representative of the
Commission.
(d) The auxiliary transmitters shall be tested at least once each
week to determine that they are in proper operating condition and that
they are adjusted to the proper frequency except that in the case of
operation in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section during any
week, the test in that week may be omitted provided the operation under
paragraph (c) of this section is satisfactory. A record shall be kept of
the time and result of each test. Such records shall be retained for a
period of two years.
(e) The auxiliary transmitters shall be equipped with satisfactory
control equipment which will enable the maintenance of the frequency
emitted by the station within the limits prescribed by the regulations
in this part.
(f) The operating power of an auxiliary transmitter may be less but
not greater than the authorized power of the main transmitters.
[28 FR 13696, Dec. 14, 1963, as amended at 37 FR 25843, Dec. 5, 1972; 60
FR 55480, Nov. 1, 1995. Redesignated at 70 FR 46677, Aug. 10, 2005, as
amended at 86 FR 54401, Oct. 1, 2021; 88 FR 21447, Apr. 10, 2023]
Sec. 73.760 Alternate main transmitters.
The licensee of an international broadcast station may be licensed
for alternate main transmitters provided that a technical need for such
alternate transmitters is shown and that the following conditions are
met: Both transmitters:
(a) Are located at the same place;
(b) Shall have the same power rating; and
(c) Shall meet the construction, installation, operation, and
performance requirements of good engineering practice.
[37 FR 25843, Dec. 5, 1972. Redesignated at 70 FR 46677, Aug. 10, 2005]
Sec. 73.761 Modification of transmission systems.
Specific authority, upon electronic filing of a formal application
(FCC Form 309) therefor in the International Communications Filing
System (ICFS), is required for any of the following changes:
(a) Change involving an increase or decrease in the power rating of
the transmitters.
(b) A replacement of the transmitters as a whole.
(c) Change in the location of the transmitting antenna.
(d) Change in the power delivered to the antenna.
(e) Change in frequency control and/or modulation system.
(f) Change in direction or gain of antenna system.
(g) Other changes, not specified above in this section, may be made
at any time without the authority of the Commission: Provided, That the
Commission shall be immediately notified electronically in ICFS thereof
and such changes shall be shown in the next application for renewal of
license.
[86 FR 54401, Oct. 1, 2021, as amended at 88 FR 21447, Apr. 10, 2023]
Sec. 73.762 Time of operation.
(a) All international broadcasting stations shall operate in
accordance with the times indicated on their seasonal schedules.
(b) In the event that causes beyond a licensee's control make it
impossible to adhere to the seasonal schedule or to continue operating,
the station may limit or discontinue operation for a period of not more
than 10 days, without further authority from the FCC. However, in such
cases, the FCC shall be immediately notified by electronic filing in the
International Communications Filing System (ICFS) of such limitation or
discontinuance of operation and shall subsequently be notified by
electronic filing in ICFS when the station resumes regular operation.
(c) In the event that causes beyond a licensee's control make it
impossible to adhere to the seasonal schedule or to continue operating
for a temporary period of more than 10 days, the station may not limit
or discontinue operation until it requests and receives specific
authority to do so from the FCC by electronic filing in ICFS. When the
station subsequently resumes regular operation after such limited
operation or discontinuance of operation, it shall
[[Page 204]]
notify the FCC in Washington, DC by electronic filing in ICFS. The
license of a broadcasting station that fails to transmit broadcast
signals for any consecutive 12-month period expires as a matter of law
at the end of that period, notwithstanding any provision, term, or
condition of the license to the contrary.
[38 FR 18895, July 16, 1973, as amended at 47 FR 40174, Sept. 13, 1982;
61 FR 28767, June 6, 1996. Redesignated at 70 FR 46677, Aug. 10, 2005;
86 FR 54401, Oct. 1, 2021; 88 FR 21447, Apr. 10, 2023]
Sec. 73.765 Determining operating power.
The operating power specified in Sec. 73.751 shall be determined by
use of a calibrated dummy load or by any other method specified by the
licensee and accepted by the Commission. Such method may subsequently be
used by the licensee to maintain the authorized operating power.
(Secs. 4, 5, 303, 48 Stat., as amended, 1066, 1068, 1082 (47 U.S.C. 154,
155, 303))
[38 FR 18895, July 16, 1973, as amended at 44 FR 65765, Nov. 15, 1979]
Sec. 73.766 [Reserved]
Sec. 73.781 Logs.
The licensee or permittee of each international broadcast station
must maintain the station log in the following manner:
(a) In the program log:
(1) An entry of the time each station identification announcement
(call letters and location) is made.
(2) An entry briefly describing each program broadcast, such as
``music'', ``drama'', ``speech'', etc., together with the name or title
thereof, language, and the sponsor's name, with the time of the
beginning and ending of the complete program.
(3) For each program of network origin, an entry showing the name of
the network originating the program.
[28 FR 13696, Dec. 14, 1963, as amended at 37 FR 25843, Dec. 5, 1972; 48
FR 38480, Aug. 24, 1983]
Sec. 73.782 Retention of logs.
Logs of international broadcast stations shall be retained by the
licensee or permittee for a period of two years: Provided, however, That
logs involving communications incident to a disaster or which include
communications incident to or involved in an investigation by the
Commission and concerning which the licensee or permittee has been
notified, shall be retained by the licensee or permittee until he is
specifically authorized in writing by the Commission to destroy them:
Provided, further, That logs incident to or involved in any claim or
complaint of which the licensee or permittee has notice shall be
retained by the licensee or permittee until such claim or complaint has
been fully satisfied or until the same has been barred by statute
limiting the time for the filing of suits upon such claims.
[28 FR 13696, Dec. 14, 1963]
Sec. 73.787 Station identification.
(a) A licensee of an international broadcast station shall make
station identification announcement (call letters and location), at the
beginning and ending of each time of operation and during the operation
on the hour.
(b) Station identification, program announcements, and oral
continuity shall be made with international significance (language
particularly) which is designed for the foreign country or countries for
which the service is primarily intended.
[28 FR 13696, Dec. 14, 1963, as amended at 34 FR 19762, Dec. 17, 1969;
38 FR 18896, July 16, 1973]
Sec. 73.788 Service; commercial or sponsored programs.
(a) A licensee of an international broadcast station shall render
only an international broadcast service which will reflect the culture
of this country and which will promote international goodwill,
understanding, and cooperation. Any program solely intended for and
directed to an audience in the continental United States does not meet
the requirements for this service.
(b) Such international broadcast service may include commercial or
sponsored programs: Provided, That:
(1) Commercial program continuities give no more than the name of
the sponsor of the program and the name
[[Page 205]]
and general character of the commodity, utility or service, or
attraction advertised.
(2) In case of advertising a commodity, the commodity is regularly
sold or is being promoted for sale on the open market in the foreign
country or countries to which the program is directed in accordance with
paragraph (c) of this section.
(3) In case of advertising an American utility or service to
prospective tourists or visitors to the United States, the advertisement
continuity is particularly directed to such persons in the foreign
country or countries where they reside and to which the program is
directed in accordance with paragraph (c) of this section.
(4) In case of advertising an international attraction (such as a
world fair, resort, spa, etc.) to prospective tourists or visitors to
the United States, the oral continuity concerning such attraction is
consistent with the purpose and intent of this section.
(5) In case of any other type of advertising, such advertising is
directed to the foreign country or countries to which the program is
directed and is consistent with the purpose and intent of this section.
(c) The geographic areas to be served by international broadcasting
stations are the zones and areas of reception shown in Sec. 73.703.
(d) An international broadcast station may transmit the program of a
AM broadcast station or network system: Provided, That the conditions in
paragraph (b) of this section as to any commercial continuities are
observed and when station identifications are made, only the call letter
designation of the international station is given and its assigned
frequency: And provided further, That in the case of chain broadcasting
the program is not carried simultaneously by another international
station (except another station owned by the same licensee operated on a
frequency in a different group to obtain continuity of signal service),
the signals from which are directed to the same area. (See section 3(p)
of the Communications Act of 1934 for the definition of ``chain
broadcasting.'')
[28 FR 13696, Dec. 14, 1963, as amended at 37 FR 25843, Dec. 5, 1972; 38
FR 18896, July 16, 1973]
Subpart G_Low Power FM Broadcast Stations (LPFM)
Source: 65 FR 7640, Feb. 15, 2000, unless otherwise noted.
Sec. 73.801 Broadcast regulations applicable to LPFM stations.
The following rules are applicable to LPFM stations:
Section 73.201 Numerical definition of FM broadcast channels.
Section 73.220 Restrictions on use of channels.
Section 73.267 Determining operating power.
Section 73.277 Permissible transmissions.
Section 73.297 FM stereophonic sound broadcasting.
Section 73.310 FM technical definitions.
Section 73.312 Topographic data.
Section 73.318 FM blanketing interference.
Section 73.322 FM stereophonic sound transmission standards.
Section 73.333 Engineering charts.
Section 73.503 Licensing requirements and service.
Section 73.508 Standards of good engineering practice.
Section 73.593 Subsidiary communications services.
Section 73.1015 Truthful written statements and responses to Commission
inquiries and correspondence.
Section 73.1030 Notifications concerning interference to radio
astronomy, research and receiving installations.
Section 73.1201 Station identification.
Section 73.1206 Broadcast of telephone conversations.
Section 73.1207 Rebroadcasts.
Section 73.1208 Broadcast of taped, filmed, or recorded material.
Section 73.1210 TV/FM dual-language broadcasting in Puerto Rico.
Section 73.1211 Broadcast of lottery information.
Section 73.1212 Sponsorship identification; list retention; related
requirements.
Section 73.1213 Antenna structure, marking and lighting.
Section 73.1216 Licensee-conducted contests.
Section 73.1217 Broadcast hoaxes.
Section 73.1250 Broadcasting emergency information.
Section 73.1300 Unattended station operation.
[[Page 206]]
Section 73.1400 Transmission system monitoring and control.
Section 73.1520 Operation for tests and maintenance.
Section 73.1540 Carrier frequency measurements.
Section 73.1545 Carrier frequency departure tolerances.
Section 73.1570 Modulation levels: AM, FM, and TV aural.
Section 73.1580 Transmission system inspections.
Section 73.1610 Equipment tests.
Section 73.1620 Program tests.
Section 73.1650 International agreements.
Section 73.1660 Acceptability of broadcast transmitters.
Section 73.1665 Main transmitters.
Section 73.1692 Broadcast station construction near or installation on
an AM broadcast tower.
Section 73.1745 Unauthorized operation.
Section 73.1750 Discontinuance of operation.
Section 73.1920 Personal attacks.
Section 73.1940 Legally qualified candidates for public office.
Section 73.1941 Equal opportunities.
Section 73.1943 Political file.
Section 73.1944 Reasonable access.
Section 73.3511 Applications required.
Section 73.3512 Where to file; number of copies.
Section 73.3513 Signing of applications.
Section 73.3514 Content of applications.
Section 73.3516 Specification of facilities.
Section 73.3517 Contingent applications.
Section 73.3518 Inconsistent or conflicting applications.
Section 73.3519 Repetitious applications.
Section 73.3520 Multiple applications.
Section 73.3525 Agreements for removing application conflicts.
Section 73.3539 Application for renewal of license.
Section 73.3542 Application for emergency authorization.
Section 73.3545 Application for permit to deliver programs to foreign
stations.
Section 73.3550 Requests for new or modified call sign assignments.
Section 73.3561 Staff consideration of applications requiring Commission
consideration.
Section 73.3562 Staff consideration of applications not requiring action
by the Commission.
Section 73.3566 Defective applications.
Section 73.3568 Dismissal of applications.
Section 73.3580 Local public notice of filing of broadcast applications.
Section 73.3584 Procedure for filing petitions to deny.
Section 73.3587 Procedure for filing informal objections.
Section 73.3588 Dismissal of petitions to deny or withdrawal of informal
objections.
Section 73.3589 Threats to file petitions to deny or informal
objections.
Section 73.3591 Grants without hearing.
Section 73.3593 Designation for hearing.
Section 73.3598 Period of construction.
Section 73.3599 Forfeiture of construction permit.
Section 73.3999 Enforcement of 18 U.S.C. 1464--restrictions on the
transmission of obscene and indecent material.
[65 FR 7640, Feb. 15, 2000, as amended at 84 FR 2758, Feb. 8, 2019; 85
FR 36794, June 18, 2020]
Sec. 73.805 Availability of channels.
Except as provided in Sec. 73.220 of this chapter, all of the
frequencies listed in Sec. 73.201 of this chapter are available for
LPFM stations.
Sec. 73.807 Minimum distance separation between stations.
Minimum separation requirements for LPFM stations are listed in the
following paragraphs. Except as noted below, an LPFM station will not be
authorized unless the co-channel, and first- and second-adjacent channel
separations are met. An LPFM station need not satisfy the third-adjacent
channel separations listed in paragraphs (a) through (c) of this section
in order to be authorized. The third-adjacent channel separations are
included for use in determining for purposes of Sec. 73.810 which
third-adjacent channel interference regime applies to an LPFM station.
Minimum distances for co-channel and first-adjacent channel are
separated into two columns. The left-hand column lists the required
minimum separation to protect other stations and the right-hand column
lists (for informational purposes only) the minimum distance necessary
for the LPFM station to receive no interference from other stations
assumed to be operating at the maximum permitted facilities for the
station class. For second-adjacent channel, the required minimum
distance separation is sufficient to avoid interference received from
other stations.
(a)(1) An LPFM station will not be authorized initially unless the
minimum distance separations in the following table are met with respect
to authorized FM stations, applications for new and existing FM stations
filed prior to the release of the public notice
[[Page 207]]
announcing an LPFM window period, authorized LPFM stations, LPFM station
applications that were timely-filed within a previous window, and vacant
FM allotments. LPFM modification applications must either meet the
distance separations in the following table or, if short-spaced, not
lessen the spacing to subsequently authorized stations.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Co-channel minimum separation First-adjacent channel minimum Second and
(km) separation (km) third adjacent
---------------------------------------------------------------- channel
For no For no minimum
Station class protected by LPFM interference interference separation
Required received from Required received from (km)
max. class max. class ---------------
facility facility Required
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
LPFM............................ 24 24 14 14 None
D............................... 24 24 13 13 6
A............................... 67 92 56 56 29
B1.............................. 87 119 74 74 46
B............................... 112 143 97 97 67
C3.............................. 78 119 67 67 40
C2.............................. 91 143 80 84 53
C1.............................. 111 178 100 111 73
C0.............................. 122 193 111 130 84
C............................... 130 203 120 142 93
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(2) LPFM stations must satisfy the second-adjacent channel minimum
distance separation requirements of paragraph (a)(1) of this section
with respect to any third-adjacent channel FM station that, as of
September 20, 2000, broadcasts a radio reading service via a subcarrier
frequency.
(b) In addition to meeting or exceeding the minimum separations in
paragraph (a) of this section, new LPFM stations will not be autorized
in Puerto Rico or the Virgin Islands unless the minimum distance
separations in the following tables are met with respect to authorized
or proposed FM stations:
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Co-channel minimum separation First-adjacent channel minimum
(km) separation (km) Second and
---------------------------------------------------------------- third adjacent
For no For no channel
Station class protected by LPFM interference interference minimum
Required received from Required received from separation
max. class max. class (km)--required
facility facility
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A............................... 80 111 70 70 42
B1.............................. 95 128 82 82 53
B............................... 138 179 123 123 92
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note to paragraphs (a) and (b): Minimum distance separations towards
``grandfathered'' superpowered Reserved Band stations are as specified.
Full service FM stations operating within the reserved band (Channels
201-220) with facilities in excess of those permitted in Sec.
73.211(b)(1) or (b)(3) shall be protected by LPFM stations in accordance
with the minimum distance separations for the nearest class as
determined under Sec. 73.211. For example, a Class B1 station operating
with facilities that result in a 60 dBu contour that exceeds 39
kilometers but is less than 52 kilometers would be protected by the
Class B minimum distance separations. Class D stations with 60 dBu
contours that exceed 5 kilometers will be protected by the Class A
minimum distance separations. Class B stations with 60 dBu contours that
exceed 52 kilometers will be protected as Class C1 or Class C stations
depending upon the distance to the 60 dBu contour. No stations will be
protected beyond Class C separations.
(c) In addition to meeting the separations specified in paragraphs
(a) and (b), LPFM applications must meet the minimum separation
requirements in the following table with respect to authorized FM
translator stations, cutoff FM translator applications, and FM
[[Page 208]]
translator applications filed prior to the release of the Public Notice
announcing the LPFM window period.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Co-channel minimum separation First-adjacent channel minimum Second and
(km) separation (km) third adjacent
Distance to FM translator 60 dBu ---------------------------------------------------------------- channel
contour For no For no minimum
Required interference Required interference separation
received received (km)--required
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
13.3 km or greater.............. 39 67 28 35 21
Greater than 7.3 km, but less 32 51 21 26 14
than 13.3 km...................
7.3 km or less.................. 26 30 15 16 8
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(d) Existing LPFM stations which do not meet the separations in
paragraphs (a) through (c) of this section may be relocated provided
that the separation to any short-spaced station is not reduced.
(e)(1) Waiver of the second-adjacent channel separations. The
Commission will entertain requests to waive the second-adjacent channel
separations in paragraphs (a) through (c) of this section on a case-by-
case basis. In each case, the LPFM station must establish, using methods
of predicting interference taking into account all relevant factors,
including terrain-sensitive propagation models, that its proposed
operations will not result in interference to any authorized radio
service. The LPFM station may do so by demonstrating that no actual
interference will occur due to intervening terrain or lack of
population. The LPFM station may use an undesired/desired signal
strength ratio methodology to define areas of potential interference.
(2) Interference. (i) Upon receipt of a complaint of interference
from an LPFM station operating pursuant to a waiver granted under
paragraph (e)(1) of this section, the Commission shall notify the
identified LPFM station by telephone or other electronic communication
within one business day.
(ii) An LPFM station that receives a waiver under paragraph (e)(1)
of this section shall suspend operation immediately upon notification by
the Commission that it is causing interference to the reception of an
existing or modified full-service FM station without regard to the
location of the station receiving interference. The LPFM station shall
not resume operation until such interference has been eliminated or it
can demonstrate to the Commission that the interference was not due to
emissions from the LPFM station. Short test transmissions may be made
during the period of suspended operation to check the efficacy of
remedial measures.
(f) Commercial and noncommercial educational stations authorized
under subparts B and C of this part, as well as new or modified
commercial FM allotments, are not required to adhere to the separations
specified in this rule section, even where new or increased interference
would be created.
(g) International considerations within the border zones. (1) Within
320 km of the Canadian border, LPFM stations must meet the following
minimum separations with respect to any Canadian stations:
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Second- Intermediate
Canadian station class Co-channel First-adjacent adjacent Third-adjacent frequency (IF)
(km) channel (km) channel (km) channel (km) channel (km)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
A1 & Low Power.................. 45 30 21 20 4
A............................... 66 50 41 40 7
B1.............................. 78 62 53 52 9
B............................... 92 76 68 66 12
C1.............................. 113 98 89 88 19
C............................... 124 108 99 98 28
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
[[Page 209]]
(2) Within 320 km of the Mexican border, LPFM stations must meet the
following separations with respect to any Mexican stations:
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Second- and Intermediate
Mexican station class Co-channel First-adjacent third-adjacent frequency (IF)
(km) channel (km) channel (km) channel (km)
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Low Power....................................... 27 17 9 3
A............................................... 43 32 25 5
AA.............................................. 47 36 29 6
B1.............................................. 67 54 45 8
B............................................... 91 76 66 11
C1.............................................. 91 80 73 19
C............................................... 110 100 92 27
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
(3) The Commission will notify the International Telecommunications
Union (ITU) of any LPFM authorizations in the US Virgin Islands. Any
authorization issued for a US Virgin Islands LPFM station will include a
condition that permits the Commission to modify, suspend or terminate
without right to a hearing if found by the Commission to be necessary to
conform to any international regulations or agreements.
(4) The Commission will initiate international coordination of a
LPFM proposal even where the above Canadian and Mexican spacing tables
are met, if it appears that such coordination is necessary to maintain
compliance with international agreements.
(5)(i) LPFM stations located within 125 kilometers of the Mexican
border are limited to 50 watts (0.05 kW) ERP, a 60 dBu service contour
of 8.7 kilometers and a 34 dBu interfering contour of 32 kilometers in
the direction of the Mexican border. LPFM stations may operate up to 100
watts in all other directions.
(ii) LPFM stations located between 125 kilometers and 320 kilometers
from the Mexican border may operate in excess of 50 watts, up to a
maximum ERP of 100 watts. However, in no event shall the location of the
60 dBu contour lie within 116.3 kilometers of the Mexican border.
(iii) Applications for LPFM stations within 320 kilometers of the
Canadian border may employ an ERP of up to a maximum of 100 watts. The
distance to the 34 dBu interfering contour may not exceed 60 kilometers
in any direction.
[78 FR 2102, Jan. 9, 2013, as amended at 85 FR 35573, June 11, 2020]
Sec. 73.808 Distance computations.
For the purposes of determining compliance with any LPFM distance
requirements, distances shall be calculated in accordance with Sec.
73.208(c) of this part.
Sec. 73.809 Interference protection to full service FM stations.
(a) If a full service commercial or NCE FM facility application is
filed subsequent to the filing of an LPFM station facility application,
such full service station is protected against any condition of
interference to the direct reception of its signal that is caused by
such LPFM station operating on the same channel or first-adjacent
channel provided that the interference is predicted to occur and
actually occurs within:
(1) The 3.16 mV/m (70 dBu) contour of such full service station;
(2) The community of license of such full service station; or
(3) Any area of the community of license of such full service
station that is predicted to receive at least a 1 mV/m (60 dBu) signal.
Predicted interference shall be calculated in accordance with the ratios
set forth in Sec. 73.215 paragraphs (a)(1) and (a)(2). Intermediate
frequency (IF) channel interference overlap will be determined based
upon overlap of the 91 dBu F(50,50) contours of the FM and LPFM
stations. Actual interference will be considered to occur whenever
reception of a regularly used signal is impaired by the signal radiated
by the LPFM station.
[[Page 210]]
(b) An LPFM station will be provided an opportunity to demonstrate
in connection with the processing of the commercial or NCE FM
application that interference as described in paragraph (a) of this
section is unlikely. If the LPFM station fails to so demonstrate, it
will be required to cease operations upon the commencement of program
tests by the commercial or NCE FM station.
(c) Complaints of actual interference by an LPFM station subject to
paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section must be served on the LPFM
licensee and the Federal Communications Commission, attention Audio
Services Division. The LPFM station must suspend operations within
twenty-four hours of the receipt of such complaint unless the
interference has been resolved to the satisfaction of the complainant on
the basis of suitable techniques. An LPFM station may only resume
operations at the direction of the Federal Communications Commission. If
the Commission determines that the complainant has refused to permit the
LPFM station to apply remedial techniques that demonstrably will
eliminate the interference without impairment of the original reception,
the licensee of the LPFM station is absolved of further responsibility
for the complaint.
(d) It shall be the responsibility of the licensee of an LPFM
station to correct any condition of interference that results from the
radiation of radio frequency energy outside its assigned channel. Upon
notice by the FCC to the station licensee or operator that such
interference is caused by spurious emissions of the station, operation
of the station shall be immediately suspended and not resumed until the
interference has been eliminated. However, short test transmissions may
be made during the period of suspended operation to check the efficacy
of remedial measures.
(e) In each instance where suspension of operation is required, the
licensee shall submit a full report to the FCC in Washington, DC, after
operation is resumed, containing details of the nature of the
interference, the source of the interfering signals, and the remedial
steps taken to eliminate the interference.
[65 FR 7640, Feb. 15, 2000, as amended at 65 FR 67302, Nov. 9, 2000; 73
FR 3216, Jan. 17, 2008; 78 FR 2104, Jan. 9, 2013]
Sec. 73.810 Third adjacent channel interference.
(a) LPFM Stations Licensed at Locations That Do Not Satisfy Third-
Adjacent Channel Minimum Distance Separations. An LPFM station licensed
at a location that does not satisfy the third-adjacent channel minimum
distance separations set forth in Sec. 73.807 is subject to the
following provisions:
(1) Such an LPFM station will not be permitted to continue to
operate if it causes any actual third-adjacent channel interference to:
(i) The transmission of any authorized broadcast station; or
(ii) The reception of the input signal of any TV translator, TV
booster, FM translator or FM booster station; or
(iii) The direct reception by the public of the off-the-air signals
of any full-service station or previously authorized secondary station.
Interference will be considered to occur whenever reception of a
regularly used signal on a third-adjacent channel is impaired by the
signals radiated by the LPFM station, regardless of the quality of such
reception, the strength of the signal so used, or the channel on which
the protected signal is transmitted.
(2) If third-adjacent channel interference cannot be properly
eliminated by the application of suitable techniques, operation of the
offending LPFM station shall be suspended and shall not be resumed until
the interference has been eliminated. Short test transmissions may be
made during the period of suspended operation to check the efficacy of
remedial measures. If a complainant refuses to permit the licensee of
the offending LPFM station to apply remedial techniques which
demonstrably will eliminate the third-adjacent channel interference
without impairment to the original reception, the licensee is absolved
of further responsibility for that complaint.
(3) Upon notice by the Commission to the licensee that such third-
adjacent channel interference is being caused, the operation of the LPFM
station
[[Page 211]]
shall be suspended within three minutes and shall not be resumed until
the interference has been eliminated or it can be demonstrated that the
interference is not due to spurious emissions by the LPFM station;
provided, however, that short test transmissions may be made during the
period of suspended operation to check the efficacy of remedial
measures.
(b) LPFM stations licensed at locations that satisfy third-adjacent
channel minimum distance separations. An LPFM station licensed at a
location that satisfies the third-adjacent channel minimum distance
separations set forth in Sec. 73.807 is subject to the following
provisions:
(1) Interference complaints and remediation. (i) Such an LPFM
station is required to provide copies of all complaints alleging that
its signal is causing third-adjacent channel interference to or
impairing the reception of the signal of a full power FM, FM translator
or FM booster station to such affected station and to the Commission.
(ii) A full power FM, FM translator or FM booster station shall
review all complaints it receives, either directly or indirectly, from
listeners regarding alleged third-adjacent channel interference caused
by the operations of such an LPFM station. Such full power FM, FM
translator or FM booster station shall also identify those that qualify
as bona fide complaints under this section and promptly provide such
LPFM station with copies of all bona fide complaints. A bona fide
complaint:
(A) Must include current contact information for the complainant;
(B) Must state the nature and location of the alleged third-adjacent
channel interference and must specify the call signs of the LPFM station
and affected full power FM, FM translator or FM booster station, and the
type of receiver involved; and
(C) Must be received by either the LPFM station or the affected full
power FM, FM translator or FM booster station within one year of the
date on which the LPFM station commenced broadcasts with its currently
authorized facilities.
(iii) The Commission will accept bona fide complaints and will
notify the licensee of the LPFM station allegedly causing third-adjacent
channel interference to the signal of a full power FM, FM translator or
FM booster station of the existence of the alleged interference within 7
calendar days of the Commission's receipt of such complaint.
(iv) Such an LPFM station will be given a reasonable opportunity to
resolve all complaints of third-adjacent channel interference within the
protected contour of the affected full power FM, FM translator or FM
booster station. A complaint will be considered resolved where the
complainant does not reasonably cooperate with an LPFM station's
remedial efforts. Such an LPFM station also is encouraged to address all
other complaints of third-adjacent channel interference, including
complaints based on interference to a full power FM, FM translator or FM
booster station by the transmitter site of the LPFM station at any
distance from the full power, FM translator or FM booster station.
(v) In the event that the number of unresolved complaints of third-
adjacent channel interference within the protected contour of the
affected full power FM, FM translator or FM booster station plus the
number of complaints for which the source of third-adjacent channel
interference remains in dispute equals at least one percent of the
households within one kilometer of the LPFM transmitter site or thirty
households, whichever is less, the LPFM and affected stations must
cooperate in an ``on-off'' test to determine whether the third-adjacent
channel interference is traceable to the LPFM station.
(vi) If the number of unresolved and disputed complaints of third-
adjacent channel interference within the protected contour of the
affected full power, FM translator or FM booster station exceeds the
numeric threshold specified in paragraph (b)(1)(v) of this section
following an ``on-off'' test, the affected station may request that the
Commission initiate a proceeding to consider whether the LPFM station
license should be modified or cancelled, which will be completed by the
Commission within 90 days. Parties may seek extensions of the 90-day
deadline consistent with Commission rules.
[[Page 212]]
(vii) An LPFM station may stay any procedures initiated pursuant to
paragraph (b)(1)(vi) of this section by voluntarily ceasing operations
and filing an application for facility modification within twenty days
of the commencement of such procedures.
(2) Periodic announcements. (i) For a period of one year from the
date of licensing of a new LPFM station that is constructed on a third-
adjacent channel and satisfies the third-adjacent channel minimum
distance separations set forth in Sec. 73.807, such LPFM station shall
broadcast periodic announcements. The announcements shall, at a minimum,
alert listeners of the potentially affected third-adjacent channel
station of the potential for interference, instruct listeners to contact
the LPFM station to report any interference, and provide contact
information for the LPFM station. The announcements shall be made in the
primary language(s) of both the new LPFM station and the potentially
affected third-adjacent channel station(s). Sample announcement language
follows:
On (date of license grant), the Federal Communications Commission
granted (LPFM station's call letters) a license to operate. (LPFM
station's call letters) may cause interference to the operations of
(third-adjacent channel station's call letters) and (other third-
adjacent channel stations' call letters). If you are normally a listener
of (third-adjacent channel station's call letters) or (other third-
adjacent channel station's call letters) and are having difficulty
receiving (third-adjacent channel station call letters) or (other third-
adjacent channel station's call letters), please contact (LPFM station's
call letters) by mail at (mailing address) or by telephone at (telephone
number) to report this interference.
(ii) During the first thirty days after licensing of a new LPFM
station that is constructed on a third-adjacent channel and satisfies
the third-adjacent channel minimum distance separations set forth in
Section 73.807, the LPFM station must broadcast the announcements
specified in paragraph (b)(2)(i) of this section at least twice daily.
The first daily announcement must be made between the hours of 7 a.m.
and 9 a.m., or 4 p.m. and 6 p.m. The LPFM station must vary the time
slot in which it airs this announcement. For stations that do not
operate at these times, the announcements shall be made during the first
two hours of broadcast operations each day. The second daily
announcement must be made outside of the 7 a.m. to 9 a.m. and 4 p.m. to
6 p.m. time slots. The LPFM station must vary the times of day in which
it broadcasts this second daily announcement in order to ensure that the
announcements air during all parts of its broadcast day. For stations
that do not operate at these times, the announcements shall be made
during the first two hours of broadcast operations each day. For the
remainder of the one year period, the LPFM station must broadcast the
announcements at least twice per week. The announcements must be
broadcast between the hours of 7 a.m. and midnight. For stations that do
not operate at these times, the announcements shall be made during the
first two hours of broadcast operations each day.
(iii) Any new LPFM station that is constructed on a third-adjacent
channel and satisfies the minimum distance separations set forth in
Sec. 73.807 must:
(A) notify the Audio Division, Media Bureau, and all affected
stations on third-adjacent channels of an interference complaint. The
notification must be made electronically within 48 hours after the
receipt of an interference complaint by the LPFM station; and
(B) cooperate in addressing any third-adjacent channel interference.
[78 FR 2104, Jan. 9, 2013, as amended at 85 FR 35573, June 11, 2020]
Sec. 73.811 LPFM power and antenna height requirements.
(a) Maximum facilities. LPFM stations will be authorized to operate
with maximum facilities of 100 watts ERP at 30 meters HAAT. An LPFM
station with a HAAT that exceeds 30 meters will not be permitted to
operate with an ERP greater than that which would result in a 60 dBu
contour of 5.6 kilometers. In no event will an ERP less than one watt be
authorized. No facility will be authorized in excess of one watt ERP at
450 meters HAAT.
(b) Minimum facilities. LPFM stations may not operate with
facilities less than 50 watts ERP at 30 meters HAAT
[[Page 213]]
or the equivalent necessary to produce a 60 dBu contour that extends at
least 4.7 kilometers.
[78 FR 2105, Jan. 9, 2013]
Sec. 73.812 Rounding of power and antenna heights.
(a) Effective radiated power (ERP) will be rounded to the nearest
watt on LPFM authorizations.
(b) Antenna radiation center, antenna height above average terrain
(HAAT), and antenna supporting structure height will all be rounded to
the nearest meter on LPFM authorizations.
Sec. 73.813 Determination of antenna height above average terrain (HAAT).
HAAT determinations for LPFM stations will be made in accordance
with the procedure detailed in Sec. 73.313(d) of this part.
Sec. 73.816 Antennas.
(a) Permittees and licensees may employ nondirectional antennas with
horizontal only polarization, vertical only polarization, circular
polarization or elliptical polarization.
(b) Permittees and licensees may employ directional antennas in the
LPFM service, in accordance with paragraph (d) of this section.
(c) [Reserved]
(d)(1) Composite antennas and antenna arrays may be used where the
total ERP does not exceed the maximum determined in accordance with
Sec. 73.811(a).
(2) Either horizontal, vertical, circular, or elliptical
polarization may be used provided that the supplemental vertically
polarized ERP required for circular or elliptical polarization does not
exceed the ERP otherwise authorized. Either clockwise or
counterclockwise rotation may be used. Separate transmitting antennas
are permitted if both horizontal and vertical polarization is to be
provided.
(3) An application that specifies the use of a directional antenna
must provide the information identified in Sec. 73.316(c) except that
such information shall not be required of:
(i) Public safety and transportation permittees and licensees
eligible pursuant to Sec. 73.853(a)(2) using directional antennas in
connection with operation of Travelers' Information Service stations;
(ii) LPFM permittees and licensees proposing a waiver of the second-
adjacent channel spacing requirements of Sec. 73.807 for the sole
purpose of justifying such a waiver; and
(iii) LPFM permittees and licensees using directional antennas
solely for the purpose of meeting the international border zone distance
requirements of Sec. 73.807(g).
[65 FR 67303, Nov. 9, 2000, as amended at 78 FR 2106, Jan. 9, 2013; 85
FR 35573, June 11, 2020]
Sec. 73.825 Protection to reception of TV channel 6.
The following spacing requirements will apply to LPFM applications
on Channels 201 through 220 unless the application is accompanied by a
written agreement between the LPFM applicant and each affected TV
Channel 6 broadcast station concurring with the proposed LPFM
facilities.
(a) LPFM stations will be authorized on Channels 201 through 220
only if the pertinent minimum separation distances in the following
table are met with respect to all full power TV Channel 6 stations.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
LPFM to TV
FM channel number channel 6 (km)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
201.................................................. 140
202.................................................. 138
203.................................................. 137
204.................................................. 136
205.................................................. 135
206.................................................. 133
207.................................................. 133
208.................................................. 133
209.................................................. 133
210.................................................. 133
211.................................................. 133
212.................................................. 132
213.................................................. 132
214.................................................. 132
215.................................................. 131
216.................................................. 131
217.................................................. 131
218.................................................. 131
219.................................................. 130
220.................................................. 130
------------------------------------------------------------------------
(b) LPFM stations will be authorized on Channels 201 through 220
only if the pertinent minimum separation distances in the following
table are met with respect to all low power TV, TV
[[Page 214]]
translator, and Class A TV stations authorized on TV Channel 6.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
LPFM to TV
FM channel number channel 6 (km)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
201.................................................. 98
202.................................................. 97
203.................................................. 95
204.................................................. 94
205.................................................. 93
206.................................................. 91
207.................................................. 91
208.................................................. 91
209.................................................. 91
210.................................................. 91
211.................................................. 91
212.................................................. 90
213.................................................. 90
214.................................................. 90
215.................................................. 90
216.................................................. 89
217.................................................. 89
218.................................................. 89
219.................................................. 89
220.................................................. 89
------------------------------------------------------------------------
[65 FR 67303, Nov. 9, 2000, as amended at 78 FR 2106, Jan. 9, 2013; 85
FR 35573, June 11, 2020]
Sec. 73.827 Interference to the input signals of FM translator or
FM booster stations.
(a) Interference to the direct reception of the input signal of an
FM translator station. This subsection applies when an LPFM application
proposes to operate near an FM translator station, the FM translator
station is receiving its input signal off-air (either directly from the
primary station or from a translator station) and the LPFM application
proposes to operate on a third-adjacent channel to the station
delivering an input signal to the translator station. In these
circumstances, the LPFM station will not be authorized unless it is
located at least 2 km from the FM translator station. In addition, in
cases where an LPFM station is located within 30
degrees of the azimuth between the FM translator station and its input
signal, the LPFM station will not be authorized unless it is located at
least 10 kilometers from the FM translator station. The provisions of
this subsection will not apply if the LPFM applicant:
(1) Demonstrates that no actual interference will occur due to an
undesired (LPFM) to desired (station delivering signal to translator
station) ratio below 34 dB at such translator station's receive antenna.
(2) Complies with the minimum LPFM/FM translator distance separation
calculated in accordance with the following formula: du =
133.5 antilog [(Peu + Gru - Grd -
Ed)/20], where du = the minimum allowed separation
in km, Peu = LPFM ERP in dBW, Gru = gain (dBd) of
the FM translator receive antenna in the direction of the LPFM site,
Grd = gain (dBd) of the FM translator receive antenna in the
direction of the primary station site, Ed = predicted field
strength (dBu) of the primary station at the translator site, or
(3) Reaches an agreement with the licensee of the FM translator
regarding an alternative technical solution.
Note to paragraph (a): LPFM applicants may assume that an FM
translator station's receive and transmit antennas are collocated.
(b) An authorized LPFM station will not be permitted to continue to
operate if an FM translator or FM booster station demonstrates that the
LPFM station is causing actual interference to the FM translator or FM
booster station's input signal, provided that the same input signal was
in use or proposed in an application filed with the Commission prior to
the release of the public notice announcing the dates for an LPFM
application filing window and has been continuously in use or proposed
since that time.
(c) Complaints of actual interference by an LPFM station subject to
paragraph (b) of this section must be served on the LPFM licensee and
the Federal Communications Commission, Attention: Audio Division, Media
Bureau. The LPFM station must suspend operations upon the receipt of
such complaint unless the interference has been resolved to the
satisfaction of the complainant on the basis of suitable techniques.
Short test transmissions may be made during the period of suspended
operations to check the efficacy of remedial measures. An LPFM station
may only resume full operation at the direction of the Federal
Communications Commission. If the Commission determines that the
complainant has refused to permit the LPFM station to apply remedial
techniques that demonstrably will eliminate the interference
[[Page 215]]
without impairment of the original reception, the licensee of the LPFM
station is absolved of further responsibility for the complaint.
[78 FR 2106, Jan. 9, 2013, as amended at 78 FR 67317, Nov. 12, 2013]
Sec. 73.840 Operating power and mode tolerances.
The transmitter power output (TPO) of an LPFM station must be
determined by the procedures set forth in Sec. 73.267 of this part. The
operating TPO of an LPFM station with an authorized TPO of more than ten
watts must be maintained as near as practicable to its authorized TPO
and may not be less than 90% of the minimum TPO nor greater than 105% of
the maximum authorized TPO. An LPFM station with an authorized TPO of
ten watts or less may operate with less than the authorized power, but
not more than 105% of the authorized power.
Sec. 73.845 Transmission system operation.
Each LPFM licensee is responsible for maintaining and operating its
broadcast station in a manner that complies with the technical rules set
forth elsewhere in this part and in accordance with the terms of the
station authorization. In the event that an LPFM station is operating in
a manner that is not in compliance with the technical rules set forth
elsewhere in this part or the terms of the station authorization,
broadcast operation must be terminated within three hours.
Sec. 73.850 Operating schedule.
(a) All LPFM stations will be licensed for unlimited time operation,
except those stations operating under a time sharing agreement pursuant
to Sec. 73.872.
(b) All LPFM stations are required to operate at least 36 hours per
week, consisting of at least 5 hours of operation per day on at least 6
days of the week; however, stations licensed to educational institutions
are not required to operate on Saturday or Sunday or to observe the
minimum operating requirements during those days designated on the
official school calendar as vacation or recess periods.
(c) All LPFM stations, including those meeting the requirements of
paragraph (b) of this section, but which do not operate 12 hours per day
each day of the year, will be required to share use of the frequency
upon the grant of an appropriate application proposing such share time
arrangement. Such applications must set forth the intent to share time
and must be filed in the same manner as are applications for new
stations. Such applications may be filed at any time after an LPFM
station completes its third year of licensed operations. In cases where
the licensee and the prospective licensee are unable to agree on time
sharing, action on the application will be taken only in connection with
a renewal application for the existing station filed on or after June 1,
2019. In order to be considered for this purpose, an application to
share time must be filed no later than the deadline for filing petitions
to deny the renewal application of the existing licensee.
(1) The licensee and the prospective licensee(s) shall endeavor to
reach an agreement for a definite schedule of periods of time to be used
by each. Such agreement must be in writing and must set forth which
licensee is to operate on each of the hours of the day throughout the
year. Such agreement must not include simultaneous operation of the
stations. Each licensee must file the same in triplicate with each
application to the Commission for initial construction permit or renewal
of license. Such written agreements shall become part of the terms of
each station's license.
(2) The Commission desires to facilitate the reaching of agreements
on time sharing. However, if the licensees of stations authorized to
share time are unable to agree on a division of time, the prospective
licensee(s) must submit a statement with the Commission to that effect
filed with the application(s) proposing time sharing.
(3) After receipt of the type of application(s) described in
paragraph (c)(2) of this section, the Commission will process such
application(s) pursuant to Sec. Sec. 73.3561 through 73.3568 of this
Part. If any such application is not dismissed
[[Page 216]]
pursuant to those provisions, the Commission will issue a notice to the
parties proposing a time-sharing arrangement and a grant of the time-
sharing application(s). The licensee may protest the proposed action,
the prospective licensee(s) may oppose the protest and/or the proposed
action, and the licensee may reply within the time limits delineated in
the notice. All such pleadings must satisfy the requirements of Section
309(d) of the Act. Based on those pleadings and the requirements of
Section 309 of the Act, the Commission will then act on the time-sharing
application(s) and the licensee's renewal application.
(4) A departure from the regular schedule set forth in a time-
sharing agreement will be permitted only in cases where a written
agreement to that effect is reduced to writing, is signed by the
licensees of the stations affected thereby, and is filed in triplicate
by each licensee with the Commission, Attention: Audio Division, Media
Bureau, prior to the time of the proposed change. If time is of the
essence, the actual departure in operating schedule may precede the
actual filing of the written agreement, provided that appropriate notice
is sent to the Commission in Washington, DC, Attention: Audio Division,
Media Bureau.
(d) In the event that causes beyond the control of a permittee or
licensee make it impossible to adhere to the operating schedule in
paragraph (b) of this section or to continue operating, the station may
limit or discontinue operation for a period not exceeding 30 days
without further authority from the Commission provided that notification
is sent to the Commission in Washington, DC, Attention: Audio Division,
Media Bureau, no later than the 10th day of limited or discontinued
operation. During such period, the permittee shall continue to adhere to
the requirements of the station license pertaining to lighting of
antenna structures. In the event normal operation is restored prior to
the expiration of the 30 day period, the permittee or licensee will
notify the FCC, Attention: Audio Division, of the date that normal
operations resumed. If causes beyond the control of the permittee or
licensee make it impossible to comply within the allowed period, Special
Temporary Authority (see Sec. 73.1635) must be requested to remain
silent for such additional time as deemed necessary not to exceed, in
total, 12 consecutive months (see Sec. 73.873(b)).
[65 FR 7640, Feb. 15, 2000, as amended at 78 FR 2106, Jan. 9, 2013; 85
FR 35573, June 11, 2020]
Sec. 73.853 Licensing requirements and service.
(a) An LPFM station may be licensed only to:
(1) Nonprofit educational organizations and upon a showing that the
proposed station will be used for the advancement of an educational
program; and
(2) State and local governments and non-government entities that
will provide non-commercial public safety radio services.
(3) Tribal Applicants, as defined in paragraph (c) of this section
that will provide non-commercial radio services.
(b) Only local organizations will be permitted to submit
applications and to hold authorizations in the LPFM service. For the
purposes of this paragraph, an organization will be deemed local if it
can certify, at the time of application, that it meets the criteria
listed below and if it continues to satisfy the criteria at all times
thereafter.
(1) The applicant, its local chapter or branch is physically
headquartered or has a campus within 16.1 km (10 miles) of the proposed
site for the transmitting antenna for applicants in the top 50 urban
markets, and 32.1 km (20 miles) for applicants outside of the top 50
urban markets;
(2) It has 75% of its board members residing within 16.1 km (10
miles) of the proposed site for the transmitting antenna for applicants
in the top 50 urban markets, and 32.1 km (20 miles) for applicants
outside of the top 50 urban markets; or
(3) In the case of any applicant proposing a public safety radio
service, the applicant has jurisdiction within the service area of the
proposed LPFM station.
(4) In the case of a Tribal Applicant, as defined in paragraph (c)
of this section, the Tribal Applicant's Tribal
[[Page 217]]
lands, as that term is defined in Sec. 73.7000, are within the service
area of the proposed LPFM station.
(c) A Tribal Applicant is a Tribe or an entity that is 51 percent or
more owned or controlled by a Tribe or Tribes. For these purposes, Tribe
is defined as set forth in Sec. 73.7000.
[65 FR 7640, Feb. 15, 2000, as amended at 73 FR 3216, Jan. 17, 2008; 78
FR 2107, Jan. 9, 2013]
Sec. 73.854 Unlicensed radio operations.
No application for an LPFM station may be granted unless the
applicant certifies, under penalty of perjury, that neither the
applicant, nor any party to the application, has engaged in any manner,
including individually or with persons, groups, organizations, or other
entities, in the unlicensed operation of any station in violation of
Section 301 of the Communications Act of 1934, as amended, 47 U.S.C.
301. If an application is dismissed pursuant to this section, the
applicant is precluded from seeking nunc pro tunc reinstatement of the
application and/or changing its directors to resolve the basic
qualification issues.
[85 FR 7889, Feb. 12, 2020]
Sec. 73.855 Ownership limits.
(a) No authorization for an LPFM station shall be granted to any
party if the grant of that authorization will result in any such party
holding an attributable interest in two or more LPFM stations.
(b) Notwithstanding the general prohibition set forth in paragraph
(a) of this section, Tribal Applicants, as defined in Sec. 73.853(c),
may hold an attributable interest in up to two LPFM stations.
(c) Notwithstanding the general prohibition set forth in paragraph
(a) of this section, not-for-profit organizations and governmental
entities with a public safety purpose may be granted multiple licenses
if:
(1) One of the multiple applications is submitted as a priority
application; and
(2) The remaining non-priority applications do not face a mutually
exclusive challenge.
[78 FR 2107, Jan. 9, 2013]
Sec. 73.858 Attribution of LPFM station interests.
Ownership and other interests in LPFM station permittees and
licensees will be attributed to their holders and deemed cognizable for
the purposes of Sec. Sec. 73.855 and 73.860, in accordance with the
provisions of Sec. 73.3555, subject to the following exceptions:
(a) A director of an entity that holds an LPFM license will not have
such interest treated as attributable if such director also holds an
attributable interest in a broadcast licensee or other media entity but
recuses himself or herself from any matters affecting the LPFM station.
(b) A local chapter of a national or other large organization shall
not have the attributable interests of the national organization
attributed to it provided that the local chapter is separately
incorporated and has a distinct local presence and mission.
(c) A parent or subsidiary of a LPFM licensee or permittee that is a
non-stock corporation will be treated as having an attributable interest
in such corporation. The officers, directors, and members of a non-stock
corporation's governing body and of any parent or subsidiary entity will
have such positional interests attributed to them.
Sec. 73.860 Cross-ownership.
(a) Except as provided in paragraphs (b), (c) and (d) of this
section, no license shall be granted to any party if the grant of such
authorization will result in the same party holding an attributable
interest in any other non-LPFM broadcast station, including any FM
translator or low power television station, or any other media subject
to our broadcast ownership restrictions.
(b) A party that is not a Tribal Applicant, as defined in Sec.
73.853(c), may hold attributable interests in one LPFM station and no
more than two FM translator stations, two FM booster stations, or one FM
translator station and one FM booster station provided that the
following requirements are met:
(1) The 60 dBu contour of the LPFM station overlaps the 60 dBu
contour of the commonly-owned FM translator station(s) and entirely
encompasses the
[[Page 218]]
60 dBu service contour of the FM booster station(s);
(2) The FM translator and/or booster station(s), at all times,
synchronously rebroadcasts the primary analog signal of the commonly-
owned LPFM station or, if the commonly-owned LPFM station operates in
hybrid mode, synchronously rebroadcasts the digital HD-1 version of the
LPFM station's signal;
(3) The FM translator station receives the signal of the commonly-
owned LPFM station over-the-air and directly from the commonly-owned
LPFM station itself. The FM booster station receives the signal of the
commonly-owned LPFM station by any means authorized in Sec. 74.1231(i)
of this chapter;
(4) The transmitting antenna of the FM translator and/or booster
station(s) is located within 16.1 kilometers (10 miles) for LPFM
stations located in the top 50 urban markets and 32.1 kilometers (20
miles) for LPFM stations outside the top 50 urban markets of either the
transmitter site of the commonly-owned LPFM station or the reference
coordinates for that station's community of license; and
(5) Booster stations commonly owned by LPFM stations may conduct
transmissions independent of those broadcast by the primary LPFM station
for a period not to exceed three minutes of each broadcast hour. This is
a strict hourly limit that may not be exceeded by aggregating unused
minutes of program origination.
(c) A party that is a Tribal Applicant, as defined in Sec.
73.853(c), may hold attributable interests in no more than two LPFM
stations and four FM translator stations provided that the requirements
set forth in paragraph (b) of this section are met.
(d) Unless such interest is permissible under paragraphs (b) or (c)
of this section, a party with an attributable interest in a broadcast
radio station must divest such interest prior to the commencement of
operations of an LPFM station in which the party also holds an interest.
However, a party need not divest such an attributable interest if the
party is a college or university that can certify that the existing
broadcast radio station is not student run. This exception applies only
to parties that:
(1) Are accredited educational institutions;
(2) Own an attributable interest in non-student run broadcast
stations; and
(3) Apply for an authorization for an LPFM station that will be
managed and operated on a day-to-day basis by students of the accredited
educational institution.
(e) No LPFM licensee may enter into an operating agreement of any
type, including a time brokerage or management agreement, with either a
full power broadcast station or another LPFM station.
[78 FR 2107, Jan. 9, 2013, as amended at 85 FR 35573, June 11, 2020; 89
FR 26702, Apr. 16, 2024]
Sec. 73.865 Assignment and transfer of LPFM permits and licenses.
(a) Assignment/transfer. No party may assign or transfer an LPFM
permit or license if:
(1) Consideration promised or received exceeds the legitimate and
prudent expenses of the assignor or transferor. For purposes of this
section, legitimate and prudent expenses are those expenses reasonably
incurred by the assignor or transferor in obtaining and constructing the
station (e.g., expenses in preparing an application, in obtaining and
installing broadcast equipment to be assigned or transferred, etc.).
Costs incurred in operating the station are not recoverable (e.g., rent,
salaries, utilities, music licensing fees, etc.);
(2) The assignee or transferee is incapable of satisfying all
eligibility criteria that apply to a LPFM licensee; or
(3) For a period of time commencing with the grant of any
construction permit awarded based on the comparative point system, Sec.
73.872, and continuing until the station has achieved at least four
years of on-air operations:
(i)(A) The assignee or transferee cannot meet or exceed the points
awarded to the initial applicant; or
(B) Where the original LPFM construction permit was issued based on
a point system tie-breaker, the assignee or transferee does not have a
``locally established date,'' as defined in
[[Page 219]]
Sec. 73.853(b), that is the same as, or earlier than, the date of the
most recently established local applicant in the tied mutually exclusive
(MX) group.
(ii) Any successive applicants proposing to assign or transfer the
construction permit or license prior to the end of the aforementioned
period will be required to make the same demonstrations. This
restriction does not apply to construction permits that are awarded to
non-mutually exclusive applicants or through settlement.
(b) Name change. A change in the name of an LPFM permittee or
licensee where no change in ownership or control is involved may be
accomplished by written notification by the permittee or licensee to the
Commission.
(c) Holding period. A construction permit cannot be assigned or
transferred for 18 months from the date of issue.
(d) Board changes. Notwithstanding the other provisions in this
section, transfers of control involving a sudden or gradual change of
more than 50 percent of an LPFM's governing board are not prohibited,
provided that the mission of the entity remains the same and the
requirements of paragraph (a) of this section are satisfied. Sudden
majority board changes shall be submitted as a pro forma ownership
change within 30 days of the change or final event that caused the LPFM
permittee or licensee to exceed the 50 percent threshold.
[85 FR 7889, Feb. 12, 2020]
Sec. 73.870 Processing of LPFM broadcast station applications.
(a) A minor change for an LPFM station authorized under this subpart
is limited to transmitter site relocations not exceeding 11.2 kilometers
or where the 60 dBu contour of the authorized facility overlaps the 60
dBu contour of the proposed facility. These distance limitations do not
apply to amendments or applications proposing transmitter site
relocation to a common location filed by applicants that are parties to
a voluntary time-sharing agreement with regard to their stations
pursuant to Sec. 73.872(c) and (e). These distance limitations also do
not apply to an amendment or application proposing transmitter site
relocation to a common location or a location very close to another
station operating on a third-adjacent channel in order to remediate
interference to the other station; provided, however, that the proposed
relocation is consistent with all localism certifications made by the
applicant in its original application for the LPFM station. Minor
changes of LPFM stations may include:
(1) Changes in frequency to adjacent or IF frequencies ( 1, 2, 3, 53 or 54 channels) or, upon a technical
showing of reduced interference, to any frequency; and
(2) Amendments to time-sharing agreements, including universal
agreements that supersede involuntary arrangements.
(b) The Commission will specify by Public Notice a window filing
period for applications for new LPFM stations and major modifications in
the facilities of authorized LPFM stations. LPFM applications for new
facilities and for major modifications in authorized LPFM stations will
be accepted only during the appropriate window. Applications submitted
prior to the window opening date identified in the Public Notice will be
returned as premature. Applications submitted after the deadline will be
dismissed with prejudice as untimely.
(c) Applications subject to paragraph (b) of this section that fail
to meet the Sec. 73.807 minimum distance separations with respect to
all applications and facilities in existence as the date of the
pertinent public notice in paragraph (b) of this section other than to
LPFM station facilities proposed in applications filed in the same
window, will be dismissed without any opportunity to amend such
applications.
(d) Following the close of the window, the Commission will issue a
Public Notice of acceptance for filing of applications submitted
pursuant to paragraph (b) of this section that meet technical and legal
requirements and that are not in conflict with any other application
filed during the window. Following the close of the window, the
Commission also will issue a Public Notice of the acceptance for filing
of all applications tentatively selected pursuant to the procedures for
mutually exclusive LPFM applications set
[[Page 220]]
forth at Sec. 73.872. Petitions to deny such applications may be filed
within 30 days of such public notice and in accordance with the
procedures set forth at Sec. 73.3584. A copy of any petition to deny
must be served on the applicant.
(e) Minor change LPFM applications may be filed at any time, unless
restricted by the staff, and generally, will be processed in the order
in which they are tendered. Such applications must meet all technical
and legal requirements applicable to new LPFM station applications.
(f) New entrants seeking to apply for unused or unwanted time on a
time-sharing frequency will only be accepted during an open filing
window, specified pursuant to paragraph (b) of this section.
[65 FR 7640, Feb. 15, 2000, as amended at 65 FR 67304, Nov. 9, 2000; 70
FR 39186, July 7, 2005; 73 FR 3217, Jan. 17, 2008; 78 FR 2108, Jan. 9,
2013; 85 FR 35574, June 11, 2020]
Sec. 73.871 Amendment of LPFM broadcast station applications.
(a) New and major change applications may be amended without
limitation during the pertinent filing window.
(b) Amendments that would improve the comparative position of new
and major change applications will not be accepted after the close of
the pertinent filing window.
(c) Only minor amendments to new and major change applications will
be accepted after the close of the pertinent filing window. Subject to
the provisions of this section, such amendments may be filed as a matter
of right by the date specified in the FCC's Public Notice announcing the
acceptance of such applications. For the purposes of this section, minor
amendments are limited to:
(1) Site relocations of 11.2 kilometers or less;
(2) Site relocations that involve overlap between the 60 dBu service
contours of the currently authorized and proposed facilities;
(3) Changes in ownership where the original party or parties to an
application either:
(i) Retain more than a 50 percent ownership interest in the
application as originally filed;
(ii) Retain an ownership interest of 50 percent or less as the
result of governing board changes in a nonstock or membership applicant
that occur over a period of six months or more; or
(iii) Retain an ownership interest of 50 percent or less as the
result of governing board changes in a nonstock or membership applicant
that occur over a period of less than six months and there is no
evidence of a takeover concern or a significant effect on such
organization's mission. All changes in a governmental applicant are
considered minor;
(4) Universal voluntary time-sharing agreements to apportion vacant
time among the licensees;
(5) Other changes in general and/or legal information;
(6) Filings proposing transmitter site relocation to a common
location submitted by applications that are parties to a voluntary time-
sharing agreement with regard to their stations pursuant to Sec. 73.872
(c) and (e); and
(7) Filings proposing transmitter site relocation to a common
location or a location very close to another station operating on a
third-adjacent channel in order to remediate interference to the other
station.
(d) Unauthorized or untimely amendments are subject to return by the
FCC's staff without consideration.
[66 FR 23863, May 10, 2001, as amended at 70 FR 39186, July 7, 2005; 73
FR 3217, Jan. 17, 2008; 78 FR 2108, Jan. 9, 2013; 85 FR 7889, Feb. 12,
2020; 85 FR 35574, June 11, 2020]
Sec. 73.872 Selection procedure for mutually exclusive LPFM applications.
(a) Following the close of each window for new LPFM stations and for
modifications in the facilities of authorized LPFM stations, the
Commission will issue a public notice identifying all groups of mutually
exclusive applications. Such applications will be awarded points to
determine the tentative selectee. Unless resolved by settlement pursuant
to paragraph (e) of this section, the tentative selectee will be the
applicant within each group with the highest point total under the
procedure set forth in this section, except as provided in paragraphs
(c) and (d) of this section .
[[Page 221]]
(b) Each mutually exclusive application will be awarded one point
for each of the following criteria, based on certifications that the
qualifying conditions are met and submission of any required
documentation:
(1) Established community presence. An applicant must, for a period
of at least two years prior to application and at all times thereafter,
have qualified as local pursuant to Sec. 73.853(b). Applicants claiming
a point for this criterion must submit any documentation specified in
FCC Form 318 at the time of filing their applications.
(2) Local program origination. The applicant must pledge to
originate locally at least eight hours of programming per day. For
purposes of this criterion, local origination is the production of
programming by the licensee, within ten miles of the coordinates of the
proposed transmitting antenna. Local origination includes licensee
produced call-in shows, music selected and played by a disc jockey
present on site, broadcasts of events at local schools, and broadcasts
of musical performances at a local studio or festival, whether recorded
or live. Local origination does not include the broadcast of repetitive
or automated programs or time-shifted recordings of non-local
programming whatever its source. In addition, local origination does not
include a local program that has been broadcast twice, even if the
licensee broadcasts the program on a different day or makes small
variations in the program thereafter.
(3) Main studio. The applicant must pledge to maintain a publicly
accessible main studio that has local program origination capability, is
reachable by telephone, is staffed at least 20 hours per week between 7
a.m. and 10 p.m., and is located within 16.1 km (10 miles) of the
proposed site for the transmitting antenna for applicants in the top 50
urban markets and 32.1 km (20 miles) for applicants outside the top 50
urban markets. Applicants claiming a point under this criterion must
specify the proposed address and telephone number for the proposed main
studio in FCC Form 318 at the time of filing their applications.
(4) Local program origination and main studio. The applicant must
make both the local program origination and main studio pledges set
forth in paragraphs (b)(2) and (3) of this section.
(5) Diversity of ownership. An applicant must hold no attributable
interests in any other broadcast station.
(6) Tribal Applicants serving Tribal Lands. The applicant must be a
Tribal Applicant, as defined in Sec. 73.853(c), and the proposed site
for the transmitting antenna must be located on that Tribal Applicant's
``Tribal Lands,'' as defined in Sec. 73.7000. Applicants claiming a
point for this criterion must submit the documentation set forth in FCC
Form 318 at the time of filing their applications.
(c) Voluntary time-sharing. If mutually exclusive applications have
the same point total, no more than three of the tied applicants may
propose to share use of the frequency by electronically submitting,
within 90 days of the release of a public notice announcing the tie, a
time-share proposal. Such proposals shall be treated as minor amendments
to the time-share proponents' applications and shall become part of the
terms of the station authorization. Where such proposals include all of
the tied applications, all of the tied applications will be treated as
tentative selectees; otherwise, time-share proponents' points will be
aggregated. Applicants may agree, at any time before the Media Bureau
implements the involuntary time-share procedures pursuant to paragraph
(d) of this section, to aggregate their points to enter into a time-
share agreement. Applicants can only aggregate their points and submit a
time-share agreement if each is designated a tentative selectee in the
same mutually exclusive group, and if each applicant has the basic
qualifications to receive a grant of its application.
(1) Time-share proposals shall be in writing and signed by each
time-share proponent, and shall satisfy the following requirements:
(i) The proposal must specify the proposed hours of operation of
each time-share proponent;
(ii) The proposal must not include simultaneous operation of the
time-share proponents; and
(iii) Each time-share proponent must propose to operate for at least
10 hours per week.
[[Page 222]]
(2) Where a station is authorized pursuant to a time-sharing
proposal, a change of the regular schedule set forth therein will be
permitted only where a written agreement signed by each time-sharing
permittee or licensee and complying with requirements in paragraphs
(c)(1)(i) through (iii) of this section is filed with the Commission,
Attention: Audio Division, Media Bureau, prior to the date of the
change.
(3) Where a station is authorized pursuant to a voluntary time-
sharing proposal, the parties to the time-sharing agreement may
apportion among themselves any air time that, for any reason, becomes
vacant.
(4) Concurrent license terms granted under paragraph (d) of this
section may be converted into voluntary time-sharing arrangements
renewable pursuant to Sec. 73.3539 by submitting a universal time-
sharing proposal.
(5) In the event a tentatively accepted time-share agreement is
dismissed, the Commission staff will release another public notice,
initiating a second 90-day period for all remaining tentative selectees
within the affected MX group to enter into either a voluntary time-share
arrangement or a universal settlement in accordance with paragraph (c)
or (e) of this section. If the tie is not resolved in accordance with
paragraph (c) or (e) of this section, the tied applications will be
reviewed for acceptability, and applicants with tied, grantable
applications will be eligible for involuntary time-sharing in accordance
with paragraph (d) of this section.
(d) Involuntary time-sharing. (1) If a tie among mutually exclusive
applications is not resolved through voluntary time-sharing in
accordance with paragraph (c) of this section, the tied applications
will be reviewed for acceptability. Applicants with tied, grantable
applications will be eligible for equal, concurrent, non-renewable
license terms.
(2) If a mutually exclusive group has three or fewer tied, grantable
applications, the Commission will simultaneously grant these
applications, assigning an equal number of hours per week to each
applicant. The Commission will determine the hours assigned to each
applicant by first assigning hours to the applicant that has been local,
as defined in Sec. 73.853(b), for the longest uninterrupted period of
time, then assigning hours to the applicant that has been local for the
next longest uninterrupted period of time, and finally assigning hours
to any remaining applicant. The Commission will offer applicants an
opportunity to voluntarily reach a time-sharing agreement. In the event
that applicants cannot reach such agreement, the Commission will require
each applicant subject to involuntary time-sharing to simultaneously and
confidentially submit their preferred time slots to the Commission. If
there are only two tied, grantable applications, the applicants must
select between the following 12-hour time slots 3 a.m.-2:59 p.m., or 3
p.m.-2:59 a.m. If there are three tied, grantable applications, each
applicant must rank their preference for the following 8-hour time
slots: 2 a.m.-9:59 a.m., 10 a.m.-5:59 p.m., and 6 p.m.-1:59 a.m. The
Commission will require the applicants to certify that they did not
collude with any other applicants in the selection of time slots. The
Commission will give preference to the applicant that has been local for
the longest uninterrupted period of time. The Commission will award time
in units as small as four hours per day. In the event an applicant
neglects to designate its preferred time slots, staff will select a time
slot for that applicant.
(3) Groups of more than three tied, grantable applications will not
be eligible for licensing under this section. Where such groups exist,
the Commission will dismiss all but the applications of the three
applicants that have been local, as defined in Sec. 73.853(b), for the
longest uninterrupted periods of time. The Commission then will process
the remaining applications as set forth in paragraph (d)(2) of this
section.
(4) If concurrent license terms granted under this section are
converted into universal voluntary time-sharing arrangements pursuant to
paragraph (c)(4) of this section, the permit or license is renewable
pursuant to Sec. Sec. 73.801 and 73.3539.
(e) Settlements. Mutually exclusive applicants may propose a
settlement at any time during the selection process
[[Page 223]]
after the release of a public notice announcing the mutually exclusive
groups. Settlement proposals must comply with the Commission's rules and
policies regarding settlements, including the requirements of Sec. Sec.
73.3525, 73.3588 and 73.3589. Settlement proposals may include time-
share agreements that comply with the requirements of paragraph (c) of
this section, provided that such agreements may not be filed for the
purpose of point aggregation outside of the 90 day period set forth in
paragraph (c) of this section.
[65 FR 7640, Feb. 15, 2000, as amended at 65 FR 67304, Nov. 9, 2000; 67
FR 13232, Mar. 21, 2002; 73 FR 3217, Jan. 17, 2008; 78 FR 2108, Jan. 9,
2013; 85 FR 7889, Feb. 12, 2020]
Sec. 73.873 LPFM license period.
(a) Initial licenses for LPFM stations will be issued for a period
running until the date specified in Sec. 73.1020 for full service
stations operating in the LPFM station's state or territory, or if
issued after such date, determined in accordance with Sec. 73.1020.
(b) The license of an LPFM station that fails to transmit broadcast
signals for any consecutive 12-month period expires as a matter of law
at the end of that period, notwithstanding any provision, term, or
condition of the license to the contrary.
[78 FR 2109, Jan. 9, 2013]
Sec. 73.875 Modification of transmission systems.
The following procedures and restrictions apply to licensee
modifications of authorized broadcast transmission system facilities.
(a) The following changes are prohibited:
(1) Those that would result in the emission of signals outside of
the authorized channel exceeding limits prescribed for the class of
service.
(2) Those that would cause the transmission system to exceed the
equipment performance measurements prescribed in Sec. 73.508.
(b) The following changes may be made only after the grant of a
construction permit application on FCC Form 318.
(1) Any construction of a new tower structure for broadcast
purposes, except for replacement of an existing tower with a new tower
of identical height and geographic coordinates.
(2) Any change in station geographic coordinates, including
coordinate corrections and any move of the antenna to another tower
structure located at the same coordinates.
(3) Any change in antenna height more than 2 meters above or 4
meters below the authorized value.
(4) Any change in channel.
(c) The following LPFM modifications may be made without prior
authorization from the Commission. A modification of license application
(FCC Form 319) must be submitted to the Commission within 10 days of
commencing program test operations pursuant to Sec. 73.1620. For
applications filed pursuant to paragraph (c)(1) of this section, the
modification of license application must contain an exhibit
demonstrating compliance with the Commission's radiofrequency radiation
guidelines. In addition, for applications filed solely pursuant to
paragraphs (c)(1) or (2) of this section, where the installation is on
or near an AM tower, as defined in Sec. 1.30002, an exhibit
demonstrating compliance with Sec. 1.30003 or Sec. 1.30002, as
applicable, is also required.
(1) Replacement of an antenna with one of the same or different
number of antenna bays, provided that the height of the antenna
radiation center is not more than 2 meters above or 4 meters below the
authorized values. Program test operations at the full authorized ERP
may commence immediately upon installation pursuant to Sec.
73.1620(a)(1).
(2) Replacement of a transmission line with one of a different type
or length which changes the transmitter operating power (TPO) from the
authorized value, but not the ERP, must be reported in a license
modification application to the Commission.
(3) Changes in the hours of operation of stations authorized
pursuant to time-share agreements in accordance with Sec. 73.872.
[65 FR 7640, Feb. 15, 2000, as amended at 78 FR 66298, Nov. 5, 2013]
Sec. 73.877 Station logs for LPFM stations.
The licensee of each LPFM station must maintain a station log. Each
log
[[Page 224]]
entry must include the time and date of observation and the name of the
person making the entry. The following information must be entered in
the station log:
(a) Any extinguishment or malfunction of the antenna structure
obstruction lighting, adjustments, repairs, or replacement to the
lighting system, or related notification to the FAA. See Sec. Sec.
17.48 and 73.49 of this chapter.
(b) Brief explanation of station outages due to equipment
malfunction, servicing, or replacement;
(c) Operations not in accordance with the station license; and
(d) EAS weekly log requirements set forth in Sec. 11.61(a)(1)(v) of
this chapter.
[65 FR 67304, Nov. 9, 2000]
Sec. 73.878 Station inspections by FCC; availability to FCC of
station logs and records.
(a) The licensee of a broadcast station shall make the station
available for inspection by representatives of the FCC during the
station's business hours, and at any time it is in operation. In the
course of an inspection or investigation, an FCC representative may
require special equipment or program tests.
(b) Station records and logs shall be made available for inspection
or duplication at the request of the FCC or its representatives. Such
logs or records may be removed from the licensee's possession by an FCC
representative or, upon request, shall be mailed by the licensee to the
FCC by either registered mail, return receipt requested, or certified
mail, return receipt requested. The return receipt shall be retained by
the licensee as part of the station records until such records or logs
are returned to the licensee. A receipt shall be furnished when the logs
or records are removed from the licensee's possession by an FCC
representative and this receipt shall be retained by the licensee as
part of the station records until such records or logs are returned to
the licensee. When the FCC has no further need for such records or logs,
they shall be returned to the licensee. The provisions of this rule
shall apply solely to those station logs and records that are required
to be maintained by the provisions of this part.
(1) Where records or logs are maintained as the official records of
a recognized law enforcement agency and the removal of the records from
the possession of the law enforcement agency will hinder its law
enforcement activities, such records will not be removed pursuant to
this section if the chief of the law enforcement agency promptly
certifies in writing to the FCC that removal of the logs or records will
hinder law enforcement activities of the agency, stating insofar as
feasible the basis for his decision and the date when it can reasonably
be expected that such records will be released to the FCC.
Sec. 73.879 Signal retransmission.
An LPFM licensee may not retransmit, either terrestrially or via
satellite, the signal of a full-power radio broadcast station.
Sec. 73.881 Equal employment opportunities.
General EEO policy. Equal employment opportunity shall be afforded
by all LPFM licensees and permittees to all qualified persons, and no
person shall be discriminated against because of race, color , religion,
national origin, or sex.